Home

HP 8590 E & L Series Spectrum Analyzers User's Guide

1. WA SB SC FC a J ne BO PO pur h Aink Jarpa CENTER 9BB MHz SPAN 1 890 GHz RES BW 3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP2 0 msec Figure 3 12 Placing a Marker on the CAL OUT Signal 3 Press MARKER A to activate a second marker at the position of the first marker Move the second marker to another signal peak using the NEXT PK RIGHT or NEXT PK LEFT softkeys or the knob 4 The amplitude and frequency difference between the markers is displayed in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the screen See Figure 3 13 Press MKR More 1 of 2 then MARKER ALL OFF to turn the markers off 3 12 Making Basic Measurements g MKA A 297 m REF 08m ATTEN1 0 dB 13 43 08 PEAK MARKER 297 MHz 213 43 LL CENTER 9098 MHz SPAN 1 892 GHz RES BW 3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 msec Figure 3 13 Using the Marker Delta Function 5 The MARKER PK PK softkey can be used to find and display the frequency and amplitude difference between the highest and lowest amplitude signals To use this automatic function press MKR More 1 of 2 MARKER PK PK See Figure 3 14 16 21 09 12 MAR 1992 REF 8dBm ATTEN1 dB MKR a 86 MHz 44 91 dB CENTER 1 121 GHz SPAN 1 919 GHz fe RES BW 3 8 MHZ ven MHz SWP 38 4 msec Figure 3 14 Using the Marker to Peak Peak Funct
2. eS O Seo pul37e Figure 1 1 HP 8590 Series Spectrum Analyzer The HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzers are small lightweight test instruments that cover the RF and microwave frequency ranges HP 8590L 9 kHz to 1 8 GHz HP 85913 9 kHz to 1 8 GHz HP 8592L 9 kHz to 22 GHz HP 85933 9 kHz to 22 GHz HP 85943 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz HP 8594L 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz HP 85953 9 kHz to 6 5 GHz HP 85963 9 kHz to 12 8 GHz Preparing For Use 1 1 Preparing Your Spectrum Analyzer for Use Detailed information for all of the steps in this process is included in this chapter 1 Unpack the spectrum analyzer and inspect it 2 Verify that all of the accessories and documentation has been shipped 3 Check that the line voltage selector is set to the proper voltage 4 Check that the correct fuse is in place Warning Failure to ground the spectrum analyzer properly can result in personal injury Use an ac power outlet that has a protective earth contact DO NOT defeat the earth grounding protection by using an extension cable power cable or autotransformer without a protective ground conductor Caution Do not connect ac power until you have verified that the line voltage is correct the proper fuse is installed and the lin
3. REF 12 0 dBm AT 30 08 62 01 dB SMPL lab GHAN POWER lextd a 49 5 dBm LOG 13 dB MARKER A 90 0 kHz 62 01 gB SL W VA SB vc FS CORR enn I I broly CENTER 825 0300 MHz SPAN 216 9 kHz RES BW 1 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 65 msec SINGLE MEAS CONT SWEEP CENTER FREG ACPGRAPH ON OFF GRPH MKA ONOFF Previous Figure 4 40 Adjacent Channel Power Graph 11 To enable the graph marker press GRPH MKR ON OFF so ON is underlined Delta frequency delta amplitude and absolute amplitude values are displayed for the marker position The marker position can be changed with the RPG knob step keys or data keys 12 Press Previous Menu Press MEAS OFF to turn the measurement off and exit the power menu or press another measurement key to stop the current measurement and start a new measurement Note If the power menus have been exited without turning the power measurement off by pressing another front panel key press the MEAS USER key twice to return to the last power menu used Making Measurements 4 47 Channel Power Measurement The channel power function measures the total power in the selected channel bandwidth The signal can be noise tones or a combination of noise and tones The channel power function measures the power using an rms method Enter the channel bandwidth and activate the channel power measurement
4. L CENTER 50 000 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RESBw 100 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 1 0 sec Figure 4 19 Viewing Time Sharing of a Frequency with a Spectrum Analyzer Description of Items in Figure 4 19 Trace display without the time gate function on Trace display of the first signal with the time gate on Trace display of the second signal with the time gate on Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability to View Pulsed RF This example demonstrates how to use Option 105 to view two different pulsed RF signals The signals are at the same frequency but they interleave in time This example uses the time gate function without using the gate utility To use Option 105 to view the amplitude of a pulsed RF signal accurately the spectrum analyzer settings of the sweep time resolution bandwidth video bandwidth gate delay and gate length must be set correctly To set the spectrum analyzer settings correctly you must determine the pulse repetition interval pulse width and signal delay if any of the pulsed RF signal Figure 4 20 shows an example of two pulsed RF signals 4 24 Making Measurements Item PS PON EEEN IDU Ee Figure 4 20 Pulse Repetition Interval and Pulse Width with Two Signals Present Description of Items in Figure 4 20 Pulse repetition interval PRI of signal 1 PRI is measured in time unit
5. Portnumber for plugisindustry identifierfor plug only Number shown for cables HP Port Numberfor completecable including plug x E Earth Ground L Ling N Neutral FORMAT80O Preparing For Use 1 7 Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time When you turn the spectrum analyzer on for the first time you should perform frequency and amplitude self calibration routines to generate correction factors and indicate that the unit is functioning correctly The spectrum analyzer should be allowed to warm up for 30 minutes before performing the self calibration routines See When Is Self Calibration Needed in Chapter 2 for helpful guidelines on how often the self calibration routines should be performed Perform the following steps 1 For an HP 85901 HP 8592L HP 8591 E HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 8594L HP 8595E or HP 85963 ensure the reference connector is connected between the 10 MHz OUTPUT and EXT REF IN rear panel connectors See Figure 1 4 REFERENCE CONNECTOR US 9000f 0000 OOOO OS Ea o Se pul2bel Figure 1 4 Reference Connector If you wish to use an external 10 MHz source as the reference frequency disconnect the reference connector from the rear panel and connect an external reference source to the EXT REF IN connector on the rear panel 2 Plug the power cord into the spectrum analyzer 3 Press LINB After a few seconds the sc
6. SER OPT MONITO AUX INTERFACE OUTPUT EX TRIG INPUT TTL pak FELEN O PARALLEL O GET O O PARALLEL O SERIAL O so Ja ec Jo ele Q O Q OPTIONO 4 1 OPTION 043 pul27e Figure 2 2 Rear Panel Feature Overview l EXT ALC INPUT allows the use of an external detector or power meter for automatic leveling control of the tracking generator For an HP 8590L and HP 8591E Option 010 or 011 only Allows the use of an external detector for an HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 or HP 8596E Option 010 only 2 TV TRIG OUTPUT TTL provides TV trigger output using TTL and negative edge triggering For Options 101 and 102 combined or Option 301 only 3 FLATNESS EXT DET IN accepts a signal 16 V maximum from an external crystal detector This signal is used to correct the spectrum analyzer response to the detector s flatness Option E02 only This input is used for digital radio testing in an HP 11758T Digital Radio Test System Getting Started 2 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GATE TRIGGER INPUT TTL accepts a TTL signal which acts as the gate trigger In edge mode the trigger event positive or negative edge initiates a gate delay In level mode the gate trigger input signal opens and closes the gate directly TTL high sets the gate on TTL low sets the gate off When this input is unconnected TTL is set high For Option 105 only
7. KA REF 6 dBm ATTEN 16 dB PEAK LOG 10 7 TRAME SPA 500 4 MHz A Aa SC F a COAR CENTER 409 0 MHZ SPAN 560 MHZ RES BW 3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 2 0 msec Figure 3 2 1 Harmonic Distortion 2 Change the span to 200 MHz press SPAN 200 MHz 3 Change the attenuation to 0 dB press AMPLITUDE ATTEN AUTO MAN 0 48m 4 To determine whether the harmonic distortion products are generated by the spectrum analyzer first save the screen data in trace B Press TRACE TRACE A B C until trace B is underlined then CLEAR WRITE B Allow the trace to update two sweeps and press VIEW B PEAK SEARCH MARKER A The spectrum analyzer display shows the stored data in trace B and the measured data in trace A Next increase the RF attenuation by 10 dB press AMPLITUDE ATTEN AUTO MAN and the step up key CH once See Figure 3 22 On 3 20 Making Basic Measurements plerss 20 APR 06 1993 77 MKR AO Hz REF 10 0 dBm AT 10 dB 5 21 gB PEAK i LOG 10 8 ATTEN 10 dB WA VB SC FC CORR CENTER 400 0 MHz SPAN 200 0 MHz RES Bw 1 0 MHZ VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 O mse Figure 3 22 RF Attenuation of 10 dB 6 Compare the response in trace A to the response in trace B If the distortion product decreases as the attenuation increases distortion products are caused by the spectrum analyzer input mixer Note When the source signa
8. 000 4 39 Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement 4 40 Third Order Intermodulation Measurement TOD 4 4 Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements 4 43 Occupied Bandwidth and Transmitter Frequency Error 4 43 Adjacent Channel Power Ratio ACP 2 a a a 4 45 Channel Power Measurement o o a a a a a a 4 48 Contents 5 Using Analyzer Features What You ll Learn in this Chapter 2 e o o o 5 1 Use the Marker Table to List All the Active Markers 5 2 Use the Peak Table to List the Displayed Signals 5 4 Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory 5 6 ToSav aState T doe n cacti He chk he oer OG lees BRA EAM a 5 6 To R calla States a crac ae bp ee ls Wee Rae RE GD ee ee 5 6 POSAVECATTACE gt tha ah wt le teak a oh a aca Gay oa ls Eee a Bates oA Bide we ta 5 7 To Recall a Tracer ag ng Bae we he A i ee ee ee A ee 5 7 To Save a Limit Line Table or Amplitude Correction Factors 5 8 To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors 5 8 To Protect Data From Being Overwritten o 5 8 Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card 5 10 Preparing the Memory Card for Use 2 2 a 5 11 Ae Entered Prefix ha a aa Y a aa Be a 5 12 Tosay aState eiiru o a ie
9. 2 20 Procedure to Change the Memory Card Battery 2 21 Analyzer Battery Information dca 2 22 Contents 3 Making Basic Measurements What You ll Learn in This Chapter e 3 1 Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function 3 2 Resolving Small Signals Hidden by Large Signals Using the Resolution Bandwidth PUNCHON 5 ei eve as eh oe ae ee Be es nana A eee ag 3 4 Increasing the Frequency Readout Resolution Using the Marker Counter 3 6 Decreasing the Frequency Span Using the Marker Track Function 3 7 Peaking Signal Amplitude with Preselector Peak 0 3 8 Tracking Unstable Signals Using Marker Track and the Maximum Hold and Minimum Hold Functions 0 00000000004 3 9 Comparing Signals Using Delta Markers 2 3 1 Measuring Low Level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video AVAST Bea Mae ao te Bae ee 3 15 Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces 3 20 Distortion from the Analyzer e 3 20 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion o 0a a a a e 3 22 Using the Analyzer As a Receiver in Zero Frequency Span 3 24 Measuring Signals Near Band Boundaries Using Harmonic Lock 3 26 4 Making Measurements What You ll Learn in This Chapter 2 a ee 4 1 Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function 4
10. COUPLE AC DC 21 1HP 8595E only 21 HP 8594 85941 8595 or 8596E only 25 HP 8592L 8593E or 8596E only 34 After selectingthissoftkey pressinganydigit 0 through 9 bringsup the appropriate amplitude terminator menu ONE EXAMPLE OF HOW TO ACCESS THE TERM NATORMENUS PRESS THIS ACTIVE PRESS ANY DIGIT E AMPL I TUDE SOFTKEY FUNCTION g gt g TERMINATOR N DA MENU REF LVL REF LEVEL HOLD dBrnv dBrnv Buv dBuv THISFOOTNOTE APPEARS IN MENU TREES TO EXPLAIN TH 1S PROCESS thissoftkey git Othrougr9 eoppropriateampli u di th rmen 8 2 Key Menus CTRL Demod Track Gen Aux Conn Control 4 COMB GEN ON OFF Quasi Peak 5 HP 8595E only Option010 or 011 only option 102or 103only Option 103 with the quosi peak detector driverinstaliedonly 25 HP 85921 8593 or 8596E only 26 Changes to ALC MTR INT XTAL for an HP 8590L or HP 8591 34 After selectingthissoftkey pressing anydigit 0 through 9 bringsup the appropriateampli tudeterminator menu MM ta ft a 30 RequiresOption1 3 0 AUTO COUPLE AUTO ALL RES BWAUTO MAN VIDBWAUTO MAN ATTENAUTO MAN SWP TIME AUTO MAN CF STEP AUTOMAN DEMOD ON OFFS DEMODA M FM SPEAKER ON OFF SQUELCH3 FM GAIN3 25 DWELL TIME SRC PWR ON OFF 2 34 TRACKING PE AK MAN TRK ADJUST 2 PWR S WP ON OFF SRC ATNMAN AUTO 2 More 1 of 2 AUTO QPAT MKR MAN QP AT MKR gt CLEAP QP DATA PU12
11. Note PRESET turns amplitude correction factors off if it is on but does not clear an existing amplitude correction table Use PURGE AMP COR to clear an existing amplitude correction table Press Edit Amp Cor to edit an existing amplitude correction table or if no amplitude correction table currently exists to create an amplitude correction table Pressing PURGE AMP COR two times consecutively clears an existing amplitude correction table Selecting the Amplitude Correction Point Pressing SELECT POINT specifies the amplitude correction point to be entered or edited Amplitude correction data is constructed from left to right and is created by entering frequency and amplitude values into an amplitude correction table The frequency and amplitude values specify a coordinate point from which amplitude corrections are interpolated see Figure 5 13 Up to 79 points can be specified for the amplitude corrections table 16 24 39 1 7 MAR 1992 REF dBm ATTEN 18 dB PEAK 400 0 MHz j START 150 0 MHz STOP 400 0 MHz RES BH 3 0 MHZ VBW 1 MHz SWP 28 0 msec R Figure 5 13 Amplitude Correction Points Description of Items in Figure 5 13 Frequencies below first point use first amplitude level First segment interpolated with the 10 dB amplitude level Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the second segment Third segment interpolated with the 10 dB amplitude level Frequency an
12. 18 P_RINT 69 dB KEY 2 25 Editor KEYHi 27 T EST 33 R_ESULT 35 H SPAN 34 Sait V ARE 33 V_ARA 33 SELECT PREFIX SA SB sc FC Exit CORR Catalog Previous OO Menu CENTER 1 488 6Hz SPAN 2 900 GHz RES BW 3 8 MHz VBW 1 MHz S WP 58 6 msec RL pqt2el Figure 7 2 Analyzer Memory Catalog Information 7 18 Key Descriptions Table 7 4 Analyzer Memory Catalog Information Callout Number Description of Items in Figure 7 2 Name of the catalog source Internal Bytes of spectrum analyzer memory used 5082 Total bytes of spectrum analyzer memory available 65534 Bytes used by item 52 Name of item S HIFT This table is not applicable when using CATALOG REGISTER or CATALOG ON EVEWT Unlike saving to the memory card data is saved as an item in spectrum analyzer memory Use the step keys to view different sections of the directory and the knob to select a file The selected file is highlighted in inverse video Each of the catalog softkey functions access the menu that has the DELETE FILE function Use DELETE FILE to delete the item from spectrum analyzer memory DELETE FILE will not delete a CATALOG ON EVENT item Pressing CATALOG REGISTER accesses a menu that has the LOAD FILE function Use LOAD FILE to load a state or trace from spectrum analyzer memory Do not use LOAD FILE to load limit line table and amplitude correction factor items Also see the CATALOG ALL and CATALOG VARIABLS softkey descr
13. RES BW 3 MHz p WA VE VC FC CORR CENTER3006 0 MHz SPAN 50 00 MHz RES BW 3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 msec pul47e Figure 5 8 Upper and Lower Limit Line Testing 5 30 Using Analyzer Features To turn the limit line testing on and off use LMT TEST ON OFF Use PURGE LIMITS to clear the limit line tables To remove the limit lines from the display use LMT DISP Y N AUTO Underlining Y displays the limit lines N turns them off and AUTO displays them if the testing is turned on or turns them off if testing is turned off Using Analyzer Features 531 Learn About the Analog Display Mode Option 101 only The analog display mode combines traditional analog display performance with digital display benefits Analog display mode gives the spectrum analyzer the look and feel of older analog displays such as the HP 8558B but it has the added benefit of features common to digital displays Display features include Hard copy output directly to a printer Complete marker functionality such as peak search and noise readout m Screen annotation functions such as title linear and log scales and graticule m Negative peak detector included with Option 101 The analog display mode is only available on spectrum analyzers with Option 101 It is also available with Option 301 which is a combination of Options 101 and 102 Option 101 also includes a negative peak detector useful for video modulator balance adjustments and
14. Print menu om Front Panel Key Access restores the factory default values of the horizontal and vertical synchronization constants for the rear panel MONITOR output CRT SYNC DEFAULT can be used to exit from the NTSC or PAL modes to return to the normal monitor output and use the default synchronization constants Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended accesses the time gate utility menu for coupling spectrum analyzer settings to the input pulsed signal parameters It also accesses the pulsed signal parameter entry menus Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended accesses the menu for turning on and defining the gate from within the time gate utility Gate delay and gate length settings determine when the gate turns on and how long it remains on The trigger marker can be activated from this menu This menu also includes a function which switches the active window between the time domain window and the frequency domain window allowing the corresponding trace to be updated Front Panel Key Access SWEEP O ption 105 only O ption 101 is recommended accesses the menu for manipulating the time domain window in the gate utility It will automatically make the time window active and turn off the gate The trigger marker can be activated from this menu Front Panel Key Access 7 32 Key Descriptions DELETE function allows you to delete an item from spe
15. To Recall a State 1 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 2 Press INTERNAL gt STATE 3 Enter the register number under which the state was saved and the state is recalled automatically State data can also be recalled by using the catalog 1 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 2 Press Catalog Internal and CATALOG REGISTER Use the knob to highlight the number of the state register to be retrieved The state registers have a ST preceding the register number 3 Press LOAD FILE Note Register 9 is a special register which can aid in recovering from inadvertent loss of line power power failure Press RECALL INTERNAL STATE then 9 to place the spectrum analyzer in the state that existed just prior to the loss of power or set POWER ON LAST to do this automatically 5 6 Using Analyzer Features To Save a Trace Saving trace data is very similar to saving state data Saving trace data saves both the trace data and the state data 1 2 3 4 Enter a screen title if desired by using DISPLAY and Change Title Set up the trace to be stored Press SAVE If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL Press Trace Intrnl This accesses a menu displaying TRACE A TRACE B and TRACE C Press the softkey for the trace that you want to save TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C REGISTER a
16. EVENT CNTR INPUT TTL accepts a TTL signal and counts the negative pulses a falling edge followed by a rising edge that occur during the gate time interval Option E02 only This input is used to test for digital radio signal errors when using the HP 11758T Digital Radio Test System GATE OUTPUT TTL provides a TTL signal which indicates gate status when the when the gate is in edge trigger mode A high TTL signal indicates the gate is on a low TTL signal indicates the gate is off GATE OUTPUT is not active in level mode For Option 105 only EARPHONE connector provides a connection for an earphone jack instead of using the internal speaker For Option 102 103 or 110 only INTERVAL CNTR INPUT TTL accepts a TTL signal It identifies negative pulses a falling edge followed by a rising edge and measures the accumulated time that a pulse is low during the gate time interval Option E02 only This input is used to test for digital radio signal errors when using the HP 11758T Digital Radio Test System SWEEP TUNE OUTPUT provides a voltage ramp that is proportional to the spectrum analyzer span 0 to 10 V plus the tuning voltage of the LO For O ption 009 only LO OUT provides the output of the first LO which is proportional to the frequency that the spectrum analyzer is tuned to For Option 009 or 010 only EXT REF IN accepts an external frequency source to provide the 10 MHz 2 to 10 dBm frequency reference used by the spectrum
17. If PARAM AUTO MAN is selected AUTO is underlined other settings will be coupled and set automatically PARAM AUTO MAN can be selected to manually control all settings by underlining MAN The measurement stops and the spectrum analyzer is returned to its prior state when other functions are activated The channel power measurement responds like an rms power measurement Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER allows the user to enter the channel spacing to set up the spectrum analyzer when using the measurement functions under the Power Menu softkey When the power measurements are first accessed the initial value for channel spacing is 25 kHz Once the value is changed the new value will be saved through an instrument preset or power on An error message will occur for invalid values of channel spacing and channel bandwidth If one of the power measurements is active and the channel spacing is changed with PARAM AUTO selected then the coupled spectrum analyzer settings are immediately updated If CONT MEAS is also selected then another sweep is taken and the measured results are updated Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER clears the current screen title or prefix This softkey is accessed under the YZ_ Spc Clear softkey when using Change Title or Change Prefix Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended clears all of the pulse parameters in the gate utility It se
18. Original Packaging Before shipping pack the unit in the original factory packaging materials if they are available If the original materials were not retained see Other Packaging Other Packaging Caution Spectrum analyzer damage can result from using packaging materials other than those specified Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging materials They do not adequately cushion the equipment or prevent it from shifting in the carton They cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in the spectrum analyzer fan You can repackage the instrument with commercially available materials as follows 1 Attach a completed service tag to the instrument 2 If you have a front panel cover install it on the instrument if not protect the control panel with cardboard 3 Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of damage caused by electrostatic discharge 4 Use the original packaging material or a strong shipping container A double walled corrugated cardboard carton with 159 kg 350 lb bursting strength is adequate The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the spectrum analyzer Allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the analyzer for packing material 5 Surround the equipment with three to four inches of packing material and prevent the equipment from moving in the carton If packing foam is not available the best alternative
19. Print Config PRINTER ADDRESS PRINTER SETUP Pm Port Conf ig PRN PORT HPIB PAR PRN PORT SER PAR Option 041 or 043 only accesses the softkey functions that are used to address the printer select a black and white print or a color print and reset the printer See the key for more information Front Panel Key Access Option 041 only allows you to change the HP IB address of the printer The printer address is set to 1 by pressing DEFAULT COMFIG Front Panel Key Access Option 041 or 043 only resets the printer sets the printer to 60 lines per page and skips line perforations This function enables you to obtain up to three printouts per page The printer paper should be at the top of the form before using this function The PRINTER SETUP function may not work with printers that are not recommended See Chapter 10 for recommended printers Front Panel Key Access Option 041 or 043 only accesses the menus used by Option 041 HP IB and Parallel Interface and Option 043 RS 232 and Parallel Interface to select printer options See the COPY key for more information Front Panel Key Access CONFIG Option 041 only allows you to select between HP IB or parallel printer ports Option 043 only allows you to select between serial or parallel printer ports The BAUD RATE softkey appears in this menu only when serial is selected Key Descriptions 7 69 PRT MENU ON OFF Pulse Param PURGE A
20. 7000 In linear mode each point has a resolution of reference level in volts 8000 For example if trace A contains amplitude values of 10 dBm and trace B contains amplitude values of 40 dBm the result of the A B A function would be 10 004 dBm if dBm units were used Since measurement units are used for the A B A function the result of A B gt A is 50 dBm 10 dBm 7000 measurement units 40 dBm 4000 measurement units the result is 3000 measurement units which is equal to 50 dBm Front Panel Key Access TRACE copies trace A into trace C Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu for selecting screen title characters A through F Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE_ Key Descriptions 7 5 ACCEPT QP DATA ACPGRAPH ON OFF ADJ CHAN POWER For Option 103 only displays the quasi peak amplitude value of the marker See the HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 8596E Option 103 supplement documentation for more information Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL turns the adjacent channel power graph ON or OFF With ACPGRAPH ON the ACP ratio graph is calculated and displayed and the numeric results are not displayed The value of the ACP ratio is displayed at the selected marker frequency offset from the center frequency This graph function is used after doing an adjacent channel power measurement with the ADJ CHAN POWER or ADJ CHAN PWR ext
21. CLEAR WRITE C CNT RES AUTO MAN CNTL A O 1 CNTL B 0 1 CNTL C 0 1 CNTL D O 1 erases any data previously stored in trace C and continuously displays any signals detected during the sweep of the spectrum analyzer This function is activated at power on and by pressing PRESET Changing the trace mode of trace C to clear write or minimum hold can change the trace mode of trace A and trace B If trace A or trace B is in clear write mode or maximum hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace A or trace B is changed to store blank The following table shows the trace mode of trace A or trace B before and after changing trace C to clear write or minimum hold trace mode Trace Mode of Trace A or B Trace Mode of Trace A or B Before After Clear write Store blank Store blank View Maximum hold View If you want to use trace A or trace B in the clear write or maximum hold mode and do not want trace C to blank it use minimum hold or view trace mode for trace C Front Panel Key Access Does not apply to HP 8590L with Option 013 allows the resolution of the marker counter to be selected manually or auto coupled The marker counter has a resolution range of 10 Hz to 100 kHz The available resolution values are 1 Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz and 100 kHz The 1 Hz marker counter resolution is not specified The resolution can be changed by using the step keys
22. FFT stop freq 400 sweep time x 2 Note When using the FFT stop frequency function the knob and step key increments are not optimal for positioning the signal To use the knob or step keys to position the signal select sweep time as the active function Front Panel Key Access FINE displays the output of the YTO fine tune DAC which is produced on the TUNE DAC A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access FLAT draws a zero slope line between the coordinate point of the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment producing limit line values equal in amplitude for all frequencies between the two points If the amplitude values of the two segments differ the limit line steps to the frequency value of the second segment Front Panel Key Access Flatness provides access to the softkeys used for viewing or editing the flatness Data correction constants This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 43 FM COIL DRIVE FM GAIN FM OFFSET FM SPAN FORMAT CARD FREE RUN FREQ DIAG FREQ DISC NORM OFF displays the output of the FM coil driver produced on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL Option 102 or 103 only adjusts the FM deviation display The center gra
23. It only performs the tracking peak self calibration for the HP 8590L and HP 85913 The spectrum analyzer should be amplitude calibrated by pressing CAL AMPTD prior to using the CAL TRK GEN function Connect the tracking generator output to the spectrum analyzer input before pressing CAL TRK GEN Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 8595E and HP 85963 only generates the best slope and offset adjustment to calibrate the YIG tuned filter YTF for each harmonic band Connect COMB OUT to the spectrum analyzer input before pressing CAL YTF on the HP 8592L HP 85933 or HP 85963 Connect the CAL OUT to the spectrum analyzer input for an HP 85953 The frequency self calibration routine should be performed before running the CAL YTF routine Front Panel Key Access Requires O ption 003 for an HP 85901 HP 8592L or HP 8594L accesses the softkey menu that allows you to catalog format and delete data from a memory card Front Panel Key Access 7 14 Key Descriptions CARD DISPLAY CARD DLP CARD STATE Card Trace Requires O ption 003 for an HP 85901 HP 85921 or HP 8594L recalls into spectrum analyzer memory a display image saved on the memory card It does not recall the associated instrument state but the restored display can be viewed and copied Before recalling a display that was saved under a prefix other than the current prefix change the current prefix to the prefix used when the display wa
24. MP COR SAVE AMP COR Change Title AMP COR ON OFF Fdit Amp Cor 4 ABCDFF GHIJKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ_ Spe Clear More 1 of FREQ DIAG LOCK ON OFF FRO DISCNORM OFF FM GAI IN FM OFFSESET More 4 of 4 A lt SELECT POINT SELECT FREO SELECT AMPLITUD DELETE POINT Edit Done PURGE AMP COR OP DET ON OP GAIN ON OFF 4 OPD RST ON OFF 4 QPD OFFSET 4 ALC TEST 27 Mare 6 or More RPG TITLE More 2 of HP 8595Eonly Opt ion010 or Oltonly OptiontOdo nly F o r serviceuseonly H P 8592LandH P 8593Eormiy HP 8595E andHP 8596Eornly HP 8590LandHP 8591E with OptiondiOor 011 only ChongestoYTFSPAN for an HP 8592L 8593E 8595 and 8596E HP 8590LorHP 8591E only PUT4EL 8 4 Key Menus CONF IG LeLocaLy COPY DEV PRNT PLT 7 Plot Config Print Config Time Dote Change Prefix More 1 of 3 7 7 Option041 or D43on y 8 Option0 4 1 only Changest o BAUD RATE for Option043 9 Changes to EXIT SHOW when SHOW OPTIONS is pressed to MEM LOCKED when 12 Changes CAV LOCK s ON 19 RegquiresOpt ion003 far the HP 8590L 8592L or 8594L 29 Appears only when PLTS PG 2 or 4 5 selected 36 Appears only when SER is selected PLIS PG 124 7 PLT Loc 29 PLT gt LJT ON OFF Pit Port Conf iq im PLT MENU ON OFF Previous Menu 7 Set B amp W Printer Prn Port Config PRT MENU ON OFF 7 PRINTER SETUP Previous Menu TIMEDATE ON OFF DATEMODE MDY DM
25. Warning These techniques for a static safe work station should not be used when working on circuitry with a voltage potential greater than 500 volts Building Ground 1 MegOhm Resistor Table Mat Building Ground d 1 MegOhm Resistor Figure 1 5 Example of a Static Safe Work Station Preparing For Use Il Reducing Damage Caused by ESD The following suggestions may help reduce ESD damage that occurs during testing and servicing Operations Before connecting any coaxial cable to an spectrum analyzer connector for the first time each day momentarily ground the center and outer conductors of the cable m Personnel should be grounded with a resistor isolated wrist strap before touching the center pin of any connector and before removing any assembly from the unit Be sure that all instruments are properly earth grounded to prevent a buildup of static charge Table 1 4 lists static safe accessories that can be obtained from Hewlett Packard by using the HP part numbers shown Table 1 4 Static Safe Accessories HP Part Description Number 9300 0797 Set includes 3M static control mat 0 6 m x 1 2 m 2 ft x 4 ft and 4 6 cm 15 ft ground wire The wrist strap and wrist strap cord are not included They must be ordered separately 9300 0980 Wrist strap cord 1 5 m 5 ft 9300 1383 Wrist strap color black stainless steel without cord has four adjust
26. limit line table The line segments of a limit line are stored in the limit line table The table can be recalled to edit the line segments then restored in the limit line file Refer also to limit line linear display The display mode in which vertical deflection on the screen is directly proportional to the voltage of the input signal The bottom line of the graticule represents 0 V the top line represents the reference level The reference level is a non zero value characteristic to the spectrum analyzer model On the HP 140 series analyzers select a specific scale factor in volts per division On newer models of spectrum analyzers select the reference level The scale factor becomes the reference level value divided by the number of graticule divisions Although the display is linear analyzers with microprocessors allow reference level and marker values to be indicated in dBm dBmV dByV volts and in some cases watts Glossary 8 linear input level The maximum input signal level where gain compression does not occur Refer also to gain compression LO The abbreviation for local oscillator The local oscillator output in a superheterodyne system is mixed with the received signal to produce a sum or difference equal to the intermediate frequency IF of the receiver Refer also to IF LO feedthrough The response that occurs on a spectrum analyzer s display when the first local oscillator frequency is equal to the first IF The LO
27. 10 2 CATV measurements personality 10 2 CATV system monitor personality 10 2 CDMA measurements personality 10 2 close field probes 10 15 CT2 CAI measurements personality 10 8 DCS1800 measurements personality 10 3 DECT measurements personality 10 3 digital radio measurements personality 10 3 EM1 diagnostics measurements personality 10 3 external keyboard 10 15 GSM900 measurements personality 10 3 HP IB cable 10 15 link measurement personality 10 4 memory card 10 15 NADC TDMA measurements personality 10 4 noise figure 10 4 noise figure measurements personality 10 4 parallel interface cable 10 15 PC interface and report generator software 10 16 PC software 10 16 PDC measurements personality 10 4 PHS measurements personality 10 4 plotter 10 16 printer 10 16 rack slide kit 10 16 RF bridge 10 13 RF limiters 10 13 RS 232 cable 10 16 scalar 500 transmission reflection test set 10 13 scalar measurements personality 10 4 transient limiters 10 13 Index transit case 10 16 accessories shipped with the analyzer 1 3 ac coupling 7 30 ACPGRAPH 7 6 AC power source 10 14 AC probe 10 14 active function 2 12 active function block 2 1 active function clearing 7 48 addressing printer 7 69 address of plotter 7 63 address of spectrum analyzer 7 10 adjacent channel power 7 6 extended dynamic range 7 7 using 4 44 47 adjacent channel power graph 7 6 adjacent chann
28. 100 Hz and 300 Hz These bandwidths improve sensitivity and allow you to resolve closely spaced signals The option also includes an internal precision frequency reference that improves stability and provides increased absolute frequency accuracy The precision frequency reference makes the narrow resolution bandwidths more effective and easier to use DSP Fast ADC and Digital Demodulator Option 151 For HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 85963 only Option 151 supplies the hardware required for fast time domain sweeps digital demodulation measurements and digital signal processor assisted DSP measurements Option 151 provides a subset of Option 101 fast time domain functions Option 101 allows zero span sweep times as low as 20 psec with a step resolution of 20 psec 20 psec 40 psec 60 psec and so forth Option 151 allows zero span sweep times as low as 40 psec with a sequence of 40 psec 80 psec 160 psec 320 psec and 160 usec step size thereafter All trace functions are available for these fast zero span sweeps Since the sweep times offered by Option 151 are a subset of those offered by Option 101 the analog display mode is not supported for Option 151 10 10 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories Option 101 or Option 151 support negative peak detection for an HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 8595E and HP 85963 The negative peak detector capability is useful for video modulator balance adjustments and intermodulatio
29. 4 22 operation local 7 5 1 operation manual see User s Guide 10 12 Option 101 used time gate Option 105 4 22 used with FFT measurements 4 2 Option 105 example of using time gating 4 24 functional check 4 36 operation 4 22 self calibration routines 4 35 spectrum analyzer settings 4 24 4 26 table of spectrum analyzer settings 4 34 options 500 to 7561 matching pad Option 711 10 12 75 input impedance Option 001 10 5 AM FM demodulator w speaker and TV sync trigger circuitry Option 102 10 9 benchlink spectrum analyzer Option B70 10 12 carrying case Option 015 10 6 carrying case Option 016 10 6 CT2 demodulator Option 1 10 10 9 digital demodulator Option 151 10 10 digital european cordless telephone Option 112 10 10 DSP Option 151 10 10 extra calibration guide Option 910 10 12 extra user s guide Option 910 10 12 fast ADC Option 151 10 10 fast time domain sweeps Option 101 10 8 frequency extension to 26 5 GHz APC 3 5 connector Option 026 10 7 frequency extension to 26 5 GHz N Type connector Option 027 10 7 front panel protective cover Option 040 10 7 group delay and amplitude flatness Option 111 10 9 GSM DCS 1800 firmware Option 163 10 11 HP IB and Parallel Option 041 10 6 impact cover Option 040 10 7 Index 11 improved amplitude accuracy Option 050 10 8 improved amplitude accuracy Option 051 10 8 improved amplitude accuracy Option 052 10
30. 5 2 Peak Table Display 2 2 e 5 3 Inserting the Memory Card 2 2 2 2 e 5 4 Typical Limit Line Display 2 20 0 0 0 0 0 200 000 5 5 The Completed Limit Line Table 0 a a a a a 0 0 0 5 6 Limit Line Segments gi i e E O a ka a a 5 7 Segment Types s e e sa ee ee ee 5 8 Upper and Lower Limit Line Testing gt o o a a a a 0040 5 9 Analog Display Mode a a aa aa e o 5 10 Windows Display Mode a 5 11 Amplitude Correction Display a 5 12 Completed Amplitude Correction Table a a a 2 a 5 13 Amplitude Correction Points a 6 1 Three Printouts Per Page ooa aa aa a 6 2 Plots P r Pagesa aii 8 d Gi des e ae ee ee a ie a GG i Contents 8 4 7 4 46 4 47 4 48 4 49 5 4 5 11 5 19 5 21 5 24 5 30 ThinkJet Printer Switch Settings HP IB to Centronics Converter Setup Printer Configuration Menu Map HP 7475A Plotter Switch Settings Plot Configure Menu 9600 Baud Settings for Serial Printers Printer Configure Menu Connecting the HP 7550A B Plotter Baud Rate Menu Map Plot Configure Menu Parallel Printer Switch Settings Printer Configuration Menu Map Plot Configure Menu Memory Card Catalog Information Analyzer Memory
31. ANNOTATN ON OFF APND CAT ITEM ATTEN AUTO MAN Option 041 only allows you to set the HP IB address of the spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer address is set to 18 by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG Front Panel Key Access displays the current value of the gain for various functional blocks within the spectrum analyzer The gain values will vary depending on the current spectrum analyzer settings This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access turns the screen annotation on or off However softkey annotation will remain on the screen The screen annotation may not be required for prints or plots or during remote operation Refer to the HOLD softkey description regarding softkey annotation Front Panel Key Access For Options 041 and 043 only Referto Chapter 4 ofthe HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information starts the DLP editor function and allows the highlighted item from the catalog of spectrum analyzer memory to be appended to the end of the item that is currently in the spectrum analyzer DLP editor memory If the item to be appended will not fit in the available memory space it will not be appended Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE_ sets the input attenuation in 10 dB increments The spectrum analyzer input attenuator which is normally couple
32. CENTER 300 0 MHz RES BW 3 MHz SPAN 200 0 MHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 msec put43e Figure 5 4 Typical Limit Line Display Upper limit line Lower limit line Screen message 5 Press Edit Limit then Edit Upper to create an upper limit line The table defaults to frequency parameters the second column should be labeled START FREO If it is labeled START TIME press More 1 of 2 EDIT DONE and Edit Limit Press LIMITS FRQ TIME so that FRQ is underlined LIMITS FRQ TIME specifies that the limit line parameters be entered in either frequency or time Note To clear an existing limit line table press More 1 of 2 Then press PURGE LIMITS two times After pressing PURGE LIMITS the first time the message If you are sure press key again to purge data will appear Pressing PURGE LIMITS a second time purges the limit line table PRESET turns limit line testing off if it is on but does not clear an existing limit line table 6 Press Edit Upper to edit or create an upper limit line Using Analyzer Features 5 19 7 The table defaults to fixed parameters the upper right corner of the table should be labeled FIXED If it is labeled RELATIVE press More 1 of 2 Then press LIMITS FIX REL so that FIX is underlined LIMITS FIX REL specifies whether or not the limit line is relative to the spectrum analyzer center frequency and reference level settings When time parameters are used the RELATIVE format only affec
33. If using the HP IB to centronics converter connect its power cable 5 The printer usually resides at device address 1 To configure the spectrum analyzer to print to address 1 press Press this key to access the configuration menu Print Config Press this key to access the print menu Pm Port Config Press this key to access the print configure menu PRN PORTHPIBPAR _ SO that HPIB is underlined PRINTER ADDRESS 1 6 Referring to Figure 6 5 select the printer configuration for your spectrum analyzer by pressing the appropriate keys CONFIG Press this key to access the configuration menu Print Config Press this key to access the print configure menu Printing and Plotting 6 5 PRINTER SETUP Set Colr Printer Set B amp W Printer HP B amp W PRINTER HP B amp W DJ540 EP MX80 SML LRG EP LQ570 SML LRG PRT MENU ON OFF COPY DEV PRNT PLT 6 6 Printing and Plotting Press this key to send a PRINTER RESET command to the printer This will cause a form feed if any data has been sent to the printer since the last form feed Press if connected to a Hewlett Packard compatible color printer then select the appropriate printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page After three printouts the page will be in position to start again at the top of the page if the printer s perforation skip is OFF see Figure 6 1 One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfitting each
34. Key Descriptions 7 65 provides a convenient starting point for making most measurements Pressing displays softkeys used for accessing the operating modes available for your spectrum analyzer See Table 7 10 and Table 7 11 for the conditions established by pressing PRESET The instrument preset function performs a processor test but does not affect CAL data Pressing clears both the input and output buffers but does not clear trace B The amplitude values of trace C are set to the reference level Amplitude correction factors are turned off Limit line testing is turned off but the limit line tables remain in spectrum analyzer memory The status byte is set to 0 Instrument preset affects all operating modes See the key description for for more information about other operating modes Pressing erases all on time functions ONCYCLE ONDELAY ONEOS ONMKR ONSRQ ONSWP ONTIME and TRMATH These are remote programming commands See the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information Note Turning the spectrum analyzer on performs an instrument preset Turning on the spectrum analyzer also fetches CAL data completes a processor test clears trace B trace C and both the input and output buffers turns off amplitude correction factors turns off limit line testing and sets the status byte to 0 The last state of the spectrum analyzer before it was switched off i
35. Mransit Caseg cutie tin A E eel hea Oe O A SRQ BERVICE REUS pd AAA a ua oe Se dh Wee G Slats Byte Definition a gy uh eG A A a he SRS Service Request Activating Commands Glossary Index Contents 6 Figures 1 1 HP 8590 Series Spectrum Analyzer e 1 2 Setting the Line Voltage Selector Switch 2 o 1 3 Checking the Line Fuse e 1 4 Reference Connector a e 1 5 Example of a Static Safe Work Station 0 2 2 1 Front Panel Feature Overview 2 2 0 2000 000008 2 2 Rear Panel Feature Overview o aooo e a 00000000000 2 3 Adjusting the Fine Focus a 2 4 Screen Annotation 2 e a 2 5 Relationship between Frequency and Amplitude 2 6 Reading the Amplitude and Frequency 2 7 Inserting the Memory Card 2 2 0 0 00000008 2 8 Memory Card Battery Date Code Location 0 0 00204 2 9 Memory Card Battery Replacement 000 2 10 Rear Panel Battery Information Label o a a a a a a 3 1 Set Up for Obtaining Two Signals oa a a aa Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude a a a a a Resolution Bandwidth Requirements for Resolving Small Signals Signal Resolution with a 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Signal Resolution with a 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth
36. Option 163 For HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 85963 with Option 151 only Option 163 provides Option 151 Digital Demodulator hardware with a firmware algorithm that demodulates GSM and DCS1800 radio carriers in order to make modulation quality measurements Option 163 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R63 for spectrum analyzers that already have Option 151 installed For analyzers that do not have Option 151 installed a retrofit kit Option R73 is available to provide both options 151 and 163 TV Picture Display Option 180 For HP 8591C HP 8591E HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only Option 180 allows you to view an NTSC PAL or SECAM television picture on the spectrum analyzer display Option 180 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R80 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 08591 60089 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories 10 1 1 TV Sync Trigger Capability Fast Time Domain Sweeps and AM FM Demodulator Option 301 For HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 85963 only Option 301 is a combined option made of Options 101 and 102 allowing sweep times down to 20 ps in zero span enabling use of amplitude or frequency demodulation and allowing a demodulated signal to be listened to See Options 101 and 102 above for more detailed descriptions 508 to 759 Matching Pad Option 711 Fbr E Series and L Series spectrum analyzers This option
37. Printing is usually faster than plotting but plotting provides higher resolution output The spectrum analyzer works with plotters such as the HP 7440A Figure 7 4 shows the rear view of a typical printer spectrum analyzer configuration ii ST En e soi Figure 7 4 Connecting a Printer to the Spectrum Analyzer Key Descriptions 7 29 Note Printing and plotting require an optional interface Generally spectrum analyzers with an HP IB interface set the plotter address to 5 and the printer address to 1 Spectrum analyzers with an RS 232 interface must have the baud rate set to match the baud rate of the printer or plotter being used The HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide that comes with the optional interfaces details the different interfaces Refer to Chapter 6 in this manual for more information about printing and plotting COPY DEV Option 041 or 043 only PRNT PLT changes between a printer and plotter For example if you have been printing and want to do a plot press COPY DEV PRNT PLT to underline PLT before pressing COPY Front Panel Key Access CORRECT controls use of some of the correction factors When ON is underlined ON OFF correction factors are used and CORR appears on the display When OFF is underlined correction factors are not used Turning the correction factors off degrad
38. SRC PWR STP SIZE SRC PWR OFFSET 2 ALC INTEXT 2 26 SWP CPLG SR SA 2 More 2 of 2 2 CNTL AO CNTL B 0 CNTL C 0 CNTL DO DISPLAY CNTL CENTER FREQ MARKER NORMPkK 2 OP X10 ON OFF 2 OP DET ON OFF 5 ACCEPT QP DATAS RETURN RESBWAUTOM A N VIDBWAU TO MAN VBW RBW ID AVGON OFF 120 kHz EM BWMenu Previous PUI3EL BW 9 kHz EMI BW 200 Hz EMI Bw 30 Menu PU14 Key Menus 8 3 I cal I CALFPE amp AMPTD CAL FRED CAL AMPTD CAL TF 17 22 CAL STORE Morelo f j STORPWP ONUNITS EXECUTE TITLE Flatness Data CAL TIMEBASE CAL MXR 17 22 SET ATTN ERROR EDIT FLATNESS IDNUM Services a Service Diag DEFAULT CAL DATA CAL TRK GEN 2 VERIFY TIMEBASE More 3 of 4 CONFTEST CAL FETCH CORRECT ON OFF CPT VERT POSITION CPT HORZPOSITION 4 More 2 of 4 INIT FLT EXIT 1 forH P 85920 DISPLAY CAL DATA 2v REF DETECTOR MAIN SPAN FINE TUNE DAC TUNE COARSE 22 DACS STP GAIN ZERO ANALYZER GAINS GND REF DETECTOR MAIN COIL OR FM COIL ORIVE SWEEP RAMP SWEEP TIME DAC COARSE TUNE DAC X F NE TUNE DAC 10VREF DETECTOR 10V PEF DETECTOP TF TUNE FINE 17 22 TF DRIVER 17 22 IXER BIAS DAC 7 22 BINARY SPAN 28 More 3 RESEL DAC17 22 More 6 AUXB 32 More DROOP More 4 FM SPAN More 2 Y _ _ YTF TUNE COARSE 7 22 YTF TUNE FINE 17 22 TF DRIVER 17 22 MIXER BIAS DAC 7 22 PRESEL DAC 17 22 RECALL
39. The transmitter frequency error is the frequency difference between the midpoint of the power bandwidth and the spectrum analyzer center frequency For special applications you can change the percent power bandwidth from 1 to 99 99 using the OCC BW POWER key Example Measure the 99 occupied bandwidth Making Measurements 4 43 on 6 Connect a signal to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Press FREQUENCY and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency Press and adjust the reference level to bring the signal near the top of the display Press MEAS USER and Power Menu to access the power measurement functions Press Setup and CHANNEL SPACING to enter the value for the channel spacing The span is automatically set to be three times the channel spacing value The center frequency step size is automatically set to be equal to the channel spacing Press Previous Menu to return to the main power menu Press OCCUPIED BANDWDTH to activate the function A REF EF 20 0 dBm AT 30 dB _ SINGLE SMPL loccuMTED aw 99 00 MEAS LOG osw 29 25 kHz 10 ZFC T35 KAZ 08 Pwr 14 2 dam CSP B0 00 kHz CONT L 4 MEAS Y L W CENTER FRED OCC BW POWER WA S SC F MAL wi Setup COR Previous 1 1 Menu CENTER 825 03000 MHz SPAN 900n kHz ARES BW 1 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 300 m
40. U CAL DATA NOT STORED CAL AMP NEEDED The correction factors are corrupt and cannot be stored You need to perform the If You Have A Problem 9 7 9 3 CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routine before trying to store the correction factors This message also sets SRQ 110 U CAL FM SPAN SENS FAIL The spectrum analyzer could not set up span sensitivity of the FM coil H CAL GAIN FAIL Indicates the signal amplitude is too low during the CAL AMPTD routine This message also sets SRQ 110 H CAL MAIN COIL SENSE FAIL The spectrum analyzer could not set up span sensitivity of the main coil If this message appears press FREQUENCY 37 Hz CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 DEFAULT CAL DATA and perform the CAL FREQ routine again H CAL NBW 200 Hz notch amp failed Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct shape for the calibration routine H CAL NBW 200 Hz notch failed Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct shape for the calibration routine H CAL NBW 200 Hz width failed Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct bandwidth for the calibration routine H CAL NBW gain failed Indicates that one of the resolution bandwidths is not the correct amplitude for the calibration routine H CAL NBW width failed Indicates that one of the resolution bandwidths is not the correct width for the calibration routine H CAL PASSCODE NEEDED Indicates
41. Using the Marker Counter After Zooming In on the Signal o Peaking Signal Amplitude Using Preselector Peak 2 Using Marker Tracking to Track an Unstable Signal 3 10 Viewing an Unstable Signal Using Max Hold A o 3 1 1 Viewing an Unstable Signal With Max Hold Clear Write and Min Hold 3 12 Placing a Marker on the CAL OUT Signal 3 13 Using the Marker Delta Function 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 3 14 Using the Marker to Peak Peak Function 3 15 Frequency and Amplitude Difference between Signals 3 16 Low Level Signal 2 2 e 3 17 Using 0 dB Attenuation 2 2 e 3 18 Decreasing Resolution Bandwidth a a a a a a a 3 19 Decreasing Video Bandwidth o a a a a a a 3 20 Using the Video Averaging Function oos oa a a 3 2 1 Harmonic Distortion o 3 22 RF Attenuation of 10 dB 2 0 e 3 23 No Harmonic Distortion 2 a a 3 24 Third Order Intermodulation Equipment Setup 0 3 25 Measuring the Distortion Product 2 3 26 Viewing an AM Signal e 3 27 Measuring Modulation in Zero Span a o 3 28 Using Harmonic Lock s soe s esa dodoa 2 0 2 2 200 00 00 0000 3 29 Harmonic Locking Off 2 2 2 0 00 020 020 0000 4 1 FFT Annotatio
42. When the memory card is selected pressing any of the catalog softkeys CATALOG ALL CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE or CATALOG DISPLAY accesses LOAD FILE When cataloging spectrum analyzer memory using CATALOG REGISTER press LOAD FILE to recall the contents of a state or trace register into spectrum analyzer memory To use the LOAD FILE function use the step keys to view sections of the directory use the knob to select a file then press LOAD FILE Trace data is loaded into trace B See the softkey descriptions for CATALOG CARD and CATALOG REGISTER Use of the LOAD FILE softkey is not recommended for recalling limit line tables or amplitude correction factors stored in spectrum analyzer memory MAIN COIL DR Front Panel Key Access or Pressing after the spectrum analyzer has been placed in the remote mode places the spectrum analyzer in the local mode and enables front panel control During remote operation R appears in the lower right corner of the screen indicating remote and talk A T or L may appear during remote operation indicating talk or listen Pressing the key removes the R symbol in the lower right corner Front Panel Key Access displays the output produced by the main coil driver on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptio
43. accesses demodulation functions For Option 010 or 011 it accesses tracking generator functions HP 8590L or HP 8591 E onl y displays the voltage level present at an unused input to the Test Point MUX circuitry located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL copies trace B into trace C Front Panel Key Access exchanges the contents of trace B with trace C and puts trace B in view mode Front Panel Key Access subtracts the display line from trace B and places the result in trace B The B DL B function is a math operation See the A B A ON OFF softkey description for information about math operations Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 11 Band Lock HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only accesses the harmonic band menu and the band lock function Selecting a harmonic band causes the spectrum analyzer to lock onto the specified harmonic band and automatically select the settings shown in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Center Frequency and Span Settings for Harmonic Bands Softkey Center Description Frequency O 2 9 Gz BAND 0 1 45 GHz Low pass filtered first harmonic mixing 2 75 6 5 BAND 1 4 638 GHz Preselected first harmonic mixing 6 0 12 8 BAND 2 9 4 GHz Preselected second harmonic mixing 12 4 19 4 BAND 3 15 9GHz Preselected third harmonic mixing 19 1 22 BAND 4 20 55 GHz Preselected fourth h
44. analyzer if necessary Press CONFIG Plot Config Plt Port Config PLT PORT SER PAR so that SER is underlined then press BAUD RATE 7 28 Key Descriptions With PLTS PG 1 2 4 you can choose a full page half page or quarter page plot Press PLTS PG 1 2 4 to underline the number of plots per page desired If two or four plots per page are chosen a softkey function is displayed that allows you to select the location of the plotter output on the paper If two plots per page are selected PLT LOC _ _ is displayed If four plots per page are selected PLT _ LOC _ _ is displayed Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the softkey label The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent the position of the page where the plotter output will be located Note The HP 7470A Plotter does not support two plots per page output If you use an HP 7470A Plotter with an HP 8590 Series Spectrum Analyzer you can select one or four plots per page but not two plots per page For a multipen plotter the pens of the plotter draw the different components of the screen as follows Description Draws the annotation and graticule Draws trace A Draws trace B Draws trace C and the display line Draws user generated graphics and the lower limit line Draws the upper limit line To plot press Previous Menu COPY DEV PRNT PLT PLT should be underlined and COPY
45. and the bottom is the negative deviation FM gain sensitivity is increased by decreasing the FM gain value As the FM gain sensitivity is increased the volume is increased Pressing SQUELCH mutes the noise level MKR10 000001 msec FIEF 30 0 dBmATTEN 10 8 99 46 dBm CENTER 97 300 MHZ SPAN 0 Hz RESBW100 kHz VBW 30 kHz SwP2 0 msec Figure 4 12 Continuous Demodulation of an FM Signal 4 14 Making Measurements Triggering on a Selected Line of a Video Picture Field Note This application should only be performed using an HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 with Option 301 Options 101 and 102 combined With Option 301 you can trigger on a TV picture carrier signal This example enables you to view a test signal transmitted during vertical retrace when the TV screen is blanked 1 Press PRESET 2 Set the frequency of a picture carrier signal to center frequency 3 Press TRIG and TV TRIG If the spectrum analyzer is in a nonzero span TV TRIG sets the amplitude scale to linear places a marker on the signal peak moves the marker to the reference level changes the detector to sample sets the sweep time to 100 ys sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz and sets the span to 0 Hz The TV line number is the active function The preset function sets the spectrum analyzer to trigger on an odd field of a video format and
46. can be used with a power meter or crystal that has a positive or negative voltage output See specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for the leveling input characteristics External leveling increases the amplitude accuracy by improving the effective source match The meter MTR position narrows ALC loop bandwidth so an HP power meter can be used Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL Key Descriptions 7 7 ALC TEST ALL DLP CARD Amp Cor AMP COR AMP COR ON OFF AMPLITUDE Amptd Units HP 8590L or HP 8591 E with Option 010 or 011 only breaks the leveling loop of the automatic leveling control in the tracking generator This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access Requires O ption 003 for an HP 8590L HP 8592L or HP 8594L saves all the downloadable programs and key definitions that are in spectrum analyzer memory onto the memory card If the downloadable program was stored using a prefix the file name for the downloadable program consists of d prefix register number If no prefix was specified the data is stored with the file name d register number Front Panel Key Access accessed by CAL Amp Cor accesses the menus for entering and editing the current amplitude correction factors Front Panel Key Access when accessed by SAVE AMP COR stores the current amplitude correction factors table
47. dB Marker Trace Type Freq Time Amplitude 1 A Freq 994 MHZ 24 60 dBm 2 A Freq 1207 MHz 25 86 dBm 3 A Freq 1510 MHz 31 75 dBm i 4 A Freq 1808 MHz 37 94 dBm CENTER 1 450 GHZ SPAN 1 706 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 34 1 msec RL Figure 5 1 Marker Table Display 5 2 Using Analyzer Features Example Use the marker table to measure the calibrator signal 1 Connect the CAL OUT signal to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Press PRESET FREQUENCY STOP FREQ 2 GHz Press and NEXT PK RIGHT to place the marker 1 on the 300 MHz cal signal Press MKR FCTN MK TABLE ON OFF ON to turn on the marker table function Press SELECT 1 2 3 4 2 to select marker 2 Press MARKER ON OFF ON to activate marker 2 Use the NEXT PK RIGHT key or move the marker using the key pad or knob to place marker 2 on the next harmonic Repeat the process for markers 3 and 4 Make marker 2 readout time rather than frequency by pressing and pressing SELECT 1 2 3 4 until 2 is selected underlined Press More 1 of 2 MK READ F TI P T to select time for the marker readout The marker table can be set to display the marker amplitudes relative to the display line Press MKR FCTN More 1 of 2 and TABLE ADL NRM key to underline the ADL This accesses the delta display line format The display line can be moved using the knob The delta display line format is only available when using the marker table function Note The marker table da
48. is S D 240 Air Cap M from Sealed Air Corporation Commerce California 90001 Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet filled with 1 1 4 inch air bubbles Use the pink colored Air Cap to reduce static electricity Wrapping the equipment several times in this material should both protect the equipment and prevent it from moving in the carton 6 Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape 7 Mark the shipping container FRAGILE HANDLE WITH CARE to assure careful handling 8 Retain copies of all shipping papers 9 6 If You Have A Problem Error Messages The spectrum analyzer can generate various messages that appear on its screen during operation to indicate a problem There are three types of messages hardware error messages H user created error messages U and informational messages M Hardware error messages indicate the spectrum analyzer hardware is probably broken m User created error messages appear when the spectrum analyzer is used incorrectly They are usually generated during remote operation entering programming commands using either a controller or the external keyboard Informational messages provide information indicating the spectrum analyzer progress within a specific procedure The messages are listed in alphabetical order on the following pages each message is defined and its type is indicated by an H U or M LOCK OFF Indicates slow YTO tuning This message
49. printout Press this key to print in black and white then select appropriate printer mode Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard compatible printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page After three printouts the page will be in position to start again at the top of the page if the printer s perforation skip is OFF see Figure 6 1 One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfitting each printout Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard DeskJet 540 printer Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a MX 80 Epson or other compatible 9 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will allow two printouts per page and will print softkey labels if desired see PRT MENU ON OFF Pressing this key to underline LRG will allow only one printout per page and will not print the softkey labels Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a LQ 570 Epson or other compatible 24 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will allow two printouts to a page and will print softkey labels if desired see PRT MENU ON OFF Pressing this key to underline LRG will allow only one printout per page and will not print the softkey labels Press this key so that ON is underlined to print the softkey labels with the spectrum analyzer printout This function is operational for E
50. readout shows amplitude frequency or time differences between the two markers residual FM The inherent short term frequency instability of an oscillator in the absence of any other modulation In the case of spectrum analyzers we usually expand the definition to include the case where the local oscillator is swept Residual FM is usually specified in peak to peak values because they are most easily measured on the display if they are visible at all residual responses These are discrete responses seen on a spectrum analyzer display although no input signal is applied resolution Refer to frequency resolution resolution bandwidth The ability of a spectrum analyzer to display adjacent responses discretely hertz hertz decibel down This term is used to identify the width of the resolution bandwidth filter of a spectrum analyzer at some level below the minimum insertion loss point maximum deflection point on the display The 3 dB resolution bandwidth is specified for others it is the 6 dB resolution bandwidth rosenfell For digital displays this is the display detection mode in which the value displayed at each point on a trace is based upon whether or not the video signal both rose and fell during the frequency or time interval represented by the point If the video signal only rose or only fell the maximum value is displayed If the video signal both rose and fell the maximum value during the interval is displayed by odd number
51. resolution bandwidths of 30 Hz 100 Hz and 300 Hz As the video bandwidth is decreased the sweep time is increased to maintain amplitude calibration A mark appears next to VBW on the bottom of the spectrum analyzer display to indicate that it is not coupled To couple the video bandwidth press VID BW AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined The video bandwidth can be changed by using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Note Coupling the video bandwidth function also couples the video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio function If you want to auto couple the video bandwidth to a nonstandard ratio you must set the video bandwidth to auto couple before setting the video bandwidth resolution bandwidth ratio Front Panel Key Access AUTO COUPLE or 7 90 Key Descriptions VIDEO VIEW A VIEW B VIEW C Volts Watts WINDOWS OFF X FINE TUNE DAC YTF DRIVER activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start if the detected RF envelope voltage rises to a level set by the display line When VIDEO is pressed the display line appears on the screen For example connect the CAL OUT signal to the spectrum analyzer input change the trigger mode to video and lower the display line The spectrum analyzer triggers when the display line reaches the noise floor Front Panel Key Access holds and displays the amplitude data that is in the trace A register The trace A register is n
52. show combination options such as Option 301 instead both options 101 and 102 will be displayed Front Panel Key Access activates an FFT marker that must be put on a signal to verify that it is not being displayed at the wrong frequency due to aliasing Once the marker is on the signal press SIGNAL ID again to initiate the signal identification function The signal should move half of a division to the right for 2 seconds A marker will be put at the frequency that the signal should move to If the marker appears on the signal when it is shifted then the frequency readout of the signal is correct Sweep time limitations may alter or stop the function from executing If the marker or the signal is less than half of a division from the right side of the display before SIGNAL ID is pressed then the routine may not function correctly and a warning message can be displayed Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 79 SINGLE FFT SINGLE MEAS SLOPE or SPAN SPAN ZOOM SPEAKER ON OFF SPECTRUM ANALYZER initializes the fast Fourier transform FFT function If the spectrum analyzer is in single sweep mode an FFT is performed on trace A without taking a new sweep If the spectrum analyzer is in continuous sweep it is put in single sweep a sweep is taken and the FFT is performed If the spectrum analyzer is already in the FFT mode it is put in single sweep a sweep is taken and an FFT is performed Pressing SINGLE FFT aga
53. 032 is also available as a service center only retrofit kit Option R52 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer Improved Amplitude Accuracy for CDMA Option 053 For HP 8591F HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only This is an amplitude calibration that improves specifications to 0 6 dB at 20 30 C for CDMA frequency bands 824 to 849 MHz and 869 to 894 MHz In addition it improves specifications to 0 9dB at 20 30 C in the frequency bands 1850 to 1910 MHz and 1930 to 1990 MHz Option 053 is also available as a service center only retrofit kit Option R53 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer Fast Time Domain Sweeps Option 101 For HP 8591E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 85963 only Option 101 allows sweep times down to 20 ys in zero span In fast sweep times sweep times less than 20 ms time domain sweeps are digitized All trace functions are available for these fast zero span sweeps Also see Option 301 below Option 101 also adds the analog display mode and negative peak detection to the spectrum analyzer The analog display mode provides traditional analog display operation combined with the advantages of digital display features like markers screen titles and hard copy output The negative peak detector capability is useful for video modulator balance adjustments and intermodulation distortion measurements Option 101 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R01 after the purchase of your s
54. 041 and RS 232 and parallel Option 043 interface buses They support remote instrument operation direct plotting or printing and parallel printing of screen data 18 AUX IF OUTPUT is a 500 21 4 MHz IF output that is the down converted signal of the RF input of the spectrum analyzer Amplitude correction factors are not applied to this signal 19 AUX VIDEO OUTPUT provides detected video output before the analog to digital conversion proportional to vertical deflection of the trace Output is from 0 V to 1 V Amplitude correction factors are not applied to this signal 20 EXT TRIG INPUT TIL accepts the positive edge of an external voltage input that triggers the spectrum analyzer internal sweep source 21 HIGH SWEEP IN OUT TTL indicates when the spectrum analyzer is sweeping or can be grounded to stop sweeping 22 EXT KEYBOARD connector is provided with the optional interface connector The external keyboard is not included with the spectrum analyzer The external keyboard can be used to enter screen titles prefixes remote commands and writing simple DLP s For Options 041 or 043 only Caution Turn off the spectrum analyzer before connecting an external keyboard to the spectrum analyzer 23 SWEEP OUTPUT provides a voltage ramp proportional to the sweep and the spectrum analyzer span 0 V to 10 V Getting Started 2 7 Data Controls Data controls are used to change values for functions such as center frequency star
55. 1 1 card configuration 7 14 catalog display images 7 18 catalog DLPs 7 18 catalog functions 7 16 cataloging 5 12 7 17 cataloging amplitude correction factor files 7 16 catalog limit lines 7 19 Index 1 0 catalog states 7 2 1 catalog traces 7 2 1 changing the battery 2 20 delete file 7 13 7 33 display recall 7 15 formatting 5 11 7 44 inserting a memory card 2 19 preparation for use 5 11 program and variable cataloging 7 16 recalling a display image 5 14 recalling a DLP 7 15 recalling amplitude correction factors 5 15 recalling a program 5 16 recalling a state 5 13 7 15 recalling a trace 5 13 7 15 recalling limit lines 5 15 saving a display image 5 14 saving amplitude correction factors 5 15 saving and recalling data 5 10 saving and recalling programs 5 16 saving a program 5 16 saving a State 5 12 saving a trace 5 13 saving limit lines 5 15 saving states 7 82 saving to memory card 7 87 write protect switch 2 21 memory card reader 2 4 memory card reader Option 003 10 5 menu and softkey overview 2 12 menus 8 1 message block 2 1 mid delta limit line editing amplitude 7 37 mid delta limit line format 5 23 MIN HOLD C 3 1 1 7 55 minimum hold 3 9 minimum to marker 7 53 MIXER BIAS DAC 7 3 7 55 mixer input level maximum 7 55 MK COUNT ON OFF 3 6 7 56 MK NOISE ON OFF 7 56 MK PAUSE ON OFF 7 56 MKR 2 14 7 57 MK READ F T IP 7 56 MKR FCTN 7 57 MKR 7 57 MK
56. 10 print menu 7 70 Pm Port Config 7 69 PRN PORT HPIB PAR 7 69 PRN PORT SER PAR 7 69 PROBE PWR 2 3 probes AC and DC 10 14 program cataloging 7 16 program DLP editor 7 38 program editing and creating 7 38 programming command dispose all 7 39 7 40 7 41 front panel execution 7 41 programming command entry external keyboard 5 43 protect data 5 8 PRT MENU ON OFF 7 70 pulsed RF using Option 105 4 24 pulse edge definition 7 39 Pulse Param 7 70 pulse parameters clearing 7 23 gate length 7 31 Index 13 PRI 7 30 7 39 pulse width 7 30 7 39 reference edge 7 39 time gate utility 7 70 pulse repetition interval 4 25 7 39 pulse width 4 25 7 39 PURGE AMP COR 5 38 7 70 PURGE LIMITS 5 19 5 22 7 70 PWR SWP ON OFF 7 71 Q QP DET ON OFF 7 3 7 72 QPD OFFSET 7 3 7 72 QPD RST ON OFF 7 3 7 72 QP GAIN ON OFF 7 3 7 72 QP X10 ON OFF 7 72 quasi peak clearing data 7 23 detector 7 72 marker amplitude value 7 6 measurement routine 7 52 normal marker 7 54 signal amplification 7 72 Quasi Peak 7 72 quasi peak detection use with Option 105 4 23 quasi peak detector and AM FM demodulator with speaker Option 103 10 9 R rack mount kit Option 908 10 12 rack mount kit with handles Option 909 10 12 rack slide kit 10 16 ratio video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth 7 90 real time clock 7 85 set date 7 79 set time 7 79 time and date display 7 85 rear panel battery i
57. 12 prints or plots screen data This requires Option 041 or 043 Use CONFIG Plot Conf ig or Print Conf ig and COPY DEV PRMT PLT before using COPY See Chapter 7 for more details CONTROL functions access menus that allow you to adjust the resolution bandwidth adjust the sweep time store and manipulate trace data and control the instrument display MARKER functions control the markers read out frequencies and amplitudes along the spectrum analyzer trace automatically locate the signals of highest amplitude and keep a signal at the marker position in the center of the screen WINDOWS keys turn on the windows display mode They allow switching between windows and control the zone span and location For the HP 859 E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 85963 only HOLD key For the HP 85901 HP 85921 and HP 8594L only HOLD deactivates an active function For the HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 85943 HP 8595E and HP 8596E the hold function is available as the HOLD softkey under DISPLAY DATA keys STEP keys and knob allow you to change the numeric value of an active function INPUT 500 is the signal input for the spectrum analyzer INPUT 750 is the signal input for an Option 001 spectrum analyzer Caution Excessive signal input will damage the spectrum analyzer input attenuator and input mixer Use extreme caution when using the spectrum analyzer around high power RF sources and transmitters The maximum input
58. 1989 OT coa rat 18 1 0 0 21 3928 MAR 1989 5_22 STATE 19 1 0 0 25 16 28 MAP 1389 s l 1 STATE 20 1 00 25 39 28 MAP 1989 dPROG DLP 21 1 08 455 7 29 MAR 1989 4000_5 DLP 22 1 07 45 40 05 APR 1989 s 222 STATE 23 1 06 41 00 07 APP 1989 t LW 22 TRACE 24 5 06 45 42 07 APR 1389 dLW_222D L P 29 1 06 49 34 07 APR 1989 dLW_20 DLP 30 1 06 50 54 07 APR 1989 SA SBI LG_5 LIMIT 31 1 09 11 30 10 OCT 1989 SC FC loTEMP_4A M P 32 1 07 30 11 10 OCT 1989 CORR CENTER 27 08823 GHz SPAN 60 74 MHz RES BW300 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP2 0 msec pul5Ne Figure 7 1 Memory Card Catalog Information Table 7 3 Memory Card Catalog Information Description Volume Label A label to identify the memory card FORMAT CARD automatically assigns the volume label HP859X to the card Number of kilobytes Displays the size of the memory card 128 is the number of 256 byte blocks or records 128 indicates that the card is a 32 Kbyte memory card 128 blocks x 256 bytes per block Indicates the type of data trace state downloadable program DLP limit line LIMIT amplitude factors AMP display image DSPLY The data type is determined by the letter t s d 1 a or i preceding the filename Indicates the physical record number of the start of the file Indicates number of records in the file Indicates the time and date of file creation The letter preceding the file name indicates the type of data of the file t trace data s state data d program data
59. 3 kH7 SWP 14 7 ser Figure 4 36 Third Order Intermodulation Measurement Example Use the TO1 function to make a measurement 1 5 6 Press PRESET Connect two equal amplitude signals with different frequencies to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Press FREQUENCY and enter the frequency of one of your input signals to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency Press SPAN Change the span until only the two signals and their two distortion products appear on the display Press MEAS USER and TO1 ON OFF ON to activate the third order intercept measurement function Read the measurement results in the upper left corner of the screen Press TO1 ON OFF OFF to turn the measurement off It is important to verify that the TO1 being measured is coming from the device under test and not from the spectrum analyzer An easy way to do this is as follows 1 2 Set up the TO1 measurement and turn it on Press AMPLITUDE ATTEN AUTO MAN AUTO and increase the attenuation 10 dB by pressing fp If the displayed result of the TO1 measurement remains constant then the value is the result of the device under test 4 If the displayed result of the TO1 measurement decreases then the value is due to spectrum analyzer distortion and not the device under test In this case continue to increase the attenuator setting until the measurement result no longer changes as the attenuator is changed When th
60. 4 26 Making Measurements The following example demonstrates the rules for setting up a time gated measurement In this example we are using two signal generators to generate two signals at the same frequency 50 MHz The pulse generators space interleave the signals in time as well as pulse modulate the signals PULSE GENERATOR 1 OUTPUT SIGNAL GENERATOR 1 RF OUTPUT EYT PULSE IPUT MODULATION INPUT PULSE SIGNAL OSCILLOSCOPE GENERATOR 2 GENERATOR 2 OUTPUT PULSE RF MODULATION OUTPUT INPUT _ n mella wey REFLECTED SOURCE ea GATE DIRECTIONAL TRIGGER BRIDGE INPUT 502 Figure 4 21 Test Setup for Option 105 Note Be sure that the input impedance for the oscilloscope channels is set to 1 MO Table 4 2 Pulse Generator Test Setup Settings Setting Pulse Pulse Generator 1 Generator 2 Period 280 us 280 us Width 50 ys 50 ys Trigger Positive edge of square wave Not applicable Voltage peak to peak 5v 5v Trigger delay 85 us None Making Measurements 4 27 Table 4 3 Signal Generator Test Setup Settings Setting Signal Signal Generator 1 Generator 2 Frequency Amplitude Pulse Modulation 1 Set the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer to the frequency of the modulated signal Decrease the frequency span of the spectrum analyzer If necessary adjust the reference level of the spectrum analyzer so that the peak signal is displayed near the top graticule
61. 9 demodulator AM FM Option 103 10 9 deskjet 7 34 DESKJET 310 7 34 DESKJET 540 7 34 DESKJET 550C 7 34 deskjet printer 7 34 detection mode negative peak 7 34 positive peak 7 34 sample 7 34 detector quasi peak 7 72 DETECTOR PK SP NG 7 34 DETECTOR SMP PK 7 34 determining gate delay 4 26 determining gate length 4 26 digital demodulator optional 10 10 digital radio measurements 10 3 disable peak detector reset 7 35 display analog 7 9 cataloging 7 18 two windows 7 60 using windows 5 33 DISPLAY 7 34 DISPLAY CAL DATA 7 2 7 34 DISPLAY CNTL I 7 35 display compression due to monitor output format 2 10 7 84 display image saving and recalling 5 18 display line 7 35 DISPLAY CARD 7 35 display zone change span 7 93 find left peak 7 93 Index find right peak 7 93 move center 7 92 Dispose User Mem 7 35 distortion products 3 20 DJ540 7 48 DLP 5 16 cataloging 7 18 editor 7 38 DLP editor function appending 7 10 display and edit item 7 36 edit last item 7 37 DONE 7 35 double display 7 60 downloadable programs 5 16 DROOP 7 2 7 35 DSP LINE ON OFF 7 35 DWELL TIME 7 36 E earphone connector 2 6 EDGE POL POS NEG 7 36 edge triggering time gate utility 7 36 edge triggering gate control 7 46 Edit Amp Cor 5 38 7 36 EDIT CAT ITEM 7 36 Edit Done 7 36 EDIT DONE 5 20 5 28 5 37 5 39 7 36 EDIT FLATNESS 7 2 7 36 editing DLPs 7 38 editing amplit
62. A REF B dBm ATTEN 1 dB PEAK LOG gt real enna i SPAN aby f Z00M SPAN 5 000 MHz Ea RAT FULL i SPAN ada the Ar saben pl ZERO pet rc p ogni is seven a a SPAN VA SE ii A AAA Qa i aa SA IRISTEN cor A ear MU Hilo SPAN iil vy ANY il h BAND LOCK CENT EBR 50 000 MHz So Gare AE SPAN 5 000 MHz RES BW 30 kHz VBW 38 kHz SHP 20 msec Figure 4 22 Setting the Center Frequency Span and Reference Level Note The Gate Utility can be used to simplify the following steps See Chapter 7 for descriptions of the gate utility softkeys 2 Set the sweep time to be 401 times greater than the pulse repetition interval For this example the pulse repetition interval is 280 ys so the sweep time is set to greater than 401 times 280 us or 0 112 s For this example we are using a sweep time of 120 milliseconds Press SWEEP 120 ms A REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB LOG Skew 18 SWEEP apy CONT SGL SWEEPTI NE A GATE K ON OFF A a tact aces PS A E E EENE AS EE E E AT MENU VA SB A Chagin ERT Aan nA GAT iia ery CORR gt MA Sr sites A ee oe AE afsh CENTER 50 000 MHz SPAN 5 000 MHz E RES BW 30 kHz VBW 38 kHz SUP 128 msec R Figure 4 23 Setting the Sweep Time 4 28 Making Measurements 3 Turn the gate on by pressing SWEEP GATE ON OFF so that ON is underlined Using an oscilloscope makes it easier to ensure that the gate occurs during the pulsed RF signal W
63. A graph of the channel power as a function of frequency can be calculated and displayed by pressing PWRGRAPH ON OFF so ON is underlined The numerical channel power results are not displayed The top graticule line represents the power as indicated by the reference level REF displayed value MKA 825 0900 MHz REF 12 0 dBm AT 30 dB 37 B7 dBm SINGLE SMPL emandeL PdWER MEAS LOG CONT 10 MEAS J cme EUF on OFF Previous Menu MARKER 625 0900 MHZ 37 87 dBm WA SB vc FS CORA CENTER B25 0300 MHz SPAN 250 0 kHz RES BWM 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SwP 750 msec Figure 4 42 Channel Power Graph 9 To enable the graph marker press GRPH MKR ON OFF so ON is underlined Absolute frequency and amplitude are displayed 10 Press Previous Menu Press MEAS OFF to turn the measurement off and exit the power menu or press another measurement key to stop the current measurement and start a new measurement Note If the power menus have been exited without turning the power measurement off by pressing another front panel key press the key twice to return to the last power menu used Making Measurements 4 49 Using Analyzer Features What You ll Learn in this Chapter This chapter introduces the features of the HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzers These features can be used to manipulate measurement data and to make measurements
64. Accessories Consult the documentation accompanying each personality for information about these other modes of operation Key Descriptions 7 57 N dB PTS ON OFF NEW EDIT NEXT PEAK NEXT PK LEFT NEXT PK RIGHT automatically places two markers at points N dB from the highest point on the highest displayed signal and determines the frequency difference between the two markers N dB is the active function and the value of N is set by the user The measurement defaults to 3 dB when it is first turned on The measurement runs continuously re executing at the end of each sweep No other signal can appear on the display within N dB of the highest signal The measured signal cannot have more than one peak that is greater than or equal to N dB A signal must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold to be identified The setting for peak excursion may be increased from the 6 dB default value so that noise will not be identified as signals Increasing the value too much may cause a smaller signal to be missed or misinterpreted as part of a larger signal The amplitude scale may be either linear or logarithmic Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER For Options 041 and 043 only Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information starts the DLP editor function clearing the DLP editor memory to create a new item in the spectrum analyzer 2500
65. CHEMICAL WASTE sk780a 4 Insert the battery clip into the memory card holding the clip as oriented in Figure 2 9 Face the open edge of the clip toward the write protect switch on the memory card 5 Write the date that the battery was replaced on the memory card label This will help you to remember when the battery should be replaced A n INSERTION END O brett 85 Va MEN WRITE PROTECT SWITCH BATTERY SLOT GPOOVE BATTER r CLP Figure 2 9 Memory Card Battery Replacement Getting Started 2 21 Analyzer Battery Information The HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzers use a 3 6 V lithium battery to enable the spectrum analyzer memory to retain data The date when the battery was installed is on a label on the rear panel of the spectrum analyzer See Figure 2 10 The minimum life expectancy of the battery is 8 years at 25 C or 1 year at 55 C If you experience problems with the battery or the recommended time period for battery replacement has elapsed see How to Return Your Analyzer for Service in Chapter 9 If you wish to replace the battery yourself you can purchase the service documentation that provides all necessary test and maintenance information The battery is soldered onto the spectrum analyzer processor board Warning There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommen
66. CONF TEST 7 27 9 2 connecting your spectrum analyzer to a printer 6 5 connector Index 4 100 MHz comb out 2 4 10 MHz ref output 2 6 AUXB 7 11 aux IF output 2 7 aux video output 2 7 cal output 2 3 earphone 2 6 event counter input 2 6 ext alc input 2 5 external detector flatness input 2 5 external keyboard 2 7 ext ref in 2 6 ext trig input 2 7 gate output 2 6 gate trigger input 2 6 hi sweep in out 2 7 HP IB interface 2 7 interval counter input 2 6 LO output 2 6 monitor output 2 6 sweep output 2 7 sweep tune output 2 6 TV trig output 2 5 connector auxiliary interface 7 1 1 continuous sweep 7 82 CONTINUS FFT 7 27 CONT MEAS 7 27 control functions 2 3 control line A auxiliary interface 7 26 control line B auxiliary interface 7 26 control line C auxiliary interface 7 26 control line D auxiliary interface 7 26 controlling the gate GATE CTL EDGE LVL 7 46 GATE ON OFF 7 46 COPY 2 3 7 28 COPY DEV PRNT PLT 7 30 correction factors 2 16 2 17 7 30 data display 7 34 default 7 31 self calibration 7 13 storing 7 14 CORRECT ON OFF 2 17 7 30 COUPLE AC DC 7 30 coupled functions menu 7 11 coupled sweep time 7 83 coupling ac or dc 7 30 all functions 7 10 time gate utility 7 23 7 30 7 31 7 32 coupling video bandwidth 7 90 CPL RBW ON OFF 7 30 CPL SWP ON OFF 7 30 CPL VBW ON OFF 7 31 creating amplitude correction factors 5 36 cre
67. Catalog Information CATALOG ON EVENT Display Connecting a Printer to the Spectrum Analyzer 7 18 7 20 7 29 Contents 9 Tables l 1 Accessories Supplied with the Spectrum Analyzer l 2 Power Requirements ak A ee Sg ce a l 3 AC Power Cables Available l oh ota de doe o ob dee a GO ae ke gy wee l 4 Static Safe Accessories ck cara a we ee ra a we a 2 1 RF Output Frequency Range 2 a e 2 2 Screen Annotation sp Pig Be 4a he Seu the Se weclah M BA de RRS ge ns te ch 2 3 Screen Annotation for Trace Trigger and Sweep Modes 4 1 Determining Spectrum Analyzer Settings for Viewing a Pulsed RF Signal 4 2 Pulse Generator Test Setup Settings 204 4 3 Signal Generator Test Setup Settings 2 204 4 4 Gate Delay Resolution Bandwidth Gate Length and Video Bandwidth Settings 4 5 SWEEP Time Settings o ooe nno ge ge ae oe che ee Seeds Be Sek ut Mere Magee ta ge 5 1 Summary of Save and Recall Operations Analyzer Memory 5 2 Comparison of Analyzer Memory and Memory Card Operations 5 3 Save and Recall Functions Using Memory Card 2 5 8 External Keyboard Functions oaa a 7 1 Commands Not Available with Analog Operation 7 2 Center Frequency and Span Settings for Harmonic Bands 7 3 Memory Card Catalog Information 2 2 004 7 4 Analyzer Memory Catalog Infor
68. Figure 3 27 If the modulation is a steady tone for example from a signal generator use video trigger to trigger on the waveform and stabilize the display Adjust the sweep time to change the horizontal scale Use markers and delta markers to measure time parameters of the waveform pp REF 446 1 mV ATTEN 16 GB PEAK if st a J CENTER 300 000 MHZ SPAN 0 Hz AES BW 1 MHz VBW300 kHz SHP2 0 msec Figure 3 27 Measuring Modulation in Zero Span Making Basic Measurements 3 25 Measuring Signals Near Band Boundaries Using Harmonic Lock Note This application should only be performed using an HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 When measuring signals at or near a band crossing use the lowest band having a specified upper frequency limit that will include the signal of interest See specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for your instrument for harmonic band specifications Using harmonic lock and choosing the lowest possible band to analyze a signal ensures the best specified measurement accuracy To lock onto a specific harmonic press FREQUENCY Band Lock BND LOCK ON OFF so that ON is underlined or select a band see specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for your instrument for band specifications After setting the harmonic lock only center frequencies and spans within the freq
69. Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE displays the output of the analog ground reference produced on the Al6 Processor Video assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access turns the screen graticule on and off This is helpful when alternative graphics are drawn on the screen through a remote controller and during plotting when a graticule is not reauired Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Key Descriptions 7 47 GRPH MKR ON OFF HOLD HP B amp W D 5540 HP B amp W PRINTER IDNUM INIT FLT turns the graph marker ON or OFF This softkey is available when ACPGRAPH is ON for ACP or ACP extended measurements or when PWRGRAPH is ON for channel power measurements For the ACPGRAPH the delta frequency ACP ratio and channel power are displayed at the marker position For the channel power graph the frequency and channel power are displayed at the marker position Front Panel Access Key MEAS USER HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L only deactivates the active function and blanks the active function text from the display No data can be accidentally entered using the knob step keys or keypad Activating another function will turn off the hold function The HOLD softkey can also be accessed by pressing the key deactivates the active function and blanks the active function text from the display No data can be accidentally entered
70. HP DeskJet 540 for color printing Use this function if you have this color printer This softkey can be accessed by pressing CONFIG then Set Colr Printer Front Panel Key Access Option 101 only selects between positive peak sample and negative peak detection Negative peak detection is only available with option 101 When sample detection is selected SMPL appears in the upper left corner of the screen In sample mode the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed in memory Sample detection is activated automatically for noise level markers during video averaging and for FFT measurements When positive peak detection is selected PEAK appears in the upper left corner of the screen Positive peak detection obtains the maximum video signal between the last display point and the present display point and stores this value in the trace memory address Positive peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing PRESET Negative peak detection functions the same as positive peak detection but selects the minimum video signal The PEAK message does not appear in the upper left corner of the screen Front Panel Key Access selects between positive peak detection and sample detection When sample detection is selected SMPL appears in the upper left corner of the screen In sample mode the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed in memory Sample detection is activated automatically
71. INTERNAL CARD INTERNAL STATE Internal Trace LAST SPAN Limit Lines adjusts the voltage readout by 1 76 dB to correct for the difference between voltage and power measurements in a 750 system versus a 500 system The impedance you select is for computational purposes only since the actual impedance of 500 750 for Option 001 is set by internal hardware The preset value can be changed by using a service function Select the computational input impedance by pressing INPUT Z 502 75Q or by entering 75 or 50 using the numeric keypad For example when making measurements in a 750 system an analyzer with either a 75Q input impedance Option 001 or a 500 input impedance using a 750 to 509 matching device the INPUT Z should be set to 750 Front Panel Key Access Requires O ption 003 for an HP 8590L HP 8592L or HP 8594L selects between spectrum analyzer memory and the memory card for the save and recall functions Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE recalls the saved spectrum analyzer state from the selected state register Recalling a state from the spectrum analyzer memory displays the time and date when the state data was stored To recall a state press INTERNAL STATE and use the numeric keypad to enter a state register number valid state register numbers are 1 through 9 State register 9 contains a previous state state register 0 contains the current state If windows are being used the instrument state
72. MHz will display the limit line segment at 1 5 GHz If the amplitude component of the relative limit line segment is 10 dB then 10 dB is added to the reference level value to obtain the amplitude of the given component reference level offset included RELATIVE is displayed in the limit line table when the limit line type is relative FIXED is displayed when limit line type is fixed A limit line entered as fixed may be changed to relative and one entered as relative may be changed to fixed When changing between fixed and relative limit lines the frequency and amplitude values in the limit line table change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current frequency and amplitude settings of the spectrum analyzer If a time and amplitude limit line is used the amplitude values change but the time values remain the same Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY LIMITS selects whether limit lines will be entered using frequency or sweep time FRQ TIME to define the segments Limit lines can be created by the user to test trace data They can be specified as a table of limit line segments of amplitude versus frequency or of amplitude versus time Time values are evaluated with respect to the spectrum analyzer sweep time A time value of zero corresponds to the start of the sweep which is the left edge of the graticule Switching the limit line definition between frequency and time will erase the current limit line table The me
73. ON Amplitude corrections OFF Using Analyzer Features 5 35 Procedure for Creating Amplitude Correction Factors This procedure demonstrates how to create and activate amplitude correction data Detailed descriptions of the amplitude correction functions follow this procedure 1 Press PRESET Note A signal is not used in this procedure for demonstrating how to create amplitude correction data Disconnect any cable on the spectrum analyzer input 2 Set the center frequency to 300 MHz and the span to 500 MHz by pressing FREQUENCY 300 Wiz SPAN 500 wiz Press CAL More of 4 More 2 of 4 More 3 of 4 then Amp Cor to access the amplitude correction menus Press Edit Amp Cor to access the editing menus for amplitude correction factors To clear any existing amplitude correction data press PURGE AMP COR two times consecutively Note After pressing PURGE AMP COR the first time the message If you are sure press key again to purge data will appear Pressing PURGE AMP COR a second time erases the amplitude correction data 6 Specify the first amplitude correction point by pressing the following keys SELECT FREQ 50 Gata 12 Gea 7 Specify the second amplitude correction point by pressing the following keys 250 10 Note Table entries can be edited if you make a mistake To edit an existing point use SELECT POINT to specify the point Then use SELECT FREQ or SELECT AMPLITUD t
74. PAL mode the monitor output is compatible with PAL video cassette recorders In the normal mode the synchronization constants can be changed from the factory default settings by using CRT HORZ POSITION and CRT VERT POSITION softkeys If the user has not changed the constants the default settings will be used The display will be compressed slightly when using the PAL format instead of the normal format The PAL format has less vertical resolution than the spectrum analyzer display The top of the spectrum analyzer display is compressed slightly so that all of the information can be fit into the vertical resolution available with the PAL format Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended changes the resolution bandwidth in the time domain window of the gate utility Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended changes the sweep time in the time domain window of the gate utility and re scales the gate markers Front Panel Key Access 7 84 Key Descriptions TABLE ADL NRM THRESHLD ON OFF Time Date switches the marker table between the normal marker formats and the delta display line format The marker information can be displayed in absolute amplitude and frequency It can also be displayed in delta amplitude and frequency using one marker as the reference These are normal marker modes Press the TABLE ADL NRM softkey to underline the ADL This accesses the delta display
75. RS 232 and Parallel Option 043 10 7 RS 232 cable 10 16 RS 232 interface connector 2 7 S sales and service offices 9 5 sample detection use with Option 105 4 23 sample detection mode 7 34 SAVE 2 2 7 75 SAVE AMP COR 7 75 save current display 7 35 save current state memory card 7 82 state register 7 82 saved analyzer state 7 49 SAVE EDIT 7 75 SAVE LIMIT 7 76 save lock on MEM LOCKED 7 55 saving a display image on the memory card 5 14 saving a limit line table into analyzer memory 5 8 saving amplitude correction factors into analyzer memory 5 8 saving amplitude correction factors on the memory card 5 15 saving and recalling data from analyzer memory 5 6 9 saving and recalling data from the memory card 5 10 18 saving and recalling programs with a memory card 5 16 saving a program on the memory card 5 16 saving a state into analyzer memory 5 6 saving a state on the memory card 5 12 saving a trace into analyzer memory 5 7 saving a trace on the memory card 5 13 saving DLPs from analyzer memory to card 7 8 saving key definitions from analyzer memory to card 7 8 saving limit line tables on the memory card 5 15 saving to a memory card 7 87 saving to spectrum analyzer memory 7 88 SAV LOCK ON OFF 5 8 7 74 scalar 500 transmission reflection test set 10 13 scalar measurements 10 4 SCALE LOG LIN 7 76 screen annotation 2 10 12 on or off 7 10 screen characters 7 47 7 57 7 82 7 92 screen d
76. SEARCH MKRFCTN MK TRACK ON OFF GEAR key sequence Note that the primary function of the marker track function is to track unstable signals not to track a signal as the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer is changed If you choose to use the marker track function when changing center frequency check to ensure that the signal found by the tracking function is the correct signal Example Use the marker track function to keep a drifting signal at the center of the display and monitor its change This example requires a modulated signal An acceptable signal can be easily found by connecting an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input and tuning to the FM broadcast band 88 to 108 MHz Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency for 100 MHz with a span of 20 MHz an attenuator setting of 0 dB and reference level setting of approximately 40 dBm Your circumstances may be slightly different depending on building shielding and proximity to transmitters 1 Connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input 2 Press PRESET FREQUENCY 100 WH SPAN 20 EZ Note Use a different signal frequency if no signal is available at 100 MHz in your area 3 Press AMPLITUDE 40 48m ATTEN AUTO MAN 0 dBm 4 Press SPAN SPAN ZOOM 500 kHz Notice that the signal has been held in the center of the display Note If the signal you selected drifts too quickly for the spectrum analyzer to keep up with use a wider s
77. SET DATE SET TIME Setup SHOW OPTIONS SIGNAL ID allows you to set the date of the real time clock Enter the date in the YYMMDD format using the number keypad and press ENTER Valid year YY values are 00 through 99 Valid month MM values are from 01 to 12 and valid day values are from 01 to 31 Front Panel Key Access allows you to set the time of the real time clock Enter the time in 24 hour HHMMSS format using the number keypad and pressing ENTER Valid hour HH values are from 00 to 23 Valid minute MM and second SS values are from 00 to 59 Front Panel Key Access accesses the menu used to set up parameters specific to the power measurements If another front panel key is pressed exiting the power menus press the MEAS USER key twice to return to the last power menu that was being used Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER changes the sweep control to single sweep if the spectrum analyzer is in the continuous sweep mode It executes a sweep after the trigger condition is met displays the number and description of the options installed in your spectrum analyzer the instrument model number of the spectrum analyzer the last five digits of the spectrum analyzer serial number and the firmware revision Pressing SHOW OPTIONS changes the softkey label to EXIT SHOW Press EXIT SHOW to erase the SHOW OPTIONS function information Pressing SHOW OPTIONS displays the individual option numbers It will not
78. SINGLE MEAS CONT MEAS CENTER FREQ OCC BW FOWEP setup Previous Menu SINCLE MLAS CONT MEAS CENTER FREQ ACPGRAPH ON OFF Setup 33 Previous Menu SINGLE MEAS CONT MEAS CENTER FREQ ACPGRAPH ON O F F Setup 33 Previous Menu SINGLE MEAS CONT MEAS CENTER FREO PWRGRAPH ON OFF Setup 93 Previous Menu MARKER gt AUTO FFT SINGLE FFT CONTINUS FFT FFT STOP FREQ FFT OFF More tof CHANNEL SPACING CHANNEL BANDWDTH PARAM AUTOMAN VIDAVG ONOFF OCC BW POWER Previous Menu FFT MARKERS MARKER gt FFT STOP MARKER i MiD SCRN SIGNAL ID 33 Changesto GRPHMKR ONO FF when GRAPH ON a More of 2 MARKER NORMAL MARKER A MARKER AMPTD 34 SELECT 1 2 3 4 MARKER ONOFF More 1 of 2 MK TRACE AUTO ABC MK READ F T i P MARKER ALL OFF More 2 of 2 Afterselecting thissoftkey pressing any digit O through 9 brings up the appropriate ampli tude terminator menu Key Menus 8 7 MKR gt MAPKER gt CF or MARKER gt MIDSCRN 6 MARKER gt REF LVL MARKER gt CF STEP MARKER A gt SPAN MARKER gt M INIMUM More 1 of 2 MARKER gt START MARKER gt STOP MARKER gt PK PK Peak Menu More 2 of 2 PEAK SEARCH 16 Alternate softkey when the FFT functionisselected MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF M lt COUNT ONOFF 20 MK TABLEON OFF M lt NOISE ON OFF MC PAUSE ON OFF More 1 of 2 TABLE ADLNPM CNTRES AUTO MAN 29 DSP L NE Oil OFF More 2 of 2 20N ot av
79. TABLE ON OFF 7 56 MK TRACE AUTO ABC 7 56 MK TRACK ON OFF 3 9 7 57 MNOPQR 7 57 MODE 2 2 7 57 model specific preset conditions 7 66 MONITOR OUTPUT 2 6 display compression 2 10 7 84 move trace A into C 7 5 multipen plotter 7 29 N NADC firmware Option 160 10 11 NADC TDMA measurements personality 10 4 narrow resolution bandwidths and precision frequency reference Option 140 10 10 narrow resolution bandwidths Option 130 10 10 N dB bandwidth measurement 4 39 N dB PTS ON OFF 4 39 7 58 negative peak detection mode 7 34 NEW EDIT 7 58 NEXT 7 58 NEXT PEAK 7 58 NEXT PK LEFT 7 58 NEXT PK RIGHT 7 58 noise figure 10 10 normalization 4 11 normal marker 7 54 quasi peak 7 54 NORMLIZE ON OFF 4 11 7 59 NORMLIZE POSITION 7 59 No User Menu 7 59 NTSC 7 59 NTSC video format 7 84 number units keypad 2 8 0 OCC BW POWER 7 59 OCCUPIED BANDWDTH 7 60 occupied bandwidth using 4 43 44 occupied power bandwidth measurement 4 43 octal to binary A 2 ON 7 60 ONCYCLE command 7 19 ONDELAY command 7 19 ONEOS command 7 19 on event commands ONCYCLE 7 19 ONDELAY 7 19 ONEOS 7 19 ONMKR 7 19 ONPWRUP 7 19 ONSRQ 7 19 ONSWP 7 19 ONTIME 7 19 TRMATH 7 19 ONMKR command 7 19 on off switch 2 4 ONPWRUP command 7 19 on screen signal positioning horizontal 7 31 vertical 7 31 ONSRQ command 7 19 ONSWP command 7 19 ONTIME command 7 19 operating Option 105
80. TV line number 17 The sweep time of 100 us allows you to view two TV lines line 17 and part of line 18 The multiburst is on TV line number 17 and the composite is on TV line number 18 40 REF14 9 2 mv ATTEN 1 dB MKR 85000 sec 3024 5 yv SMPL LIN e LINE 1 wth VAS sc E Mo COAR f CENTER 67 259 MHZ RES BW 1 MHz VBW3 00 kHz SPAN 0 Hz 5WP100 sec Figure 4 13 Triggering on an Odd Field of a Video Format 4 Press TV TRIG EVEN FLD to trigger on an even field of a video format Making Measurements 4 15 Ip MKRA50 00 psec REF 4 492 mv ATTEN 10 dB 289 B2 W SMPL LIN TV LINE Ayr AN VAS sc T CORR CENTER 67 250 MHz SPAN 0 HZ RES BW 1 MHz VBW3 00 kHz SWP100 usec Figure 4 14 Triggering on an Even Field of a Video Format The default video format is NTSC Press TV Standard then PAL M PAL or SECAM L to select a different video format For non interlaced video formats press TV TRIG VERT INT Note The video format selection NTSC PAL M PAL or SECAM L automatically selects the video modulation negative or positive 4 16 Making Measurements Making Reflection Calibration Measurements Typically the calibration standard for reflection measurements is a short circuit connected at the reference plane the point at which the
81. The prefix can be from one to seven characters long The longer the prefix the shorter the register number must be The total length of the prefix and register number cannot exceed eight characters The prefix can be any character however the underscore should not be the first character of the prefix An existing prefix can be cleared with the clear function Press CONFIG or DISPLAY Change Prefix YZ_ Spc Clear then Clear to clear the current prefix To change a prefix clear the existing prefix and then enter a new prefix To Save a State l Press or CONFIG Change Prefix Use the softkeys to enter the prefix under which you want the state saved A prefix can be one to seven characters long If you do not specify a prefix the state will be saved with a file name consisting of s register number 2 Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Selecting CARD selects the memory card as the mass storage device 3 Press STATE CARD REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the spectrum analyzer display 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER 5 12 Using Analyzer Features To Recall a State 1 Press or RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 2 Press Catalog Card then CATALOG STATES Use the knob to highlight the state data to be retrieved 3 Press LOAD FILE State data can also be recalled by specifying the
82. Tu ble 2 1 Caution If the tracking generator output power is too high it may damage the device under test Do not exceed the maximum power that the device under test can tolerate RF OUT 759 supplies a source output for the built in tracking generator For Option 011 only See Table 2 1 Table 2 1 RF Output Frequency Range Model Number Option 010 Option 011 Frequency Range Frequency Range HP 8590L 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz 1 MHz to 1 8 GHz HP 85913 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz 1 MHz to 1 8 GHz HP 85933 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz available HP 85943 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz available HP 85953 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz available HP 85963 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz available 19 turns the instrument on and off The symbols to the left of the line switch represent the up position of the switch when the instrument is off and the down position of the switch when the instrument is on An instrument self check is performed every time the instrument is turned on After applying power allow the temperature of the instrument to stabilize for best measurement results Note The instrument continues to draw power when it is plugged into the ac power source even if the line power switch is off 2 4 Getting Started Rear Panel Features EARPHONE O AiG G Mors R GATE HT SUES OR ION FL TNESS EVENT INTERVA EXY ALC EXY DET CNTR INPUT N INPUT SN GA iv VN N a A i Q pan SWEEP HIGH SWEEP OUTPUT N OUT TTL OUTPUT Aree 10 MHz REF o DO
83. With the PWRGRAPH ON the channel powergraph is calculated and displayed and the numeric results are not displayed The value of the channel power is displayed at the selected marker frequency This graph function is used after doing a channel power measurement with the CHANNEL POWER softkey Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER 7 70 Key Descriptions PWR SWP ON OFF HP 8590L and HP 8591 E with O ption 010 or 011 HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E with Option 010 activates ON or deactivates OFF the power sweep function which sweeps the output power of the tracking generator over the selected power sweep range The value of the power sweep range is displayed in the active function block when PWR SWP ON OFF is turned on The available power sweep range is a function of the source attenuator setting For power sweeps press SRC ATN MAN AUTO until MAN is underlined so the spectrum analyzer source attenuator is manually set decoupled For a given source attenuation setting the maximum specified power sweep range is given by the following Power Sweep Range for the HP 8590 L and HP 8591 E is 15 dBm minus the source attenuation setting to 0 dBM minus the source attenuation setting For example if the source attenuation setting is 20 dB the maximum power sweep range is from 35 dBm 15 dBm 20 dB to 20 dBm 0 dBm 20 dB The starting power level is the source power setting The ending power level is the sum o
84. a directional bridge or coupler 3 Connect the spectrum analyzer INPUT to the coupled port of a directional bridge or coupler Making Measurements 4 17 4 Adjust the spectrum analyzer for measurement conditions or settings Turn on the tracking generator and set the amplitude level by pressing AUX CTRL Track Gen and setting SRC PWR ON OFF to ON Set center frequency span and other settings 5 Replace the DUT with a short circuit 6 Normalize the trace by performing the following functions a Press TRACE select B using TRACE A BC then CLEAR WRITE B to display the reference trace in B b Press BLANK B to store the reference trace in B C Press More 1 of 3 then set NORMLIZE ON OFF to ON to activate the trace A minus trace B function and display the results in trace A for each sweep The normalized trace or flat line represents 0 dB return loss Measuring the Return Loss Note If possible use a coupler or bridge with the correct test port connector for both calibrating and measuring Any adapter between the test port and DUT degrades coupler bridge directivity and system source match Ideally you should use the same adapter for the calibration and the measurement Be sure to terminate the second port of a two port device 7 After calibrating the system with the above procedure reconnect the filter in place of the short circuit without changing any spectrum analyzer settings 8 Use the marker t
85. a 10 11 TV Sync Trigger Capability Fast Time Domain Sweeps and AM FM Demodulator Option BOL fe ce a aa Bate artes are bevy ds 10 12 500 to 750 Matching Pad Option 711 2 a 10 12 Reduced Frequency Accuracy Option 713 0 0 0 0 2 10 12 Contents 5 Accessories Rack Mount Kit Without Handles Option 8 Rack Mount Kit With Handles Option 99D User s Guide and Calibration Guide Option 910 a a a a a Service Documentation Option 915 2 2 ee ln BenchLink Spectrum Analyzer Option B70 022 RF and Transient Limiters ooa a 500 Transmission Reflection Test Set Scalar 500 Transmission Reflection Test Set 500 750 Minimum Loss Pad wl 750 Matching Transformer a a a a RE BMG eS o oo 2 eat aves 4 Gd a la desa Bk e a AC Power Source ei a Hela hak ie See He AOU Tie lade ys Ole Os AG Probe yaa tebe ae hei ad ee a e ee ee es Broadband Preamplifiers and Power Amplifiers 202 2 Burst Carrier Tear c g alk nt Wht ded we Rl ak a we Re Close Field Probes A Le te ta a External Keyboard l a aaa a HPB Cablen a II aS a Hel ae Gs BAA a e A I Memory Cards da der ke te a Ad dd a Parallel Interface Cable o o a a il A ae ga PC Interface and Report Generator software E SO EO ce tor ai ta Priten SS tk ch on the Ae Me oh a Meee a ee a a Bes Ole Ee Rack Slide Kit aD a ee ae A da SOD CI n C a E aro We waaay ais eto AOE ak ane hd
86. analyzer Not availablefor HP 8590L with O ption 713 or HP 8592L with Option 713 10 MHz REF OUTPUT provides a 10 MHz 0 dBm minimum time based reference signal Not available for HP 8590L with Option 713 or HP 8592L with Option 713 VOLTAGE SELECTOR adapts the unit to the power source 115 V or 230 V MONITOR OUTPUT drives an external monitor with a signal that has a 15 7 kHz horizontal synchronizing rate It can also be switched to provide an NTSC format output which is compatible with VHS video recorders or a PAL format which is compatible with PAL SECAM video recorders Power input is the input for the line power source Make sure that the line power source outlet has a protective ground contact AUX INTERFACE provides a nine pin D subminiature connector for control of external devices Refer to specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for a more detailed description 2 6 Getting Started Caution Turn off the spectrum analyzer before connecting the AUX INTERFACE connector to a device Failure to do so may result in loss of factory correction constants Do not exceed the current limits for the 5 V supply when using the AUX INTERFACE connector Exceeding the current limits may result in loss of factory correction constants Do not use the AUX INTERFACE as a video monitor interface Damage to the video monitor will result 17 Interface connectors are optional interfaces for HP IB and parallel Option
87. and trace B into trace A B DL B puts the difference between trace B and the display line in trace B CLEAR WRITE B initially erases trace B and then displays it continuously CLEAR WRITE C initially erases trace C and then displays it continuously DEMOD ON OFF turns AM or FM demodulation on and off FFT changes zero span data to the frequency domain using an FFT MKR CNT ON OFF turns the marker counter on and off MK PAUSE ON OFF stops the analyzer sweep at the marker for the defined of the dwell time MAX HOLD A updates trace A with the maximum level at each point each sweep MAX HOLD B updates trace B with the maximum level at each point each sweep MIN HOLD C updates trace C with the minimum level at each point each sweep NORMLIZE ON OFF the difference between A and B is added tothe display line and put into trace A MK TRACK ON OFF moves the signal closest to the marker to center screen and keeps it centered SPAN ZOOM finds the highest signal peak turns on marker track and activates span THRESHLD ON OFF sets a lower boundary to the active trace TRACKING PEAK starts a routine which adjusts tracking to peak the tracking generator signal YID AVG ON OFF starts a routine which digitally averages display signals and noise VIEW A holds and displays the trace A data when used after blanking trace A VIEW B holds and displays the trace B data VIEW C holds and displays the trace C data Key Descriptions 7 9 ANALYZER ADDRESS ANALYZER GAINS
88. are sure Press key againtopurgedata Press ERASE MEM ALL again if you want to dispose of all user memory Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of all user memory Note ERASE MEN ALL ignores the state of the SAV LOCK So even if STATES and TRACES are locked they will still be erased by ERASE MEM ALL ERASE MEM CARD Front Panel Key Access allows you to dispose of any data or programs stored on the memory card by formatting it This is the same as FORMAT CARD Pressing Dispose User Mem and then pressing ERASE MEM CARD causes a message to appear on the spectrum analyzer screen If you are sure Press key againtopurge data Press ERASE MEM CARD again if you want to dispose of the CARD s memory Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of the CARD s memory Note Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from spectrum analyzer memory ERASE STATEALL Front Panel Key Access allows you to purge all the user state registers 1 through 9 Pressing Dispose User Mem and then pressing ERASE STATEALL causes a message to appear on the spectrum analyzer screen If you are sure Press key again to purge data Press ERASE STATEALL again if you want to dispose of the user state registers Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of user state registers Note a If SAVE LOCK ON OFF is set to ON this function is disabled Use DELETE FILE to
89. available for the HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L as Option 003 Use the following information to ensure that the memory card is inserted correctly Improper insertion causes error messages to occur but generally does not damage the card or instrument Care must be taken however not to force the card into place The cards are easy to insert when installed properly 1 Locate the arrow printed on the card s label 2 Insert the card with its arrow matching the raised arrow on the bezel around the card insertion slot See Figure 2 7 SPECTRUM ANALYZER gt INSTRUMENT STATE O HERY DO E UU FREQUENCY DD C J 9 E E 00 2 CIE 20 Figure 2 7 Inserting the Memory Card 3 Press the card into the slot When correctly inserted about 19 mm 0 75 in of the card is exposed from the slot Getting Started 2 19 Changing the Memory Card Battery It is recommended that the memory card battery be changed every 2 years The battery is a lithium commercial CMOS type battery part number CR 2016 or HP part number 1420 0383 Note The minimum lifetime of the battery under ordinary conditions is more than 2 years The date that the memory card battery was installed is either engraved on the side of the memor
90. bandwidth is equal to the separation a dip of approximately 3 dB is seen between the peaks of the two equal signals and it is clear that more than one signal is present See Figure 3 2 In order to keep the spectrum analyzer calibrated sweep time is automatically set to a value that is inversely proportional to the square of the resolution bandwidth So if the resolution bandwidth is reduced by a factor of 10 the sweep time is increased by a factor of 100 when sweep time and bandwidth settings are coupled Sweep time is proportional to 1 BW For fastest measurement times use the widest resolution bandwidth that still permits discrimination of all desired signals The spectrum analyzer allows you to select from 30 Hz to 3 MHz resolution bandwidth in a 1 3 10 sequence plus 5 MHz for maximum measurement flexibility Example Resolve two signals of equal amplitude with a frequency separation of 100 kHz 1 To obtain two signals with a 100 kHz separation connect the calibration signal and a signal source to the spectrum analyzer input as shown in Figure 3 1 If available two sources can be used SOURCE A pee aD 89 goo 252 INPUT 509 COUPLER Figure 3 1 Set Up for Obtaining Two Signals 2 If you are using the 300 MHz calibration signal set the frequency of the source 100 kHz greater than the calibration signal that is 300 1 MHz The amplitude of both signals should be approximately 20 dBm 3 O
91. be accomplished by manually form feeding each printout This is done by pressing either the hard key on the printer or the PRINTER SETUP soft key under the hard key on the analyzer 6 2 Printing and Plotting PLOTS MKR 214 MIZ REF 6 dBA ATTEN 10 d3 20 15 d3m per page C3HTIR 90A MHz RES BW 3 MHz VEW 1 MHe N IER HH CES vue TAN wo ar act per page Ei pa pu120el Figure 6 2 Plots Per Page The PLTS PG 1 2 4 softkey under CONFIG Plot Config allows you to select 1 2 or 4 plots per page Printing and Plotting 6 3 Printing Using an HP IB Interface Equipment m HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer equipped with Option 041 HP 10833A or equivalent HP IB cable m Printer with HP IB Interface choose one of the following a HP 2225A ThinkJet a HP 3630A PaintJet a HP 500 Series DeskJet with HP IB to Centronics converter j a HP 310 Portable DeskJet with HP IB to Centronics converter j a HP LaserJet with HP IB to Centronics converter j o MX 80 Epson with HP IB to Centronics converter j a LQ 570 Epson with HP IB to Centron
92. center frequency changes the horizontal placement of the signal on the screen Changing the reference level changes the vertical placement of the signal on the screen Increasing the span increases the frequency range that appears horizontally on the screen Note Spectrum analyzers with Option 001 or 011 display the amplitude values in dBmV Options 001 and 011 are available only for an HP 8590L or HP 8591E A CENTER FREQUENCY v _ __ REFERENCE FREQUENCY LEVEL AMPL I TUDE Figure 2 5 Relationship between Frequency and Amplitude 7 Set the marker You can place a diamond shaped marker on the signal peak to find the signal s frequency and amplitude To activate a marker press the key located in the MARKER section of the front panel The MARKER NORMAL label appears in inverse video to show that the marker is the active function Turn the knob to place the marker at the signal peak You can also use the PEAK SEARCH key which automatically places a marker at the highest point on the trace Readouts of marker amplitude and frequency appear in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the display Look at the marker readout to determine the amplitude of the signal If another function is activated the frequency and amplitude can still be identified by looking at the marker readout in the upper right corner of the screen 2 14 Getting Started Measurement Summary 1
93. changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace C is changed to minimum hold Trace Mode of Trace C After Minimum hold Trace Mode of Trace C Before Clear write Minimum hold Minimum hold View View Front Panel Key Access 7 24 Key Descriptions CLEAR WRITE B erases any data previously stored in trace B and continuously displays any signals detected during the sweep of the spectrum analyzer This function is activated at power on and by pressing PRESET_ Changing the trace mode of trace C to clear write or minimum hold can change the trace mode of trace B If trace B is in clear write mode or maximum hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace B is changed to store blank The following table shows the trace mode of trace B before and after changing trace C to clear write or minimum hold trace mode Trace Mode of Trace B Trace Mode of Trace B Before After Clear write Store blank Maximum hold Store blank View View Changing the trace mode of trace B to clear write or maximum hold can change the trace mode of trace C If trace C is in clear write mode when trace B is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace C is changed to minimum hold Trace Mode of Trace C Trace Mode of Trace C Before After Clear write Minimum hold Minimum hold Minimum hold View View Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 25
94. data to and from the memory card and for cataloging by the prefix The prefix can be from one to seven characters long The longer the prefix the shorter the register number must be The total length of the prefix and register number cannot exceed eight characters The prefix can be any character however the underscore should not be the first character of the prefix Pressing Change Prefix accesses a menu containing the letters of the alphabet the underscore symbol the number symbol a space and the clear function To select a character press the softkey that displays the group of characters that contains the desired character The softkey menu changes to allow you to select an individual character If you make a mistake press to space back over the incorrect character Additional characters are available by pressing More 1 of 2 Numbers may be selected with the numeric keypad Key Descriptions 7 21 A prefix can be cleared with the clear function Press or DISPLAY Change Prefix YZ_ Spc Clear Clear to clear the current prefix The current prefix is blanked by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG Front Panel Key Access CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or Change allows you to write a 53 character screen title across the top of the screen Title The marker readout may interfere with the last 26 characters The markers can be turned off by pressing MKR More 1 of 2 and MARKER ALL OFF Pressing Change Title accesses the softkey menus th
95. delta markers m Measuring low level signals using attenuation video bandwidth and video averaging m Identifying distortion products using the RF attenuator and traces m Using the spectrum analyzer as a receiver in zero frequency span m Measuring signals near band boundaries using harmonic lock HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 85953 or HP 8596E only To find descriptions of specific spectrum analyzer functions refer to Chapter 7 Key Descriptions Making Basic Measurements 3 1 Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function In responding to a continuous wave signal a swept tuned spectrum analyzer traces out the shape of the spectrum analyzer intermediate frequency 1F filters As we change the filter bandwidth we change the width of the displayed response If a wide filter is used and two equal amplitude input signals are close enough in frequency then the two signals appear as one Thus signal resolution is determined by the IF filters inside the spectrum analyzer The resolution bandwidth RES SW function selects an IF filter setting for a measurement Resolution bandwidth is defined as the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter The 3 dB bandwidth tells us how close together equal amplitude signals can be and still be distinguished from each other Generally to resolve two signals of equal amplitude the resolution bandwidth must be less than or equal to the frequency separation of the two signals If the
96. edo hte te ole cote de 3 12 To Recall a Se ia ici Biche se 5 13 ToSayvealrace niie ers iea i e oy he A A e A ee EE os 5 13 To Recall a Trace tr we ee a ta a ae Re ee 5 13 To Save a Display Image 4 0 5 14 To Recalla Display Image aoura wh whee a da AAD Ar 5 14 To Save Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors 5 15 To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors 5 15 Saving and Recalling Programs with a Memory Card 5 16 To Save a Programi o A ESA Re A de A ia 5 16 To Recall a Program du a Ye hanged a SOG ed o od 5 16 Using Limit Line Functions und oe ye wt he Shey wld we we eS 5 18 Procedure for Creating an Upper Limit Line 5 18 Limit Line Functions ara Ee hs De e o Ie eS 5 22 Editing Creating or Viewing a Limit Line 2 5 22 Selecting the Type of Limit Line Table 5 22 Selecting the Limit Line Table Format oao o a a a a 5 23 Selecting the Segment Number asec it a 5 23 Selecting the Frequency or Time Coordinate o a o e a a 5 25 Selecting the Amplitude Coordinate 0 4 5 25 Selecting the Segment Type o oa a a a 5 26 Completing Table Entry and Activating Limit Line Testing 5 28 Saving or Recalling Limit Line Tables 5 28 Procedure for Creating an Upper and Lower Limit Line 3 29 Learn About the Analog Display Mode Op
97. file name Amplitude factors can be saved in spectrum analyzer memory by either loading in amplitude correction factors from a memory card defining amplitude correction factors using a remote programming command AMPCOR or using EDIT AMP COR See Entering Amplitude Correction Factors in Chapter 5 for more information Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE Requires Option 003 for an HP 8590L HP 85921 or HP 8594L accesses a menu with the cataloging functions for the memory card CATALOG ALL CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE and CATALOG DISPLAY Each catalog function displays catalog information and accesses a menu containing LOAD FILE and DELETE FILE The catalog contains information about the items stored on the memory card see Figure 7 1 and Table 7 3 Use the step keys to view different sections of the directory and the knob to select a file Press LOAD FILE to load the selected file into spectrum analyzer memory Press DELETE FILE to delete the selected file from the memory card Unlike saving to the internal memory data is saved as a file on the memory card The files stored on the memory card are in the logical interchange format LIF Front Panel Key Access or SAVE_ 7 16 Key Descriptions 40 REF O dBm ATTEN 1 0 d PEAK HP859x1 2 8 LOG 10 sS LW_8 STATE 12 1 19 07 41 23 MAR 1989 dB t 40 TRACE 13 5 15 56 45 27 MAR
98. for noise level markers during video averaging and for FFT measurements When positive peak detection is selected PEAK appears in the upper left corner of the screen Positive peak detection obtains the maximum video signal between the last display point and the present display point and stores this value in the trace memory address Positive peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing PRESET Front Panel Key Access accesses softkeys that include the HOLD key and limit line menus and activate the display line threshold and analog display mode They allow title and prefix entry and control the display of the graticule and screen annotation displays the current correction factor data generated by the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access 7 34 Key Descriptions DISPLAY CARD DISPLAY CNTE I Dispose User Mem Requires O ption 003 for the HP 85901 HP 8592L and HP 8594L saves the current spectrum analyzer display image on the memory card for viewing or copying later It does not save the spectrum analyzer state or trace so it cannot be used to restore an instrument to the conditions at the time the image was saved To save the current display image press DISPLAY CARD use the numeric keypad to enter a number and press ENTER If you want the file name of the stored data to contain a prefix pr
99. for trace C and removes it from the screen The trace C register will not be updated as the spectrum analyzer sweeps Front Panel Key Access 7 12 Key Descriptions BLANK CARD BND LOCK ON OFF Requires O ption 003 for an HP 85901 HP 8592L or HP 8594L deletes all the files from the memory card Pressing BLANK CARD displays the message If you are sure press key again to purge data Press BLANK CARD again if you want to delete all files from the memory card Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 8595E and HP 8596E only underlining ON locks the spectrum analyzer to the lowest frequency band local oscillator harmonic number containing the correct center frequency Start and stop frequencies will be changed if necessary Executing a band lock limits the spectrum analyzer tuning range to the selected harmonic number Selecting the softkeys for band 0 through band 4 turns on the band lock function automatically If the start frequency is well within a lower band turning band lock off will result in a multiband sweep If a specific band had been selected prior to changing to a multiband sweep the selected band s softkey label will no longer be underlined indicating that it is not selected Sweep of a single band is indicated by the selected band s softkey label being underlined Note Before changing the frequency range to another harmonic band unlock the band by pressing BND LOCK ON OFF so that OFF is underlin
100. from damage due to signal transients It specifically is needed for use with a line impedence stabilization network NISN It operates over a frequency range of 9 kHz to 200 MHz with 10 dB of insertion loss 500 Transmission Reflection Test Set The HP 85044A Option H10 transmission reflection test set provides the capability to simultaneously measure the impedance and transmission characteristics of 500 devices It is effective over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz Scalar 503 Transmission Reflection Test Set The HP 85630A scalar transmission reflection test set provides the capability to simultaneously measure the impedance and transmission characteristics of devices It is effective over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 2 9 GHz and must be used with the HP 85714A scalar measurements personality 500 752 Minimum Loss Pad The HP 11852B is a low VSWR minimum loss pad that is required for measurements on 750 devices using an spectrum analyzer with a 500 input It is effective over a frequency range of dc to 2 GHz The minimum loss pad can be order as Option 004 at the time the instrument is ordered 753 Matching Transformer The HP 11694A allows you to make measurements in 75Q systems using a spectrum analyzer with a 500 input It is effective over a frequency range of 3 to 500 MHz RF Bridges The HP 86205A 500 RF bridge and HP 86207A 750 RF bridge can be used to make reflection measurements with the spectrum analyzer These exte
101. ig Pm Port Conf ig PRN PORT SER PAR so that SER is underlined then press BAUD RATE If the spectrum analyzer is connected to an HP PaintJet printer and you want a color printout press Set Colr Printer and then PAINTJET PRINTER If the spectrum analyzer is connected to an HP PaintJet printer and you want a black and white printout press Set B amp W Printer and then HP B amp W PRINTER More printer information can be found in the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide and chapter 6 of this manual If you want the softkey labels to be printed with the spectrum analyzer display printout when using COPY press PRT MENU ON OFF so that ON is underlined Press COPY and the process will begin The screen remains frozen no further sweeps taken until the data transfer to the printer is complete The spectrum analyzer works with many Hewlett Packard printers The plotting process is similar to the printing process On the spectrum analyzer press CONFIG Plot Conf ig To obtain a plot press CONFIG COPY DEV PRNT PLT so that PLT is underlined then Plot Conf ig Plt Port Config For Option 041 use PLOTTER ADDRESS to change the HP IB address for the plotter if necessary Press CONFIG Plot Conf ig Plt Port Conf ig PLT PORT HPIB PAR so that SER is underlined then press PLOTTER ADDRESS For Option 043 use BAUD RATE to change the baudrate of the spectrum
102. intermodulation distortion measurements The analog display mode can be used to view interfering intermodulation products on a live television channel It can be used to set the residual carrier level and check the linearity of a video modulator Refer to Product Note 8590 3 HP part number 5091 2480 for more information about these measurements 16 39 52 42 MAR 1992 REF dBm ATTENLS dB PEAK sae AA he ee a eee CENTER 1 3950 GHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 3 8 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 0 msec R Figure 5 9 Analog Display Mode Example Use the analog display mode to look at the calibrator signal 1 Connect the CAL OUT signal to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 50Q Press PRESET FREQUENCY START FREQ 0 Hz STOP FREQ 1 5 Ghz 2 and ANALOG ON OFF ON to turn on the analog display mode Use the knob step keys or the data entry keys to change the DOT DENSITY 3 Press to activate a marker and use the knob to move it 4 Press DISPLAY Then press ANALOG ON OFF to underline OFF to turn the analog display off Note displayed 5 32 Using Analyzer Features Learn About the Windows Display The windows display feature is only available on the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 Windows display mode splits the spectrum analyzer display into two frequency or time displays When windows is first turned on the top window will contain an inactive copy of the previous display The lower w
103. is underlined to set up the large screen printout This will allow for one printout per page The large screen printout format will not allow for printing of the menu keys Press Set B amp W Printer then EP MX80 SML LRG until SML is underlined to set up the small screen printout This will allow for two printouts per page Front Panel Key Access executes a programming command displayed in the screen title area of the spectrum analyzer The Change Title function can be used to print programming commands in the screen title area of the display The commands can then be executed from the front panel of the spectrum analyzer without an external computer by pressing the EXECUTE TITLE softkey Front Panel Key Access CAL exits the EDIT FLATNESS softkey menu This is a service calibration function and is designed for service use only Front Panel Key Access returns the spectrum analyzer to the state it was in before the current catalog function was invoked It clears the catalog display and returns to a normal spectrum analyzer display Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE Key Descriptions 7 41 EXIT SHOW EXIT UTILITY EXTERNAL EXTERNAL PREAMPG FFT MARKERS removes the screen annotation left after pressing SHOW OPTIONS Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended exits the gate utility returning to the gate control menu The spectrum analyzer is returned to normal operation The state
104. is at the front of this manual If the spectrum analyzer is no longer under warranty or is not covered by an HP maintenance plan Hewlett Packard will notify you of the cost of the repair after examining the unit See How to Call Hewlett Packard and How to Return Your Analyzer for Service for more information If You Have A Problem 9 1 Before You Call Hewlett Packard Check the Basics A problem often can be solved by rechecking what was being done when the problem occurred A few minutes spent in performing some simple checks may save waiting for your instrument to be repaired Before calling Hewlett Packard or returning the spectrum analyzer for service please make the following checks 1 10 11 12 Is the rear panel voltage selector switch set correctly Is the line fuse good 2 Does the line socket have power 3 4 Is the analyzer turned on Check that the green light above is on indicating that the Is the analyzer plugged in to the proper ac power source power supply is on If other equipment cables and connectors are being used with the HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer are they connected properly and operating correctly Review the procedure for the test being performed when the problem appeared Are all the settings correct If the display is dark or dim turn the intensity knob clockwise If the display focus is poor reduce the brightness with the intensity knob or adjus
105. is underlined This turns the limit testing on For example LIMIT FAIL is displayed because the calibration signal exceeds the limit line 14 Disconnect the CAL OUT from the spectrum analyzer INPUT 5052 LIMIT PASS is displayed since no signal exceeds the limit line 5 20 Using Analyzer Features fp REF O d8miBm ATTEN 10 dB PEAK LOG J y 1e I FIXED SEG START_FREQ UPPER_AMP TYPE 1 50 00 MMHz 60 en 2 250 0 MHz 60 SLOPE 3 400 0 MHz 10 FLAT 4 600 0 MHz SA VB VCF CORR CENTERR 300 0 MHz SPANN 500 0 MHz RES BW 3 MHz VBW 11 MH zz SWP 2 00msecec Figure 5 5 The Completed Limit Line Table pul44e Using Analyzer Features 5 21 Limit Line Functions This section describes the limit line functions in the order that they are usually used Editing Creating or Viewing a Limit Line Pressing DISPLAY then Limit Lines accesses the softkey menus used for creating a limit line Press Edit Limit to edit an existing limit line table or If no limit line table currently exists this will allow you to create one If a limit line exists currently and you would like to purge it and create a new one press Edit Upper and More 1 of 2 Then press PURGE LIMITS two times to clear the existing limit line table and access the limit line editing menu Note After pressing PURGE LIMITS the first time the message If you are sure press key again to purge d
106. limit line table the upper limit line values are treated as a separate table from the lower limit line values The upper limit line entries can have independent frequency or time and amplitude coordinates from lower limit line table entries Front Panel Key Access selects upper or lower limit line tables It switches to the limit line table that is not currently being edited Front Panel Key Access For options 041 and 043 only Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information accesses the menu of down loadable program DLP editor softkeys With an external keyboard programming commands can be used to write a program to control the spectrum analyzer The built in DLP editor uses the spectrum analyzer rather than an external computer to create view or edit programs These programs can then be sent to the spectrum analyzer command parser which is similar to outputting them to the spectrum analyzer from an external computer Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE accesses the functions that set the spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth to the values required for electromagnetic interference EMI testing 200 Hz EM1 BW is only available with O ption 130 Front Panel Key Access Pressing which is also the ENTER key terminates and enters into the spectrum analyzer a numerical value that has been entered from the front panel using the keypa
107. mixing process transfers any local oscillator instability to the mixing products so the noise sidebands appear on any spectral component displayed on the analyzer far enough above the broadband noise floor Because the sidebands are noise their level relative to a spectral component is a function of resolution bandwidth Noise sidebands are typically specified in terms of dBc Hz amplitude in a 1 Hz bandwidth relative to the carrier at a given offset from the carrier the carrier being a spectral component viewed on the display nonvolatile memory Memory data that is retained in the absence of an ac power source This memory is typically retained with a battery Refer also to battery backed RAM occupied bandwidth A measure of the frequency bandwidth occupied by the carrier of a transmitter It is usually the bandwidth that includes 99 of the total mean carrier power and is equivalent to 90 power bandwidth It is measured by determining the lower and upper frequency limits where 0 5 of the total mean carrier power is below the lower frequency limit and 0 5 is above the upper frequency limit Occasionally percentages other than 99 are specified parameter units Standard units of measure which include the following Measured Unit Unit Parameter Name Abbreviation frequency hertz Hz power level decibel relative to milliwats dBm power ratio decibel dB voltage volt V time second s electrical current ampere A impedance resistanc
108. more easily In this chapter you will Use the marker table to list all the active markers Use the peak table to list the displayed signals m Save and recall data from analyzer memory Save and recall data from the memory card Learn about creating limit lines Learn about the analog display mode Option 101 only m Learn about the windows display Learn how to enter amplitude correction factors m Use the external keyboard Option 041 or 043 only Using Analyzer Features 5 1 Use the Marker Table to List All the Active Markers The marker table function can be used to display a list of all of the active markers It is sometimes necessary to keep track of several points on a signal trace Multiple markers are swept measurements The multiple markers feature allows you to place up to four markers on a trace Using the marker table all the markers on the display are annotated in a window is activated or updated Each marker can be independently set to read frequency sweep time inverse sweep time or period inverse frequency This allows you to measure pulse The marker information can be displayed in absolute amplitude and frequency or it can be in delta amplitude and frequency using one marker as the reference The marker table can also available when using the marker table function 16 35 40 12 MAR 1992 MKR 1 808 GHz REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB 37 94 dBm PEAK OO LOG 18
109. must be maintained to make a valid rms measurement If these conditions are not met errors of up to 2 5 dB can occur for noise like signals a Video bandwidth is at least 10 times the resolution bandwidth m Detector mode is sample SP You can use DETECTOR PK SP NG to change the detector mode Resolution bandwidth is less than or equal to 100 kHz Video averaging is OFF a Neither MAX HOLD nor MIN HOLD trace mode is selected A wider dynamic range is available using the ADJ CHAN POWER extd function This extended range is measured by taking two different sweeps with different reference levels and combining the trace data The results are displayed in a 13 dB per division format The extended ACP function does not provide a continuous measurement mode Example Measure the adjacent channel power of a signal 1 Connect a signal to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 2 Press FREQUENCY and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 3 Press and adjust the reference level to bring the signal near the top of the display 4 Press and Power Menu to access the power measurement functions 5 Press Setup and CHANNEL BANDWDTH Enter the value for the channel bandwidth 6 Press CHANNEL SPACING Enter the value for the channel spacing The spectrum analyzer will use the last entered values for channel bandwidth and spacing if they are not entered 7 Press Previous Menu
110. of a signal For example If the gate does not occur during the RF pulsed signal the amplitude of the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer is lower than the actual signal see Figure 4 28 08 58 21 OCT 18 1998 REF dBm ATTEN 18 dB CLEAR Bree ENE WRITE A LO6 ee 18 dB MAX HOLD A A OO VIEW A BLANK A TRACE A B MORE 1 of 3 00 MHz CENTER 59 20 MHz SPAN 20 rswe 158 msec RT RES BW 109 kHz VBW 100 kHz Figure 4 28 Gate Not Occurring During the Pulse The time gate is implemented after the resolution bandwidth filtering and before the video filtering The displayed signal is a result of the decay time for the resolution bandwidth filters and is not an accurate representation of the input signal If the gate occurs at the beginning of the RF pulse signal or at the end of the RF pulse signal the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer can be attenuated or contain transient signals caused by the spectrum analyzer see Figure 4 29 If this happens decrease the gate length and change the gate delay to place the gate output during the signal 7 REF dBm ATTEN 18 dB B amp W BTPOS oo eee e ereere PRINTER LOG E ES n h e T PAINTJET dB PRINTER SWEEPTIME 158 msec PRINTER mentees ADDRESS aes easter de att bene oe ON OFF PRINTER SETUP PREV I E h MENU CENTER 50 00 MHz SPAN 20 00 MHz ERES BW 100 kHz VBW 108 kHz SWP 150 msec RT Figure 4 29 Gate is Occurri
111. of the delta marker to establish a new reference The ZERO MARKER softkey is in the pulse parameter entry menus of the gate utility Front Panel Key Access SWEEP changes the frequency span to zero and turns off marker track if it is on Front Panel Key Access HP 8591 E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E only allows the zone markers to be moved in frequency without changing the zone span The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone on the upper window They correspond with the frequency range displayed in the lower window As the zone markers are moved the center frequency of the lower window is changed but the lower window will not be updated unless it is active The zone can be moved beyond the frequency range that is being displayed in the upper window Its movement is limited to the frequency range of the spectrum analyzer The zone markers will be displayed at the edges of the upper window when the zone is moved beyond the displayed frequency range Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS ON 7 92 Key Descriptions ZONE PK LEFT ZONE PK RIGHT ZONE SPAN HP 8591 E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E only searches for the next frequency peak outside and to the left of the zone markers on the upper window trace and then moves the zone so that it is centered around the new peak The zone span is not changed The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zone center frequency The lower
112. of the precision frequency oven is not measured Option 004 only M PARAMETER ERROR The specified parameter is not recognized by the spectrum analyzer See the appropriate programming command description to determine the correct parameters U PASSCODE NEEDED Indicates that the function cannot be accessed without the pass code U POS PK FAIL Indicates the positive peak detector has failed H REF UNLOCK Indicates that the frequency reference is not locked to the external reference input Check that the 10 MHz REF OUT connector is connected to the EXT REF IN connector or when using an external reference that an external 10 MHz reference source of sufficient amplitude is connect to the EXT REF IN connector U and H Require 1 signal gt PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD Indicates that the N dB PTS routine cannot locate a signal that is high enough to measure The signal must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure U Require 3 signals gt PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD Indicates that the AM routine cannot locate three signals that are high enough to measure The signals must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure U Require 4 signals gt PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD Indicates that the TO1 routine cannot locate four signals that are high enough to measure The signals must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure
113. or by entering the resolution using the numeric keypad The marker counter resolution can be auto coupled to the span by pressing CNT RES AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined The CNT RES AUTO MAN softkey function is not affected by pressing AUTO ALL Front Panel Key Access makes the auxiliary interface control line A output high or low TTL Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL makes the auxiliary interface control line B output high or low TTL Front Panel Key Access makes the auxiliary interface control line C output high or low TTL Front Panel Key Access makes the auxiliary interface control line D output high or low TTL Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL 7 26 Key Descriptions COARSE TUNE DAC COMB GEN ON OFF CONF TEST CONT MEAS CONTINUS FFT displays the analog output of the YTO coarse tune DAC located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 8593E and HP 8596E only turns the internal comb generator on or off Connect a cable between 100 MHz COMB OUT and the spectrum analyzer input Front Panel Key Access initiates a variety of tests to check the major functions of the spectrum analyzer The confidence test function checks that the video bandwidths change the noise floor level decreases as the resolution bandwidth narrows the step gains switch and the 3 dB bandwidths of the resolution bandw
114. or frequency becomes uncalibrated MEAS UNCAL appears Use and AUTO ALL to recouple functions The asterisk indicates that a function is in progress Softkey labels are the annotation on the screen next to the unlabeled keys Most of the labeled keys on the spectrum analyzer front panel also called front panel keys access menus of related softkeys Softkeys are the unlabeled keys next to the screen Getting Started 2 1 OY HEWLETT SPECTRUM ANALWZER 14D PACKARD I INSTRUMENT STATE CH ATTEN 10 da MEE a l FREQUENCY i 53 C3 ES 7 AUTO MAN vew REW SPAN gt MARKER CONTROL ie JOG JIA OM OFF AMPL I TUDE WINDOWS i af 1 DATA ae PDE 50 o O AL L STEP 2 gt 6 099AXO Ba PES x out J COMB INTEN cal PROBE input son 500 OUT OUT _ PWR AAA AH 9 kHz EMI BW pul33e Figure 2 1 Front Panel Feature Overview 5 FREQUENCY SPAN and AMPLITUDE are the three large dark gray keys that activate the primary spectrum analyzer functions and access menus of related functions 6 INSTRUMENT STATE functions affect the state of the entire spectrum analyzer Self calibration routines and special funct
115. power level at which the power of each distortion product equals the power of the two main signals Practically it may not be possible to reach this power level because of compression or limiting The Third Order Intercept TOI is defined as the power at which the third order distortion products equals the power of two equal level test signals trace A trace is made up of a series of data points containing frequency and amplitude information The series of data points is often referred to as an array Traces A B and C are the typical names of traces that analyzer displays The number of traces is specific to the instrument Glossary l 6 units Dimensions on the measured quantities Units usually refer to amplitude quantities because they can be changed In spectrum analyzers with microprocessors available units are dBm dB relative to 1 mW milliwatt dissipated in the nominal input impedance of the analyzer dBmV dB relative to 1 mV millivolt dBuV dB relative to 1 pV volts and in some analyzers watts update To make existing information current to bring information up to date upgrade To improve the quality or extend the capability of an instrument or product Enhancements to upgrade the product These enhancements can then be documented in an update package variable persistence A property of the display that allows the adjustment of the trace fade rate which is created by the display s electron beam It is a capabilit
116. prefix and the register number I Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 Press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press CARD STATE 4 Enter the register number that the state was saved under and then press ENTER To Save a Trace Saving trace data saves the trace data and the state data 1 Press DISPLAY or CONFIG and then Change Prefix to enter a new prefix or change the existing prefix If you do not specify a prefix the trace will be saved with a file name consisting of s_ register number 2 Enter a screen title if desired by using DISPLAY then Change Title 3 Set up the trace to be stored 4 Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Press Trace Card to access the menu that displays TRACE A TRACE B and TRACE C 5 Press the softkey label of the trace that you want to save TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the spectrum analyzer display 6 Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER The trace data is saved with a file name consisting of a t the current prefix an underscore _ and the register number The t denotes that the file contains trace data To Recall a Trace L Press or RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 2 Press Catalog Card then CATALOG TRACES Use the knob t
117. press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press Catalog Card then CATALOG ALL Use the knob to highlight the display image data to be retrieved 4 Press LOAD FILE Note The intensity of some screen items may differ if the window configuration of the current spectrum analyzer state does not match the recalled display image This will not affect the ability to copy the screen Display image data can also be recalled by specifying the prefix and the register number I Press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 2 Press CARD DISPLAY 3 Enter the register number that the state was saved under and then press ENTER 5 14 Using Analyzer Features To Save Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors The procedure for saving limit line tables or amplitude correction factors is similar to saving trace data State and trace data is not recalled when the limit line tables or amplitude correction factors are recalled 1 Press or CONFIG Change Prefix to enter a new prefix or change the existing prefix If you do not specify a prefix the limit line table will be saved with a file name consisting of l_ register number A table of amplitude correction factors will be saved with a file name consisting of a register number 2 When saving tables set up the table to be stored See Using the Limit Line Functions or Using Amplitude Correction Functions for more information about
118. problem in communication systems When two signals are present in a system they can mix with the second harmonics generated and create third order intermodulation distortion products which are located close to the original signals These distortion products are generated by system components such as amplifiers and mixers Example Test a device for third order intermodulation This example uses two sources one set to 300 MHz and the other to approximately 301 MHz Other source frequencies may be substituted but try to maintain a frequency separation of approximately 1 MHz 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 24 SOURCE 1 INPUT LOWPASS FILTER LOWPASS FILTER SOURCE 2 Figure 3 24 Third Order Intermodulation Equipment Setup 2 Set one source to 300 MHz and the other source to 301 MHz for a frequency separation of 1 MHz Set the sources equal in amplitude in this example the sources are set to 5 dBm 3 Tune both signals onto the screen by setting the center frequency between 300 and 301 MHz Then using the knob center the two signals on the display Reduce the frequency span to 5 MHz for a span wide enough to include the distortion products on the screen To be sure the distortion products are resolved reduce the resolution bandwidth until the distortion products are visible Press 8w RES BW and then use the step down key to reduce the resolution bandwi
119. put the spectrum analyzer in zero span the envelope detector demodulates the input signal and we can observe the modulating signal as a function of time on the display error message A message displayed on the screen indicating missing or failed hardware improper user operation or other conditions that require additional attention Generally the requested action or operation cannot be completed until the condition is resolved external mixer An independent mixer usually having a waveguide input port used to extend the frequency range of those spectrum analyzers designed to use them The analyzer provides the local oscillator signal and mixer bias if needed then returns the mixing products to the analyzer s IF input FFT The abbreviation for fast Fourier transform It is a mathematical operation performed on a time domain signal to yield the individual spectral components that constitute the signal in the frequency domain Refer also to spectrum firmware An assembly made up of hardware and instruction code that are integrated to form a functional set which cannot be altered during normal operation The instruction code permanently installed in the circuitry of the instrument is classified as ROM read only memory The firmware determines the operating characteristics of the instrument or equipment Each firmware version is identified by a revision code number or date code flatness The displayed amplitude variation correspondi
120. resolution bandwidth of 9 kHz This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic interference EMI measurements Front Panel Key Access allows a 6 dB resolution bandwidth of 120 kHz This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic interference EMI measurements Front Panel Key Access For Option 130 only allows a 6 dB resolution bandwidth of 200 Hz This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic interference EMI measurements Front Panel Key Access exchanges the contents of the trace A register with the trace B register and puts trace A in view mode Front Panel Key Access when ON is underlined subtracts the data in trace B from the measured data in trace A A minus sign appears between the trace A status and the trace B status in the screen annotation while the function is active To deactivate this function press A B A ON OFF so that OFF is underlined The A B A and B DL B functions are math functions Unlike operations on dBm units math functions operate on measurement units Measurement units are used to format trace data for data within the graticule limits The displayed amplitude of each element falls on one of 8000 vertical points with the value of 8000 being equal to the reference level For log scale data each point is equal to 0 01 dB The peak of a signal equal to 10 dBm or one division below the reference level is equal to 7000 measurement units 8000 1000
121. sequence causing the program to branch to a subroutine For example by using service requests the computer can perform other operations while the spectrum analyzer is sweeping When the sweep is completed the computer can service the spectrum analyzer by changing the spectrum analyzer state or reading data from the memory Note Service requests do not work with computers that have an RS 232 interface Not all service requests are available with some HP IB computers Refer to the manuals supplied by your computer s manufacturer When making a service request the spectrum analyzer places the I O interface SRQ line true and the spectrum analyzer displays SRQ with an octal coded number Setting the SRQ line true announces to the computer that the spectrum analyzer requires attention The computer can then command the spectrum analyzer to send its status byte The status byte indicates the type of service request The status byte is the binary equivalent of the octal SRQ number Note If the spectrum analyzer display annotation has been blanked the service request notation will not appear A serial polling technique must be used by the computer to test for service requests The spectrum analyzer does not respond to parallel polling A service request can be cleared from the display by pressing CONFIG doing an instrument preset or by executing a remote command query Status Byte Definition The status byte sent by the spec
122. set to a month day year format by pressing DEFAULTCONFIG Front Panel Key Access changes the amplitude units to dBm for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE changes the amplitude units to dBmV for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE changes the amplitude units to dBuV for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE accesses the factory default correction factors A special pass code is required for use If the message Self cal needed appears when DEFAULT CAL DATA is pressed the CAL FREQ and CAL AMPTD routines need to be run The CAL FREQ and CAL AMPTD must be run to ensure specifications If the spectrum analyzer maximum frequency is higher than 3 GHz the CAL YTF routine must also be run The calibration results must then be saved by pressing CAL STORE See Chapter 9 for more information Front Panel Key Access CAL resets the spectrum analyzer configuration to the state it was in when it was originally shipped from the factory and performs an instrument preset See Table 7 6 for the default user configuration values set by pressing DEFAULTCONFIG Key Descriptions 7 31 DEFAULT SYNC Define Coup ing Define Gate Define Time Table 7 6 Default Configuration Values Default Value 1 5 Printer address Option 041 e Plotter address Option oa s Save lock internal states or traces Om
123. signal tracking 3 7 7 63 See also marker tracking SINGLE FFT 7 80 SINGLE MEAS 7 80 single sweep 7 79 7 82 SLOPE 5 26 7 80 softkey label 2 1 softkey locations 8 1 softkey overview 2 12 softkeys 2 1 source power 7 81 space character 7 92 span 0 Hz 7 92 LAST SPAN 7 49 window zone 7 93 SPAN 2 1 2 13 7 80 SPAN ZOOM 3 9 7 80 speaker AM FM demodulator and quasi peak detector Option 103 10 9 Option 102 10 9 SPEAKER ON OFF 7 80 spectral density channel power 7 23 SPECTRUM ANALYZER 7 80 spectrum analyzer attenuator 7 10 spectrum analyzer auto coupled sweep time 7 83 spectrum analyzer configuration default 7 31 spectrum analyzer error messages 9 7 spectrum analyzer mode 7 66 spectrum analyzer state recalled 7 65 speed data transmission 7 12 split screen 7 60 SQUELCH 4 14 7 81 SRC ATN MAN AUTO 7 81 SRC PWR OFFSET 7 81 SRC PWR ON OFF 4 8 7 81 SRC PWR STP SIZE 7 81 SRQ A 1 standard timebase 7 14 start and stop frequencies 7 53 START FREQ 7 81 state of spectrum analyzer at power on 7 65 state registers locking 7 74 STATE CARD 7 82 STATE INTRNL 7 82 status byte A l status byte definition A l step keys 2 3 2 9 Index l 6 step size center frequency 7 21 step size coupling 7 10 stimulus response measurements 4 7 stimulus response mode 7 83 STOP FREQ 7 82 stop frequency fft 7 43 store correction factors 7 14 storing display 7 35 storing the correctio
124. spectrum analyzer automatically selects all of the other settings for accurate and efficient measurements There is also a manual mode where the user selects all of the spectrum analyzer settings The manual mode should be used carefully since it has limitations and requirements that are necessary to ensure the measurement is accurate Power measurements are made continuously updating at the end of each sweep This allows you to make adjustments and see changes as they happen They can also be made on a single sweep providing time to study or record the data Note Some spectrum analyzer options may be required to make valid measurements particularly in narrow bandwidths The built in frequency counter is standard in the HP 8590L HP 85913 HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 8594L HP 85953 and HP 85963 It is not available with HP 8590L with Option 713 The precision frequency reference is available as Option 004 for the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 Occupied Bandwidth and Transmitter Frequency Error You often need to confirm a channel s 99 occupied bandwidth The OCCUPIED BANDWDTH function does this easily The user enters the channel spacing and activates the occupied bandwidth function Markers show the power bandwidth edges and the spectrum analyzer calculates and displays The total power in dBm other units selectable The occupied bandwidth 99 power bandwidth The transmitter frequency error
125. test device will be connected see Figure 4 15 A short circuit has a reflection coefficient of 1 0 dB return loss it thus reflects all incident power and provides a convenient O dB reference TGOUTPUT RF INPUT COUPLED PORT INPUT HP 85630A SHORT PORT TEST SET CIRCUIT OR OR DIRECTIONAL BRIOGE COUPLER DUT pul35e Figure 4 15 Reflection Measurement Short Calibration Test Setup Example Measure the return loss of a filter The HP 85630A transmission reflection test set is recommended for making reflection measurements with your spectrum analyzer It must be used with the HP 85714A scalar measurement personality The scalar measurement personality includes instructions on how to make fast accurate scalar network analysis measurements with your spectrum analyzer and test set The following procedure is written for making a reflection measurement using a coupler or directional bridge instead of the test set Reflection Calibration Note The spectrum analyzer center frequency and span for this measurement can easily be set up using the transmission measurement setup Tune the spectrum analyzer so that the passband of the filter comprises a majority of the display then proceed with the steps outlined below 1 Connect the DUT to the output port of a directional bridge or coupler Terminate the unconnected port of the DUT 2 Connect the tracking generator output of the spectrum analyzer to the input port of
126. that together can execute an operation Generally for spectrum analyzers it is a sequence of code that controls some operation of a spectrum analyzer These codes can be keyed in via a controller or computer Refer also to function continuous sweep mode The analyzer condition where traces are automatically updated each time trigger conditions are met CORR Annotation indicating a corrected measurement condition exists It appears when correction factors are being applied to measurement results If the CORR message is not displayed the measurements may not meet specifications correction factor The factor by which a measurement reading must be multiplied to correct for the effects of errors due to spectrum analyzer circuitry This factor is the product of the ratio and phase angle correction factors for the existing conditions of operation CRT persistence An indication of the rate at which the image fades on the display In analyzers that digitize the trace information video before writing it to the screen the refresh rate is high enough to prevent any flicker in the display therefore short persistence displays are used Purely analog analyzers typically use long persistence or variable persistence displays because the refresh rate equals the sweep rate current probe A magnetic field sensor that is clamped around power lines to sense conducted emissions It is the preferred transducer for most MIL STD conducted emissions testing The
127. the DLP editor utility saves the current amplitude correction factors table to the current mass storage device spectrum analyzer memory or memory card To verify the current mass storage device press SAVE AMP COR If MAX REG appears on the spectrum analyzer display the current mass storage device is spectrum analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press or RECALL then INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device Press SAVE AMP COR enter a register number then press to save the current amplitude correction factors table in spectrum analyzer memory or on the memory card When saved on the memory card amplitude correction factors tables are stored with a the prefix and the register number entered When saved in spectrum analyzer memory the register number is saved in a trace register Trace register values are restricted to a range between 0 and the number x indicated by MAX REG x Front Panel Key Access For Option 041 or 043 only Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for mare information passes the text from the DLP editor memory through the parser to execute as spectrum analyzer commands Pressing SAVE EDIT is similar to outputting the text to the spectrum analyzer from an external controller If the text commands is a valid user defined function it passes through the parser an
128. the following that the source power is set higher or lower than the spectrum analyzer can provide that the frequency span extends beyond the specified frequency range of the tracking generator or that the calibration data for the tracking generator is incorrect See Stimulus Response Measurements in Chapter 4 of the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers User s Guide for more information 17 Too many signal with valid N dB points Indicates the N dB PTS function has located two or more signals that have amplitudes within the specified dB from the signal peak If this happens you should decrease the span of the spectrum analyzer so that only the signal that you want to measure is displayed U If You Have A Problem 9 15 Trace A is not available Indicates that trace A is in the store blank mode and cannot be used for limit line testing Use CLEAR WRITE A or VIEW A to change trace A from the store blank mode to the clear write mode and then turn on limit line testing U UNDF KEY The softkey number is not recognized by the spectrum analyzer U USING DEFAULTS self cal needed Indicates that the current correction factors are the default correction factors and that the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routine needs to be performed For the HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 CAL YTF routine needs to be performed also U Verify gate trigger input is disconnected before CAL AMPTD This message is meant to remind you that not
129. the function from front panel key selections gain compression The signal level at the input mixer of a spectrum analyzer where the displayed amplitude of the signal is a specific number of dB too low due just to mixer saturation The signal level is generally specified for 1 dB or 0 5 dB compression and is usually between 3 dBm and 10 dBm gated measurement See time gate hard copy Information or data printed onto paper as opposed to its being stored on disk or in the instrument s memory Glossary 6 harmonic distortion Undesired frequency components added to signals as a result of nonlinear behavior of the device for example a mixer or an amplifier through which signals pass These unwanted components are harmonically related to the original signal harmonic mixing The utilization of local oscillator harmonics generated in a mixer to extend the tuning range of a spectrum analyzer beyond the range achievable using just the local oscillator fundamental The mathematical algorithm is Fin Fro Fire HP IB The abbreviation for Hewlett Packard Interface Bus It is a Hewlett Packard proprietary parallel interface that allows you to daisy chain more than one device to a port on a computer or instrument IF The abbreviation for intermediate frequency An IF frequency is a frequency to which a signal wave is shifted locally as an intermediate step in transmission or reception On spectrum analyzers this is the frequency
130. the spectrum analyzer and the plotter 4 Set the spectrum analyzer baud rate see Figure 6 11 To set the spectrum analyzer baud rate to 1200 baud press Plot Config Plt Port Config PLT PORT SER PAR so that SER is underlined BAUD RATE 1200 COPY DEV FRNT PLT PLTS PG 1 2 4 PRN PORT SER PAR Plot Config mJ PLT LOC PLT PORT SER PAR Print Config PLT gt LJUT ON OFF BAUD RATE CONF IG Time Date Plt Port Config Change Prefix PLT MENU ON OFF More 1 of 3 Previous Menu Previous Menu pul34el Figure 6 1 1 Baud Rate Menu Map Printing and Plotting 6 15 5 Set the baud rate on your plotter Depending on the model it may need to be OFF to set the baud rate Refer to your plotter s documentation If you have an HP 7550A B plotter you need to configure it as follows MODE DATA FLOW BYPASS HANDSHAKE PARITY BAUD RATE DUPLEX STANDARD SERIAL not ENHANCED REMOTE STANDALONE not EAVESDROP ON or OFF don t care HARDWIRE DIRECT 8 BITS OFF 1200 it will work at 9600 FULL PLTS PG 124 PET LOGS o PLT gt LJT ON OFF Pit Port Config PLT MENU ON OFF Previous Menu COPY DEV PRNT PLT Plot Config Print Config Time Date Change Prefix More 1 of 3 put32e Figure 6 12 Plot Configure Menu 6 Referring to Figure 6 12 select the plotter configuration for your spectrum analyzer by pressing the appropriate keys Plot Conf ig PLTS PG 12 4 PLT LOC PLT
131. the zone markers are moved the span of the lower window is changed but the lower window will not be updated unless it is active The zone can be expanded beyond the frequency range that is being displayed in the upper window Its movement is limited to the frequency range of the spectrum analyzer The zone markers will be displayed at the edges of the upper window when the zone is moved beyond the displayed frequency range Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS HP 8591 E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E only switches between the split screen windows display and a full size display of the window that is currently active Once the ZOOM function is active the key can be used to switch between the two windows while remaining zoomed full sized Key Descriptions 7 93 Key Menus This chapter contains the key menu diagrams for the HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzers The menus are documented for the HP 8590L m HP 85913 HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 8594L HP 85953 HP 85963 Each key menu diagram is arranged alphabetically according to the front panel key name Note Some of the softkeys in the key menus are model or option specific and may not appear on your spectrum analyzer Key Menus 8 1 AMPL TUDE REF LvL on Bn LIN tee PRESEL PEAK 1 25 MAX MXR LVL ae aa PRESEL DEFAULT 22 Amotd Units 4 More 1 of 3 EXTERNAL PREAMPG eer INPUT Z 500750 Watts REF LVL OFFSET Previous Menu More 2 of 3
132. then MARKER ALL OFF 47 MKA A 300 0 MHz REF 0 dBm ATTEN 19 dB 133 3 ve PEAK T LOG 10 08 CENTER 597 5 MHz WA SB SE FOI mrs COAR eee Il lr CENTERS 9 7 SMHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RESBW3 MHZ VBW 1 MHz SWP 28 msec Figure 3 15 Frequency and Amplitude Difference between Signals 3 14 Making Basic Measurements Measuring Low Level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging Spectrum analyzer sensitivity is the ability to measure low level signals It is limited by the noise generated inside the spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer input attenuator and bandwidth settings affect the sensitivity by changing the signal to noise ratio The attenuator affects the level of a signal passing through the instrument whereas the bandwidth affects the level of internal noise without affecting the signal In the first two examples in this section the attenuator and bandwidth settings are adjusted to view low level signals If after adjusting the attenuation and resolution bandwidth a signal is still near the noise visibility can be improved by using the video bandwidth and video averaging functions as demonstrated in the third and fourth examples Example If a signal is very close to the noise floor reducing input attenuation brings the signal out of the noise Reducing the attenuation to O dB maximizes signal power in the spectrum analyzer Note The
133. time softkey functions SWP TIME AUTO MAN and SWEEP CONT SGL Option 105 only The key also accesses the GATE ON OFF softkey which turns on the gate function and the Gate Control softkey which accesses the gate menus switches the spectrum analyzer between the continuous sweep mode and the single sweep mode If the spectrum analyzer is in single sweep mode SGL is underlined Press to enable a sweep when in single sweep mode When continuous sweep mode is in use one sweep follows another as soon as it is triggered Pressing PRESET turning the power on and pressing PRESET SPECTRUM all select continuous sweep Front Panel Key Access SWEEP or TRIG 7 82 Key Descriptions SWEEP DELAY SWEEP RAMP SWEEP TIME DAC SWP CPLG SR SA SWP TIME AUTO MAN SYNC CRD TV TRIG Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended delays the start of sweep with respect to the gate trigger edge in the time domain window of the gate utility The time segment being displayed can be shifted up to 65 msec after the gate trigger edge in 1 psec increments Front Panel Key Access SWEEP displays the RAMP signal from the sweep ramp generator that is located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL displays the output of the sweep time DAC SWP_DAC from the sweep ramp generator that is on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic f
134. to an LQ 570 Epson or other compatible 24 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will print two printouts Per page and will print softkey labels if desired see PRT MENU ON OFF This function is operational for Epson compatible printers only when SML is underlined Press this key so that ON is underlined to print the softkey labels with the spectrum analyzer printout This function is operational for Epson compatible printers only when SML is underlined Press this key so PRNT is underlined Press this key to copy the spectrum analyzer display to the printer Plotting to an HP LaserJet Printer This section describes how to plot to a LaserJet printer using either an RS 232 or parallel interface Equipment HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer with RS 232 or parallel interface One of the following cables a HP 24542G 9 25 pin RS 232 cable a HP C2932A 9 25 Pin RS 232 Cable For use with LaserJet 4P and 4Plus a HP C2950A parallel printer cable Any of the following HP LaserJets a HP LaserJet IIP Plus a HP LaserJet MI a HP LaserJet HIP a HP LaserJet 4 a HP LaserJet 4L a HP LaserJet 4P Interconnection and Plotting Instructions The RS 232 or parallel interface allow only one device to be connected to the spectrum analyzer Refer to the programmer s guide for more information on protocol and cable wiring 1 Turn off the spectrum analyzer and LaserJet 2 Connect the HP LaserJet to the ana
135. to select the location on the paper for the plotter output The quadrant of the softkey label graphically represents where the plotter output will be located Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the softkey label Press this key so that PLT is underlined Make sure that OFF is underlined unless you are plotting to a laserjet Press this key to copy the spectrum analyzer display to the plotter For a multi pen plotter the pens of the plotter draw the different components of the screen as follows Pen Numbei Description Draws the annotation and graticule Draws trace A Draws trace B Draws trace C and the display line Draws user generated graphics and the lower limit line Draws the upper limit line Printingand Plotting 6 9 Printing or Plotting with RS 232 Printing Using an RS 232 Interface This section describes how to print using an RS 232 interface It is critical that the printer and spectrum analyzer be configured to be compatible with each other Particular attention should be paid to Character Size 8 Bits Parity OFF Baud Rate 9600 typical Handshaking DTR YES DUPLEX FULL Equipment HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer with Option 043 RS 232 interface One of the following cables Q HP 24542G 9 25 pin RS 232 cable eI HP C2932A 9 9 pin RS 232 cable For use with LaserJet 4P and 4Plus Printer with RS 232 interface choose one of the following
136. until some later time and from which the entire original data may be retrieved memory card A small credit card shaped memory device that can store data or programs The programs are sometimes called personalities and give additional capabilities to your instrument Typically there is only one personality per memory card Refer also to personality menu The spectrum analyzer functions that appear on the display and are selected by pressing front panel keys These selections may evoke a series of other related functions that establish groups called menus narrowband response A response measured under conditions in which there is only one spectral component at a time in the passband of a spectrum analyzer s resolution filter This condition occurs for continuous wave signals and repetitive signals whose repetition rate is greater than about twice the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer Note that a signal can have a spread spectrum and still be viewed in the narrowband mode on the spectrum analyzer The same checks that were listed under broadband response are used here but with different results Change the frequency span The frequency separation of the components remains unchanged Change the resolution bandwidth The amplitude of the responses does not change with resolution bandwidth changes as long as the bandwidth remains narrow relative to the separation of the responses Change the sweep time The separation of the respon
137. used for this purpose a HP IB a RS 232 m Parallel Printing or Plotting with HP IB More than one instrument can communicate on the same HP IB Therefore each device must have a unique HP IB address This means that both a printer and a plotter can be connected to the spectrum analyzer at the same time using two or more HP IB cables The printer must be configured with an address which can be recognized by the spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer will not print if it senses another controller on the HP IB Therefore other controllers such as computers must be disabled In most cases it is sufficient to simply turn the other controllers OFF Printing and Plotting 6 1 PRINTER 09 36 54 09 JUH 1994 HP BH PRINTER EP mxu0 SNL LRG EP t0570 SML LRG Previous E Menu SPAN 438 6 MHz SHP 20 0 msec F B3 36154 69 JUN 1994 REF din AT 19 dB PEAK gt E FEE on w A per page Previous Menu CENTER 1 4000 6Hz SPAN 438 6 MHz RES BW 3 8 MHz VEH 1 MHz SWP 20 0 msec T 9 36154 BI JUN 1994 REF din AT 18 68 HP BEW FEAR E 7 E 2 PRINTER EP mxee SML LRG e 1 0098 GHz EP Los7e r smt tre Previous Menu CENTER 1 0009 GHz SPAN 438 6 MHz RES BH 3 8 MHz VBW i MHz SHP 20 0 msec F pu121el Figure 6 1 Three Printouts Per Page Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page before form feeding the page One printout per page can
138. using a different format than the one that was used for creating it Selecting the Segment Number Pressing SELECT SEGMENT specifies the segment number to be entered or edited Limit lines are created by entering frequency or time values and amplitude values into a limit line table The frequency time and amplitude values specify a coordinate point from which a limit line segment is drawn The coordinate point is the lowest frequency or time point of the line Using Analyzer Features 5 23 segment Limit lines are constructed from left to right The segment is defined by its beginning point see Figure 5 6 Note Up to 20 segments can be specified for an upper or lower limit line table When entering a limit line segment the frequency time and amplitude values will be listed as asterisks until new values are entered The new segment will be listed last until both the frequency or time and the amplitude values have been entered Once the frequency time and an amplitude value are entered the segment will be sorted into the limit line table according to frequency or time 2 9999 PPP REF 0 dBm ATT 10 dB 1 CENTER3 0 0 OMHz SPAN 2000MH7 BW VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 msec pul45e Figure 5 6 Limit Line Segments Description of Items in Figure 5 6 Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the first segment First segment Frequency and am
139. utility trigger 7 89 list of 7 56 menu of controls 7 57 menu of functions 7 57 quasi peak 7 54 selection 7 76 table 7 56 time gate utility 7 54 trace selection 7 56 zeroing delta marker in the gate utility 7 92 MARKER A 3 12 7 52 MARKER A gt SPAN 7 53 MARKER ALL OFF 7 54 MARKER AMPTD 7 54 marker counter 3 6 7 56 resolution 7 26 use with Option 105 4 23 marker delta 3 12 marker functions 2 3 Index 9 marker noise 7 56 use with Option 105 4 23 MARKER NORMAL 2 14 7 54 MARKER NORM PK 7 54 MARKER ON 7 54 marker pause 7 56 dwell time 7 36 marker readout modes 7 56 MARKER AUTO FFT 7 53 MARKER CF 7 53 MARKER CF STEP 7 53 MARKER FFT STOP 7 53 MARKER MID SCRN 7 53 MARKER MINIMUM 7 53 MARKER gt PK PK 3 13 7 53 MARKER REF LVL 7 53 MARKER START 7 53 MARKER STOP 7 54 markers using multiple markers 5 3 marker table mode 7 85 using 5 2 3 marker to 7 57 marker tracking 3 7 7 57 7 63 mass storage device analyzer memory 7 49 memory card 7 49 matching pad 500 to 750 Option 711 10 12 MAX HOLD A 3 10 7 55 MAX HOLD B 7 55 maximum hold 3 9 maximum mixer level 7 55 MAX MXR LVL 7 55 MEAS OFF 7 55 measuring amplitude modulation 4 2 measuring low level signals 3 15 measuring return loss 4 18 measuring signals near band boundaries 3 26 MEAS USER 7 55 MEM LOCKED 7 55 7 74 memory amount available 7 18 memory card battery 2 20 blank card 5
140. voltage at the output of the probe is proportional to the power line current and affected by probe characteristics Probe characteristics are provided by the manufacturer in the form of transfer impedance Z which varies as a function of frequency The equation below illustrates how probe characteristics may be stated Z dBQ V dBV I dByA default The preset conditions options or parameters of an instrument The default state may be changed by choosing key selections or writing programming commands to use other conditions delta marker An analyzer mode in which a fixed reference marker is established then a second active marker becomes available so it can be placed anywhere along the trace A readout indicates the relative frequency separation and amplitude difference between the reference and active markers Glossary 3 detector mode The manner in which analog video information is processed prior to being digitized and stored in memory Refer also to negative peak positive peak quasi peak detector rosenfell and sample digital display A display that uses vectors drawn between a series of data points analog video that are first digitized and stored in memory then displayed The number of stored data points is a function of the particular analyzer The displayed information is refreshed old data points are replaced with new data points stored in memory at a flicker free rate The data in memory is updated at the sweep r
141. when gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the spectrum analyzer input Thus the signal level measured by the spectrum analyzer is the level at the input of an external amplitude conversion device When an amplitude offset is entered its value is displayed on the left side of the screen as opposed to frequency offsets which are displayed at the bottom of the screen To eliminate an offset press REF LVL OFFSET 0 or dBm Pressing also sets the offset to zero Reference level offsets are entered using the numeric keypad See also the EXTERNAL PREAMPG softkey description Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE Key Descriptions 7 73 RES BW AUTO MAN RETURN RPG TITLE SAV LOCK ON OFF changes the spectrum analyzer 3 dB resolution bandwidth As the resolution bandwidth is decreased the sweep time is increased to maintain amplitude calibration Resolution bandwidth is also related to span As span is decreased the resolution bandwidth is decreased A mark appears next to RES BW on the screen to indicate that it is not coupled To recouple the resolution bandwidth press RES BW AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined The resolution bandwidth can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Front Panel Key Access or Option 103 only returns the spectrum analyzer to the settings that were present when MAN QP AT MKR was pressed displays the quasi peak amplitude value and the quasi peak ma
142. window will not be updated until it is made active If no peak is found the zone will not be moved A signal must have a 6 dB peak excursion to be identified as a peak signal The definition of a peak excursion can be changed by selecting PEAK EXCURSN while the upper window is active Pressing ZONE PK LEFT will have no effect if the upper window is in zero span Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS HP 8591 E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E only searches for the next frequency peak outside and to the right of the zone markers on the upper window trace and then moves the zone so that it is centered around the new peak The zone span is not changed The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zone center frequency The lower window will not be updated until it is made active If no peak is found the zone will not be moved A signal must have a 6 dB peak excursion to be identified as a peak signal The definition of a peak excursion can be changing by selecting PEAK EXCURSN while the upper window is active Pressing ZONE PK RIGHT will have no effect 1f the upper window is in zero Span Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS HP 8591E HP 8593F HP 85943 HP 8595E or HP 8596E only allows the span of the zone markers to be changed without changing the center frequency The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone on the upper window They correspond with the frequency range displayed in the lower window As
143. windows display mode If the windows display mode is being used the save state function saves the state of the currently active window The recall state function recalls the stored state into the currently active window See the DISPLAY CARD and CARD DISPLAY softkeys for information about saving the display Table 7 9 Functions Which Exit The Windows Display Format AM measures percent amplitude modulation Adjacent Channel Power measures adjacent channel power Calibration Functions self calibration routines Channel Power measures channel power Confidence Test built in self test routine Dispose User Memory deletes user s items from analyzer memory FFT initiates FFT on zero span input Gate Utility accesses time gate functionality Instrument Preset returns analyzer to preset state Marker Table lists all of the active markers N GB Points measures N dB bandwidth Occupied Bandwidth measures occupied bandwidth Peak Table lists displayed signal peaks Peak Zoom initiates the peak zoom routine TOI makes a third order intercept measuremenl Option 041 or 043 only selects a color print for use with an HP PaintJet printer only The traces are displayed in orange trace A blue trace B and red trace C The graticule screen annotation and user information are displayed in black Front Panel Key Access Options 101 and 102 or Option 301 only allows you to trigger on the PAL video format Pressing PAL alters the T
144. 0 MHz REF OUT and the EXT REF IN on the rear panel of the analyzer Not shipped with HP 8590L option 713 Not shipped with Options 001 011 or 026 Shipped with HP 8592L HP 85933 and HP 8596E Not shipped with Option 026 Shipped with Options 001 or 011 only Shipped with Option 026 only Shipped with analyzer Preparing For Use 1 3 Power Requirements The spectrum analyzer is a portable instrument and requires no physical installation other than connection to a power source Warning Failure to ground the spectrum analyzer properly can result in personal injury Use an ac power outlet that has a protective earth contact DO NOT defeat the earth grounding protection by using an extension cable power cable or autotransformer without a protective ground conductor Caution Do not connect ac power until you have verified that the line voltage is correct the proper fuse is installed and the line voltage selector switch is properly positioned as described in the following paragraphs Damage to the equipment could result Table 1 2 Power Requirements 115 V Requirement 230 V Requirement Input Voltage 90 to 132 V rms 198 to 264 V rms 47 to 440 Hz 47 to 66 Hz lt 500 VA lt 180 W lt 500 VA lt 180 W Frequency Power Setting the Line Voltage Selector Switch Caution Before connecting the spectrum analyzer to the power source you must set the rear panel voltage selector switc
145. 0A 32 Kbytes HP 85702A 128 Kbytes HP 85704A 256 Kbytes HP 85705A 512 Kbytes Parallel Interface Cable For use with Option 047 and 043 The HP 92284A parallel interface cable is a 36 pin to 25 pin male to male 2 meter cable used to connect supported printers and plotters to a spectrum analyzer Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories 10 15 PC Interface and Report Generator software For use with HP 8590 E Series or L Series spectrum analyzers with option 003 and HP 85716A CATV system monitor personality The HP 85916A PC Interface and Report Generator software provides easy setup and scheduling screens for immediate and timed measurements This software allows you to create or edit test plans to suit your needs You can download CATV system monitor data to the HP 85916A s database The data can be reviewed on the PC screen in tabular or W Y graph format This software allows you to control the spectrum analyzer over telephone lines Plotter For use with Option 041 or 043 If you have access to an HP 7440A HP 7475A or HP 7550A you can plot a permanent record of the display Most HP LaserJet printers will support the PLT gt LJT mode See RS 232 Cable in this chapter for the required cable Printer For use with Option 047 or 043 The DeskJet personal printers provide black and white or color printing for another form of permanent records of your test results The HP LaserJet series printers are also compatible The
146. 2 Stimulus Response Measurements 2 a a a ee a 4 7 What Are Stimulus Response Measurements 4 7 Using a Spectrum Analyzer with a Tracking Generator 4 8 Stepping through the Measurement 04 4 8 Tracking Generator Unleveled Condition 4 12 Demodulating and Listening to an AM or FM Signal 2 2 4 13 Triggering on a Selected Line of a Video Picture Field 2 2 4 15 Making Reflection Calibration Measurements 00 4 17 Reflection CAMDEAUON sa a a hal deo aie OE aed 4 17 Measuring the Return Loss 2 2 e 4 18 Using the Gate Utility to Simplify Time Gated Measurements Option 105 only 4 19 Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility 4 22 Introducing the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability 4 22 Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability to View Pulsed RF 4 24 Example of a Time Gated Pulsed RF Signal 4 26 Setting the Gate Delay and Gate Length Properly When NOT Using the Gate MOOT age hah TE Wynd de Beit ale eA Moat Fe gh Ned es Bek a ae 4 33 Using the Self Calibration Routines with Option 105 2 2 4 35 Performing a Functional Check of Option 105 4 36 Using the One Button Measurements to Measure N dB Bandwidth Percent Amplitude Modulation and Third Order Intercept TOI 2 2 4 39 N dB Bandwidth Measurement
147. 2 Type in a programming command for example type IP 3 Press ENTER on the external keyboard to execute the command Note Unlike entering a remote programming command using an external controller entering the remote programming commands with the external keyboard does not require including the spectrum analyzer address It is also not necessary to terminate the programming line with a semicolon However semicolons are necessary for separating the programming commands For example a program line is entered via the external controller as OUTPUT 718 CF 300MHZ SP 1MHZ The same program line is entered using the external keyboard as CF 300MHZ SP 1MHZ ENTER After is pressed the spectrum analyzer remains in command mode To return to the title entry mode press on the external keyboard To Enter a Prefix Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information 1 Press on the external keyboard to enter the mode for entering a prefix 2 Type in the prefix 3 Press on the external keyboard Using Analyzer Features 5 43 Printing and Plotting You may obtain a permanent record of data displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen by using the copy key of the spectrum analyzer and a printer or plotter This chapter describes how to print or plot the results displayed on your spectrum analyzer screen There are three different interfaces
148. 5 installed in it you should ensure that nothing is connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector when the CAL AMPTD or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routines are performed U and H INTERNAL LOCKED The spectrum analyzer internal trace and state registers have been locked To unlock the trace or state registers press SAV LOCK ON OFF so that OFF is underlined For remote operation use PSTATE OFF U INVALID ACTDEF The specified ACTDEF name is not valid See the ACTDEF programming command U INVALID AMPCOR FREQ For the AMPCOR command the frequency data must be entered in increasing order See the description for the AMPCOR programming command for more information U INVALID BLOCK FORMAT IF STATEMENT An invalid block format appeared within the IF statement See the description for the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF programming command for more information U INVALID CARD Indicates one of the following conditions a card reader is not installed the memory card is write protected check the position of the switch on the memory card the memory card is a read only memory ROM card or a memory card has not been inserted This message can also occur if remote programming commands for the memory card capability are executed with an HP 8590L HP 8592L or HP 8594L that does not have an Option 003 U INVALID CARD BAD MEDIA Indicates the formatting routine FORMAT CARD for the memory card could not be completed See the description for INV
149. 5913 is 30 dBm 1 watt continuous 25 Vdc with 10 dB or more attenuation The maximum input power for the HP 8592L and HP 85933 is 30 dBm 1 watt continuous 0 Vdc with input attenuation of 10 dB or more in bands 1 through 4 The maximum input power for the HP 85943 HP 8594L HP 85953 or HP 85963 is 30 dBm 1 watt continuous and 50 Vdc ac coupled or 0 Vdc de coupled The input attenuation must be 10 dB or more Let s begin using the spectrum analyzer by measuring an input signal Since the 300 MHz calibration signal CAL OUT is readily available we will use it as our input signal You cannot hurt the spectrum analyzer by using the calibration signal and pressing any of the keys described in this section Don t be afraid to play with the knob step keys or number units keypad If you have experimented with other keys and wish to return to a known state press the green key 1 First turn the instrument on by pressing LINE Wait for the power up process to complete 2 Press the green PRESET key 3 Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 500 with an appropriate cable 4 Set the frequency Press the key CENTER appears on the left side of the screen indicating that the center frequency function is active The CENTER FREQ softkey label appears in inverse video to indicate that center frequency is the active function The active function block is the space on the screen within the graticule where the cent
150. 6E 5 minutes If You Have A Problem 9 3 d Set the display position using CAL More 1 of 4 CRT VERT POSITION and CAL More 1 of 4 CRT HORZ POSITION Press CAL CAL STORE Note Some user configurations may need to be reset DEFAULT CAL DATA can only be accessed by entering a center frequency of 37 Hz The center frequency 37 Hz acts as a pass code for DEFAULT CAL DATA 19 Tf a program in user memory is suspected of causing problems use CONFIG More 1 of 3 Dispose User Mem ERASE DLP MEM ERASE DLP MEM requires a double key press ERASE DLP MEM erases all user programs variables personalities DLPs and user defined traces in spectrum analyzer memory 20 If the necessary test equipment is available perform the performance verification tests given in the Calibration Guide for your spectrum analyzer Record all results on an Performance Verification Test Record form which follows the tests Read the Warranty The warranty for your spectrum analyzer is at the front of this manual Please read it and become familiar with its terms If your spectrum analyzer is covered by a separate maintenance agreement please be familiar with its terms Service Options Hewlett Packard offers several optional maintenance plans to service your spectrum analyzer after the warranty has expired Call your Hewlett Packard Sales and Service office for full details If you want to service the spectrum analyzer yourself
151. 7 3 Analyzer Functions 7 AM ON OFF LOCK ON OFF 10V REF DETECTOR IOV REF DETECTOR 2v REF DETECTOR O 2 9 GHz BAND 0 2 75 6 5 BAND 1 6 0 12 8 BAND 2 12 4 19 BAND 3 determines the percent of amplitude modulation of the largest displayed signal and its two sidebands The sidebands are assumed to be entirely from amplitude modulation If there are differences in the sideband amplitude the larger value is used The measurement runs continuously re executing at the end of each sweep All three signal must be displayed The frequency spacing of the sideband signals must be the same within the span accuracy of the measurement All of the signals must be greater than the PEAK EXCURSION above the THRESHOLD The amplitude scale may be either linear or logarithmic Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER turns off the spectrum analyzer phase locking The counter is turned off so frequency correction is no longer done at the start of each sweep Turning the phase locking off increases measurement speed but it decreases frequency accuracy This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use Front Panel Key Access displays the output of the 10 V reference from the A7 Analog Interface assembly as a horizontal line at the top graticule This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access displays the output of the 10 V reference from the A7 Analog Interface
152. 8 improved amplitude accuracy Option 053 10 8 LO output Option 009 10 5 memory card reader kit 10 5 memory card reader Option 003 10 5 narrow resolution bandwidths and precision frequency reference Option 140 10 10 narrow resolution bandwidths Option 130 10 10 noise figure Option 119 10 10 PCD PHS NADC CDMA firmware Option 160 10 11 precision frequency reference Option 004 10 5 protective soft carrying case Option 042 10 7 quasi peak detector and AM FM demodulator with speaker Option 103 10 9 rack mount kit Option 908 10 12 rack mount kit with handles Option 909 10 12 reduced frequency accuracy Option 713 10 12 RS 232 and Parallel Option 043 10 7 service documentation Option 915 10 12 sweep tune output Option 009 10 5 time gated spectrum analysis Option 105 10 9 tracking generator 500 Option 010 10 6 tracking generator 75Q Option 01 1 10 6 TV Picture Display Option 180 10 11 TV sync trigger capability fast time domain sweeps AM FM demodulator Option 301 10 12 options displayed 7 79 output power 7 81 output screen data 7 28 overview menus and softkeys 2 12 P packaging 9 6 paintjet printer 7 78 PAINTJET PRINTER 7 61 PAL 7 61 PAL M 7 61 PAL video format 7 84 parallel interface connector 2 7 parallel plotting Index 12 laserjet 6 21 parallel polling A 1 PARAM AUTO MAN 7 62 pass code 7 31 PCD firmware Option 160 10 11 PDC measureme
153. 8592L with Option 713 The marker counter increases the resolution and accuracy of frequency readout When using the marker count function if the bandwidth to span ratio is too small less than O Ol the Reduce Span message appears on the display If Widen RES BW is displayed it indicates that the resolution bandwidth is too narrow Resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz are not allowed if you are using firmware with a revision date prior to 930506 If the signal being counted is the largest signal within the 300 Hz bandwidth then the count will be correct If there is another larger signal even off the display the count will be for the larger signal Example Increase the resolution and accuracy of the frequency readout on the signal of interest 1 Place a marker on the signal of interest If you are using the CAL OUT signal place the marker on the 300 MHz calibration signal Press 300 MHz 100 MHz and PEAK SEARCH 2 Press MKR FCTN then MK COUNT ON OFF ON should be underlined to turn the marker counter on COUNTER and the frequency and amplitude of the marker will appear in the active function area 3 Increase the counter resolution by pressing More 1 of 2 CNT RES AUTO MAN and then entering the desired resolution using the step keys or the number units keypad For example press 1 kHz The marker counter readout is in the upper right corner of the screen The resolution can be set from 10 Hz to 100 kHz 4 Th
154. A CATV system monitor personality U If You Have A Problem 9 9 FAIL _ An error was discovered during the power up check The 4 digit by lo digit code indicates the type of error Error codes are described in the spectrum analyzer service guide H File type incompatible Indicates that the selected file is not a display image file The file name for a display image file is always preceded by an i U FREQ UNCAL If the FREQ UNCAL message appears constantly it indicates a YTO tuning error If this message appears constantly perform the CAL FREQ routine FREQ UNCAL appears briefly during the CAL FREQ routine this is normal and does not indicate a problem U and H U and H Function not available in current Mode Indicates that the function that you have selected can only be used with the spectrum analyzer mode You can use the key to select the spectrum analyzer mode U Function not available with analog display Indicates that the function that you have selected is not compatible with the Analog display mode To use the function you must first turn off the Analog display mode with ANALOG ON OFF U Gate card not calibrated This message can indicate that either the CAL AMPTD routine need to be performed before the time gating functions can be used or that something was connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector during the CAL AMPTD or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routines If your spectrum analyzer has an Option 10
155. ALID CARD above for more information about the possible causes of this message U and H 9 10 If You Have A Problem INVALID CARD DATA ERROR Indicates the data could not be retrieved from the memory card U and H INVALID CARD DIRECTORY Indicates the memory card has not been formatted U INVALID CARD NO CARD Indicates a memory card has not been inserted U INVALID CARD TYPE Indicates one of the following conditions a card reader is not installed the memory card is write protected check the position of the switch on the memory card the memory card is a read only memory ROM card or a memory card has not been inserted This message can also occur if remote programming commands for the memory card capability are executed with an HP 8590L HP 8592L or HP 8594L that does not have an Option 003 U INVALID CHECKSUM USTATE The user defined state does not follow the expected format U INVALID COMPARE OPERATOR An IF THEN or REPEAT UNTIL routine is improperly constructed Specifically the IF or UNTIL operands are incorrect U INVALID DET FM or TV option only Indicates that the selected detector cannot be used until the appropriate option is installed in the spectrum analyzer U INVALID ENTER FORMAT The enter format is not valid See the appropriate programming command description to determine the correct format U INVALID lt file name gt NOT FOUND Indicates that the specified file could not be loaded int
156. ATALOG ALL CATALOG AMP COR Catalog Card saved under a prefix other than the current prefix change the current prefix to the prefix used when the data was saved If windows are being used only the trace of the active window can be recalled Pressing LOAD FILE is an alternate way to load trace data but not recommended for recalling limit line files or amplitude correction factor files from the memory card into spectrum analyzer memory See Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 5 for more information Front Panel Key Access RECALL catalogs all the programs and variables stored in spectrum analyzer memory in bytes along with the remaining memory available in bytes Press CATALOG REGISTER to catalog states traces limit line tables and amplitude correction factors saved in spectrum analyzer memory Pressing CATALOG ALL catalogs all traces states amplitude correction factors programs display images and limit line tables stored on the memory card when cataloging the memory card Front Panel Key Access or SAVE_ Requires Option 003 for an HP 8590L HP 85921 or HP 8594L catalogs the amplitude correction factor files that are on the memory card Use the CATALOG REGISTER softkey to catalog amplitude factors saved in spectrum analyzer memory amplitude correction factors saved in analyzer memory are stored in trace registers Amplitude correction factors are saved with an a before the memory card
157. Attenuation Center frequency CF step size Coupled functions Coupling Mass storage device card or internal Detector Display line level Frequency offset Limit line testing LIMIHI and LIMILO Log scale Marker counter Marker counter resolution t Markers Mixer level Operating mode Preselector peak t Reference level Reference level offset Reference level position Resolution bandwidth Span SRQ mask Start Frequency Stop Frequency State registers 1 8 Sweep Threshold level Title Trace A Trace B Trace C Frace registers Trigger VBW RBW ratio Video averaging Video bandwidth HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only Off Off default values on 10 dB auto coupled Refer to Table 7 10 10 of span all set to AUTO AC INTERNAL positive peak 2 5 graticule divisions below reference level display off O Hz Off cleared 10 d B division Off auto coupled Off 10 dBm spectrum analyzer reset 0 dBm in power on units 0 dB top 8th graticule 3 MHz auto coupled Refer to Table 7 10 actal 50 Refer to Table 7 10 Refer to Table 7 10 unaffected continuous ne graticule above baseline display off cleared clear write store blank store blank at reference level Inaffected Tee run 2 3 off L MHz auto coupled All E Series and L Series spectrum analyzers except HP 8590L with Option 713 HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 onlv Key Descriptions 7 67 7 68 Ke
158. CH to retrieve the correction data that has previously been saved If the fetched correction data is corrupt the procedure in step 18 can be used to set the correction data back to factory default values If the display is scrambled or filled with snow first try adjusting the horizontal position by pressing CAL the bottom softkey and then pressing the fifth softkey from the top Turn the knob counterclockwise The vertical position will not cause this symptom If the display is still scrambled use DEFAULT CAL DATA per the following procedure to reinitialize the memory area for correction factors instrument configuration and miscellaneous constants This procedure will not erase factory installed calibration factors a Press FREQUENCY 37 Hz CAL the bottom softkey the bottom softkey again then softkey b FREQ amp Be sure CAL OUT is connected to the spectrum analyzer input Note If the CAL OUT signal cannot be found press FREQUENCY 37 before performing the CAL FREQ or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD c For the HP 8592L HP 85933 or HP 85963 connect a low loss cable such as HP part number 8120 5148 from 100 MHz COMB OUT to the spectrum analyzer input For the HP 85953 connect a low loss cable from CAL OUT to the spectrum analyzer input Press CAL CAL YTF The YTF self calibration routine completes in approximately Model Number YTF Cal Time HP 8592L 7 minutes HP 85933 7 minutes HP 85953 3 minutes HP 859
159. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 500 and press the PRESET_ key 2 Set the center frequency by pressing the following keys FREQUENCY 300 MHz 3 4 The calibration signal is 20 dB two graticule divisions below the top of the screen using Set the span by pressing the following keys SPAN 20 MHz these spectrum analyzer settings If desired adjust the reference level press AMPLITUDE to activate the reference level and use the knob or step keys to change the reference level Determine the amplitude and frequency of the signal You can either press or press and move the marker to the signal peak Read the amplitude and frequency The display screen should look like the one in Figure 2 6 Frequency is displayed horizontally and amplitude power is displayed vertically A MKR300 010 MHz H E F 0dBm ATTEN 10 dB 20 1 7 dBm PEAK LOG 10 dB MARKER 300 010MHz EET PES 20 17 dBm WA SB se FC CORR CENTER 300 000 MHz SPAN2 0 0 0 MHz RES BW1 0 KHz VBW 10 KHz SWPe o nsec Figure 2 6 Reading the Amplitude and Frequency Note Spectrum analyzers with Option 001 or 011 display the amplitude values in dBmV Options 001 and 011 are available only for an HP 8590L or HP 85913 Getting Started 2 15 Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines Data from the self calibration routine is necessary for spectr
160. ER INPUT rear panel connector before performing the self calibration routines 6 Perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration routine by pressing CAL and CAL FREQ amp AMPTD During the frequency routine CAL SWEEP CAL FREQ and CAL SPAN are displayed as the sequence progresses For an Option 102 CAL FM GAIN OFFSET is also displayed During the amplitude routine CAL AMPTD CAL 3 dB BW CAL ATTEN and CAL LOGAMP are displayed as the sequence progresses CAL DONE appears when the routine is completed Any failures or discrepancies produce a message on the screen see Chapter 9 7 When the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines have been completed successfully store the correction factors by pressing CAL STORE The self calibration routines calibrate the spectrum analyzer by generating correction factors The softkey CAL STORE stores the correction factors in the area of spectrum analyzer memory that is saved when the spectrum analyzer is turned off the spectrum analyzer will automatically apply these factors in future measurements If CAL STORE is not pressed the correction factors remain in effect until the spectrum analyzer is turned off Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine For spectrum analyzers with Option 010 or 011 the tracking generator self calibration routine should be performed prior to using the tracking generator Note Since the tracking generator calibration r
161. FTSTOP 6 667 kHz RES BW 18 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP38 8 msec R Figure 4 2 Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement Example 2 Use the automatic FFT measurement to look at 60 Hz AM modulation 1 Connect a signal generator to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Adjust the signal generator to produce an AM signal with a 60 Hz modulation frequency 2 Press FREQUENCY and set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to the frequency of the modulated input signal Press SPAN 10 MHz Press FREQUENCY to keep the signal on the spectrum analyzer display 3 Press FFT Menu and MARKER AUTO FFT This initiates the FFT function and activates a marker 4 Use the knob to place the marker on the AM modulated signal and press MARKER AUTO FFT again The spectrum analyzer will perform the following steps a Save the present instrument state in state register 8 b Reduce the span to zoom in on the signal c Set the detector mode to sample d Set the scale to linear e Change the span tozerospan f Start the continuous FFT function g Set the FFT stop frequency to 10 kHz 5 Press FFT STOP FREQ 250 Hz This sets the spectrum analyzer to include the fourth harmonic of the 60 Hz modulation signal on the screen 6 To confirm that the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth are correct for measuring the modulation amplitude use the following procedure a Press and use the knob to move the marker to the desired modulation signal I
162. Front Panel Key Access 7 58 Key Descriptions No User Menu NORMLIZE ON OFF NORMLIZE POSITION NTSC occ BW POWER is displayed if key number 1 has not been defined by the user Key number 1 can be defined by remote programming commands KEYCMD or KEYDEF Front Panel Key Access subtracts trace B from trace A and adds the result to the display line The result is displayed in trace A The trace data is normalized with respect to the display line even if the value of the display line is changed This function is executed on all subsequent sweeps until it is turned off A minus sign appears between the trace A status and the trace B status in the screen annotation while the function is active To turn off the normalize function press NORMLIZE ON OFF so that OFF is underlined The normalize function is useful for applying correction data to a trace For example store a measurement sweep of the response of a system in trace B Trace A can be used to measure the response of the system after a device is added Set NORMLIZE ON OFF to ON to subtract the system response from the response of the device under test to characterize the response of a device under test Front Panel Key Access displays the display line and makes the display line function active The trace data is normalized with respect to the display line even if the value of the display line is changed Front Panel Key Access Options 101 and 102 or Op
163. GHz Option 026 APC 3 5 connector 10 7 frequency extension to 26 5 GHz Option 027 N Type connector 10 7 frequency offset 7 45 frequency self calibration 7 14 frequency span 7 80 changing to full span 7 45 front panel execution of programming commands 7 41 front panel features 2 1 4 front panel protective cover Option 040 10 7 FRQ DISC NORM OFF 7 3 FULL SPAN 7 45 functional check of Option 105 4 36 function coupling 7 10 fuse 1 5 fuse holder 2 6 G gain internal spectrum analyzer 7 10 gate coupling functions 7 32 using the gate utility 4 19 gate control 7 32 edge or level triggering 7 46 Option 105 4 38 Gate Control 7 45 GATE CTL EDGE LVL 7 46 operation 4 38 gate definition 7 32 gate delay determining the gate delay 4 26 setting gate delay outside the Gate Utility 4 33 GATE DELAY 7 46 gate length determining the gate length 4 26 setting gate length outside the Gate Utility 4 33 GATE LENGTH 7 46 GATE ON OFF 7 46 GATE OUTPUT 2 6 GATE TRIGGER INPUT 2 6 gate utility exit 7 42 exiting 7 47 use of 4 19 4 20 GATE UTILITY 7 47 gate utility coupling 7 32 resolution bandwidth 7 30 Index 7 sweep time 7 30 video bandwidth 7 31 GHIJKL 7 47 GND REF DETECTOR 7 3 7 47 graph markers 7 48 GRAT ON OFF 7 47 group delay and amplitude flatness Option 111 10 9 GRPH MKR ON OFF 7 48 GSM900 measurements 10 3 GSM DCS 1800 firmware Option 163 10 11 guidelines for using Optio
164. Hz SPAN 508 0 MHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP5 0 msec Figure 4 9 Normalized Trace 9 To measure the rejection of the filter at a given frequency press MKR and enter the frequency For example enter 350 MHz The marker readout displays the rejection of the filter at 350 MHz see Figure 4 10 Making Measurements 4 11 q MKR 349 9 MHz REF 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB 18 64 dB PEAK LOG o 10 d8 bni li e i MARKER 349 9 MHz DL 48 64 dB 6 5 d8 WA SB SCF CORA a EP PSA CENTER 443 6 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 18 kHz SHP 5 0 msec Figure 4 10 Measure the Rejection Range with Delta Markers Tracking Generator Unleveled Condition When using the tracking generator the message TG UNLVL may appear The TG UNLVL message indicates that the tracking generator source power SRC PWR ON OFF could not be maintained at the user selected level during some portion of the sweep If the unleveled condition exists at the beginning of the sweep the message will be displayed immediately If the unleveled condition occurs after the sweep begins the message will be displayed after the sweep is completed A momentary unleveled condition may not be detected when the sweep time is small The message will be cleared after a sweep is completed with no unleveled conditions The unleveled condition may be caused by any of the followi
165. J LOC COPY DEV PRNT PLT PLT gt LJT ON OFF 6 16 Printing and Plotting Press this key to access the configuration menu Press this key to access the plotter configuration menu Press this key to underline the number of plots per page desired Choose 1 2 or 4 plots per page see Figure 6 2 If two plots per page are chosen this function allows you to select the location on the paper for the plotter output The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent where the plotter output will be located Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the softkey label If four plots per page are chosen this function allows you to select the location on the paper for the plotter output The quadrant of the softkey label graphically represents where the plotter output will be located Press this key so that PLT is underlined Make sure that OFF is underlined unless you are plotting to a laserjet Press this key to copy the spectrum analyzer display to the plotter For a multi pen plotter the pens of the plotter draw the different components of the screen as follows Pen Description Number Draws the annotation and graticule Draws trace A Draws trace B Draws trace C and the display line Draws user generated graphics and the lower limit line a no fF V N Draws the upper limit line Printing after Plotting or Plotting after Printing Pressing withou
166. L function is enabled a frequency marker is enabled at the position of the first marker Use the data controls to position the marker Annotation in the active function block and in the upper right corner indicates the frequency and amplitude of the marker The marker stays on the trace at the horizontal screen position where it was left unless MK TRACK ON OFF MARKER AMPTD or a marker to softkey function such as MARKER CF MARKER gt REF LVL MARKER CF STEP MARKER A SPAN or MARKER MINIMUM is selected Pressing MARKER NORMAL turns off the marker delta function Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended activates a marker in the gate utility The MARKER ON key is accessed from within the pulse parameter entry menus in the gate utility If the reference edge parameter is being entered MARKER ON turns on a trigger marker For pulse width and pulse repetition interval entry it turns on a delta marker The delta marker will be activated at the defined reference edge if one is available Otherwise it will activate at mid screen Front Panel Key Access 7 54 Key Descriptions MAX HOLD A MAX HOLD B MAX MXR LVL MEAS OFF MEAS USER MEM LOCKED MIN HOLD C MIXER BIAS DAC maintains the maximum level for each trace point of trace A Updates each trace point if a new maximum level is detected in successive sweeps Front Panel Key Access maintains the maximum level for each trac
167. LEFT Making Measurements 4 13 Example The signal can be continuously demodulated if the spectrum analyzer is in zero span lL 2 Place the marker on a signal of interest as in steps 1 through 3 of the previous example If the signal of interest is the highest amplitude on screen signal set the frequency of the signal to center frequency by pressing MKR FCTN then MK TRACK ON OFF ON If it is not the highest amplitude on screen signal move the signal to center screen by pressing and MARKER CF If marker track is on press and 1 to reduce the span to 1 MHz If marker track is not used use the step down key J_ to reduce the span and use MARKER CF to keep the signal of interest at center screen Set the span to zero by pressing ZERO SPAN ZERO SPAN turns off the marker track function Change the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz by pressing and entering 100 kHz 6 Set the signal in the top two divisions of the screen by changing the reference level Press AMPLITUDE and then the step down key C _ until the signal is in the top two divisions Press AUX CTRL Demod DEMOD ON OFF ON then DEMOD AM FM FM SPEAKER ON OFF is set to ON by the preset function Use the front panel volume control to control the speaker s volume For FM demodulation use FM GAIN to adjust the top to bottom screen deviation of the signal with center screen as the reference 0 deviation The top is the positive deviation
168. MC FC A EIA L CUAR CENTER 104 8813 MHz SPAN 500 0 kHz RESBW1 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP3 0 msec Figure 3 11 Viewing an Unstable Signal With Max Hold Clear Write and Min Hold Making Basic Measurements 3 11 Comparing Signals Using Delta Markers Using the spectrum analyzer you can easily compare frequency and amplitude differences between signals such as radio or television signal spectra The spectrum analyzer delta marker function lets you compare two signals when both appear on the screen at one time or when only one appears on the screen Example Measure the differences between two signals on the same display screen 1 Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 500 Press PRESET For the HP 85933 only set the center frequency to 900 MHz and the span to 1 8 GHz press FREQUENCY 900 MHz SPAN 1 8 GHz The calibration signal and its harmonics appear on the display 2 Press to place a marker at the highest peak on the display The NEXT PK RIGHT and NEXT PK LEFT softkeys move the marker from peak to peak Press NEXT PK RIGHT to move the marker to the 300 MHz calibration signal See Figure 3 12 The signal that appears at the left edge of the screen is the spectrum analyzer local oscillator LO and represents O Hz 47 MKR 311 MHz REF dBm ATTEN 18 dB 20 15 dem PEAK LOG 10 JB i im
169. MP COR PURGE LIMITS PWRGRA PH ON OFF Option 041 or 043 only allows the softkey labels to be printed along with the spectrum analyzer display This function operates when the copy key is used in a print configuration The PRT MENU function is set to ON when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended accesses the gate utility menus for entering the pulse parameters reference edge pulse width and pulse repetition interval If pulse parameters have previously been entered pressing Pulse Param causes a list of the current values to be displayed Front Panel Key Access clears the current amplitude correction factors table Pressing PURGE AMP COR displays the message If you are sure press key againtopurge data Pressing PURGE AMP COR a second time clears the amplitude correction data Press SAVE AMP COR to save amplitude correction factors and then press PURGE AMP COR to clear the current amplitude correction factors table Front Panel Key Access CAL clears the current limit line table from spectrum analyzer memory Pressing PURGE LIMITS displays the message If you are sure press key again to purge data Press PURGE LIMITS againifyou wish to clear the current limit line table Press SAVE LIMIT to save the current limit line table and then press PURGE LIMITS to clear the current limit line table Front Panel Key Access turns the channel power graph ON or OFF
170. Menu ABCDEF GHEJKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ_ Spe Clear More 1 of 2 CATALOG ON EVENT xit Catalog More 2 of 2 SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalag Previous Menu EDIT LAST EDIT CAT ITEM APND CAT ITEM SAVE EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu a o lt gt 201 OH HK Edit Done More 2 of 2 CATALOG DLP _ Editor ee DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu EDIT LAST EDIT CATITEM APND CAT ITEM SAVE EDIT NEW E DIT Previous Menu Key Menus 8 1 8 12 Key Menus FORRECALL NGAND SAVINGTO MEMORY CARD tiat SAVE STATE gt CARD Trace gt Card DISPLAY gt CARD ALL GLP gt CARD Catalog Card INTERNAL CARD is FRACE A TRACE B TRACE C LIMIT LINES AMP COR Previous Menu CATALOG ALL CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES CATALOG PREF IX Change Prefix More 1 of 2 for FILE DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu Pecos GHI JKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ_ Spe Clear More 1 af 2 CATALOG DLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMTLIN CATALOG DISPLAY Exit Catalog More 2 of 2 a SGL SPAN SPAN SPAN FULL ZERO LAST PEAK ZOOM SPAN SPAN SPAN ZOOM with CARD selected or Caa lt gt 0 ANALES Catone Moree 2 of 2 LOAD FILE DELETEFILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu PU128 PUI2Z7 SWEEP SWP TIME AUTOMAN GATE DELAY 13 14 SWEEP CONTSGL GATE LENGTH 13 14 GATE ON OFF 153 EDGE P
171. N OFF Previous Menu COPY DEV PRNT PLT Plot Config Print Config Time Date Change Prefix More 1 of 3 pul32el Figure 6 7 Plot Configure Menu 4 Turn on the spectrum analyzer and the plotter 5 The plotter usually resides at device address 5 To configure the plotter address to 5 on the spectrum analyzer press Plot Config Plt Port Config pLT PORT yptp PAR PLOTTER ADDRESS 5 Hz Press this key to access the configuration menu Press this key to access the plotter menu Press this key to access the plotter configuration menu o that HPIB is underlined 6 Referring to Figure 6 7 select the plotter configuration for your spectrum analyzer by pressing the appropriate keys Plot Config PLTS PG 124 PLT LOC PLT _ LOC COPY DEV PRNT PLT PLT gt LJT ON OFF 6 8 Printing and Plotting Press this key to access the configuration menu Press this key to access the plotter configuration menu Press this key to underline the number of plots per page desired Choose 1 2 or 4 plots per page see Figure 6 2 If two plots per page are chosen this function allows you to select the location on the paper for the plotter output The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent where the plotter output will be located Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the softkey label If four plots per page are chosen this function allows you
172. O 5 OUTPUT R ExT i OAA KEYBOARD S no beza 5 3 Jo e o AAA MON TOR AUX INTERFACE OUTPUT pul2del Figure 4 31 Rear Panel Connections for Option 105 4 36 Making Measurements 2 Press PRESET J FREQUENCY O Hz SPAN ZERO SPAN SWEEP 200 ms Gate Control GATE DELAY 60 ms GATE LENGTH 60 ms The GATE CTL EDGE LVL softkey should have EDGE underlined and EDGE POL POS NEG should have POS underlined 3 Press Previous Menu GATE ON OFF so that ON is underlined see Figure 4 32 Note This procedure offers a qualitative functional check only Due to several factors the accuracy of the marker readout of the gate delay and gate length can vary by several milliseconds For more information about gate timing see the Characteristics in specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for your spectrum analyzer 9 A REF 100_ dBm ATTEN 10 dB 7 GTPOS LOG 10 dB GATE LENGTH 1 60 000 msec WA SBI SC FC CORR CENTER 0 Hz ae SPAN O Hz RES BW 3 0 Mhz VBW 1 MHz SWP 200 msec Figure 4 32 Gate On Description of Items in Figure 4 32 Represents the gate delay The gate is off during the gate delay Represents the gate is on and the HI SWEEP IN OUT sig Making Measurements 4 37 4 To check the gate control f
173. OG LMT LINE 7 19 CATALOG ON EVENT 7 19 CATALOG PREFIX 7 20 CATALOG REGISTER 7 2 1 CATALOG STATES 7 2 1 CATALOG TRACES 7 2 1 CATALOG VARIABLS 7 2 1 CATV measurements 10 2 CATV system monitor 10 2 CDMA firmware Option 160 10 11 CDMA measurements 10 2 CENTER FREQ 7 21 Index 3 center frequency 7 21 window zone 7 92 center frequency step size 7 2 1 CF STEP AUTO MAN 7 21 change function values 2 8 change prefix edit done 7 36 Change Prefix 7 21 Change Title 7 22 changing windows 7 58 CHANNEL BANDWDTH 7 22 channel power using 4 48 49 CHANNEL POWER 7 23 channel power measurement 4 43 CHANNEL SPACING 7 23 characters 7 5 7 47 7 82 7 92 checking the fuse 1 5 check spectrum analyzer operation 7 27 CISPR testing 7 38 Clear 7 23 clear display active function area 2 8 clearing a service request A l clearing the active function 7 48 CLEAR PARAM 7 23 CLEAR QP DATA 7 23 CLEAR WRITE A 7 24 CLEAR WRITE B 7 25 CLEAR WRITE C 7 26 close field probes 10 15 CNTL A 0 1 7 26 CNTL B 0 1 7 26 CNTL C 0 1 7 26 CNTL D 0 1 7 26 CNT RES AUTO MAN 3 6 7 26 COARSE TUNE DAC 7 2 7 27 COMB GEN ON OFF 3 26 7 27 command complete A l commands dispose all 7 39 7 40 7 41 front panel execution 7 41 common measurements stimulus response 4 7 12 common preset conditions 7 66 comparing signals 3 12 confidence test 7 27 9 2 CONFIG 7 27 configuration plotter 7 63 7 64 printer 7 69
174. OL POS NEG 3 14 SWEEP DELAY 15 Gate Contro1 GATE CTL EDGE tv s T WINDOW SWP TIME S GATE UTILITY 5 rh T WINDOW RES Bw13 Previous Menu TRIG MKR ON OFF S Main Menu Define Time 13 Define Gate 13 GATE DELAY 13 14 Define Couptingl3 GATE LENGTH 13 14 GATE ON OFF 13 UPDATE TIMEFREO1S TRIG MKR ON OFF 13 EXITUTILITY 13 UPDATE T IMEFREQ 3 SWEEP DELAY 13 Main Menul3 TWINDOW SWP T ME1S ENTER REF EDGE gt Pulse Parom 3 ENTER WIDTH 13 MARKER on 3 ENTER PRI 15 DONE S CPLREWON OFF 13 CLEAR PARAM CPL BW ON OFF IS is SWEEP DELAY 13 teo previous Menu T WINDOW SWETIME 13 13 Option 105 only MARKER ON 13 14 Appears only iff GATE CTL edge ZERO MARKER 13 EDGE is selected DONE PUTTY with TraceA selected TRACE CLEAR WRITE A MAX HOLD A 15 VIEW A VIDAVGON OFF BLANK A DETECTOR SMP PK 23 Nore HORMLIZEPOSITION M78 A ON OFF A B DL gt B a lt gt B gt Wore 2 of 3 O B gt C Changesto MINHOLD C when More 3 of 3 traceC 1s selected Changes to DETECTOR PK SPNG for option101 Key Menus 8 13 TRIG SWEEP CONT SGL FREE RUN VIDEO TV LINE 5 LINE TU VO TRIGODOF LO EXTERNAL 3 TV TRIGEVEN FLOS NTSC SYNCCPD TV TRIG Ty TRIG VERT INTI PALM3 TV SYNC NEG POS 3 PAL3 T V_Standard3 SECAM 15 Previous Menu 3 3 options 10ta nd 102 0r3 01 only pul24e 20 WINDOWS NEXT Z00M ZONE CENTEP Togglesbetween Togg es between ZONE SPAN windows
175. OWS ION at this point turns the windows display format on again with the current display as the new upper window A new lower window will be generated based on the zone in the upper window Note Markers and limit lines can be used in both windows but they must be turned on independently in each window The current limit lines will be common to both windows 5 34 Using Analyzer Features Learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors This section provides an overview of amplitude correction a procedure for creating amplitude correction data and descriptions of the amplitude correction functions Refer to Key Descriptions in Chapter 7 for more information on a specific amplitude correction function Amplitude corrections provide an easy way to adjust trace data with a set of amplitude and frequency parameters while the spectrum analyzer is sweeping the measurement range Every measurement sweep of data is adjusted by the amplitude correction values When using the amplitude correction functions an A is displayed at the left hand side of the graticule edge REF 0 dBm ATTEN1 0 dB PEAK i LOG BN dB r WA V SC FC ACORR CENTER 300 0 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW1 MHz SWP2 0 msec Figure 5 1 1 Amplitude Correction Display em Description of Items in Figure 5 11 Indicates amplitude correction factors are on Amplitude corrections
176. P 85717A CT2 CAI measurements personality provides RF transmitter measurements for testing CT2 cordless telephone handsets and bases The measurements include mean carrier power carrier off power adjacent channel power out of band power spurious emissions intermodulation attenuation and frequency error deviation The CT2 CAI measurements personality is a downloadable program on a memory card DECT Measurements Personality For use with the HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 85963 only The HP 85723A measurements personality provides RF transmitter measurements for testing DECT Digital European Cordless Telephone handsets and base stations The measurements include mean carrier power adjacent channel power due to modulation adjacent channel power due to switching transients spurious emissions intermodulation attenuation frequency error and frequency deviation The DECT measurements personality is a downloadable program on a memory card Digital Radio Measurements Personality For use with the HP 8592L HP 85935 HP 8594E HP 8594L HP 8595E or HP 8596E The HP 8592L and HP 8594L must have Option 003 The HP 85713A digital radio measurements card provides an easy way to measure band occupancy and transmitter spurious outputs as well as determine the sources of interference including external broadcast or multipath effects The digital radio measurements personality is a downloadable program on a memory card It qualifies the occup
177. P 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 with Option 010 What Are Stimulus Response Measurements Stimulus response measurements require a source to stimulate a device under test DUT a receiver to analyze the frequency response characteristics of the DUT and for return loss measurements a directional coupler Characterization of a DUT can be made in terms of its transmission or reflection parameters Examples of transmission measurements include flatness and rejection A reflection measurement is return loss A spectrum analyzer combined with a tracking generator forms a stimulus response measurement system With the tracking generator as the swept source and the spectrum analyzer as the receiver operation is analogous to a single channel scalar network analyzer A narrow band system has a wide dynamic measurement range but the tracking generator s output frequency must be made to precisely track the spectrum analyzer input frequency This wide dynamic range will be illustrated in the following example Figure 4 3 shows the block diagram of a spectrum analyzer and tracking generator system SPECTRUM ANALYZER TRACK I NG GEN Figure 4 3 Block Diagram of a Spectrum Analyzer Tracking Generator Measurement System Note The HP 85630A Transmission Reflection Test Set with the HP 85714A Scalar Measurement Personality is recommended for making transmission and reflection measurements with your spectrum analyzer The scalar m
178. PLT MENU ON OFF function is set to OFF when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed Front Panel Key Access Option 041 or 043 only accesses the menus used by Option 041 HP IB and Parallel Interface and Option 043 RS 232 and Parallel Interface to select plotter options See the key for more information Front Panel Key Access Option 041 only allows you to select between HP IB or parallel plotter ports Option 043 only allows you to select between serial or parallel plotter ports The BAUD RATE softkey appears in this menu only when serial is selected Option 041 or 043 only allows you to plot a full page half page or quarter page output Selecting two plots per page requires a plotter that has the rotate command RO The plotter will be set to a full page output when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed Front Panel Key Access Option 04 or 043 only allows you to plot a full page half page or quarter page output to an HP LaserJet printer This softkey can be accessed by pressing CONFIG then Plot Config Front Panel Key Access specifies a limit value for one coordinate point so that a POINT segment specifies a limit value for a single frequency or time For an upper limit line a POINT segment is indicated by a line drawn vertically from the coordinate point to a point off the top of screen For a lower limit line a POINT segment is indicated by a line drawn vertically from the coordinate point to a point off the bottom of screen
179. Prefix register register 4 lt 8 characters i current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters i current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters I current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters a current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters a current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters d current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters d current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters Key Sequence STATE gt CARD register ENTER CARD gt STATE register ENTER SAVE Trace Card TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C register Card Trace TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C register ENTER DISPLAY gt CARD register 4 CARD DISPLAY register ENTER Trace gt Card LIMIT LINES register ENTER Card gt Trace LIMIT LINES register ENTER SAVE Trace Card AMP COR register Card Trace AMP COR register ENTER ALL DLP gt CARD register ENTER RECALL CARD DLP register ENTER the key sequence RECALL Catalog Card CATALOG ALL use the knob to highlight the desired file then LOAD FILE The screen title is part of the display image but is an image only It is not ti
180. Q softkey starts the frequency self calibration routine This routine adjusts the frequency sweep time and span accuracy in approximately 2 minutes The CAL AMPTD softkey starts the amplitude calibration routine This routine takes approximately 3 minutes 7 minutes with Option 130 to adjust the bandwidths log and linear switching IF gains IF frequency centering RF attenuation and log amplifier When the amplitude calibration routine has finished the preset display returns and CAL DONE is displayed Although the spectrum analyzer stores the correction factors in battery backed RAM the data will not be saved when the spectrum analyzer power is turned off unless the data has been stored with CAL STORE Using CAL STORE stores the correction factors in an area of spectrum analyzer memory that is accessed when the spectrum analyzer is turned on After the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines are complete CORR corrected now appears on the left side of the screen indicating that the spectrum analyzer is using its frequency and amplitude correction factors Correction factors can be turned off by pressing CORRECT ON OFF When OFF is underlined most amplitude correction factors and some frequency correction factors are not used If the self calibration routines cannot be performed see Check the Basics in Chapter 9 Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine Option 010 or 011 only In order for the track
181. RAMETER _ _ _ The specified value parameter is invalid U INVALID VARDEF _ _ _ The specified variable name is not allowed To avoid this problem use an underscore as the second character in the variable label or avoid beginning the variable label with the following pairs of letters LB OA OL TA TB TR MA MF TS OT and DR U INVALID WINDOW TYPE _ _ _ The specified window is invalid See the description for the TWNDOW programming command U LOST SIGNAL For the HP 8592L HP 8593E or HP 85963 this message indicates that the cable from the 100 MHz COMB OUT connector to the spectrum analyzer input is defective or has become disconnected during the CAL YTF routine For the HP 85953 this message indicates that the cable from the CAL OUT connector is defective or has been disconnected during the CAL YTF routine Be sure to use a short low loss cable to connect the signal to the spectrum analyzer input when performing the CAL YTF routine U LO UNLVL Indicates that the spectrum analyzer local oscillator distribution amplifier is not functioning properly H Marker Count Reduce SPAN Indicates the resolution bandwidth to span ratio is too small to use the marker count function Check the span and resolution bandwidth settings U Marker Count Widen RES BW Indicates that the current resolution bandwidth setting is too narrow to use with the marker counter function The marker counter function can be in narrow resolution ba
182. Reference Option 004 For HP 8591E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 85963 only This option provides increased absolute frequency reference accuracy because the internal oscillators are phase locked to an internal precision frequency reference Option 004 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R04 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5062 6459 LO and Sweep Tune Outputs on Rear Panel Option 009 Fbr HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 85963 only Option 009 provides local oscillator output and sweep tune output at the rear panel for use with external tracking sources such as HP 85644A and HP 85645A Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories 10 5 Tracking Generator Option 010 and Option 011 For HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only Option 010 provides a 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz built in tracking generator This source receiver combination makes insertion loss frequency response and return loss measurements The tracking generator has a wide distortion free dynamic range plus good sensitivity and selectivity Option 010 has the standard 500 output impedance HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 85963 Option 010 is also available with factory installation Option K10 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer For HP 8590L and HP 8591E only Option 010 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz or 011 1 MHz to 1 8 GHz provides a built in tracking generator Option 010 has the stand
183. S BW 3 8 MHZ VBW 1 MHz SWP 58 8 msec RL Figure 5 2 Peak Table Display 5 4 Using Analyzer Features Example Use the peak table function to measure the calibrator signal and its harmonics 1 Connect the CAL OUT signal to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 and press PRESET 2 Press ira sma More 1 of 2 and PK TABLE ON OFF ON to turn on the peak table display 3 The displayed peaks are listed by amplitude with the highest amplitude signal listed first The table can be sorted by frequency instead of amplitude In this mode the lowest frequency peak is listed first with the others listed in order of increasing frequency Press PK SORT FRQ AMP to underline FRQ and list the signals by frequency 4 The harmonics are numbered on the display in order of their listing in the peak table The table can be limited to list only the signals above a certain power level Change the peak table from the normal mode to the display line mode by pressing PK MODE lt gt DL NRM to underline gt DL The knob can then be used to move the display line to identify only the desired peaks above the display line 5 Press PK MODE lt gt DL MRM again to underline lt DL and move the display line to identify only the peaks that fall below the display line Note The peak table data can be printed by pressing the key The peak table cannot be saved or recalled Using Analyzer Features 5 5 Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory This sec
184. T If MAX REG appears on the spectrum analyzer display the current mass storage device is spectrum analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press SAVE or RECALL then INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device To recall a limit line enter the register number that the limit line tables was saved under then press ENTER When recalling a limit line from the memory card it may be necessary to change the current prefix to the prefix with which the limit line was stored Press Change Prefix to change the current prefix When saved in spectrum analyzer memory the register number is restricted to the range between 0 and the number x indicated by MAX REG x The screen title is not recalled with the limit line tables Front Panel Key Access allows the reference level to be changed This function is activated when is pressed The reference level is the amplitude power or voltage represented by the top graticule line on the screen Changing the value of the reference level changes the absolute amplitude level in dBm of the top graticule line Pressing any digit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE adds an offset value to the displayed reference level Offsets are entered by using the number units keypad Entering an offset does not affect the trace or the attenuation value Reference level offsets are used
185. TALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES CATALOG VARIABLS CENTER FREQ CF STEP AUTO MAN Change Prefix Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE_ Requires Option 003 for an HP 8590L HP 8592L or HP 8594L catalogs all of the states stored on the memory card Front Panel Key Access RECALL or Requires Option 003 for an HP 8590L HP 85921 or HP 8594L catalogs all of the traces stored on the memory card Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE catalogs all of the variables saved in spectrum analyzer memory Variables can be saved in analyzer memory by loading in a downloadable program from the memory card or defining a function using remote programming commands VARDEF or TRDEP Front Panel Key Access or activates the center frequency function to allow the selection of frequency that will be at the center of the screen Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL MEAS USER or FREQUENCY changes the step size for the center frequency function Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is activated the step keys change center frequency by the step size value The step size function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the spectrum analyzer current frequency span When auto coupled the center frequency step size is set to one graticule 10 percent of the span Front Panel Key Access AUTO COUPLE or FREQUENCY allows you to enter a prefix that can be used for saving and recalling
186. TE OUTPUT must be connected to EXT TRIG INPUT If no trigger is present an error message is displayed Connect a trigger input or press instrument preset to exit the gate utility If the gate utility menus are exited by pressing one of the front panel keys they may be re entered by pressing twice Some spectrum analyzer functions are altered or are not available when the gate utility is active see Table 7 8 From within the gate utility press EXIT UTILITY to return to normal spectrum analyzer operation Press twice and EXIT UTILITY to return to the gate utility and then exit it properly Table 7 8 Commands Altered Not Available within the Gate Utility Command Description of Change AM measurement function is not available Adjacent Channel Power measurement function is not available Calibration no calibration functions can be accessed Channel Power measurement function is not available FFT measurement function is not available N dB Points measurement function is not available Occupied Bandwidth measurement function is not available Peak Zoom routine is not available Res BW turns off resolution BW coupling to pulse width Span must be zero in the time domain window Sweep time turns off sweep time coupling to PRI TOl measurement function is not available Video BW turns off video BW coupling to gate length Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used for selecting screen title or prefix characters G through L
187. TIL statements that can be nested is 20 U INVALID RS 232 ADRS OPERATION An RS 232 operation was aborted due to an invalid operation U INVALID SAVE REG Data has not been saved in the specified state or trace register or the data is corrupt U INVALID SCRMOVE Indicates the spectrum analyzer may have a hardware failure See The spectrum analyzer Service Guide for more information H INVALID START INDEX Indicates that the first trace element specified for a range of trace elements is not within the trace range of the specified trace U INVALID STOP INDEX Indicates that the ending trace element specified for a range of trace elements is not within the trace range of the specified trace U INVALID STORE DEST ___ The specified destination field is invalid U INVALID TRACE The specified trace is invalid U INVALID TRACE NAME _ _ _ The specified trace name is not allowed Use an underscore as the second character in the trace name or avoid beginning the trace name with the following pairs of letters LB OA OL TA TB TR MA MF TS OT and DR U INVALID TRACENAME _ _ _ Indicates the specified trace could not be saved because the trace name is not allowed To avoid this problem use an underscore as the second character in the trace name or avoid beginning the trace name with the following pairs of letters LB OA OL TA TB TR MA MF TS OT and DR U 9 12 If You Have A Problem INVALID VALUE PA
188. TV Measurements and System Monitor Personality The HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 85941 must have O ption 003 The HP 85721A Cable TV Measurements Personality provides one button diagnostic measurements automatic system test and monitoring and with Option 107 non interfering RF and video measurements including FCC proof of performance are available This downloadable program on a memory card additionally includes the functionality of both the HP 85711B and the HP 85716A Cable TV Measurement Personalities The use of this personality is limited in the HP 8590L and the HP 8592L spectrum analyzers CDMA Measurements Personality For use with the HP 8591E HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 8595 or HP 8596E The HP 85725B CDMA measurements personality provides RF transmitter measurements for testing CDMA cellular radio mobile stations and base stations In addition it provides channel plans for IS 95 J STD 008 Korean and ARIB T53 Japan Standards The measurements include transmit and receive RF channel power in band and out of band spurious emissions standby output power occupied bandwidth gated output power time response to open loop power control and others The HP 85725B CDMA measurements personality is a downloadable program on a memory card See Option 053 in this chapter 10 2 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories CT2 CAI Measurements Personality For use with the HP 8591E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E The H
189. The POINT segment type is generally used as the last segment in the limit line table However if the last segment in the table is not of the POINT segment type an implicit point is automatically added at the right hand side of the screen If a visible POINT segment at the right hand edge of the display is not desired add an explicit last point segment to the limit line table that is higher in frequency than the stop frequency Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY 7 64 Key Descriptions Power Menu POWER ON IP LAST accesses functions which make transmitter power measurements The measurements are designed for analog radio or continuous carrier digital radio signals If another front panel key is pressed exiting the power menus press the key twice to return to the last power menu that was being used Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER determines the state of the spectrum analyzer when the spectrum analyzer is powered on If the POWER ON function is set to IP the state of the spectrum analyzer is the same as it is after is pressed when the spectrum analyzer is powered on If the POWER ON function is set to LAST then the state that the spectrum analyzer was left in when it was powered off is recalled The setting IP or LAST of the POWER ON function is not changed by pressing PRESET Use the POWER ON IP LAST softkey function to change the setting of the spectrum analyzer state which is recalled at power on Limit lines are not re
190. The deviation is entered by pressing SELECT DLT AMPL entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key Note Frequency or amplitude values that are not within the limit line range will be modified For example a frequency value of 60 GHz will be modified to 30 GHz Using Analyzer Features 5 25 Selecting the Segment Type Press SEGMENT TYPE then FLAT SLOPE or POINT to specify the segment type The segment type determines how to connect the coordinate point of the current line segment with the coordinate point of the next line segment The segment type determines whether the line segment is horizontal vertical sloped or a single point The three segment types are 1 Flat draws a zero slope line between the coordinate point of the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment producing limit line values equal in amplitude for all frequencies or times between the two points If the amplitude values of the two segments differ the limit line will step to the value of the second segment see Figure 5 7 2 Slope draws a straight line between the coordinate point of the current segment and the the two points 3 Point specifies a limit value for the coordinate point It specifies a limit at a single frequency indicated by a line drawn from the coordinate point vertically off the top of screen For a lower limit line a point segment is indicated by a line drawn from the coordinate point segment in t
191. The spectrum analyzer calculates and displays The total power in dBm other units selectable The power spectral density in dBm Hz other units selectable Example Measure the total power in a signal R 2 Connect a signal to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Press FREQUENCY and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency Press and adjust the reference level to bring the signal near the top of the display Press MEAS USER and Power Menu to access the power measurement functions Press Setup and CHANNEL BANDWDTH Enter the value for the channel bandwidth The spectrum analyzer will use the last entered value for channel bandwidth if it is not entered Press CHANNEL SPACING and enter the value for channel spacing This is optional and is only used to set the center frequency step size Press Previous Menu to return to the main power menu Press CHANNEL POWER to activate the function K4 REF 20 0 dBm AT 30 o8 SINGLE SMPL CHANNEL POWER MEAS LOG Pwr 13 71 dBm 10 ETT TEM7AZ CSP 4D 00 kHz CONT d8 A CEW BO cdl kH MEAS CENTER FRED f PWRGRAPH A ON OFF Setup Y ay l l Previous Menu Y CENTER B25 03000 MHz SPAN 60 00 kHz RES BW 1 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 300 msec Figure 4 41 Channel Power 4 48 Making Measurements 8
192. This option provides built in demodulation capability for making DECT Digital European Cordless Telephone measurements It must be used with HP 85723A measurements personality to make frequency and deviation measurements on DECT handsets and base stations Option 112 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R06 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer Noise Figure Option 119 For HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 8595 and HP 8596E only This option along with the HP 85719A Noise Figure Measurement Personality provide displayed swept noise figure and gain measurements from 10 MHz to 2 9 GHz Option 119 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R19 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5063 0247 Narrow Resolution Bandwidths Option 130 For HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 8596E only This option provides additional narrow resolution bandwidths of 30 Hz 100 Hz and 300 Hz These bandwidths improve the spectrum analyzer sensitivity and allow you to resolve closely spaced signals Option 130 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R30 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5063 0246 Narrow Resolution Bandwidths and Precision Frequency Reference Option 140 For HP 8591E HP 8593E HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 only This option is a combination of Option 130 and Option 004 Option 140 provides additional narrow resolution bandwidths of 30 Hz
193. Ti 4 00 V div offset 2 062 Y 10001 de 2 B 00 V div offset7500mv 1 000 1 dr y 200 mV div offset 0 000 V 1 000 1 de ga 4 00 V div offset O 00 Y 1 000 1 de Pp 50 0 us div Description of Items in Figure 4 26 Output from pulse generator 1 Output from pulse generator 2 Pulsed RF signal input to the spectrum analyzer Gate output from Option 105 Notice that the gate output is directly below signal 2 10 Set the resolution bandwidth to a value that is greater than 2 divided by the gate delay 110 ps minus the signal delay 85 ys The resolution bandwidth should be set to greater than 2 divided by 25 ys or greater than 80 kHz Press BW RES BW 100 kHz 11 Since the gate length was not changed the video bandwidth is still 100 kHz Making Measurements 4 31 Figure 4 27 shows the first pulsed RF signal contained in trace A and the second pulsed RF signal contained in trace B we REF dBm ATTEN 18 dB BATE ATATA PNET ia KAOTE TO SEIA N ie a DELAS pecen SATE LENGTH EDGE POL POS NEG GATE CTL EDGE LVL PREV MENU CENTER 50 000 MHz SPAN 5 808 MHz RES BW 188 kHz VBH 100 kHz SHP 128 Figure 4 27 Viewing Both Signals with Time Gating 4 32 Making Measurements Setting the Gate Delay and Gate Length Properly When NOT Using the Gate Utility If the gate delay and gate length are not set properly you may not be viewing an accurate representation
194. U Required option not installed Some spectrum analyzer functions require that an option be installed in the spectrum analyzer See the description for the function in the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers User s Guide for more information about which option is required U RES BW NOISE FAIL Indicates the noise floor level is incorrect at the indicated bandwidth H RES BW SHAPE FAIL Indicates the 3 dB bandwidth is not within specifications H RF PRESEL ERROR Indicates that the preselector peak routine cannot be performed H RF PRESEL TIMEOUT Indicates that the preselector peak routine cannot be performed H SAMPLE FAIL Indicates the sample detector has failed H SETUP ERROR Indicates that the span channel bandwidth or channel spacing are not set correctly for the adjacent channel power or channel power measurement U SIGNAL NOT FOUND Indicates the PEAK ZOOM routine did not find a valid signal U 9 14 If You Have A Problem SIGNAL CLIPPED Indicates that the current FFT measurement sweep resulted in a trace that is above the top graticule line on the spectrum analyzer display If this happens the input trace trace A has been clipped and the FFT data is not valid U Signals do not fit expected AM pattern Indicates that the AM routine cannot perform the percent AM measurement because the on screen signals do not have the characteristics of a carrier with two sidebands U Signals
195. UT 509 Figure 4 4 Transmission Measurement Test Setup 3 Activate the tracking generator menu by pressing AUX CTRL and Track Gen To activate the tracking generator power level press SRC PWR ON OFF until ON is underlined see Figure 4 5 Caution Excessive signal input may damage the DUT Do not exceed the maximum power that the device under test can tolerate Note To reduce ripples caused by source return loss use 10 dB or greater tracking generator output attenuation Tracking generator output attenuation is normally a function of the source power selected However the output attenuation may be controlled by using SRC ATN AUTO MAN There is no output attenuation in the HP 8590L with Option 010 or Option 011 Refer to specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for more information on the relationship between source power and source attenuation 4 8 Making Measurements REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB PEAK LOG 10 d8 SAL POWE 10 50 dB L CENTER 9908 MHZ S PANN 20D2GHzz AES BW 3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 mseec Figure 4 5 Tracking Generator Output Power Activated 4 Put the sweep time of the analyzer into stimulus response auto coupled mode by pressing More 1 of 2 then SWP CPLG SR SA until SR stimulus response mode is underlined Auto coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements than they are
196. User s Guide HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers O HEWLETT PACKARD HP Part No 08590 90301 Supersedes 08590 90234 Printed in USA July 1998 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Copyright 1994 1995 1998 Hewlett Packard Company Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product m
197. V line number that the spectrum analyzer triggers on internally the line number displayed when TV LINE is pressed does not change Pressing PAL changes the video modulation to negative set TV SYNC MEG POS so that POS is underlined if positive video modulation is reauired Front Panel Key Access TRIG Options 101 and 102 or O ption 301 only allows you to trigger on the PAL M video format PAL M alters the TV line number the spectrum analyzer triggers on internally the line number displayed by TV LINE does not change PAL M changes the video modulation to negative use TV SYNC NEG POS POS if positive video modulation is reauired Front Panel Key Access TRIG Key Descriptions 7 61 PARAM AUTO MAN PEAK EXCURSM lets the user choose between automatically or manually setting the parameters used for the measurement functions under the Power Menu softkey Parameters such as span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth center frequency step size detector mode and sweep time are coupled so that they are automatically updated With AUTO underlined when channel bandwidth or channel spacing are changed the coupled parameters will be updated and another sweep will be taken and measured If MAN is underlined the user must set all of the parameters correctly Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER sets the minimum amplitude variation of signals that the marker can identify as a peak If a value of 10 dB is selected the marker moves
198. W 1 MHz SHP2 0 msec Figure 3 28 Using Harmonic Lock Note The comb frequencies have a 100 MHz spacing MKA A 201 3 MHz REF dBm ATTEN 0 GB 89 dB PEAK LOG 10 dB CENTER 12 9000 GHz SPAN 350 0 MHz RES BW 3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP4 0 msec Figure 3 29 Harmonic Locking Off Making Basic Measurements 3 27 Making Measurements What You ll Learn in This Chapter This chapter demonstrates spectrum analyzer measurement techniques with examples of typical applications each application focuses on different features The measurement procedures covered in this chapter are listed below Measuring amplitude modulation using the fast Fourier transform function m Stimulus response measurements using the built in tracking generator Option 010 or 011 Demodulating and listening to an AM or FM signal Option 102 or 103 only m Triggering on a selected line of a video picture field Options 101 and 102 or Option 301 only Making a reflection calibration and measurements m Using the Gate Utility to simplify time gated measurements Option 105 only m Using the time gated spectrum analyzer capability Option 105 only Using the one button measurements to measure N dB bandwidth percent amplitude modulation and third order intercept TOD m Using the power measurement functions to make transmitter measurements To find descriptions of specific s
199. Y SET TIME SET DATE Previous Menu ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPQR STUVWX YZ_ Spe Clear More 1 of 2 Card Config Dispose User Mem ANALYZER ADDRESS 8 DEFAULT CONF G SHOW OPTIONS More 2 of 3 COPY Set Colr Printer 7 4 OPTION 041 PRN POPT HP B PAP PLTPORTHPIBP A P PRINTER ADDRESS PLOTTEF ADDRESS Previous Menu OPTION 043 PRN PORT SER PAR PLT PORT SER PAR BAUD RATE 36 Prev lous Menu HP B amp W PRINTER HP B amp W DJ540 EP MX80 SML LRG EP LQ570SML LRG Previous Menu PAINTJET PRINTER DESKJET 310 5500 DESKJET 540 Previous Menu Omar lt gt fA AE Edit Done More 2 of 2 CATALOG CARD FORMAT CARD BLANK CARD Previous Menu ERASE MEM CARD ERASE DLP MEM ERASE STATE ALLI ERASE TRACE ALL 2 ERASE MEM ALL Previous Menu POWER ON IP LAST SYNC NRM NTSC DEFAULT S NC SYNC NPM PAL More 3 OF 3 pqlsel PU17 Key Menus 8 5 DisPLAY NN HOLD 20 DSP LiNE OF 34 Change Title LimitLines ANALOG ON OFF 3 More 1 of 2 AECDEF GHIJKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ_ Spc Clear More 1 of 2 RECALL LIMIT SAVE LIMIT Change Tit ISP YN Limit GRAT ON OFF ANNOTATN ON OFF Prefix More 2 of 2 available an 8590L Requires Option 101 or 301 THRESHLD ON OFF 34 a lt gt 0 BH EZA RPG TITLE More 2 of 2 LIMITS FRQ TIME Edit Upper Edit Edit Un Low Mid Delt Previo
200. a HP 500 Series DeskJet a HP 2225D ThinkJet a HP 3630A PaintJet a MX 80 Epson a LQ 570 Epson a HP LaserJet o HP QuietJet or QuietJet Plus Some models support color printing Some models do not support the RS 232 interface Interconnection and Printing Instructions The RS 232 interface allows only one device to be connected to the spectrum analyzer Refer to the programmer s guide for more information on RS 232 protocol 1 Turn off the spectrum analyzer and the printer 2 Connect the printer using an RS 232 cable Figure 6 8 shows examples of some of the printers configuration switches set up for 9600 baud See your printer s documentation for more specific information 6 10 Printing and Plotting a QT OE EE Lae l 0 0 E 12345678 QUIETJET QUIETJET PLUS e PAINTJET 12345678 VEA 1 Vt 0 0 TH INKJE pul22e Figure 6 8 9600 Baud Settings for Serial Printers To set the spectrum analyzer baud rate to 9600 press Print Config Pm Port Config PRN PORT SER PAR so that SER is underlined BAUD RATE 9600 Hz To set the spectrum analyzer baud rate to 1200 press Print Config Pm Port Config PRN PORT SER PAR so that SER is underlined BAUD RATE 1200 Hz Printing and Plotting 6 4 CONF IG pu1l30el COPY Plot Print Config Time Change Prefix More Set B amp W Printer B
201. ab environment use CAL FREQ amp AMPTD monthly After being turned off overnight the spectrum analyzer will need to warm up but should not require self calibration To achieve optimal amplitude accuracy for relative measurements a Keep the spectrum analyzer in a stable environment b Use CAL FREQ amp AMPTD before beginning the first measurement c Keep the spectrum analyzer turned on between measurements d Do not use CAL FREQ amp AMPTD before subsequent measurements the amplitude drift is normally smaller than the self calibration uncertainty If you change the input signal for EXT REF IN run the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines using CAL OUT Amplitude calibration is required to improve IF centering If preselector peaking PRESEL PEAK has more than a 2 dB effect on the signal amplitude when in BAND 1 or above and in a single band sweep then perform the YTF self calibration routine and store the data with CAL STORE The YTF self calibration routine improves the preselector default values HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 8595E or HP 8596E only 2 18 Getting Started 6 If accurate self calibration is needed temporarily in a different environment use CAL FREQ amp AMPTD but do not press CAL STORE The temporary correction factors will be used until the spectrum analyzer is turned off or until CAL FETCH is pressed Memory Card Insertion and Battery Replacement The memory card reader is
202. able links and a 7 mm post type connection 9300 1 169 ESD heel strap reusable 6 to 12 months 1 12 Preparing For Use Getting Started What You ll Learn in this Chapter This chapter introduces the basic functions of the HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzers In this chapter you will m Get acquainted with the front panel and rear panel features Get acquainted with the menus and softkeys m Learn about screen annotation Make a basic measurement the calibration signal Learn how to improve measurement accuracy by using self calibration routines Learn how to insert the memory card and about the memory card battery Learn about the spectrum analyzer battery Note Before using your spectrum analyzer please read Chapter 1 Preparing for Use which describes how to set up your spectrum analyzer and how to verify that it is operational Chapter 1 describes many safety considerations that should not be overlooked Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer Front Panel Features The following section provides a brief description of front panel features Refer to Figure 2 l l Active function block is the space on the screen that indicates the active function Most functions appearing in this block can be changed using the knob step keys or data keys Message block is the space on the screen where MEAS UNCAL and the asterisk appear If one or more functions are manually set uncoupled and the amplitude
203. ackard Taiwan 8th Floor H P Building 337 Fu Hsing North Road Taipei Taiwan 886 2 712 0404 UNITED STATES EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS France Hewlett Packard France Avenue Du Canada Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf F 91947 Les Ulis Cedex France 33 1 69 82 60 60 Germany Hewlett Packard GmbH Hewlett Packard Strasse 61352 Bad Homburg v d H Germany 49 6172 16 0 INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS Australia Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 61 3 895 2895 Japan Hewlett Packard Japan Ltd 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Tokyo 192 Japan 81 426 60 2111 Canada Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 17500 South Service Road Trans Canada Highway Kirkland Quebec H9J 2X8 Canada 514 697 4232 Singapore Hewlett Packard Singapore Pte Ltd 150 Beach Road 29 00 Gateway West Singapore 07 18 65 291 9088 If You Have A Problem 9 5 How to Return Your Analyzer for Service Service Tag If you are returning the spectrum analyzer to Hewlett Packard for servicing fill in and attach a blue service tag Several service tags are supplied at the rear of this manual Please be as specific as possible about the nature of the problem If you have recorded any error messages that appeared on the screen or have completed a Performance Test Record or have any other specific data on the performance of the spectrum analyzer please send a copy of this information with the unit
204. acy of measurement results to the extent that they no longer meet specifications measurement bandwidth The resolution bandwidth required for a specific EM1 measurement For MIL STD measurements the resolution bandwidth is often determined by the tester with the approval of the contracting agency For commercial testing the measurement bandwidths required usually follow the recommendations of CISPR Band A 10 kHz to 150 kHz 200 Hz Band B 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz Band C and D 30 MHz to 1 GHz 120 kHz measurement range The ratio expressed in dB of the maximum signal level that can be measured usually the maximum safe input level to the lowest achievable average noise level This ratio is almost always much greater than can be realized in a single measurement Refer also to dynamic range Glossary 9 measurement units Trace information is stored in trace arrays made up of measurement units The measurement unit range is restricted to integers between 32 768 and 32 767 In a logarithmic scale a measurement unit is one hundredth of a dBm or represented mathematically as value in dBm x 100 measurement units As an example 10 115 dBm x 100 1012 measurement units not 1011 5 Measurement units for linear trace information are from zero for the bottom of the display to 10 000 for the top of the display or the reference level memory A storage medium device or recording medium into which data can be stored and held
205. after the warranty expires you can purchase the service documentation that provides all necessary test and maintenance information You can order the service documentation Option 915 through your Hewlett Packard Sales and Service office Service documentation is described under Service Documentation for the HP 8590 Series Option 915 in Chapter 10 in this manual How to Call Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard has Sales and Service offices around the world to provide you with complete support for your spectrum analyzer To obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office listed in Table 9 1 In any correspondence or telephone conversations refer to the instrument by its model number and full serial number 9 4 If You Have A Problem Table 9 1 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices Instrument Support Center Hewlett Packard Company 800 403 0801 Headquarters Hewlett Packard S A 150 Route du Nant d Avril 1217 Meyrin 2 Geneva Switzerland 41 22 780 8111 Great Britain Hewlett Packard Ltd Eskdale Road Winnersh Triangle Wokingham Berkshire RG41 5DZ England 44 734 696622 Headquarters Hewlett Packard Company 3495 Deer Creek Road Palo Alto California USA 94304 1316 415 857 5027 China China Hewlett Packard Company 38 Bei San Huan Xl Road Shuang Yu Shu Hai Dian District Beijing China 86 1 256 6888 Taiwan Hewlett P
206. ailablefor HP 8590L with Option 713 PU18EL MODE SPECTRUM ANALYZER preser SPECTRUM PU113 PEAK SEARCH MARKER gt CFo MARKER gt MIDSCPN MARKERA NEXT PEA NEXT PK RIGHT PK TABLE ON OFF NEXT PKLEFT PK SORT FRO AMP More 1 cf 2 P K MODE lt gt DLNRM DSPLINEONO F F PEAK EXCURSN More 2 of 2 16 Alternatesoftkeywhen the FFT functiont selected PU114 8 8 Key Menus PRESET SPECTRUM ANALYZER amp amp T SPECTRUM FOR RECALLING AND SAV NGTO ANAL YZER MEMORY thatis with RECALL INTERNAL gt STATE Internal gt Trace Catalog Internal INTERNAL CARD TRACE A TRACE B TRACE C LIMIT LINES AMP COR Previous Menu CATALOG ALL A CATALOG REGISTER lmi CATALOG VARIABLS CATALOG PREF IX ChangePrefix More 1 of 2 INTERNALselected Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog PreviousMenu LOAD FILE DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog PreviousMenu Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ_ Spe Clear More 1 of 2 CATALOG DLP CATALOG ON EVENT Exit Catalog More 2 of 2 EDIT LAST EDIT CAT ITEM APND CAT ITEM SAVE EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu EDIT LAST EDIT CAT ITEM APND CAT ITEM SAVE EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu Cy ag lt gt 7 0 OH ETA Edit Done More 2 of 2 Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREF Ix Exit Catalog Prev
207. al Keyboard The HP C1405B keyboard with an HP Cl40560015 Adapter is an IBM AT compatible keyboard that can be connected to the external keyboard connector on the rear panel of the spectrum analyzer Options 041 or 043 only The external keyboard allows a convenient way to enter screen titles and remote programming commands directly into the spectrum analyzer or to access the softkey functions Detailed information on using the external keyboard can be found in the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide Options 041 or 043 provide the capability to control your spectrum analyzer from a computer that uses either an HP IB Option 041 or RS 232 Option 043 interface bus The function keys of the external keyboard control the spectrum analyzer as follows Table 5 8 External Keyboard Functions Accesses the TF menu Accesses the menu 5 40 Using Analyzer Features Table 5 8 External Keyboard Functions continued o ay D o o PY weg e a a Q a a Das 5 E 4 a loa Turns on underlining o 4 Dw 2 a E D E a y O a Hn io O E 3 oO q Ss 49 lt wa 5 e O a pak oO n ct gt or ej o o SS A o lt lt A N gt o E a aj O ko 5 oO 177 n a y ct J far n 3 o e 3 D The external keyboard operation wi
208. allation 1 Turn off the spectrum analyzer Caution The spectrum analyzer must be turned off before connecting an external keyboard to the spectrum analyzer Failure to do so may result in loss of factory installed correction constants 2 Connect the HP C1405B keyboard cable to the spectrum analyzer rear panel connector EXT KEYBOARD using the HP C1405 60015 adapter 3 Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on 4 The external keyboard is now ready to use for entering a screen title programming commands or a prefix To Enter a Screen Title Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information 1 Press to enter the title mode 2 Type in a screen title using the external keyboard The entry appears at the top line of the spectrum analyzer display as it is entered 3 Press ENTER on the external keyboard Pressing ENTER moves the characters to the position on the display for screen title annotation Note To view more than 31 characters per line turn off the time and date display by pressing the following keys CONFIG TIMEDATE TIMEDATE ON OFF OFF 5 42 Using Analyzer Features To Enter Programming Commands Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmers Guide for more information 1 Press on the external keyboard to enter the mode for executing remote commands
209. amplitude units 7 8 dBm 7 31 dBmV 7 31 dBuV 7 31 Volts 7 9 1 Watts 7 9 1 Amptd Units 7 8 analog display 7 9 using 5 31 32 ANALOG ON OFF 7 9 ANALYZER ADDRESS 7 10 analyzer battery 2 22 analyzer distortion products 3 20 ANALYZER GAINS 7 2 7 10 analyzer memory cataloging functions 7 18 catalog variables 7 2 1 delete file 7 33 DLP cataloging 7 18 erase user programs and variables 7 35 program and variable cataloging 7 16 recalling amplitude correction factors 5 8 recalling a state 5 6 recalling a trace 5 7 recalling limit lines 5 8 saving amplitude correction factors 5 8 saving and recalling data 5 6 saving a state 5 6 saving a trace 5 7 saving limit lines 5 8 saving to 7 88 state and trace register status 7 21 annotation 2 10 ANNOTATN ON OFF 7 10 APND CAT ITEM 7 10 ATTEN AUTO MAN 7 10 attenuation coupling 7 10 attenuator error factors 7 78 AUTO ALL 7 10 AUTO COUPLE 7 1 1 automatic FFT 7 53 automatic leveling control 7 7 automatic quasi peak routine 7 1 I AUTO QP AT MKR 7 11 AUXB 7 2 7 11 Aux Conn Control 7 11 AUX CTRL 7 1 1 AUX IF OUTPUT 2 7 auxiliary connector input 7 35 auxiliary interface connector 7 1 1 control line A 7 26 control line B 7 26 control line C 7 26 control line D 7 26 AUX INTERFACE 2 6 AUX VIDEO OUTPUT 2 7 available memory 7 18 B BC 7 11 B lt gt C 7 11 B DL gt B 7 11 band boundaries measuring signals near 3 26
210. amplitude values specify a coordinate point from which a limit line segment is drawn The coordinate point is the lowest frequency or time point of the line segment Limit lines are constructed from left to right To select a segment press SELECT SEGMENT enter the segment number you wish to specify then press a units key Up to 20 segments can be specified per limit line table Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Key Descriptions 7 77 SELECT TIME Note allows you to enter the time value for a limit line segment The time value is with respect to the spectrum analyzer sweep time A time value of zero is the start of the sweep which is the left edge of the graticule Enter the time value by using the data keys Change the time value by using the step keys or the knob Press to correct errors Limit line data is sorted in time order in the limit line table The sorting occurs after you have entered the time and at least one amplitude value SELECT TYPE SELECT UPR AMPL Service Cal Service Diag SET ATTN ERROR Set B amp W Printer Set Colr Printer Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used to select the limit line type of line Press FLAT to select a flat line press SLOPE to select a sloped line or press POINT to select a point Front Panel Key Access allows you to enter the amplitude value for the upper limit line segment Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequency or time by usi
211. and GATE UTILITY Note If the gate menus are exited without turning the gate utility off by pressing another front panel key press the key twice to return to the last gate utility menu used 7 Press Define Time to set up the time domain window the upper window Change the sweep time using the T WINDOW SWP TIME softkey so that the pulses are displayed Press SWEEP DELAY and use the knob to center the pulses in the upper window 8 The trigger marker reads out the time from the rear panel gate trigger point to the current marker position Turn the trigger marker on by pressing TRIG MKR ON OFF ON and use the knob to move the trigger marker to the edge of the pulse The marker readout indicates the position of the edge relative to the rear panel trigger The trigger marker may be used to perform settling time measurements on the rising or falling edges of a digital communications signal Settling time is the time from the trigger to 90 percent of the stable pulse on off value 9 Press Main Menu to exit the define time menu 4 20 Making Measurements 10 Press Define Gate Use the GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH keys to position the gate Once gate delay or gate length are activated use the knob and data entry keys can be used to position the two vertical gate markers Select a time interval within the last half of the pulse is selected 11 Turn the gate on by pressing GATE ON OFF so that ON is underlined This activates the f
212. andwidth must be set wider than the resolution bandwidth zoom A term referring to the process of looking at something more closely This may require narrowing the resolution bandwidth or span to view a signal more closely Or it may mean increasing the size of the spectrum analyzer display from a partial screen to the full screen Glossary 8 Index 0 0 2 9 GHz BAND 0 7 4 0 2 9 Gz BAND 0 7 12 1 100 MHz COMB OUT 2 4 10 MHz reference DAC setting 7 14 10 MHz REF OUTPUT 2 6 10V REF DETECTOR 7 2 7 4 IOV REF DETECTOR 7 2 7 4 120 kHz EM1 BW 7 5 12 4 19 BAND 3 7 4 7 12 19 1 22 BAND 4 7 5 7 12 2 200 Hz EMI BW 7 5 2 75 6 5 BAND 1 7 4 7 12 2v REF DETECTOR 7 2 7 4 3 3 dB bandwidth measurement 7 58 5 500 750 minimum loss pad 10 13 500 RF bridge 10 13 500 to 7561 matching pad Option 71 1 10 12 500 transmission reflection test set 10 13 6 6 0 12 8 BAND 2 7 4 7 12 7 750 input impedance Option 001 10 5 750 matching transformer 10 13 750 RF bridge 10 13 9 9 kHz EMI BW 7 5 A A lt gt B 7 5 A B gt A ON OFF 7 5 A C 7 5 ABCDEF 7 5 ACCEPT QP DATA 7 6 accessories 500 7592 minimum loss pad 10 13 500 transmission reflection test set 10 13 750 matching transformer 10 13 AC power source 10 14 AC probe 10 14 broadband preamplifiers 10 14 broadcast measurements personality 10 2 burst carrier trigger 10 14 cable TV measurements personality
213. appropriate printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page After three printouts the page will be in position to start again at the top of the page if the printer s perforation skip is OFF see Figure 6 1 One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfitting each printout Press this key to print in black and white then select appropriate printer mode Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard compatible printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page After three printouts the page will be in position to start again at the top of the page if the printer s perforation skip is OFF see Figure 6 1 One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfitting each printout Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard DeskJet 540 printer Printing and Plotting 6 19 EP MX80 SML LRG EP LQ570 SML LRG PRT MENU ON OFF COPY DEV PRNT PLT 6 20 Printing and Plotting Press this key 1f the spectrum analyzer is connected to a MX 80 Epson or other compatible 9 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will allow two printouts per page and will print softkey labels if desired see PRT MENU ON OFF Pressing this key to underline LRG will allow only one printout per page and will not print the softkey labels Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected
214. ard 500 output impedance Option 011 has 750 output impedance HP 8590L Options 010 and 011 are also available as retrofit kits Option R10 or R11 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as kits HP part number 5062 6463 and 5062 6479 respectively HP 8591E Options 010 and 011 are also available as retrofit kits Option R10 or RII after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as kits HP part numbers 5062 6460 and 5062 6480 respectively Protective Em Operating Carrying Case with Shoulder Strap Option 015 This option lowers the maximum ambient operating temperature specification by 5 C It allows instrument operation while installed in the case It is a soft nylon operating and carrying case with a shoulder strap and a pouch for accessories It includes a CRT viewing hood for operation in direct sunlight Option 015 can be used to provide additional protection during travel Protective Yellow Operating Carrying Case with Shoulder Strap Option 016 This option lowers the maximum ambient operating temperature specification by 5 C It allows instrument operation while installed in the case It is a soft nylon operating and carrying case with a shoulder strap and a pouch for accessories It includes a CRT viewing hood for operation in direct sunlight Option 016 can be used to provide additional protection during travel HP IB and Parallel Interface Option 041 Option 041 allows you to control your spectrum analyze
215. armonic mixing Not available with the HP 85953 t Not available with the HP 85953 or HP 85963 BND LOCK ON OFF locks the spectrum analyzer onto a selected frequency band local oscillator harmonic number When only one frequency band is being swept the corresponding softkey will be underlined even if band lock is off Note When using the spectrum analyzer in a band lock mode the span is limited to 3 6 GHz in band 0 and 1 and to 7 GHz in bands 2 through 4 To select the maximum span in a given band use the start frequency stop frequency or span function BAUD RATE BINARY SPAN BLANK A BLANK B BLANK C Front Panel Key Access Option 043 AS 232 and parallel interface only sets the data transmission speed Also see the description for the key The baud rate is set to 1200 by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG Front Panel Key Access HP 8590L and HP 85913 only displays the output of the span DAC that is located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL stores the amplitude data for trace A and removes it from the screen The trace A register will not be updated as the spectrum analyzer sweeps Front Panel Key Access stores the amplitude data for trace B and removes it from the screen The trace B register will not be updated as the spectrum analyzer sweeps Front Panel Key Access stores the amplitude data
216. ase Back Pack Option 042 Option 042 can be used to provide additional protection during travel In addition it provides a pouch for accessories Cannot operate instrument while installed in case Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories 10 7 Improved Amplitude Accuracy for NADC bands Option 050 For HP 859 E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only This is an amplitude calibration that improves specifications to O 0 6dB at 20 30 C for NADC frequency bands 824 to 849 MHz and 869 to 894 MHz In addition it improves specifications to 0 9dB at 20 30 C in the frequency bands 1850 to 1910 MHz and 1930 to 1990 MHz Option 050 is also available as a service center only retrofit kit Option R50 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer Improved Amplitude Accuracy for PDC bands Option 051 For HP 8591E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only This is an amplitude calibration that improves specifications to f0 5 dB at 20 30 C for the PDC frequency bands in the 810 to 956 MHz and 1429 to 1501 MHz frequency ranges Option 051 is also available as a service center only retrofit kit Option R51 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer Improved Amplitude Accuracy for PHS Option 052 For HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only This is an amplitude calibration that improves specifications to 0 5 dB at 20 30 C for the PHS frequency band in the 1895 to 1918 MHz frequency range Option
217. assembly as a horizontal line at the bottom graticule This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access displays the output of the 2 V reference produced on the Al6 Processor Video assembly as a horizontal line at the top graticule This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 8593 HP 8595E and HP 8596E only locks onto harmonic band 0 Harmonic band O uses low pass filtering instead of bandpass preselection It has a specified tuning range of 0 to 2 9 GHz Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only locks onto harmonic band 1 Harmonic band 1 is preselected and has a specified tuning range of 2 75 GHz to 6 5 GHz Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 8593E and HP 8596E only locks onto harmonic band 2 Harmonic band 2 is preselected and has a specified tuning range of 6 0 to 12 8 GHz Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L and HP 8593E only locks onto harmonic band 3 Harmonic band 3 is preselected and has a specified tuning range of 12 4 to 19 4 GHz Front Panel Key Access 7 4 Key Descriptions 19 1 22 BAND 4 9 kHz EM1 BW 120 kHz EM1 BW 200 Hz EM1 BW A lt gt B A B gt A ON OFF A C ABCDEF HP 8592L and HP 8593E only locks onto harmonic band 4 Harmonic band 4 is preselected and has a specified tuning range of 19 1 to 22 GHz Front Panel Key Access allows a 6 dB
218. asurements Personality 0 0 02002 0004 10 2 CT2 CAI Measurements Personality 0 004 10 3 DECT Measurements Personality 2 ee ee 10 3 Digital Radio Measurements Personality 0 00 0008 4 10 3 EM1 Diagnostics Measurements Personality 00 10 3 GSM900 and DCS1800 Transmitter Measurements Personalities 10 3 Link Measurement Personality 0 000008 10 4 NADC TDMA Measurements Personality 0 00002022020848 10 4 Noise Figure Measurements Personality 0 00 10 4 PDC Measurements Personality 0 0 0 00084 10 4 PHS Measurements Personality 2 5 6 o a a See 10 4 Scalar Measurements Personality 0202 2 2 222220084 10 4 OPUONS I ax oe A ws Bec Bee as lee ie A a 10 5 75 Input Impedance Option 001 ooa aaa ee 10 5 Memory Card Reader Option 003 10 5 Precision Frequency Reference Option 004 ooa a a a a a aa 10 5 LO and Sweep Tune Outputs on Rear Panel Option 009 2 2 10 5 Tracking Generator Option 010 and Option 011 a a a aa a aa 10 6 Protective Tan Operating Carrying Case with Shoulder Strap Option 015 10 6 Protective Yellow Operating Carrying Case with Shoulder Strap Option 016 10 6 HP IB and Parallel Interface Option 041 10 6 RS 232 and Parallel Interface Option 043 10 7 Frequency Extension to 26 5 GHz with APC 3 5 Connector Optio
219. at contain the available characters and symbols A programming command can be entered in the screen title area It can then be executed from the front panel by pressing EXECUTE TITLE The screen title will remain on the screen until either Change Title is pressed again or a trace is recalled that was saved with a screen title A screen title can also be cleared by using the clear function Press DISPLAY Change Title YZ Spc Clear Clear to clear the current screen title Pressing Change Title accesses a menu containing the letters of the alphabet the underscore symbol _ the number symbol a space and the Clear softkey To select a character press the softkey that displays the group of characters that contains the desired character The softkey menu changes to allow you to select an individual character If you make a mistake press to space back over the incorrect character Additional characters are available by pressing More 1 of 2 Numbers may be selected by using the numeric keypad Pressing RPG TITLE provides additional characters for the menu accessed by pressing Change Title Pressing RPG TITLE provides lowercase letters numbers Greek letters and punctuation symbols To access additional characters press RPG TITLE When RPG TITLE is pressed a character table appears on the screen To select a character turn the knob to position the cursor under the desired character and press the key The step keys move t
220. at the wrong frequency The sweep time affects the sample rate and must be optimized to avoid aliasing The single and continuous FFT functions require a specific spectrum analyzer setup before they can be activated First an AM signal is demodulated in the time domain In order to do this the resolution bandwidth is widened to include the signal sidebands within the passband of the spectrum analyzer Next zero span is selected so that the spectrum analyzer operates as a fixed tuned receiver Tuning is centered around the AM carrier The MARKER AUTO FFT softkey activates the FFT function with very little preliminary setup required Two examples of using the FFT function are included in this section First example uses the manual FFT functions Second example uses the automatic FFT measurement Note After the FFT function is used the markers are still in FFT mode for use in evaluating data Turn off the FFT markers before attempting to use markers in the normal fashion Press FFT OFF in the FFT menu to turn off the markers and exit the FFT measurement Example 1 Use the manual FFT measurement to look at 60 Hz AM modulation 1 Connect a signal generator to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Adjust the signal generator to produce an AM signal with a 60 Hz modulation frequency 2 Press FREQUENCY and set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to the frequency of the modulated input signal Press SPAN 10 MHz Press again an
221. ata output 7 28 screen graticule 7 47 screen title 7 22 characters 7 5 clearing 7 23 RPG TITLE 7 74 screen title using an external keyboard 5 42 SECAM L 7 76 segment deletion 7 33 SELECT 1 2 3 4 7 76 SELECT AMPLITUD 5 25 5 39 7 76 SELECT DLT AMPL 5 25 7 76 SELECT FREQ 5 25 5 39 7 77 SELECT LWR AMPL 5 25 7 77 SELECT MID AMPL 5 25 7 77 SELECT POINT 5 38 7 77 SELECT PREFIX 7 77 SELECT SEGMENT 5 23 7 77 SELECT TIME 7 78 SELECT TYPE 7 78 SELECT UPR AMPL 5 25 7 78 self calibration routine CAL TRK GEN 1 9 CAL YTF 1 10 self calibration routines 1 8 2 16 18 amplitude 7 13 CAL 7 13 correction factors 7 13 frequency 7 14 frequency and amplitude 7 14 tracking generator 7 14 sensitivity spectrum analyzer 3 15 serial polling A l Service Cal 7 2 7 78 Service Diag 7 2 7 78 service documentation Option 915 10 12 service functions 7 2 Service Cal 7 2 Service Diag 7 2 service options 9 4 service request A 1 clearing A l service tag 9 6 SET ATTN ERROR 7 2 7 78 Set B amp amp W Printer 7 78 Set Color printer 7 78 SET DATE 7 79 SET TIME 7 79 setting gate delay 4 33 setting gate length 4 33 setting the amplitude 2 13 setting the center frequency 2 13 setting the marker 2 14 setting the span 2 13 setup power measurement functions 7 79 printer 7 69 SGL SWP 7 79 SHOW OPTIONS 7 79 signal comparison 3 12 SIGNAL ID 7 79 signal peak Index l 5 highest 7 80
222. ata will appear Pressing PURGE LIMITS a second time purges the limit line table PRESET turns limit line testing off if it is on but does not clear an existing limit line table Selecting the Type of Limit Line Table The LIMITS FRQ TIME key selects the type of limit line parameters Parameters can be entered as frequency amplitude coordinates or as time amplitude coordinates Use the LIMITS FRQ TIME key to underline the desired choice of either frequency or time parameters Frequency is the default selection If TIME is selected SELECT TIME will replace SELECT FREQ in the Edit Limit menus The second column of the limit line table is labeled START FREQ when frequency is selected It is labeled START TIME when time is selected The LIMITS FIX REL key selects the type of limit line There are two types of limit lines fixed and relative Fixed limit lines contain only absolute amplitude and frequency or time values Relative limit lines consist of frequency values that are referenced to the spectrum analyzer center frequency and amplitude values that are relative to the analyzer reference level The relative setting does not affect time values They always begin at the left edge of the graticule As an example fixed versus relative limit lines if a limit line is specified as fixed entering a limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz If the same limit line table is speci
223. ate of the analyzer display dynamic range The maximum dynamic range over which both the larger and smaller signal can be viewed simultaneously on the display For analyzers with a maximum logarithmic display of 10 dB division the actual dynamic range may be greater than the display dynamic range Refer also to dynamic range display fidelity The measurement uncertainty of relative differences in amplitude on a spectrum analyzer On purely analog analyzers those analyzers that display trace information immediately and do not store then recall the data to the screen these differences are displayed on the screen and the graticule is used to evaluate the measurement Many analyzers with digital displays refer to digital display have markers that can be used to measure the signal As a result measurement differences are stored in memory and the ambiguity of the display is eliminated from the measurement display range The calibrated range of the display for a particular display mode or scale factor Refer also to linear display log display and scale factor displayed average noise level The noise level viewed on the analyzer s display after narrowing the video bandwidth setting enough to reduce the peak to peak noise fluctuations The resulting noise display is essentially a straight line Usually this term refers to the analyzer s own internally generated noise as a measure of sensitivity It is typically specified in dBm under condition
224. ate utility is entered the current value of the gate length will be used The GATE LENGTH softkey can be accessed from within the gate utility under the Define Gate menu Front Panel Key Access SWEEP GATE Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended ON OFF turns on or off the gate for Option 105 the time gated spectrum analyzer capability The gate can be turned on outside or from within the gate utility The gate utility makes it easier to set up and manipulate the gate If GATE ON OFF is accessed under the menu it turns the gate on and off If GATE ON OFF is accessed under the Define Gate softkey from within the gate utility the gate can only be turned on when the frequency domain window is active If the time domain window is made active the gate will be turned off Gate manipulation with the gate turned on in the time domain window is difficult due to trace dropouts and triggering errors Front Panel Key Access SWEEP 7 46 Key Descriptions GATE UTILITY Note GHIJKL GND REF DETECTOR GRAT ON OFF Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended accesses the softkey functions used for Option 105 the time gated spectrum analyzer capability It creates related time domain and frequency domain windows to set up the time gate and make measurements The center frequency and reference level must be set correctly before entering the gate utility There must be a TTL signal at the GATE TRIGGER INPUT on the rear panel and GA
225. ating limit lines 5 18 creating new programs 7 58 CRT HORZ POSITION 7 31 CRT VERT POSITION 7 31 CT2 CAI measurements 10 3 CT2 demodulator Option 1 10 10 9 D DAC bias current adjustment 7 14 extra fine tune 7 91 fine tune 7 43 mixer bias 7 55 sweep time 7 83 YTF coarse tune 7 92 YTF fine tune 7 92 DACS 7 2 7 31 data controls 2 8 data keys 2 3 2 8 data protection 5 8 data recall 7 72 data transmission speed 7 12 DATEMODE MDY DMY 7 31 dBm 7 31 dBmV 7 31 dBuV 7 31 de coupling 7 30 DC probes use of 10 14 DCS1800 measurements 10 3 deactivate function 2 8 deactivating the active function 7 48 DECT demodulator Option 1 12 10 10 DECT measurements 10 3 DEFAULT CAL DATA 7 31 9 3 DEFAULT CONFIG 7 3 1 DEFAULT SYNC 7 32 Define Coupling 7 32 Define Gate 7 32 Define Time 7 32 delay GATE DELAY 7 46 delaying sweep time gate utility 7 83 DELETE FILE 7 33 delete files from memory card 7 13 delete frequency accuracy Option 713 10 12 DELETE POINT 7 33 DELETE SEGMENT 7 33 delta display line markers 7 85 delta marker 3 12 7 52 Demod 4 13 7 33 DEMOD AM FM 4 13 7 33 DEMOD ON OFF 4 13 7 33 demodulating an AM or FM signal 4 13 demodulation 7 33 AM 7 33 continuous 4 14 dwell time 7 36 FM 7 33 FM gain 7 44 FM offset 7 44 FM span 7 44 on and off 7 33 speaker on off 7 80 squelch 7 81 demodulator optional 10 9 demodulator AM FM Option 102 10
226. attenuation makes the signal more visible As a precaution to protect the spectrum analyzer input mixer 0 dB RF attenuation can be selected only with the number units keypad Ua MKR1049 3 MHZ REF 0 dBm HAT O dB 56 54 dBm PEAK s COG 10 pa 18 ATTEN o dB ie VA SB SC FC CORR CENTER1049 3 MHZ SPAN1Ono MHZ RES BW 100 kHz VBW 30 KHz SWP 20 0 mse Figure 3 17 Using O dB Attenuation Before connecting other signals to the spectrum analyzer input increase the RF attenuation to protect the spectrum analyzer input mixer press ATTEN AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined or press AUTO COUPLE and AUTO ALL Example The resolution bandwidth can be decreased to view low level signals 1 As in the previous example connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input Set the spectrum analyzer to view a low level signal 2 Press then J The low level signal appears more clearly because the noise level is reduced See Figure 3 18 40 MER 104 95 MHz REF 10 dBm AT O GB 58 30 dBm a PEAK LOG 10 7 7 E de EL AES BW 39 kHz 4 VA SB sc FC CORR By Mal ot a all CENTER ANA II_MHZ SPAN 10 00 MHz ARES BW 30 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 33 3 msec Figure 3 18 Decreasing Resolution Bandwidth 3 16 Making Basic Measurements A mark appears ne
227. atting a card deletes any data stored on the memory card catalog the card before using the format card function if you suspect the memory card might contain data Using Analyzer Features 5 11 To format a new card press CONFIG More 1 of 3 Card Conf ig FORMAT CARD The message If you are sure press key again to purge data appears on the spectrum analyzer screen Press FORMAT CARD again FORMAT CARD requires a double key press To catalog a memory card press CONFIG More 1 of 3 Card Conf ig Catalog Card Catalog Card either displays any existing data that is on the memory card if the memory card has been formatted or displays INVALID CARD DIRECTORY if the card has not been formatted Use BLANK CARD if you wish to delete the files from the memory card To Enter a Prefix Memory card data can be stored and recalled using a prefix To enter a prefix press DISPLAY or CONFIG Change Prefix Pressing Change Prefix accesses a menu containing the letters of the alphabet the underscore symbol _ the number symbol a space and the clear function To select a character press the softkey that displays the group of characters that contains the desired character The softkey menu changes to allow you to select an individual character If you make a mistake press to space back over the incorrect character Additional characters are available by pressing More of 2 Numbers may be selected with the numeric keypad
228. atus of the on event programming commands as UNDEFINED If the ONEOS ONSWP TRMATH ONMKR ONPWRUP and ONSRQ commands have been set pressing CATALOG ON EVENT displays their status as ACTIVE When ONCYCLE ONDELAY or ONTIME have been set pressing CATALOG ON EVENT displays the information in Table 7 5 see Figure 7 3 Table 7 5 CATALOG ON EVENT Display Description Programming Description of CATALOG ON EVENT Display Command ONCYCLE The number of seconds left until the event occurs followed by the number of seconds ONCYCLE was set for ONDELAY CATALOG ON EVENT displays either a positive number or negative number of seconds A positive number indicates the number of seconds left until tht event occurs A negative number indicates the number of seconds that has passed since the event occurred ONTIME The date in year month and day format and the time in 24 hour format that ONTIME is set for Front Panel Key Access or we REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB aiii TEPC OOOO LLODIO DDD EEE EEE a PEAK ON EVENTS LOG UNDEFINED 19 ONSHP UNDEFINED dB TRMATH UNDEFINED ONCYCLE IN 86244 SEC ON CYCLE OF 86400 SEC ONOELAY IN 125 SEC ONMKR ACTIVE ONSRQ UNDEFINED DELETE ONTIME AT OATE 991891 AT TIME 09 80 90 Al SELECT et x ES PREFX SA B D ee O EXIT CORR O ae CATALOG PREV sabe VRE a a sa Ki MENU CENTER 1 200 GHz RES BW 3 8 MHz VBW 1 MHz SE bP S8 GRE ar Figure 7 3 CATALOG ON EVENT Display CATALOG catalogs all of the
229. band lock band selection 7 4 7 5 Band Lock 7 12 BAND LOCK 3 26 band locking 7 13 bandwidth measurement 4 39 bandwidth functions 7 13 bandwidth measurement 7 58 bandwidth ratio video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth 7 90 battery See analyzer battery memory card changing the battery 2 20 BAUD RATE 7 12 benchlink spectrum analyzer Option B70 10 12 bias current DAC adjustment 7 14 binary A 2 BINARY SPAN 7 2 7 12 black and white printing 7 48 BLANK A 7 12 BLANK B 7 12 BLANK C 7 12 BLANK CARD 5 11 7 13 BND LOCK ON OFF 3 26 7 13 broadband preamplifiers 10 14 built in tracking generator 7 88 BW 7 13 B amp W PRINTER 7 48 C cable TV measurements personality 10 2 CAL 2 16 7 13 CAL AMPTD 1 8 2 16 7 13 CAL FETCH 2 16 7 13 CAL FREQ l 8 2 16 7 14 CAL FREQ amp AMPTD 1 9 2 16 7 14 calibration 7 13 attenuator error factors 7 78 self calibration routines 2 16 CAL MXR 7 2 7 14 CAL OUT 2 3 CAL STORE 1 9 2 16 7 14 CAL TIMEBASE 7 2 7 14 CAL TRK GEN 1 9 2 17 7 14 CAL YTF 1 10 2 18 7 14 card changing the battery 2 20 inserting a memory card 2 19 Card Config 7 14 CARD DISPLAY 7 15 CARD gt DLP 7 15 CARD STATE 7 15 Card Trace 7 15 care memory 10 15 carrying case Option 015 10 6 carrying case Option 016 10 6 CATALOG ALL 7 16 CATALOG AMP COR 7 16 Catalog Card 5 12 7 16 CATALOG DISPLAY 7 18 CATALOG DLP 7 18 Catalog Internal 7 18 CATAL
230. bandwidth of the synchronously tuned Gaussian like resolution filters in the Hewlett Packard spectrum analyzers is approximately 1 5 times the 3 dB bandwidth incidental FM Undesired frequency modulation on the output of a device for example a signal source or an amplifier caused by or incidental to some other form of modulation such as amplitude modulation Glossary 7 input attenuator An attenuator between the input connector and the first mixer of a spectrum analyzer also called an RF attenuator The input attenuator is used to adjust the signal level incident to the first mixer and to prevent gain compression due to high level or broadband signals It is also used to set the dynamic range by controlling the degree of internally generated distortion For some analyzers changing the input attenuator settings changes the vertical position of the signal on the display which then changes the reference level accordingly In Hewlett Packard microprocessor controlled spectrum analyzers the IF gain is changed to compensate for changes in input attenuator settings Because of this the signals remain stationary on the display and the reference level is not changed input impedance The terminating impedance that the analyzer presents to the signal source The nominal impedance for RF and microwave analyzers is usually 50Q For some systems such as cable TV 750 is standard The degree of mismatch between the nominal and actual input impedan
231. be turned off Sweep time coupling only applies to the frequency domain window Front Panel Key Access SWEEP 7 30 Key Descriptions CPL VBW ON OFF CRT HORZ POSITION CRT VERT POSITION DACS DATEMODE MDY DMY dBm dBmV dBuV DEFAULT CAL DATA DEFAULT CONFIG Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended automatically selects the optimum video bandwidth if the gate length has been entered If the gate length has not been determined the video bandwidth will not be coupled to the gate length and an error message will occur If a gate length is entered manually the coupling will be turned off Front Panel Key Access changes the horizontal position of the signal on the spectrum analyzer display Press CAL STORE if you want the spectrum analyzer to use this position permanently so that it is not lost when the power is turned off Front Panel Key Access changes the vertical position of the signal on the spectrum analyzer display Press CAL STORE if you want the spectrum analyzer to use this position permanently so that it is not lost when the power is turned off Front Panel Key Access changes the DAC numbers of the span DAC YTO coarse tune DAC YTO fine tune and YTO FM tune DAC located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access changes the display of the date from a month day year format to a day month year format It is
232. bel contains too many characters A key label is limited to 8 printable characters per label line U If You Have A Problem 9 11 INVALID KEYNAME _ The specified key name is not allowed The key name may have conflicted with a spectrum analyzer programming command To avoid this problem use an underscore as the second character in the key name or avoid beginning the key name with the following pairs of letters LB OA OL TA TB TR MA MF TS OT and DR U INVALID OUTPUT FORMAT The output format is not valid See the appropriate programming command description to determine the correct format U INVALID RANGE Stop lt Start Indicates that the first trace element specified for a range of trace elements is larger that ending trace element When specifying a trace range the starting element must be less than the ending element For example TRA 2 300 is legal but TRA 300 2 is not U INVALID REGISTER NUMBER The specified trace register number is invalid U INVALID REPEAT MEM OVFL Memory overflow occurred due to a REPEAT routine This can occur if there is not enough spectrum analyzer memory for the REPEAT UNTIL declaration or if the REPEAT UNTIL declaration exceeds 2047 characters U INVALID REPEAT NEST LEVEL The nesting level in the REPEAT routine is improperly constructed This can occur if too many REPEAT routines are nested When used within a downloadable program DLP the maximum number of REPEAT UN
233. ber The d denotes that the file contains downloadable program data To Recall a Program l Press or RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD CARD is underlined when the memory card is selected 2 Press Catalog Card More 1 of 2 then CATALOG DLP Use the knob to highlight the data to be retrieved 3 Press LOAD FILE Programs can also be recalled by specifying the prefix and the register number I Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 Press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press CARD DLP enter the register number that the program was saved under and then press ENTER Table 5 3 summarizes the functions when saving and recalling data to and from the memory card 5 16 Using Analyzer Features Table 5 3 Save and Recall Functions Using Memory Card Operation recall state save trace recall trace save display image recall display image save limit line table recall limit line table save amplitude correction factors recall amplitude correction factors save DLP recall DLP An alternate method for recalling a file uses Register Range s current prefix Prefix register lt 8 characters s current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters t current prefix Prefix register register lt 8 characters t current prefix
234. bration Routine 0 1 10 El ctrostatic Dischatge x ick Ae ee a a A a ee a 1 11 Reducing Damage Caused by ESD 1 12 2 Getting Started What You ll Learn in this Chapter 2 2 e 2 1 Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer o 2 1 Front Panel Features sarua e w 2 aoa k a e e a aioa aia a e a 2 1 Rear Panel Features wo 0 0 o 2 5 Data Controls sii aee a Ba e a a se 2 8 Hold Key e cne cs a rta A A la o wrt 2 8 Koob a ch ee eg ee te MO Seg ut e yey 2 8 Number Units Keypad e 2 9 Step Keys os e pl a ode se Af da ro 2 9 Fine Focus Control o ots es s wr aie eta e 2 9 Screen Annotation a ae a ee a a we A a 2 10 Menu and Softkey Overview ee a 2 12 Making a Measurement 2 13 Measurement Summary 2 000 00020084 2 15 Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines 2 2 16 Warm Up Tim a sia A Ro Ss Bo a ewe Slat Wa RG 2 16 Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine Option 010 or 011 MS ee pth Se dak A E A AO dE 2 17 Performing the YTF Self Calibration Routine HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 89963 Only far a ua Bak dee OR e ae eB BA ee 2 18 When Is Self Calibration Needed oo Gee Be ia ae ee 2 18 Memory Card Insertion and Battery Replacement 2 19 Changing the Memory Card Battery o a
235. byte DLP editor memory The item will not be in the spectrum analyzer user memory until it is processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey The DLP editor memory buffer remains intact when the instrument is preset and when it is powered off Front Panel Key Access or HP 8591 HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 or HP 8596E only switches the active window between the two displayed windows if the windows display mode has been turned on The active window is marked by solid lines If the zoom function has been used to expand an active window to the full screen the key still switches the active window between the two windows The windows remain zoomed full screen so the inactive window is not displayed as the active window is switched places the marker on the next highest peak The signal peak must exceed the threshold value Also see the PEAK EXCURSN and THRESHLD ON OFF softkey descriptions Front Panel Key Access PEAK SEARCH moves the marker to the next peak to the left of the current marker The signal peak must exceed the threshold value If there is no peak to the left the marker will not move Also see the PEAK EXCURSN and THRESHLD ON OFF softkey descriptions Front Panel Key Access moves the marker to the next peak to the right of the current marker The signal peak must exceed the threshold value If there is no peak to the right the marker will not move Also see the PEAK EXCURSN and THRESHLD ON OFF softkey descriptions
236. called when the spectrum analyzer is powered up Note If you have a downloadable program or personality installed in spectrum analyzer memory the following changes apply to the operation of the POWER ON function When using a downloadable program or personality the last state of the personality is not recalled We recommend that if you are using a downloadable program or personality you set POWER ON IP LAST to IP If POWER ON IP LAST is set to LAST you must press PRESET whenever you power on the spectrum analyzer PRESEL DAC PRESEL DEFAULT PRESEL PEAK Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 8595E or HP 8596E only peaks the YTF preselector by allowing the user to manually adjust the YTF fine tune DAC This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 and HP 8596E only enables default preselector data for bands 1 through 4 to allow maximum frequency response without peaking the preselector The CAL YTF routine should be performed before pressing PRESEL DEFAULT Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 8595E or HP 8596E only optimally centers the preselector on a given signal for the most accurate measurement of amplitude The maximum response found for the frequency at the marker determines the future adjustment values that will be provided to the preselector Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE
237. can only be recalled into the active window Front Panel Key Access accesses a softkey menu that allows you to either select the trace in which the trace data is to be recalled trace A trace B or trace C recall the current limit line tables or recall amplitude correction factors When recalling a trace select the trace in which the trace data is to be recalled enter the trace register number and press ENTER If windows are being used only the trace of the active window can be recalled When recalling limit line tables or amplitude correction factors press LIMIT LINES or AMP COR respectively enter the trace register number and press ENTER Valid trace register numbers are 0 through the maximum register number The maximum register number is the number displayed after MAX REG during a save or recall operation If a screen title is present it is recalled with the trace data but not with the limit line table or the amplitude correction factors If the screen title does not exceed 34 characters the time and date when the data was stored will also be displayed INVALID SAVEREG is displayed if data has not been stored in the trace register Front Panel Key Access changes the spectrum analyzer frequency span to the previous span setting Front Panel Key Access SPAN accesses the limit line menus Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Key Descriptions 7 49 LIMIT When accessed by SAVE pressing LIMIT LINES stores the c
238. ccess MEAS USER changes the frequency at the middle of the FFT display to whatever the current value of the FFT marker frequency is within the limitations of the available sweep times This puts the marker in the middle of the graticule When using the FFT function the MARKER MID SCRN softkey replaces the MARKER gt CF softkey in the PEAK SEARCH and menus Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER MKR or moves the active marker to the minimum detected amplitude value Front Panel Key Access finds and displays the frequency and amplitude differences between the highest and lowest trace points Pressing MARKER PK PK performs the routine similar to pressing the following keys PEAK SEARCH MARKER A and MARKER MINIMUM Front Panel Key Access changes the spectrum analyzer settings so that the amplitude at the active marker becomes the reference level Front Panel Key Access changes the start frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the active marker This moves the active marker to the left edge of the display Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 53 MARKER STOP MARKER ALL OFF MARKER AMPTD MARKER NORM PK MARKER NORMAL MARKER ON changes the stop frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the active marker This moves the active marker to the right edge of the display Front Panel Key Access turns off all of the markers including markers used for marker track and demo
239. ccessed through the limit line menu Pressing EDIT DONE erases the limit line table from the spectrum analyzer screen and restores the menu accessed by the Limit Lines softkey Use EDIT DONE when all the limit line values have been entered Front Panel Key Access allows flatness correction constants to be viewed or modified This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access 7 36 Key Descriptions EDIT LAST Edit Limit Edit Lower Edit Mid Delt For options 021 023 and 024 only Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information starts the DLP editor function and allows the most recent item that was being edited in the DLP editor buffer to be accessed again The item will not be in the spectrum analyzer user memory until it is processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey The DLP editor memory remains intact when the instrument is preset and when it is powered off Front Panel Key Access RECALL or allows you to edit the current limit line tables by accessing Edit Upper Edit Lower Edit Up Low and Edit Mid Delt Use PURGE LIMITS under any of the above edit menus to dispose of the current limit line table Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY allows you to view or edit the lower limit line table Up to 20 entries are allowed for the lower limit line table With the lower limit line table format the coord
240. ce data The time and date that the data was stored is appended to the screen title When comparing a trace displayed in view mode with a recalled trace it is possible to over write the displayed trace by recalling the trace data This can happen because the instrument state is saved and recalled with the trace data For example if you save trace A when it is in clear write mode place trace A in view mode then recall the trace data into trace B trace B will be placed in view mode but the trace mode of trace A is changed to clear write mode since the trace mode of trace A was clear write when it was saved To avoid this problem we change the trace mode of the traces to view or blank mode before saving the trace data Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 87 Trace gt Intrnl Track Gen TRACKING PEAK accesses a softkey menu that allows you to select the item to be stored in spectrum analyzer memory the trace to be saved trace A trace B or trace C limit line tables or amplitude correction factors To save a trace select the trace to be saved enter the trace register number and press ENTER To save limit line tables or amplitude correction factors press LIMIT LINES to save limit line tables or AMP COR to save amplitude correction factors enter the trace register number and press ENTER Valid trace register numbers are 0 through the maximum register number The maximum register number is the number
241. ce is called the VSWR voltage standing wave ratio interface The point at which different parts of a system interact Also the point at which operators and instruments interact intermodulation distortion Undesired frequency components resulting from the interaction of two or more spectral components passing through a device having nonlinear behavior such as a mixer or an amplifier The undesired components are related to the fundamental components by sums and differences of the fundamentals and various harmonics The algorithm is fit fo 2x fit fo 2x fot fi dx fi 2 fo and so on limit line A test limit made up of a series of line segments positioned according to frequency and amplitude within the spectrum analyzer s measurement range Two defined limit lines may be displayed simultaneously One sets an upper test limit the other sets a lower test limit Trace data can be compared with the limit lines as the spectrum analyzer sweeps If the trace data exceeds either the upper or lower limits the spectrum analyzer displays a message or sounds a warning indicating that the trace failed the test limits limit line file The user memory file that contains the limit line table entries Limit lines are composed of frequency and amplitude components that make up a trace array and this data is stored in the file The limit line file feature is available on spectrum analyzers that are capable of limit line operation Refer also to limit line
242. cess to any of its storage locations Data can be written to or retrieved from RAM but data storage is only temporary When the power is removed the information disappears User generated information appearing on a display is RAM data raster display A television like display in which the image is formed by scanning the electron beam rapidly across and slowly down the CRT face and gating the beam on as appropriate The scanning rates are fast enough to produce a flicker free display Refer also to vector display and sweep time Glossary 2 read only memory ROM read only memory that is encoded into the analyzer s firmware The data can be accessed read only it cannot be altered by the user reference level The calibrated vertical position on the display used as a reference for amplitude measurement in which the amplitude of one signal is compared with the amplitude of another regardless of the absolute amplitude of either relative amplitude accuracy The uncertainty of an amplitude measurement in which the amplitude of one signal is compared with the amplitude of another regardless of the absolute amplitude of either Distortion measurements are relative measurements Contributors to uncertainty include frequency response and display fidelity and changes of input attenuation IF gain scale factor and resolution bandwidth relative marker mode The active marker is positioned relative to the position of the reference marker Marker
243. computations on the time data to produce the frequency domain results CONTINUS FFT can be used instead of SINGLE FFT and the spectrum analyzer will be put in continuous sweep mode with an FFT being performed at the end of each sweep A WKR 61 Hz REF 15 83 mV ATTEN 48 dB 2 3825 mV SMPL LIN MARKER i 61 Hz 12 3825 mV SA vB A en ee CORR FFT START 0 Hz FFT STOP 200 Hz RES BW 199 kHz VBW 38 kHz SWP 1 800 sec RT Figure 4 1 FFT Annotation Some of the screen annotation is altered when the FFT function is active The left edge of the graticule is relabeled FFT START and represents O Hz relative to the carrier The right edge of the graticule is relabeled FFT STOP and is the maximum FFT frequency used in the transformation The annotation LIN in the upper left corner refers to the scale of the incoming data being transformed The FFT results which are being displayed are always in LOG scale The carrier appears at the left edge of the graticule with the modulation sidebands and any distortion appearing along the horizontal axis The amplitude relationships of all the signals are the same as they would be if the components were displayed with normal swept tuned operation in log mode 10 dB per division 4 2 Making Measurements If the FFT stop frequency is less than the highest harmonic of the AM modulation than the FFT results may include aliased signals That is it will include some signals that are being displayed
244. connector that accepts programming commands from an external keyboard Option 043 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R43 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 08590 60381 Note Option 043 can be converted to an Option 041 by ordering the HP IB and parallel interface connector assembly HP part number 08590 60368 Frequency Extension to 26 5 GHz with APC 3 5 Connector Option 026 For HP 8592L and HP 8593E only The frequency range of the spectrum analyzer is extended from 22 GHz to 26 5 GHz Analyzers with this option use an APC 3 5 connector on the RF INPUT and circuit boards and front panels that are different from the standard units Frequency Extension to 26 5 GHz with N Type Connector Option 027 For HP 8592L and HP 8593E only The frequency range of the spectrum analyzer is extended from 22 GHz to 26 5 GHz Analyzers with this option use an N Type connector on the RF INPUT and circuit boards and front panels that are different from the standard units Note The extended frequency specifications only apply when using the Type N to SMA adaptor that is supplied with the option Front Panel Protective Cover Option 040 The impact cover assembly snaps onto the front of your spectrum analyzer to protect the front panel during travel and when the unit is not in use Option 040 is also available as a kit Impact Cover Assembly HP part number 5062 4805 Protective Soft Carrying C
245. ct type 7 78 select upper amplitude 7 78 slope type 7 80 table format 5 23 table type 5 22 testing 5 28 7 51 upper and lower 5 29 using RECALL LIMIT 5 28 using SAVE LIMIT 5 28 Limit Lines 7 49 LIMIT LINES 5 22 7 50 LIMIT PASS 5 18 LIMITS FIX REL 5 19 5 20 5 22 7 50 LIMITS FRQ TIME 5 19 5 22 7 50 LINE 7 51 linear scale 7 76 LINE front panel key 2 4 LINE switch 2 4 line voltage selector switch 1 4 link measurement personality 10 4 list of markers 7 56 marker table 5 2 list of peaks 7 63 peak table 5 4 LMT DISP Y N AUTO 5 28 7 51 LMT TEST ON OFF 5 20 5 28 7 51 LOAD FILE 7 51 LOCALS 7 51 local operation 7 27 7 51 lock harmonic band 7 13 lock internal state and trace registers 7 74 LO feedthrough 3 12 log scale 7 76 LO OUTPUT 2 6 LO output Option 009 10 5 lower limit line 5 23 editing 7 37 low level signals 3 15 reducing attenuation 3 15 reducing resolution bandwidth 3 16 reducing video bandwidth 3 17 video averaging 3 17 M MAIN COIL DR 7 3 7 51 Main Menu time gate utility 7 52 MAIN SPAN 7 3 7 52 making a measurement 2 13 14 MAN QP AT MKR 7 52 MAN TRK ADJUST 4 10 7 52 manuals extra user s and calibration guide Option 910 10 12 installation see User s Guide 10 12 operation see User s Guide 10 12 verification see Calibration Guide 10 12 manual tracking adjustment 7 52 marker delta display line 7 85 FFT 7 42 gate
246. ctions Available CATALOG ALL CATALOG REGISTER CATALOG VARIABLS CATALOG ON EVENT CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP DELETE FILE LOAD FILE CATALOG ALL CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE DELETE FILE LOAD FILE Specifies types of data that can be stored by using normal front panel operation t When cataloging analyzer memory LOAD FILE is available for CATALOG REGISTER only 5 10 Using Analyzer Features Preparing the Memory Card for Use Note Improper insertion causes error messages to occur but generally does not damage the card or instrument Care must be taken however not to force the card into place The cards are easy to insert when installed properly 1 Locate the arrow printed on the card s label 2 Insert the card with its arrow matching the raised arrow on the bezel around the card insertion slot see Figure 5 3 C HEWLETT SPECTRUM ANALYZER DJ AN FER INSTRUMENT STATE gt OO Oo Frequency a E CL CONTROL y Figure 5 3 Inserting the Memory Card 3 Press the card into the slot When correctly inserted about 19 mm 0 75 in of the card is exposed 4 If this is a new memory card it must be formatted before use Since form
247. ctrum analyzer memory or a FILE file from the memory card Use the step keys to view different sections of the directory and use the knob to select the file or item to delete Pressing DELETE FILE causes a message to appear on the spectrum analyzer screen If you are sure press key again to purge data Press DELETE FILE again if you want to delete the memory item Note Deleting items beginning with an underscore from spectrum analyzer memory is not recommended and may have unexpected results Items beginning with an underscore are used by the spectrum analyzer Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE DELETE deletes an amplitude correction factor that was previously selected by POINT SELECT POINT Front Panel Key Access CAL DELETE deletes the limit line entry for the selected segment number Press SEGMENT SELECT SEGMENT then enter the segment number to select the limit line entry for deletion Front Panel Key Access Demod Option 102 or 103 only accesses the softkeys controlling demodulation functions speaker volume squelch level FM gain and dwell time Front Panel Key Access DEMOD Option 102 or 103 only AM FM allows selection of amplitude AM or frequency FM demodulation Activating AM detection turns off FM demodulation if it is on When the frequency span is greater than 0 Hz a 30 kHz resolution bandwidth is used during demodulation regardless of the screen annotation When the span is equal to O Hz the displayed ba
248. d into the spectrum analyzer user memory It will replace an existing user defined function of the same name The DLP editor memory buffer remains intact when the spectrum analyzer is preset or powered off so the text being edited will not be lost Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE Key Descriptions 7 75 SAVE LIMIT SCALE LOG LIB SECAM L SELECT 1234 SELECT AMPLITUD SELECT DLT AMPL saves the current limit line tables in the current mass storage device spectrum analyzer memory or memory card To verify the current mass storage device press SAVE LIMIT If MAX REG appears on the spectrum analyzer display the current mass storage device is spectrum analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press or RECALL then INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device Press SAVE LIMIT enter a register number then press to save the current limit line table in spectrum analyzer memory or on the memory card When saved on the memory card limit line tables are stored with 1 the prefix and the register number entered When saved in spectrum analyzer memory the register number is saved in a trace register Trace register values are restricted to a range between O and the number x indicated by MAX REG x Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY scales the vertical graticule divisions in logarithmic units when LOG is underlined When the SCALE LOG LIN function is
249. d knob or step up down keys 7 38 Key Descriptions ENTER PRI ENTER REF EDGE ENTER WIDTH ERASE DLP MEM Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended accesses the menu for entering the value of the pulse repetition interval PRD A delta marker can be activated by pressing MARKER ON The other menu functions can be used to manipulate the marker to indicate the pulse repetition interval value Pressing DONE returns to the previous menu and makes the current value of the marker the pulse repetition interval It also restores the time domain window to the state prior to any adjustments made during entry of the pulse repetition interval When the pulse repetition interval is entered an arrow will appear on the display indicating the position of the gate trigger fr for positive triggering or 4 for negative triggering Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended accesses the menu used to define the edge of the pulse that will be used as the time reference Press MARKER ON to activate a trigger marker The other menu functions can be used to manipulate the marker to indicate the location of the reference edge Pressing DONE returns to the previous menu and makes the current value of the marker the reference edge It also restores the time domain window to the state prior to any adjustments made during entry of the reference edge Front Panel Key Access SWEEP Option 105 only Option 101 is rec
250. d linked to the reference level control reduces the power level of the spectrum analyzer input signal at the input mixer The attenuator is recoupled when AUTO is underlined Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE or AUTO COUPLE Caution To prevent damage to the input mixer the power level at the input mixer must not exceed 30 dBm To prevent signal compression power at the input to the input mixer must be kept below 10 dBm Note To protect the mixer from possible damage 0 dB RF attenuation no input power reduction to the mixer can be selected only from the number units keypad AUTO ALL couples the following functions resolution bandwidth video bandwidth attenuation sweep time center frequency step video bandwidth and video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio Front Panel Key Access AUTO_COUPLE 7 10 Key Descriptions AUTO COUPLE AUTO QP AT MKR Aux Conn Control AUXB B lt gt C B DL B accesses the softkey menu of functions that can be coupled Coupled functions are functions that are linked if one function is changed the other function is changed The functions that can be auto coupled are listed below m Resolution bandwidth couples to span Video bandwidth couples to resolution bandwidth when the spectrum analyzer has a video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio of 0 3 Sweep time couples to span resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth RF attenuation cou
251. d amplitude coordinate that starts the fourth segment 5 38 Using Analyzer Features Selecting the Frequency Coordinate Press SELECT FREQ then enter a frequency value for the point Note Only two entries per frequency are used If more points with the same frequency are entered only the first and last entries are used All other amplitude values are ignored See Figure 5 13 for an example of two entries at the same frequency Note When entering amplitude correction data the frequency and amplitude values will be listed as asterisks until new values are entered Once the frequency value is entered the segment is immediately sorted into the table according to this value Selecting the Amplitude Coordinate The amplitude value is entered by pressing SELECT AMPLITUD entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key Note Frequency or amplitude values that are not within range will be modified For example a frequency value of 60 GHz will be modified to 30 GHz Completing Table Entry and Activating Amplitude Corrections Pressing EDIT DONE blanks the amplitude correction table from the screen and accesses the menu with AMP COR ON OFF Pressing AMP COR ON OFF turns the amplitude corrections on and off Saving or Recalling Amplitude Correction Tables Pressing Amp Cor under the DISPLAY key accesses SAVE AMP COR and RECALL AMP COR These softkey functions provide an easy way to save or recall current am
252. d center the signal on the spectrum analyzer display 3 Press SPAN 1 MHz Press FREQUENCY and center the signal on the spectrum analyzer display again 4 Press BW 100 kHz Re center the signal if necessary Press 200 kHz re centering the signal again if it is necessary 5 Press VID BW AUTO MAN 1 kHz The video bandwidth should be about ten times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest for the best amplitude accuracy 6 Press REF LVL and turn the knob to change the reference level placing the signal peak within the top division of the screen The signal peak must be below the reference level The signal amplitude moves up and down because the spectrum analyzer catches the signal at different points of modulated amplitude each time it sweeps 7 Change the amplitude scale to linear by pressing AMPLITUDE and SCALE LOG LIN so that LIN is underlined The FFT will give incorrect results when the spectrum analyzer is in Log mode Press REF LVL and place the signal peak within the top division of the screen 8 Press SPAN 0 Hz The spectrum analyzer now operates as a fixed tuned receiver 9 Press MEAS USER FFT Menu and CONTINUS FFT The spectrum analyzer will now be taking FFTs continuously updating the measurement at the end of every sweep Press FFT STOP FREQ 250 Hz This sets the spectrum analyzer to include the fourth harmonic of the 60 Hz modulation signal on the screen Making Measuremen
253. d softkeys Front Panel Key Access measures the power leakage into the adjacent channels and calculates the adjacent channel power ratio of both the upper and lower channels with respect to the total power The total power of the carrier is displayed The adjacent channel power ratios of both channels are also displayed and the larger number is marked with a A Vertical lines on the display indicate the bandwidth edges of the three different channels being measured The measurement can be made on a single sweep or continuously updated at the end of each sweep See SINGLE MEAS and CONT MEAS The measurement stops and the spectrum analyzer is returned to its prior state when other measurement functions are activated The center frequency must be set to the intended carrier frequency and the reference level set to optimize the displayed signal The channel bandwidth and channel spacing must be entered by the user If PARAM AUTO is selected so AUTO is underlined other spectrum analyzer settings will then be coupled and set automatically The adjacent channel power measurement responds to signals like an rms power measurement This means that the measurement of the total channel power and the adjacent channel power ratios are accurately reported whether the transmitted signal contains tones noise or both If PARAM AUTO is selected the parameters of the instrument state are set for a valid measurement When using PARAM MAN the following condit
254. ded Note When changing both the center frequency and the span change the frequency first since the span can be limited by the frequency value FULL changes the spectrum analyzer span to full span PERN For an HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only span can be limited if harmonic band lock BND LOCK ON OFF is set to ON Full Span Frequency Range Frequency Range HP 8590L 9 kHz to 1 8 GHz HP 85913 9 kHz to 1 8 GHz HP 8592L 2 75 GHz to 22 GHz HP 85933 2 75 GHz to 22 GHz HP 85943 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz HP 8594L 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz HP 85953 9 kHz to 6 5 GHz HP 8596E 9 kHz to 12 8 GHz Harmonic band lock is set to OFF Front Panel Key Access Gate Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended Control accesses the menu of gate control functions and the entrance to the gate utility menus The gate can be controlled independently or from within the gate utility The gate utility makes it easier to set up and manipulate the gate When the gate control functions are accessed under the Gate Control menu outside of the gate utility they do not interact with the gate utility Values that are changed using these keys will not affect the gate utility settings and Key Descriptions 7 45 graphics unless the utility is entered with the new settings Front Panel Key Access GATE CTL Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended EDGE LVL determines if the gate is enabled on the edge of the trigger input or on a threshold level of th
255. ded Discard used batteries according to manufacture s instructions DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE sk780a You can order the service documentation for an HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer through your HP Sales and Service office The documentation is described under Service Documentation Option 915 in Chapter 10 of this manual After replacing the spectrum analyzer battery write the date of battery replacement on the rear panel label BATTERY LIFE 8 YEARSA T 2590 1 r EAP AT 55 C NSTALLED pul32e Figure 2 10 Rear Panel Battery Information Label 2 22 Getting Started Making Basic Measurements What You ll Learn in This Chapter This chapter demonstrates basic spectrum analyzer measurements with examples of typical measurements each measurement focuses on different functions The measurement procedures covered in this chapter are listed below Resolving signals of equal amplitude using the resolution bandwidth function Resolving small signals hidden by large signals using the resolution bandwidth function m Increasing the frequency readout resolution using the marker counter m Decreasing the frequency span using the marker track function m Peaking signal amplitude using preselector peak HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 85953 or HP 85963 only Tracking unstable signals using marker track and the maximum hold and minimum hold functions Comparing signals using
256. djustment 7 14 YTF SPAN 7 3 7 92 YTF TUNE COARSE 7 3 7 92 YTF TUNE FINE 7 3 7 92 YZ_ Spc Clear 7 92 Z ZERO MARKER 7 92 ZERO SPAN 3 7 7 92 ZONE CENTER 7 92 ZONE PK LEFT 7 93 ZONE PK RIGHT 7 93 ZONE SPAN 7 93 ZOOM 7 93 zooming a window 7 93 Index 19
257. do not fit expected TO1 pattern Indicates that the TO1 routine cannot perform the third order intermodulation measurement because the on screen signals do not have the characteristics of two signals and two distortion products U SMPLR UNLCK Indicates that the sampling oscillator circuitry is not functioning properly If this message appears check that the external frequency reference is correctly connected to the EXT REF INPUT U and H SOFTKEYOVFL Softkey nesting exceeds the maximum number of levels U SRQ The specified service request is active Service requests are a form of informational message and are explained in Appendix A of the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers User s Guide M STEP GAIN ATIN FAIL Indicates the step gain has failed H Stop at marker not available with negative detection Indicates that the marker counter cannot be used when negative peak detection is selected To use the marker counter turn off negative peak detection with DETECTOR PK SP NG U TABLE FULL Indicates the upper or lower table of limit lines contains the maximum number of entries allowed Additional entries to the table are ignored U TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND Indicates the tracking generator output signal cannot be found Check that the tracking generator output RF OUT 500 or RF OUT 75Q is connected to the spectrum analyzer input connector with an appropriate cable U TG UNLVL This message can indicate
258. domain window 16 Press UPDATE TIMEFREQ so that FREQ is underlined or press NEXT to activate the frequency window instead of the time domain window If the gate was not on when the user left the frequency window it may be necessary to press Define Gate and GATE ON OFF ON to turn the gate on again Note another front panel key press the key twice to return to the last gate utility menu used Making Measurements 4 21 Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Note Option 105 is required to perform this application Option 101 fast time domain sweep is recommended in addition to Option 105 because it significantly increases the resolution available in the time domain With Option 101 sweep times in zero span as fast as 20 ys can be used otherwise the maximum sweep time is limited to gt 20 ms The measurement procedures in this section explain how to use the time gate capability without the convenience of the Gate Utility The Gate Utility provides the user with simultaneous displays of the frequency and time domain to assist in setting up and manipulating the time gate See Using the Gate Utility To Simplify Time Gated Measurements for information about using the Gate Utility All the Gate Utility keys are listed under the SWEEP key in the key menu in Chapter 8 Descriptions of the different Gate Utility functions are found in Chapter 7 This section provides the
259. downloadable program 1 limit line a amplitude factors i display image If the data was saved using a prefix the prefix follows the first character in the file name An underscore and the register number follow the prefix CATALOG Requires Option 003 for an HP 85901 HP 8592L or HP 8594L CARD displays a catalog of the items stored on the memory card while accessing the memory card configuration menu Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 17 CATALOG DISPLAY CATALOG DLP Catalog Internal Requires O ption 003 for an HP 8590L HP 8592L or HP 8594L catalogs all of the display images that are on the memory card A display image can be recalled to the spectrum analyzer by using the CARD DISPLAY softkey Front Panel Key Access or catalogs all of the downloadable programs DLPs that are in spectrum analyzer memory or on the memory card Downloadable programs can be saved in spectrum analyzer memory by either loading in a downloadable program from the memory card or defining a function using remote programming commands FUNCDEF or ACTDEF Front Panel Key Access or accesses a menu that has the cataloging functions for spectrum analyzer memory CATALOG ALL CATALOG REGISTER CATALOG VARIABLS CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP and CATALOG ON EVENT Each catalog function displays catalog information The catalog contains information about the data stored in internal memory see Figure 7 2 and Table 7 4
260. dth until the distortion products are visible 4 For best dynamic range set the mixer input level to 40 dBm and move the signal to the reference level press AMPLITUDE More 1 of 3 MAX MXR LEVEL 40 lt aBm The spectrum analyzer automatically sets the attenuation so that a signal at the reference level will be a maximum of 40 dBm at the input mixer 5 To measure a distortion product press to place a marker on a source signal To activate the second marker press MARKER A Using the knob adjust the second marker to the peak of the distortion product that is beside the test tone The difference between the markers is displayed in the active function block 3 22 Making Basic Measurements To measure the other distortion product press PEAK SEARCH NEXT PEAK This places a marker on the next highest peak which in this case is the other source signal To measure the difference between this test tone and the second distortion product press MARKER A and use the knob to adjust the second marker to the peak of the second distortion product See Figure 3 25 ye MKR A 1 025 MHz REF 0 dam ATTEN 42 d8 54 04 de PEAK LOG 10 dB MARKER A 1 025 MHz 54 84 dB CENTER 300 650 MHz SPAN 5 000 MHz AFS RW 7 kH7 VAW 3 kHz SWP 1 7 ser Figure 3 25 Measuring the Distortion Product Making Basic Measurements 3 23 Using the Analyzer As a Receiver in Z
261. dulation demodulation is only available with Option 102 or 103 Marker annotation is also removed Front Panel Key Access keeps the active marker at the requested amplitude on the screen Once activated the marker remains at the amplitude selected by the step keys knob or numeric keypad even if the signal frequency is changed Pressing any digit O through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected units terminator menu The marker will be placed on the signal furthest left at that amplitude If no signal exists at that amplitude it will be placed above the highest signal amplitude or below the lowest trace element if it is below all trace elements When marker delta is active in addition to marker amplitude the behavior of the active marker is useful for measuring signal bandwidths For example place a marker 20 dB below the peak of a signal press MARKER A MARKER AMPTD The marker readout shows the 20 dB bandwidth Front Panel Key Access For Option 103 only provides a function similar to a normal marker when making quasi peak measurements When NORM is selected the marker can be moved anywhere on the trace when PK is selected the marker is placed on the highest on screen signal peak after each sweep Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL activates a single frequency marker at the center frequency on the active trace if an on screen marker is not already displayed If there is an on screen marker before the MARKER NORMA
262. dwidth If the bandwidths are uncoupled when video bandwidth is the active function pressing VID BW AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined recouples the bandwidths See Figure 3 19 Note The video bandwidth must be set wider than the resolution bandwidth when measuring impulse noise levels 47 MKR 104 95 MHz AEF 10 0 dBm AT O de 57 74 d8m PEAK LOG 10 2 Y 7 VIDEO Bn 10 kHz dd a ae Ma af CENTER 104 93 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHZ RES BW 100 KHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 30 0 mse Figure 3 19 Decreasing Video Bandwidth Making Basic Measurements 3 17 Example If a signal level is very close to the noise floor video averaging is another way to make the signal more visible Note The time required to construct a full trace that is averaged to the desired degree is approximately the same when using either the video bandwidth or the video averaging technique The video bandwidth technique completes the averaging as a slow sweep is taken whereas the video averaging technique takes many sweeps to complete the average Characteristics of the signal being measured such as drift and duty cycle determine which technique is appropriate Video averaging is a digital process in which each trace point is averaged with the previous trace point average Selecting video averaging changes the detection mode from peak to sample The result is a sudden drop in the display
263. e ohm Q peak detection mode The analyzer state where circuits calculate the peak value of a displayed signal This value is determined by evaluating a series of measured values from an active trace peak detector A detector that follows the peak or envelope of the signal applied to it The standard detector in a spectrum analyzer is typically a peak detector MIL STD EM1 measurements usually call for peak detection Refer also to quasi peak detector and envelope detector percent amplitude modulation A measure of the amount of amplitude modulation on a signal The measurement value is a comparison of the power in the modulation signal to the power in the signal being modulated Percent amplitude modulation can be calculated as follows where dB is the ratio of the power of the signal to the power of the amplitude modulation sidebands AM 2002107 Glossary l 1 persistence See CRT persistence personality Applications available on a memory card or other electronic media that extends the capability of an instrument for specific uses Examples include digital radio personalities and cable TV personalities phase noise Refer to noise sidebands position units The position unit describes the location of a point along the horizontal axis of a trace Position unit values of a trace begin on the left hand side of the graticule and increase to a predefined value specific to the spectrum analyzer model on the right hand side of the grat
264. e Width with Two Signals Present 4 21 Test Setup for Option 105 2 o 4 22 Setting the Center Frequency Span and Reference Level 4 23 Setting the Sweep Time e 4 24 Setting the Gate Delay and Gate Length Using an Oscilloscope 4 25 Using Time Gating to View Signal 1 2 a a a en 4 26 Placing the Gate Output During the Second Signal 4 27 Viewing Both Signals with Time Gating a a 000 4 28 Gate Not Occurring During the Pulse 4 29 Gate is Occurring at the Beginning of the Pulse 4 30 Self Calibration Data Results 2 2 eo 4 31 Rear Panel Connections for Option 105 2 o AD Tate MN a a AD eee a De o mae 4 33 Using the Level Gate Control 2 2 a a e o 4 34 N dB Bandwidth Measurement e eo 4 35 Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement 4 36 Third Order Intermodulation Measurement s 0 o o 4 37 Occupied Bandwidth e 4 38 Adjacent Channel Power 2020000 0048 4 4 39 Adjacent Channel Power Extended a a 4 40 Adjacent Channel Power Graph o a a a ee o 4 41 Channel Power p saos ai enata a a a A a a 4 42 Channel Power Graph 2 2 e 5 1 Marker Table Display 2 2 2 o
265. e frequency separation so the input signals will be resolved REF 23 7 dBm ATTEN 16 GB MKA 300 010 MHz 23 86 dam PEAK LOG 10 dB MARKER 300 010 MHz 23 86 dBm WA SB SC FC CORR CENTER 300 000 MHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SPAN 2 O92 MHZ SWP 68 msec Figure 3 4 Signal Resolution with a 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth If a 30 kHz filter is used the 60 dB bandwidth will be 450 kHz Since the half bandwidth 225 kHz is wider than the frequency separation the signals most likely will not be resolved See Figure 3 5 To determine resolution capability for intermediate values of amplitude level differences consider the filter skirts between the 3 dB and 60 dB points to be approximately straight In this case we simply used the 60 dB value REF 23 7 dBm ATTEN 10 dB PEAK LOG MKA 300010 MHz 23 87 dBm 10 dB 8 5 BW kHz l WA SB sc FO CORR CENTER 209 008 MHz RES BW 30 kHz VBW 30 kHz SPAN 2 000 MHz SWP 20 msec Figure 3 5 Signal Resolution with a 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Making Basic Measurements 3 5 Increasing the Frequency Readout Resolution Using the Marker Counter Note This application cannot be performed using an HP 8590L with Option 713 or an HP
266. e frequency response of the test system connect the cable but not the DUT from the tracking generator output to the spectrum analyzer input Press TRACE TRACE A B C so B is underlined CLEAR WRITE B BLANK B The frequency response of the test system is now stored in trace B 8 To normalize reconnect the DUT to the spectrum analyzer Press TRACE More 1 of 3 NORMLIZE ON OFF until ON is underlined Press NORMLIZE POSITION to activate the display line This display line marks the normalized reference position or the position where O dB insertion loss transmission measurements or O dB return loss reflection measurements will normally reside Using the knob results in a change in the position of the normalized trace within the range of the graticule Normalization eliminates the frequency response error of the test system When normalization is on trace math is being performed on the active trace The trace math performed is trace A minus trace B plus the display line with the result placed into trace A Remember that trace A contained the measurement trace trace B contained the stored calibration trace and DL display line represents the normalized reference position Note that the units of the reference level dB reflect this relative measurement 4 REF dBm ATTEN 0 dB PEAK LOG 10 dB DISPLAY LINE 6 6 dB DL 1 T 6 6 dB wA SB SC FC CORA N o femal CENTER 443 6 M
267. e input signal If the gate control is set to EDGE the edge of the input signal triggers the timer for the gate delay When the gate control is set to LVL the gate follows the positive level of the signal connected to GATE TRIGGER INPUT When the gate control is set to level the functions of gate delay and gate length no longer apply and therefore the GATE DELAY GATE LENGTH and EDGE POL POS NEG softkeys are blanked The gate utility does not allow level triggering The gate will automatically be set to edge trigger on entry to the gate utility Front Panel Key Access SWEEP GATE Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended DELAY sets the duration of the delay after an edge trigger before the gate switch closes The gate delay can be set from 1 ys to 65 535 ms in 1 ps steps If the GATE DELAY softkey is accessed outside of the time gate utility 1t turns off the gate markers but does not affect the gate utility settings When the gate utility is entered the current value of the gate delay will be used The GATE DELAY softkey can be accessed from within the gate utility under the Define Gate menu Front Panel Key Access GATE Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended LENGTH sets the duration of the gate The gate length can be set from 1 ps to 65 535 ms in 1 ys steps If the GATE LENGTH softkey is accessed outside of the time gate utility 1t turns off the gate markers but does not affect the gate utility settings When the g
268. e is usually expressed as the ratio of the power in the adjacent channel to the channel power amplitude accuracy The general uncertainty of a spectrum analyzer amplitude measurement whether relative or absolute analog display mode A display mode of the HP 8590 Series Spectrum Analyzers that digitally simulates an analog display The spectrum analyzer takes several samples of the signal amplitude at each horizontal point as it sweeps across the screen The samples are displayed as individual dots on the screen that are not connected This analog like trace data is available along with the normal digital display features like hard copy output screen annotation and titles and complete marker functions analog display A display where the trace data is generated by deflecting the electron beam to match the signal amplitude as it sweeps across the screen The refresh rate of the trace data is equal to the spectrum analyzer sweep rate Refer also to CRT persistence ASCII The acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange It is an eight part code 7 bits plus parity check used for data information interchange An ASCII value is a specific combination of bits ranging from O to 255 that represent characters in machine language that computers and controllers can understand Glossary attenuation A general term used to denote a decrease of signal magnitude in transmission from one point to another Attenuation may be expre
269. e marker counter remains on until turned off Turn off the marker counter by pressing MKR FCTN then MK COUNT ON OFF until OFF is underlined MARKER ALL OFF also turns the marker counter off 4D CNTRR BOO 000 MHz REF dBm ATTEN 18 gB 20 45d8m CNT RESOLN 1 kHz WA SB SERE dl a pins CENTER 308 MHz SPAN 100 0 MHz RES BW 1 MHz VBW 2300 kHz SWP 75 msec Figure 3 6 Using the Marker Counter 3 6 Making Basic Measurements Decreasing the Frequency Span Using the Marker Track Function Using the spectrum analyzer marker track function you can quickly decrease the span while keeping the signal at center frequency Example Examine a carrier signal in a 200 kHz span 1 Press PRESET tune to a carrier signal and place a marker at the peak If you are using the CAL OUT signal place the marker on the 300 MHz calibration signal Press FREQUENCY 300 MHz SPAN 200 MHz and PEAK SEARCH Press MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF ON and the signal will move to the center of the screen if it is not already positioned there note that the marker must be on the signal Because the marker track function automatically maintains the signal at the center of the screen you can reduce the span quickly for a closer look If the signal drifts off of the screen as you decrease the span use a wider frequency span Press SPAN 200 kHz The span decreases in st
270. e point of trace B Updates each trace point if a new maximum level is detected in successive sweeps Front Panel Key Access lets you change the maximum input mixer level in 10 dB steps from 10 dBm to 100 dBm The mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the attenuator setting As the reference level changes the input attenuator setting is changed to keep the power levels less than the selected level at the input mixer Pressing PRESET resets the maximum input mixer level to 10 dBm Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE turns off the measurement functions under the Power Menu softkey and restores the spectrum analyzer to the state prior to initiating the power measurement If another front panel key is pressed exiting the power menus press the MEAS USER key twice to return to the power menu Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER switches between the User Menu and the menu containing N dB PTS ON OFF AM ON OFF TO1 ON OFF Power Menu and FFT Menu If no keys have been defined in the user menu No User Menu is displayed See the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information about defining keys in the user menu indicates that the save lock function is on It replaces the ERASE STATEALL and ERASE TRACEALL softkeys under the key and it replaces STATE INTERNAL and TRACE gt INTERNAL under the SAVE_ key when SAV LOCK ON OFF is ON Pressi
271. e represents the version of firmware that particular instrument was shipped with For HP 70000 Modular Measurement Systems file numbers saved by the user in memory are preceded with letters that define the file type Refer to the HP 70000 system operation manual for detailed information shape factor Refer to bandwidth selectivity signal resolution The ability of the spectrum analyzer to resolve two separate input signals Closely spaced signals are more difficult to resolve than signals spaced far apart Refer also to resolution bandwidth and shape factor signal identification A routine that identifies whether or not a particular Fourier transform response on the spectrum analyzer s display is at the correct frequency The displayed signal may be aliased by the FFT calculation because of inadequate sample rate The signal identification routine indicates if the signal is being displayed at the wrong frequency single sweep mode The spectrum analyzer sweeps once when trigger conditions are met Each sweep is initiated by pressing an appropriate front panel key or by sending a programming command sinusoid A wave whose electric field vector is proportional to the sine or cosine of an angle that is a linear function of time or distance or both softkey Key labels displayed on a screen or monitor which are activated by mechanical keys surrounding the display or located on a keyboard Softkey selections usually evoke menus that are w
272. e to determine whether there are two signals see Figure 4 18 However you could not use a standard spectrum analyzer since both signals would contribute to the displayed frequency spectrum By using the time gate functions of Option 105 you can use a spectrum analyzer to mask out one signal at a time and measure each of the two signals separately see Figure 4 19 4 22 Making Measurements Note When Option 105 is enabled it interrupts the internal signal path of the spectrum analyzer so several spectrum analyzer functions may not be available under all conditions These conditions include marker noise MK NOISE ON OFF sample detection while in the frequency span mode quasi peak detection Option 103 and AM FM demodulation and TV sync trigger Option 102 The marker counter function MK COUNT ON OFF is not directly affected by the operation of Option 105 but many signals that are appropriate for time gating for example pulsed RF signals will not be counted correctly by the marker counter function Description of Items in Figure 4 18 item Description of Items in Figure 4 18 First signal When the time gate will be actively viewing the second signal Second signal When the time gate will be actively viewing the first signal Making Measurements 4 23 hp P E F10 0 dBm GTPOS LOG 10 dB ATTAN 10 dB
273. e value remains constant the result is from the device under test Increasing the attenuator setting of the spectrum analyzer decreases the level of the signal internal to the spectrum analyzer and therefore decreases the distortion generated by the analyzer Refer to the characteristics information in specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for a graph of the typical distortion performance of the spectrum analyzer 4 42 Making Measurements Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements The power menu provides several powerful transmitter measurement functions that are easy to use The measurements include Occupied Bandwidth m Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Channel Power These transmitter power measurements can be used to measure analog and continuous carrier digital radios The transmitted signal can be tones noise or a combination of tones and noise without affecting the measurement accuracy The power is measured in an rms way so that power and power ratio values are consistent with power meter results The signal or signals being measured should be displayed before activating the measurement The spectrum analyzer center frequency should be set to the carrier frequency and the reference level should be set so that the signal is near the top graticule A power measurement may require the user to enter the channel spacing and or channel bandwidth before activating the function The
274. e voltage selector switch is properly positioned as described in the following paragraphs Damage to the equipment could result 5 Connect the power cable to the spectrum analyzer and turn it on Warning Install the product so thatthe detachable power cord is readily identifiable and easily reached by the operator The detachable power cord is the product disconnecting devise It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the product The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch Alternatively an externally installed switch or circuit breaker which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator may be used as a disconnecting device 6 Execute the self calibration routines 1 2 Preparing For Use Initial Inspection Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged keep it until you have verified that the contents are complete and you have tested the spectrum analyzer mechanically and electrically Table 1 1 contains the accessories shipped with the spectrum analyzer If the contents are incomplete or if the spectrum analyzer does not pass the verification tests in the calibration guide notify the nearest Hewlett Packard office If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress also notify the carrier Keep the shipping materials for the carrier s insp
275. eamplifiers and power amplifiers can be used with your spectrum analyzer to enhance measurements of very low level signals The HP 10855A preamplifier provides a minimum of 22 dB gain from 2 MHz to 1300 MHz The HP 8449B preamplifier provides a minimum of 30 dB gain from 1 GHz to 26 5 GHz The HP 8447D preamplifier provides a minimum of 25 dB gain from 100 kHz to 1 3 GHz The HP 84473 power amplifier provides a minimum of 22 dB gain from 0 1 GHz to 1 3 GHz The HP 87405A preamplifier provides a minimum of 22 dB gain from 10 MHz to 3 GHz The HP 85905A CATV 75 ohm preamplifier provides a minimum of 18 dB gain from 45 MHz to 1 GHz Burst Carrier Trigger For use with HP 8590 E Series spectrum analyzers The HP 85902A burst carrier trigger detects the burst RF carrier of a digital communication system and provides a TTL output trigger to synchronize a spectrum analyzer The triggering function is especially useful when performing time dependent measurements used as power versus time and adjacent channel power gated measurements The HP 85902A is compatible with most digital communications formats including NADC TDMA E TDMA JDC GSM DCS 1800 CT2 CAI DECT PHP and CDMA 10 14 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories Close Field Probes The HP 11945A close field probe set contains the HP 11940A and HP 11941A close field probes These are small hand held electromagnetic field sensors that provide repeatable absolute magnetic fi
276. easurement personality provides simple menu driven functions to make fast accurate scalar network analysis measurements with your spectrum analyzer and test set Making Measurements 4 7 Using a Spectrum Analyzer with a Tracking Generator The procedure below describes how to use the built in tracking generator system of the HP 85913 Option 010 spectrum analyzer to measure the rejection of a low pass filter which is a type of transmission measurement Illustrated in this example are the functions in the tracking generator menu such as adjusting the tracking generator output power source calibration and normalization Conducting a reflection measurement is similar and is covered in Making Reflection Calibration Measurements Refer to the HP Spectrum Analyzer Seminar or Application Note 150 7 for more information Stepping through the Measurement There are four basic steps in performing a stimulus response measurement whether it be a transmission or reflection measurement set up the spectrum analyzer settings calibrate normalize and measure 1 If necessary perform the self calibration routine for the tracking generator described in Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine in Chapter 2 2 To measure the rejection of a low pass filter connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 4 This example uses a filter with a cut off frequency of 300 MHz as the DUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER RF OUTSU INP
277. easurements 4 39 Example Measure the 6 dB bandwidth of the spectrum analyzer internal 9 kHz EM1 bandwidth 1 On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET PEAK SEARCH MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF ON SPAN and enter 200 kHz 2 Select the 9 kHz EM1 bandwidth by pressing Bw EM1 BW Menu and 9 kHz EM1 BW 3 Press and N dB PTS ON OFF ON to activate the N dB bandwidth function 4 Read the measurement results in the upper left corner of the screen 5 The knob or the data entry keys can be used to change the N dB value from 3 dB to 6 dB 6 Press N dB PTS ON OFF OFF to turn the measurement off Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement Percent amplitude modulation can be measured quickly and easily using the one button AM function The signal and both its sidebands must be on the display The sidebands are assumed to be entirely from amplitude modulation The spectrum analyzer places arrow markers on the three signals to be used to compute percent amplitude modulation and displays the value If the sidebands are not in the frequency span or their frequency spacing is not equal the measurement stops and an error message is displayed Percent AM measurement accuracy for close signals m typically about 0 1 for log mode m typically about 3 for linear mode MKR 1 017 kHz 45 25 dBm No user P Menu FFT STOP 6 667 kHz SWP 38 FFT START RE 8 msec R Hz S BW 10 kHz VBW 18 kHz Figure 4 35 Pe
278. easuring a signal at another frequency PRESEL DEFAULT provides the best flatness for a full single band for viewing several signals simultaneously Example Use the knob step keys or to place the marker on your signal and then press AMPLITUDE and PRESEL PEAK The message CAL PEAKING appears in the active function block while the routine is working K4 MKR1 8 5GHZ REF 0 dBm ATTEN1 0 dB 41 22m PEAK 7 LOG REF LEVEL 10 dB g dBm L CENTER 18 909 GHz SPAN 2 000 GHz HE5 BW3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 40 msec Figure 3 8 Peaking Signal Amplitude Using Preselector Peak 3 8 Making Basic Measurements Tracking Unstable Signals Using Marker Track and the Maximum Hold and Minimum Hold Functions The marker track function is useful for tracking unstable signals that drift with time The maximum hold and minimum hold functions are useful for displaying modulated signals which appear unstable but have an envelope that contains the information bearing portion of the signal MK TRACK ON OFF may be used to track these unstable signals Use to place a marker on the highest signal on the display Pressing MK TRACK ON OFF ON will bring that signal to the center frequency of the graticule and adjust the center frequency every sweep to bring the selected signal back to the center SPAN ZOOM is a quick way to perform the PEAK
279. ecrease the video bandwidth until the amplitude of the measured signal drops Then step the bandwidth up until the signal amplitude stops increasing or until the maximum video bandwidth is reached Use the narrowest video bandwidth that does not cause a change in the signal amplitude For the best amplitude accuracy the video bandwidth should be about 10 times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest For the 60 Hz fundamental a 1 kHz video bandwidth works well 7 Press and AM ON OFF so that ON is underlined The spectrum analyzer reads out the percent AM of the largest modulation frequency An arrow indicates the signal being measured see Figure 4 1 This measurement does not include all of the harmonics of the modulating signal Note The percent AM function will not run if the SIGNAL CLIPPED error message is being displayed Increase the reference level until the error message goes away Note To return to the spectrum analyzer state prior to running the FFT function press the FFT OFF softkey This turns off the FFT function Press RECALL INTERNAL STATE and 8 to recall the state from state register 8 Note When the FFT measurement is active pressing the key will cycle between the MEAS USER and FFT menus 4 6 Making Measurements Stimulus Response Measurements Note This application should only be performed using an HP 8590L or HP 85913 with Option 010 or 011 or using an H
280. ection The HP office will arrange for repair or replacement without waiting for a claim settlement If the shipping materials are in good condition retain them for possible future use You may wish to ship the spectrum analyzer to another location or to return it to Hewlett Packard for service See How to Return Your Analyzer for Service in Chapter 9 for more information about shipping materials Note If cleaning is necessary use a damp cloth only Table 1 1 Accessories Supplied with the Spectrum Analyzer Description 32 kilobyte Memory Card Memory Card Holder Adapter Type N m to BNC f Two Adapters BNC m to BNC f Adapter BNC m to SMA f Connector APC 3 5 mm f to f Reference Connector Table 502 BNC Zable SMA m to type N m Zable 750 BNC Zable SMA m to SMA m ower cable 0950 1964 9222 1545 1250 0780 1250 0076 HP 1250 1700 HP 5061 5311 1250 1499 8120 2682 8120 5148 5062 6452 08592 60061 See Table 1 3 HP Part Number Shipped with analyzer HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L must include Option 003 Shipped with analyzer HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP8594L must include Option 003 Not shipped with Option 001 Two adapters are shipped with Option 010 Shipped with Option 105 only The adapters can be used to connect cables to the rear panel connectors Shipped with Option 026 only Shipped with Option 026 only Shipped connected between the 1
281. ection factors is similar to saving trace data State and trace data is not recalled with limit line tables or amplitude correction factors 1 Enter a screen title if desired by using DISPLAY Change Title The screen title is displayed when CATALOG REGISTER is used to catalog the trace registers The screen title is not recalled however with the limit line tables or amplitude correction factors 2 When saving limit line tables set up the limit line table to be stored See Using the Limit Line Functions in this chapter When saving amplitude correction factors enter the data using the remote programming AMPCOR command or use the amplitude correction function softkeys See Using Amplitude Correction Functions in this chapter for more information about entering amplitude correction factors via the front panel 3 Press Save If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 4 Press Trace Intrnl This accesses a menu with LIMIT LINES and AMP COR 5 Press LIMIT LINES to save limit line tables Press AMP COR to save amplitude correction factors REGISTER and MAX REG are displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen The number after MAX REG indicates the maximum register number that can be entered for storage in spectrum analyzer memory 6 Use the numeric keypad to enter a number from O to the maximum register number and then press ENTER To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Fac
282. ed CAL CAL AMPTD Front Panel Key Access activates the resolution bandwidth function and accesses the softkeys that control the bandwidth functions RES BW AUTO MAN VID BW AUTO MAN VBW RBW RATIO VID AVG ON OFF and the EMI BW Menu Also see the RES BW AUTO MAN softkey description accesses the softkey menus used for the self calibration service diagnostics and service calibration functions For more information about self calibrating the spectrum analyzer see Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines in Chapter 2 initiates an amplitude self calibration routine Connect CAL OUT to the spectrum analyzer input before pressing CAL AMPTD If Option 105 is installed remove the cable from the rear panel GATE INPUT before starting the self calibration routine Note If the frequency calibration and amplitude calibration self calibration routines are both used the CAL FREQ softkey function should always be initiated before the CAL AMPTD softkey function CAL FETCH Front Panel Key Access retrieves stored self calibration correction factors from the last calibration saved using CAL STORE Front Panel Key Access CAL Key Descriptions 7 13 CAL FREQ CAL FREQ amp AMPTD CAL MXR CAL STORE CAL TIMEBASE CAL TRK GEN CAL YTF Card Conf ig initiates a frequency self calibration routine Connect CAL OUT to the spectrum analyzer input before pressing CAL FREQ If Op
283. ed If the spectrum analyzer is in non zero span the resolution bandwidth is changed to 1 MHz the frequency span is set to O Hz the detector mode is changed to sample the sweep time is changed to 100 ys the amplitude scale is changed to linear a sweep is taken and a marker is placed on the signal peak Front Panel Key Access TRIG Key Descriptions 7 83 SYNC NRM NTSC SYNC NRM PAL T WINDOW RES BW T WINDOW SWP TIME changes the rear panel MONITOR output between normal internal monitor horizontal and vertical synchronization constants or the NTSC video compatible format In the NTSC mode the monitor output is compatible with NTSC video cassette recorders In the normal mode the synchronization constants can be changed from the factory default settings by using CRT HORZ POSITION and CRT VERT POSITION softkeys If the user has not changed the constants the default settings will be used The display will be compressed slightly when using the NTSC format instead of the normal format The NTSC format has less vertical resolution than the spectrum analyzer display The top and bottom of the spectrum analyzer display are compressed slightly so that all of the information can be fit into the vertical resolution available with the NTSC format Front Panel Key Access changes the rear panel MONITOR output between normal internal monitor horizontal and vertical synchronization constants or the PAL video compatible format In the
284. ed the limit lines are only displayed when limit line testing is turned on Saving or Recalling Limit Line Tables Pressing then Limit Lines accesses SAVE LIMIT and RECALL LIMIT These softkey functions provide an easy way to save or recall current limit line tables SAVE LIMIT saves the current limit line tables in the current mass storage device either spectrum analyzer memory or a memory card To determine the current mass storage device press SAVE LIMIT If MAX REG appears on the spectrum analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Enter a register number then press to save the current limit line table in the current mass storage location RECALL LIMIT recalls limit line tables from the current mass storage device either spectrum analyzer memory or a memory card To determine the current mass storage device press RECALL LIMIT If MAX REG appears on the spectrum analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device To recall a limit line enter the register number that the limit line table was saved under then press ENTER When recalling a limit line from the memory card it is necessary that the current prefix matches the prefix that the limit line was stored with Use Change Prefix to change the current prefix 5 28 Using Analyzer Features Proced
285. ed noise level The sample mode displays the instantaneous value of the signal at the end of the time or frequency interval represented by each display point rather than the value of the peak during the interval Sample mode is not used to measure signal amplitudes accurately because it may not find the true peak of the signal Video averaging clarifies low level signals in wide bandwidths by averaging the signal and the noise As the spectrum analyzer takes sweeps you can watch video averaging smooth the trace 1 Position a low level signal on the spectrum analyzer screen 2 Press TRACE More 1 of 3 then VID AVG ON OFF When ON is underlined the video averaging routine is initiated As the averaging routine smoothes the trace low level signals become more visible VID AVG 100 appears in the active function block The number represents the number of samples or sweeps taken to complete the averaging routine 3 To set the number of samples use the number units keypad For example press VID AVG ON OFF so that ON is underlined 25 Hz Turn video averaging off and on again by pressing VID AVG ON OFF OFF VID AVG ON OFF ON The number of samples equals the number of sweeps in the averaging routine During averaging the current sample appears at the left side of the graticule Changes in active functions settings such as the center frequency or reference level will restart the sampling The sampling will also restart if vid
286. ed points and the minimum value by even numbered points To prevent the loss of a signal occurring during an even numbered interval the maximum value of the signal during this interval is preserved At the next odd numbered interval the value displayed is the greater value carried over or the maximum that occurs during the current interval sample The instantaneous value of an incoming signal On digital displays each displayed point of the signal indicates the instantaneous value of the signal for that part of the frequency span or time interval represented by the point Glossary 13 scale factor The per division calibration of the vertical axis of the display scan frequency span linearity The measured accuracy of the horizontal axis of the analyzer display When two horizontal points are set with analyzer controls then measured the linearity is the calculated error between the two points compared with the analyzer settings selectivity See bandwidth selectivity sensitivity The level of the smallest sinusoid that can be observed on a spectrum analyzer usually under optimized conditions of minimum resolution bandwidth O dB input attenuation and minimum video bandwidth Hewlett Packard defines sensitivity as the displayed average noise level A sinusoid at that level appears to be about 2 dB above the noise serial prefix Serial numbers that identify an instrument begin with a five character prefix The prefix in this cas
287. ed to mark the ON position of the power line switch ISM LA This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product General Safety Considerations Warning This is a Safety Class I product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited Warning No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers Warning If this product is not used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired This product must be used in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only Warning For continued protection against fire hazard replace fuse only with same type and ratings type 5A 250V The use of other fuses or materials is prohibited Warning To prevent electrical shock disconnect the HP 8590 Series equipment from mains before cleaning Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external case parts Do not attempt to clean internally Warning There are many points inside the instrument which can if contacted cause personal injury Be extremel
288. egment regardless of the format chosen The mid delta format can be used if the upper and lower limit lines are symmetrical with respect to the amplitude axis An upper and lower amplitude component are specified for every frequency or time component Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 37 Edit Up Low Edit Upper EDIT UPR LWR Editor EMI BW Menu allows you to view or edit the upper and lower limit line tables simultaneously Up to 20 entries are allowed for the upper and lower limit line tables With the upper and lower limit line table format the upper and lower limit lines can be entered at the same time With the upper and lower limit line format the frequency or time upper amplitude and lower amplitude are specified The frequency or time and upper amplitude value comprise the coordinate point for the upper limit line the frequency or time and lower amplitude value comprise the coordinate point for the lower limit line It is not necessary to specify both an upper and lower amplitude component for every frequency or time component Front Panel Key Access allows you to view or edit the upper limit line table Up to 20 entries are allowed for the upper limit line table With the upper limit line table format the coordinates of the upper limit line are specified but none are specified for the lower limit line Even if lower limit line values exist or the values had been entered as an upper and lower
289. el power measurement 4 43 adjacent channel power ratio 7 6 ADJ CHAN POWER 7 6 ADJ CHAN PWR extd 7 7 ALC INT EXT 7 7 ALC MTR INT XTAL 7 7 ALC TEST 7 2 7 8 aliasing FFT function 4 3 signal identification 7 79 ALL DLP CARD 5 16 7 8 alpha characters 7 5 7 47 7 82 7 92 AM FM demodulation use with Option 105 4 23 AM FM demodulator with speaker and quasi peak detector Option 103 10 9 and TV sync trigger circuitry Option 102 10 9 AM ON OFF 4 40 7 4 Amp Cor 5 38 7 8 AMP COR 7 8 AMP COR ON OFF 5 37 5 39 7 8 amplifiers 10 14 AMPLITUDE 2 1 2 13 7 8 amplitude accuracy 7 30 amplitude and frequency self calibration routine 7 14 amplitude correction amplitude coordinate 5 39 frequency coordinate 5 39 point 5 38 testing 5 39 using RECALL AMP COR 5 39 using SAVE AMP COR 5 39 amplitude correction factors 5 35 39 amplitude correction factors 5 35 cataloging 7 16 delete point 7 33 edit 7 36 Index 2 edit done 7 36 menus 7 8 on or off 7 8 purge 7 70 recall table 7 73 save table 7 75 select amplitude 7 76 select frequency 7 77 select point 7 77 select sweep time 7 78 storing 7 8 amplitude correction functions 5 38 amplitude corrections creating 5 36 amplitude corrections creating 5 37 editing 5 36 amplitude demodulation 7 33 amplitude menus 7 8 amplitude modulation 7 4 amplitude modulation measurement 4 39 amplitude scale 7 76 amplitude self calibration 7 13
290. eld measurements over a wide frequency range The HP 11941A operates from 9 kHz to 30 MHz The HP 11940A from 30 MHz to 1 GHz When attached to a source the probes generate a localized magnetic field for electromagnetic interference EMI susceptibility testing The HP 11945A Option E51 also includes the HP 8447F Option H64 preamplifier and a convenient carrying bag External Keyboard For use with Option 041 or 043 The HP C1405B keyboard is an IBM AT compatible keyboard that can be connected to the external keyboard connector using a C1405 60015 cable adapter of the rear panel of the spectrum analyzer Any IBM AT compatible keyboard with a small DIN connector will work Screen titles and remote programming commands can be entered easily with the external keyboard HP IB Cable Fbr use with Option 041 The HP 10833 HP IB cables interconnect HP IB devices and are available in four different lengths HP IB cables are used to connect printers plotters and controllers to a spectrum analyzer Memory Cards The HP 8590L and HP 8592L must have Option 003 Blank memory cards are available for the storage and transfer of data and programs Several different sizes of cards are available for use with the memory card reader see table below The memory card reader is standard for the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 The memory card reader is Option 003 for the HP 8590L and HP 8592L Model Number Size of Memory Card HP 8570
291. ent or the amplitude value for the current amplitude correction point Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequency or time by using the data keys Change an amplitude value by using the step keys or the knob Press to correct errors Front Panel Key Access or DISPLAY allows you to enter the delta amplitude value The middle amplitude value and the delta amplitude value create an upper and lower limit line segment Enter the delta amplitude value for the selected frequency or time by using the knob or data keys Press to correct errors The default value is 0 Front Panel Key Access 7 76 Key Descriptions SELECT FREQ allows you to enter the frequency value for a limit line segment or for an amplitude correction point Enter the frequency value for the frequency by using the data keys Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob Press to correct errors A frequency coordinate must always be specified for either limit lines or amplitude correction factors Note SELECT LWR AMPL SELECT MID AMPL SELECT POINT SELECT PREFIX SELECT SEGMENT Limit line data is sorted in frequency order in the limit line table The sorting occurs after you have entered the frequency and at least one amplitude value For amplitude correction factors only two entries with the same frequency are valid Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used the middle points are igno
292. entering data 3 Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Press Trace Card to access the menu with LIMIT LIMES and AMP COR 4 Press either LIMIT LINES to save limit line tables or AMP COR to save amplitude correction factors REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the spectrum analyzer display 5 Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER The data is saved with a file name consisting of a 1 for limit line tables or a for amplitude correction factors the prefix that was entered an underscore and the register number To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors l Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press Card Trace to access the menu with LIMIT LINES and AMP COR 4 Press either LIMIT LINES to recall a limit line table or AMP COR to recall amplitude correction factors 5 Enter the register number that the limit line data or amplitude correction factors was saved under and then press ENTER Note If LOAD FILE is used to recall limit line files or amplitude correction factor files the traces are set to the store blank mode Press TRACE CLEAR WRITE A to view trace A data or press PRESET Using Analyzer Features 5 15 Saving and Recalling Programs with a Memory Card Programs als
293. eo averaging is turned off and then on again Once the set number of sweeps has been completed the spectrum analyzer continues to provide a running average based on this set number 3 18 Making Basic Measurements a MKR 181 73 MHz REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB 60 29 dBm SMPL LOG 10 48 VID AVG 25 al CENTER 18173 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHZ RES BW1 0 0 kHz VBW3 0 kHz SWP2 0 msec Figure 3 20 Using the Video Averaging Function Making Basic Measurements 3 19 Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces Distortion from the Analyzer High level input signals may cause spectrum analyzer distortion products that could mask the real distortion measured on the input signal Using trace B and the RF attenuator you can determine which signals if any are internally generated distortion products Example Using a signal from a signal generator determine whether the harmonic distortion products are generated by the spectrum analyzer 1 Connect a signal generator to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Set the signal generator frequency to 200 MHz and the amplitude to 0 dBm Set the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer to 400 MHz and the span to 500 MHz press FREQUENCY 400 MHz SPAN 500 MHz The signal shown in Figure 3 21 produces harmonic distortion products in the spectrum analyzer input mixer
294. eps as automatic zoom is completed See Figure 3 7 You can also use the knob or step keys to decrease the span or use the PEAK ZOOM function under SPAN Press MK TRACK ON OFF again so that OFF is underlined to turn off the marker track function Note When you are finished with the example turn off the marker tracking function 47 MER TRK 300 0010 MHz REF dBm ATTEN1 0 dB 280 4 dBm PEAK LOG 10 a7 d8 o e SPAN 200 0 kHz Wa ss SC FC CORR CENTER 3680015 MHz SPAN 200 0 kHz RES BW 3 kHz VBW 3 kHz SWP 100 msec Figure 3 7 After Zooming In on the Signal Making Basic Measurements 3 7 Peaking Signal Amplitude with Preselector Peak Note This application should only be performed using an HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 8595E or HP 85963 PRESEL PEAK works above 2 9 GHz only bands 1 through 4 The preselector peak function automatically adjusts the preselector tracking to peak the signal at the active marker Using preselector peak prior to measuring a signal yields the most accurate amplitude reading at the specified frequency To maximize the peak response of the preselector and adjust the tracking tune the marker to a signal and press AMPLITUDE PRESEL PEAK Note PRESEL PEAK maximizes the peak response of the signal of interest but may degrade the frequency response at other frequencies Use PRESEL DEFAULT or to clear preselector peak values before m
295. er frequencies is the 99 power bandwidth and is the value displayed The OCC BW POWER softkey can be used to change the measured power value from 1 to 99 99 of the total displayed power The occupied bandwidth function also indicates the value of the measured power in the occupied bandwidth and the difference between the spectrum analyzer center frequency and the center frequency of the occupied bandwidth The measurement can be made on a single sweep or to continuously update at the end of each sweep The center frequency reference level and channel spacing must be set by the user Press PARAM AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined and other spectrum analyzer settings will be set automatically set to make a valid measurement Set PARAM AUTO MAN to MAN to manually control all settings The measurement function stops and the spectrum analyzer is returned to its prior state when other functions are activated Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS ON HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 85953 or HP 8596E only activates the windows display mode and accesses the menu of window zone functions The windows display function splits the screen into two separate displays Only one of these displays is active at a time The currently active window will have a solid line around the graticule rather than a broken line The WINDOWS NEXT key will switch the active display between the upper and lower windows The instrument state of the active window can be c
296. er frequency messages appear Functions appearing in this block are active their values can be changed with the knob step keys or number units keypad Set the center frequency to 300 MHz with the DATA keys by pressing 300 MHz The knob and step keys can also be used to set the center frequency 5 Set the span Press SPAN SPAN is now displayed in the active function block and the SPAN softkey label appears in inverse video to indicate it is the active function Reduce the span to 20 MHz by using the knob pressing the down key D or pressing 20 MHz 6 Set the amplitude When the peak of a signal does not appear on the screen it may be necessary to adjust the amplitude level on the screen Press AMPLITUDE REF LEVEL O dBm appears in the active function block The REF LVL softkey label appears in inverse video to indicate that reference level is the active function The reference level is the top graticule line on the display and is set to 0 0 dBm Changing the value of the reference level changes the amplitude level of the top graticule line If desired use the reference level function to place the signal peak on the screen using the knob step keys or number units keypad Marker functions determine the frequency and amplitude of a signal Getting Started 2 13 Figure 2 5 demonstrates the relationship between center frequency and reference level The box in the figure represents the spectrum analyzer screen Changing the
297. ered affect your choice of using the upper lower or mid delta functions The four limit line table formats are described below w The upper limit line table format is accessed by Edit Upper With the upper limit line table format the coordinates of only the upper limit line are displayed for editing lower limit line coordinates are not specified Even if lower limit line values exist or the values had been entered as an upper and lower limit line table the upper limit line values are treated as a separate table from the lower limit line values Upper limit line entries can have independent frequency and amplitude coordinates from lower limit line table entries The lower limit line table format is accessed by Edit Lower With the lower limit line table format the coordinates of only the lower limit line are displayed for editing upper limit line coordinates are not specified Even if upper limit line values exist or the values had been entered as an upper and lower limit line table the lower limit line values are treated as a separate table from the upper limit line values Lower limit line entries can have independent frequency and amplitude coordinates from upper limit line table entries E The upper and lower limit line table format is accessed by Edit Up Low With the upper and lower limit line table format the upper and lower limit line coordinates can be entered at the same time the frequency or time upper amplitude lower amplit
298. ero Frequency Span The spectrum analyzer operates as a fixed tuned receiver in zero span The zero span mode can be used to recover modulation on a carrier signal Center frequency in the swept tuned mode becomes the tuned frequency in zero span The horizontal axis of the screen becomes calibrated in time rather than frequency Markers display amplitude and time values The following functions establish a clear display of the video waveform m Trigger stabilizes the waveform trace on the display by triggering on the modulation envelope If the signal s modulation is stable video trigger synchronizes the sweep with the demodulated waveform Linear mode should be used in amplitude modulation AM measurements to avoid distortion caused by the logarithmic amplifier when demodulating signals Sweep time adjusts the full sweep time from 20 ms 20 ys in zero span with Option 101 to 100 s The sweep time readout refers to the full lo division graticule Divide this value by 10 to determine sweep time per division m Resolution and video bandwidth are selected according to the signal bandwidth Each of the coupled function values remains at its current value when zero span is activated Video bandwidth is coupled to resolution bandwidth Sweep time is not coupled to any other function Note Capability for measuring AM or FM demodulation is available if Option 102 103 or 301 is installed in your spectrum analyzer Refer to Demod
299. ervice diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access All E Series and L Series spectrum analyzers except HP 8590L with Option 713 indicates the status of the frequency discriminator as a function of LO span This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access 7 44 Key Descriptions FREQ allows the user to input a frequency offset value that is added to the OFFSET frequency readout to account for frequency conversions external to the spectrum analyzer Offset entries are added to all frequency readouts including marker start frequency and stop frequency Entering an offset does not affect the trace Offsets are not added to the span Frequency offsets are entered using the numeric keypad When a frequency offset is entered its value is displayed on the bottom of the screen as opposed to reference level offsets which are displayed on the left side of the screen To eliminate an offset press FREQ OFFSET and 0 ENTER Pressing also sets the offset to zero Front Panel Key Access activates the center frequency or start frequency function and accesses the menu that has the frequency functions The center frequency or start frequency value appears below the graticule on the screen Although the spectrum analyzer allows entry of frequencies greater than the specified frequency range using frequencies greater than the frequency span of the spectrum analyzer is not recommen
300. ervice guide The assembly level repair service guide describes assembly level troubleshooting procedures and adjustment procedures The component level repair service guide includes parts lists component location diagrams and schematic diagrams for selected repairable assemblies The manuals can be ordered separately BenchLink Spectrum Analyzer Option B70 Option B70 provides the BenchLink Spectrum Analyzer software that can be used to capture screen images and trace data using a Personal Computer PC The captured information can then be used in other PC applications including word processing and spreadsheets 10 12 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories Accessories A number of accessories are available from Hewlett Packard to help you configure your spectrum analyzer for your specific applications They can be ordered through your local HP Sales and Service Office RF and Transient Limiters The HP 11867A and HP 11693A RF Limiters protect the spectrum analyzer input circuits from damage due to high power levels The HP 11867A operates over a frequency range of DC to 1800 MHz and begins reflecting signal levels over 1 milliwatt up to 10 watts average power and 100 watts peak power The HP 11693A microwave limiter 0 1 to 12 4 GHz usable to 18 GHz guards against input signals over 1 milliwatt up to 1 watt average power and 10 watts peak power The 11947A Transient Limiter protects the spectrum analyzer input circuits
301. es amplitude accuracy Note Correction factors must be on for the spectrum analyzer to meet its specified performance Front Panel Key Access COUPLE HP 85945 HP 8595E or HP 8596E only AC DC specifies alternating current AC or direct current DC coupling at the spectrum analyzer input Selecting ac coupling blocks any dc voltage at the spectrum analyzer input however the ac coupling also decreases the frequency range of the spectrum analyzer The input coupling is set to ac by an instrument preset Amplitude specifications apply only when coupling is set to DC Caution Do not use dc coupling if there is any dc voltage at the spectrum analyzer input Front Panel Key Access CPL RBW Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended ON OFF automatically selects the optimum resolution bandwidth for an unmodulated pulse if the pulse width has been entered If the pulse width has not been determined the resolution bandwidth will not be coupled to the pulse parameters and a warning message will occur If a resolution bandwidth is entered manually the coupling will be turned off Front Panel Key Access SWEEP CPL SWP Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended ON OFF automatically selects the optimum sweep time if the pulse repetition interval has been entered If the pulse repetition interval has not been determined the sweep time will not be coupled and an error message will occur If a sweep time is entered manually the coupling will
302. ess Change Prefix to enter a prefix before storing the data If the display image was stored using a prefix the file name for the display image consists of i prefix register number If no prefix was specified the file name is i_ register number Front Panel Key Access displays the status of the auxiliary connector input control line I on the spectrum analyzer screen high 1 or low 0 in TTL Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkeys ERASE MEM CARD ERASE DLP MEM ERASE STATEALL ERASE TRACEALL and ERASE NEM ALL which are used to erase the user programs and variables that are in spectrum analyzer memory Note Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from spectrum analyzer memory DONE DROOP DSP LINE ON OFF Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended exits the pulse parameter entry menus in the gate utility assigning the current marker value to be the value of the parameter being entered Pressing DONE also restores the sweep delay and sweep time of the time domain window to the values that existed prior to any adjustments made during pulse parameter entry Front Panel Key Access SWEEP disables the reset of the peak detector on the Al6 Processor Video assembly after each analog to digital conversion This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access activates an adjustable horizontal line that is u
303. etermine measurement time and repeatability PDC Measurements Personality For use with HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 8596E spectrum analyzers The HP 85720C PDC measurements personality simplifies testing of personal digital cellular PDC transmitters by providing power frequency timing spurious emission and modulation accuracy measurements based on RCR STD 27C The HP 85913 is compatible with HP 85720C if no modulation accuracy tests are needed See Option 051 in this chapter PHS Measurements Personality For use with HP 8593E HP 8594 HP 85953 and HP 8596E spectrum analyzers The HP 85726B PHS measurements personality simplifies testing of personal handy phone system transmitters by providing power frequency timing spurious emission and modulation accuracy measurements based on RCR STD 28 See Option 032 in this chapter Scalar Measurements Personality For use with the HP 85901 HP 859 E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 or HP 85963 with tracking generator Option 010 The HP 8590L must have Option 003 The HP 85714A scalar measurements personality uses the optional built in tracking generator to make scalar network analysis measurements with your spectrum analyzer The scalar measurements personality is a downloadable program on a memory card It provides for high dynamic range measurements and can make simultaneous transmission and reflection measurements using the HP 85630A transmission reflection test set Marker measu
304. f split screenand ZONE PK RIGHT windowsareo n full size display ZONE PK LEFT ifwindows are on WINDOWS OFF 20N o t available for an H P 8590LorH P 8592L 8 14 Key Menus If You Have A Problem What You ll Find in This Chapter This chapter includes information on how to check for a problem with your HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer and how to return it for service It also includes descriptions of all of the spectrum analyzer built in error messages Your spectrum analyzer is built to provide dependable service However if you experience a problem or if you desire additional information or wish to order parts options or accessories Hewlett Packard s worldwide sales and service organization is ready to provide the support you need In general a problem can be caused by a hardware failure a software error or a user error Follow these general steps to determine the cause and to resolve the problem 1 Perform the quick checks listed in the Check the Basics section these checks may eliminate the problem altogether or may give a clearer idea of its cause 2 If the problem is a hardware problem you have several options Repair it yourself see the Service Options section Return the spectrum analyzer to Hewlett Packard for repair if the spectrum analyzer is still under warranty or is covered by an HP maintenance contract it will be repaired under the terms of the warranty or plan the warranty
305. f the source power setting plus the source power sweep setting Source power sweep may be set as high as 20 dB but performance is specified only up to 15 dB Power Sweep Range for the HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 85963 is also related to the source attenuation setting See Table 7 13 Table 7 13 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 The output power of the tracking generator is swept according to the sweep rate of the spectrum analyzer The output power is always swept from the source power setting to a higher power setting negative source power sweep values are not allowed Refer to the calibration guide for your instrument for more information regarding source power and source attenuation relationships Power sweep measurements are particularly useful in making gain compression measurements or output power versus frequency measurements Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL Key Descriptions 7 71 QP x10 ON OFF QP DET ON OFF QP GAIN ON OFF QPD OFFSET QPD RST ON OFF Quasi Peak Option 103 only amplifies the video signal ten times 20 dB in order to make an accurate measurement of a low quasi peak signal See the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 Option 103 supplement documentation for more information Front Panel Key Access Option 103 only turns the quasi peak detector on and off This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only See either the service docu
306. feedthrough is a 0 Hz marker with no error so it can be used to improve the frequency accuracy of spectrum analyzers with nonsynthesized LO systems log display The display mode in which vertical deflection is a logarithmic function of the input signal voltage Log display is also referred to as logarithmic mode The display calibration is set by selecting the value of the top graticule line reference level and scale factor in volts per division On Hewlett Packard analyzers the bottom graticule line represents zero volts for scale factors of 10 dB division or more The bottom division therefore is not calibrated for those analyzers Analyzers with microprocessors allow reference level and marker values to be indicated in dBm dBmV dByV volts and occasionally in watts Nonmicroprocessor based analyzers usually offer only one kind of unit typically dBm marker A visual indicator we can place anywhere along the displayed trace A marker readout indicates the absolute value of the trace frequency and amplitude at the marked point The amplitude value is displayed with the currently selected units Refer also to delta marker and noise marker maximum input level The maximum signal power that may be safely applied to the input of a spectrum analyzer Typically 1 W 30 dBm for Hewlett Packard spectrum analyzers MEAS UNCAL Annotation indicating an uncalibrated measurement condition exists It appears when instrument settings affect accur
307. fications and characteristics in your calibration guide for specific information for your spectrum analyzer Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL Option 010 or 011 only allows the user to set the step size of the source power level source power offset and power sweep range functions The step size may be values from 32 7 dB to 32 7 dB The default setting is one vertical scale division Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies When these frequencies are activated their values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 81 STATE CARD STATE INTRNL STOP FREQ STOR PWR ON UNITS STP GAIN ZERO STUVWX SWEEP CONT SGL Requires Option 003 for the HP 85901 HP 8592L and HP 8594L saves the current spectrum analyzer state on the memory card To save the current state press STATE CARD use the numeric keypad to enter a number and press ENTER If you want the file name of the stored data to contain a prefix press Change Prefix to enter a prefix before storing the data If the state data was stored using a prefix the file name for the state data consists of s prefix _ register number If no prefix was specified the file name is s_ register number If windows are being used only the state of the acti
308. fied as relative it is displayed relative to the spectrum analyzer center frequency and reference level If the center frequency is at 1 2 GHz a relative limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz will display the limit line segment at 1 5 GHz If the amplitude component of a relative limit line segment is 10 dB and the spectrum analyzer reference level is 15 dB then 10 dB is added to the reference level value and the amplitude component of the limit line will be at 25 dB RELATIVE is displayed in the limit line table when the limit line type is relative FIXED is displayed when the limit line type is fixed A limit line entered as fixed may be changed to relative and one entered as relative may be changed to fixed When the limit line type is changed the frequency and amplitude values in the limit line table are modified by the current center frequency and reference level settings to keep the limit line in the same position on the spectrum analyzer 5 22 Using Analyzer Features Selecting the Limit Line Table Format Press Edit Upper Edit Lower Edit Up Low or Edit Mid Delt to editor create a limit line table Each of the edit softkeys represents a different type of limit line table format The choice of edit softkey depends upon whether you want an upper limit line only a lower limit line only or both an upper and a lower limit line If you want both lower limit lines then the characteristics of the limit lines being ent
309. following information Introduces the time gated spectrum analyzer capability Explains how to use Option 105 to view a pulsed RF signal Explains how to use the self calibration routines with Option 105 Explains how to perform a functional check of Option 105 Note For more information about how to use Option 105 with other types of signals see Product Note 8590 2 that is shipped with Option 105 Also see the descriptions of individual functions in Chapter 7 Introducing the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability As the spectrum analyzer takes a measurement sweep it displays a specific frequency as it sweeps across the frequency range of the spectrum analyzer Since signals can vary in time the spectrum analyzer can miss an event at one frequency because it is sweeping at a different frequency when the event occurs With Option 105 the time gated spectrum analyzer capability the spectrum analyzer can provide a window of what is going on with a signal at any specific time since a spectrum analyzer with Option 105 has the capability to selectively acquire data based on an external trigger signal The window represents a periodic timed event during which data acquisition is enabled The following figures demonstrate how the time gate can be used to view a signal For example you could have two signals at the same frequency in alternating time slots so they can share a common system You can use an oscilloscop
310. for an external controller to transfer data The process of saving and recalling data from the memory card is similar to saving and recalling data from the spectrum analyzer memory Due to the expanded capabilities of the memory card there are some important differences For example data is stored in spectrum analyzer memory as an item on the memory card data is stored as a logical interchange file LIF Memory card data can be stored and recalled using a prefix A prefix is an optional user defined label for states traces and programs The prefix becomes part of the file name If you do not specify a prefix the file name will be created without it Table 5 2 compares the save and recall operations of spectrum analyzer memory and the memory card Refer to Table 5 3 at the end of this section for a summary of saving and recalling data to and from spectrum analyzer memory Table 5 2 Comparison of Analyzer Memory and Memory Card Operations Stored with a Prefix Restriction on Register Number Data Stored As Mass Storage Device 1 to 8 for states 3 to MAX REG for traces limit lines amplitude correction factors Analyzer Memory Prefix register lt 8 characters Memory Card Types of Data That Can Be Stored States traces limit line tables amplitude correction factors States traces limit line tables amplitude correction factors display images and downloadable programs Catalog Fun
311. for spectrum analyzer measurements Note In the stimulus response mode the Q reactance versus resistance of the DUT can determine the fastest rate at which the spectrum analyzer can be swept To determine whether the analyzer is sweeping too fast slow the sweep time and note whether there is a frequency or amplitude shift of the trace Continue to slow the sweep time until there is no longer a frequency or amplitude shift 5 Since we are only interested in the rejection of the low pass filter tune the spectrum analyzer center frequency so that the roll off of the filter comprises the majority of the trace on the display see Figure 4 6 40 REF 0 dBm ATTEN1 0 dB PEAK SPAN 908 9 MHz WA SB sc FC CORR iia an danas al CENTER 443 6 MHZ SPAN 5061 0 MHz RES BW 3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 msec Figure 4 6 Spectrum Analyzer Settings According to the Measurement Requirement Making Measurements 4 9 6 Decrease the resolution bandwidth to increase sensitivity and narrow the video bandwidth to smooth the noise In Figure 4 7 the resolution bandwidth has been decreased to 10 kHz ie REF dBn ATTEN1 0 dB PEAK 7 LOG Jenaan RES BW 19 kHz EN VP Ss SC FID CORA CENTER 443 6 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 10 kHz YBW 10 kHz SHP5 0 msec Figure 4 7 Decrease the Resolution Bandwidth to Im
312. g average video bandwidth The cut off frequency 3 dB point of an adjustable low pass filter in the video circuit When the video bandwidth is equal to or less than the resolution bandwidth the video circuit cannot fully respond to the more rapid fluctuations of the output of the envelope detector The result is a smoothing of the trace or a reduction in the peak to peak excursion of broadband signals such as noise and pulsed RF when viewed in broadband mode The degree of averaging or smoothing is a function of the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth Glossary 7 video filter A post detection low pass filter that determines the bandwidth of the video amplifier It is used to average or smooth a trace Refer also to video bandwidth windows display mode A display mode of the HP 8590 Series Spectrum Analyzers where the screen area is split into two separate displays This allows two different frequency spans to be viewed simultaneously The analyzer state of the two displays can be set independently zero span The case in which a spectrum analyzer s local oscillator remains fixed at a given frequency so that the analyzer becomes a fixed tuned receiver In this state the bandwidth is equal to the resolution bandwidth Signal amplitude variations are displayed as a function of time To avoid loss of signal information the resolution bandwidth must be as wide as the signal bandwidth To avoid any smoothing the video b
313. gns a marker to a trace Pressing MK TRACE AUTO ABC will activate a marker on trace A if there are no markers turned on If a marker is currently active press MK TRACE AUTO ABC until A B or C are underlined The active marker will be moved to the selected trace Selecting the AUTO mode will move the marker to the trace that is automatically selected The selection order is to first look for a trace in the clear write mode in the order of trace A then trace B then trace C If no traces are currently being written it will select a trace in the view store mode again in the order of trace A B then C Front Panel Key Access 7 56 Key Descriptions MK TRACK ON OFF MKR MKR_FCTN MNOPQR moves the signal that is nearest to the active marker to the center of the screen and keeps the signal there MKR TRK or CNTR TRK appears in the upper right corner of the display An may appear in the upper right corner of the display while the spectrum analyzer is verifying that it has the correct signal Pressing MK TRACK ON OFF PRESET MARKER NORMAL or MARKER ALL OFF turns off the marker track function When marker track is on and the span is reduced an automatic zoom is performed the span is reduced in steps so that the signal remains at the center of the screen If the span is zero marker track cannot be activated Front Panel Key Access MKR_FCTN accesses the marker control softkeys which select the type and number of marker
314. gure 4 30 Making Measurements 4 35 TUNING CAL 346800008 Sweepsens 16M 8 888185383 ZERO 211996616 Sweepsens Wide 0 080002030 FAST 56503057 Main Coil ens 0 098835200 MED 1114621728 FM Coilsens Er 0 958118558 SLOW 22348669 Wide Disc Err 2 590917587 PkOfst 28 Wisc sweepsens 0 000502140 TCXO 98 EYO slope 5E 18 Last Cal Freq 18 18 33 MAR B4 1992 Last Cal Amp 18 26 17 MAR 04 1992 TRACKING GEN FM DEMODULATI ON AOFST 3051 ZERO 0 XOFST 3095 SLOPE 16893 OCORR 22372 Narrow BW 1756 ASLOP 0 617283940 Wide BW 1751 FSLOP 068080168 XSLOP 8 307900012 GATE 0 999294639 Figure 4 30 Self Calibration Data Results If the number is not between 0 98 and 1 0 check that the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector is not connected to anything then repeat the previous steps of this procedure 7 Press PRESET Performing a Functional Check of Option 105 To check that the time gated spectrum analyzer capability is operational perform the following steps 1 Connect the rear panel HIGH SWEEP IN OUT connector to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector with a short BNC calibration cable see Figure 4 31 EARPHONE A ya LO SER O O OUT SER SWEEP OPT TV TRIG GATE TRIGGER GATE TUNE EXT REF OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT a a IA AN 5 gt 9 Pa Q al VOL TAGE Z SELECTOR FLATNES EVENT INTERVAL EXT ALC EXT DET CNTR CNTR INPUT IN ae INPUT O Ou SWEEP HIGH SWEER IF OUTPUT IN OUT Ty OUTPUT OUTPUT 10 MHz REF EXT e
315. h correctly to adapt the spectrum analyzer to the power source An improper selector switch setting can damage the spectrum analyzer when it is turned on Set the instrument s rear panel voltage selector switch to the line voltage range 115 V or 230 V corresponding to the available ac voltage See Figure 1 2 Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool in the slot and slide the switch so that the proper voltage label is visible pul32e Figure 1 2 Setting the Line Voltage Selector Switch 1 4 Preparing For Use Checking the Fuse The recommended fuse is size 5 by 20 mm rated F5A 250 V IEC approved This fuse may be used with input line voltages of 115 V or 230 V Its HP part number is 2110 0709 With an input line voltage of 115 V an alternate fuse can be used In areas where the recommended fuse is not available a size 5 by 20 mm rated fast blow 5 A 125 V UL CSA approved fuse may be substituted Its HP part number is 2110 0756 The line fuse is housed in a small container beside the rear panel power connector See Figure 1 3 The container provides space for storing a spare fuse as shown in the figure To check the fuse insert the tip of a screwdriver in the slot at the middle of the container and pry gently to extend the container Warning For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating 5A 250V The use of other fuses or material is prohibited N
316. hanged without affecting the state of the inactive window The complete annotation is not displayed for each window because of space limitations When the windows display mode is first turned on the top window will contain an inactive copy of the previous full display The lower window will be active and will display a subset of the frequency span of the upper window The displayed span or zone of the lower window will be indicated on the upper window by two vertical lines called zone markers The zone can be moved and changed using the zone keys which are accessed by pressing the WINDOWS key Changing the span or center frequency of the lower window will change the corresponding zone markers on the upper window Most functions can be used from within the windows display mode Some functions like editing limit lines and showing the options require a full sized display They will temporarily exit the windows display format When the function is finished the instrument will return to a windows display Other functions will permanently exit the windows display and it will be necessary to restart the windows display mode by pressing WINDOWS see Table 7 9 Limit lines can be displayed and tested within the windows display mode Viewing and testing must be turned on independently in each window The current limit lines will be common to both windows 7 60 Key Descriptions PAINT JET PRINTER PAL PAL M SAVE and RECALL do not save the
317. he FFT markers If the FFT mode is not active then the FFT marker will be activated and the FFT annotation will be displayed but an FFT will not be performed Pressing the AM ON OFF key will give a valid value for the signal in trace B Press FFT OFF to return the spectrum analyzer to normal operation An FFT trace can be saved and recalled If a trace has been recalled FFT MARKERS can be used to activate the markers so that the trace can be evaluated Front Panel Key Access 7 42 Key Descriptions FFT accesses the menu of keys to initiate and evaluate a Fourier transform of Menu the spectrum analyzer displayed data Activating other spectrum analyzer functions will automatically exit the FFT function or will corrupt the display see Table 7 7 Table 7 7 Compatibility of FFT With Other Functions Function Compatibility Info Catalog functions corrupts the display DLP Editor corrupts the display Marker Table exits FFT N GB Points measurement exits FFT Peak Table exits FFT Power Menu measurements exits FFT Show Options corrupts the display Time Gate functions exits FFT TO1 measurement exits FFT Windows exits FFT Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER FFT OFF exits the FFT mode and menus returning the spectrum analyzer to normal operation Front Panel Key Access FFT STOP allows the user to enter the stop frequency for the desired FFT span This sets FREQ the spectrum analyzer sweep time by the relationship
318. he cursor between rows When all desired characters have been entered press WINDOWS NEXT or for an HP 8590L or an HP 8592L press HOLD All other spectrum analyzer functions are inoperative until the or key is pressed Front Panel Key Access CAL or CHANNEL allows the user to enter the channel bandwidth to set up the spectrum BANDWDTH analyzer when using the measurement functions under the Power Menu softkey When the power measurements are first accessed the initial value for channel bandwidth is 16 kHz If the value is changed the new value will be saved through an instrument preset or power on An error message will occur for invalid values of channel bandwidth and channel spacing If one of the power measurements is active and the channel bandwidth is changed with PARAM AUTO selected then the coupled spectrum analyzer settings are immediately updated If CONT MEAS is also selected then another sweep is taken and the measured results are uodated From Panel Key Access MEAS USER 7 22 Key Descriptions CHANNEL POWER CHANNEL SPACING Clear CLEAR PARAM CLEAR QP DATA measures the power and power spectral density in the channel bandwidth specified by the user Two vertical lines on the display indicate the edges of the channel bandwidth The measurement can be made on a single sweep or to continuously update at the end of each sweep The center frequency reference level and channel bandwidth must be set by the user
319. he knob is turned When either center frequency or reference level is adjusted the signal will shift right or left or up or down with the rotation of the knob before a new sweep is actually taken An asterisk is placed in the message block the upper right hand corner of the spectrum analyzer display to indicate that the data on screen does not reflect data at the current setting Note When using the knob to change frequency or amplitude settings the trace data is shifted Therefore when using MAX HOLD A MAX HOLD B or MIN HOLD C moving the center frequency with the knob will not simulate a drifting signal Number Units Keypad The number units keypad allows entry of exact values for many of the spectrum analyzer functions You may include a decimal point in the number portion If not the decimal point is placed at the end of the number Numeric entries must be terminated with a units key The units keys change the active function in a manner prescribed bv that function For example the units keys for frequency span are GHz MHz kHz and Hz whereas the units for reference level are dBm dBm Gv and Gav Note If an entry from the number units keypad does not coincide with an allowed function value for example that of a 12 MHz bandwidth the spectrum analyzer defaults to the nearest allowable value 2 8 Getting Started Step Keys The step keys allow discrete increases or decreases of the active function
320. he limit line table However if the last segment in the table is not specified as the point segment type an implicit point is automatically used If a visible point segment at limit line table that is higher in frequency than the stop frequency Figure 5 7 demonstrates the different segment types 5 26 Using Analyzer Features hp REF 0 dBm ATTEN PEAK LOG T def SEG START_FRE TYPE 200 0 MHz FLAT 300 0 MHZ SLOPE CENTER 300 0 MHz RES BW 350 0 MHz 1 MHz POINT A AN 200 0 MHz S 20 msec o S VBW 300 kHz pul46e Figure 5 7 Segment Types Item oon F wo N Segment Types Flat upper limit line Slope upper limit line Point upper limit line Point lower limit line Slope lower limit line Flat lower limit line Using Analyzer Features 5 27 Completing Table Entry and Activating Limit Line Testing Pressing EDIT DONE blanks the limit line table from the screen and accesses the menu with LMT TEST ON OFF and LMT DISP Y N AUTO softkeys Pressing LMT TEST UN OFF turns the limit line testing on and off Pressing LMT DISP Y N AUTO Y turns the limit lines display on Pressing LMT DISP Y N AUTO N turns the limit lines display off Pressing LMT DISP Y N AUTO AUTO sets the limit line display to match the limit line test function With AUTO underlin
321. he peak it places a marker on it turns on the marker track function and activates the span function Pressing SPAN ZOOM performs the routine similar to pressing the following keys MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF ON and PAN Front Panel Key Access Option 102 103 or 301 only turns the internal speaker on and off The volume from the speaker is controlled by the front panel volume control knob and FM GAIN when using FM demodulation There is no output from the speaker unless demodulation is turned on Pressing PRESET sets SPEAKER ON OFF to ON Front Panel Key Access sets the spectrum analyzer to the spectrum analyzer operating mode and accesses the PRESET SPECTRUM softkey function Front Panel Key Access or 7 80 Key Descriptions SQUELCH SRC ATN MAN AUTO SRC PWR OFFSET SRC PWR ON OFF SRC PWR STP SIZE START FREQ Option 102 103 or 301 only adjusts the squelch level The squelch level mutes weak signals and passes strong signals The squelch level affects the audio output only If the internal speaker is on audio signals are not output unless the signal strength exceeds the squelch threshold The squelch level does not affect the rear panel AUX VIDEO OUT signal Squelch level is indicated on screen by the unitless numbers 0 to 100 with O being minimum squelch threshold all signals are passed and 100 being maximum squelch threshold no signals are passed The default squelch value is 0 Front Pa
322. hic tools in the gate utility The gate position relative to the signal is clearly shown in the time domain window The spectral effects corresponding to an adjustment of the gate time position are displayed in the frequency domain window Tools are provided to aid the user in determining the best gate position and optimizing the spectrum analyzer settings for the input signal CENTER 980 8088 MHz SPAN Hz YRES BW 1 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz SUP 18 8 msec y CENTER 900 MHz SPAN 1 800 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHz ven mz SWP 36 8 msec Figure 4 17 Time Gate Utility Display Gate utility features include w Displays time and frequency domains simultaneously Measures continuously m Interactively controls and displays the gate s position in time Gi Note Option 105 time gate is required Option 101 fast ADC is recommended usec Sweep times down to 20 msec are available without Option 101 The gate utility provides tools to make pulsed RF measurements easy If the user enters the optimize the resolution bandwidth sweep time and video bandwidth for these pulse parameters Coupling the spectrum analyzer settings to pulse characteristics allows easy Making Measurements 4 19 The types of signals that can be measured using the time gate function include Pulsed RF signals Time domain multiple access TDMA communication system signals Interleaved or intermittent signals Signals with transient spectra Time critical signal
323. hing should be connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the spectrum analyzer rear panel during the CAL AMPTD routine U VID BW FAIL Indicates the video bandwidths have failed H Waiting for gate input Indicates that the spectrum analyzer needs an external trigger signal to use the time gating functions Before using the time gating functions you should ensure there is a trigger pulse connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the rear panel of spectrum analyzer and that the GATE OUTPUT is connected the EXT TRIG INPUT connector If you do not want to use the time gating functions press PRESET U YTF is not available The YTF is only available for the HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 and HP 85963 U 9 16 If You Have A Problem 10 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories What You ll Find In This Chapter Many measurement personalities options and accessories are available to enhance the spectrum analyzer so that it will better meet the needs of your application This chapter contains a list of the available measurement personalities options and accessories for your spectrum analyzer Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories 10 4 Measurement Personalities Broadcast Measurements Personality For use with the HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 or HP 8596E The HP 85724A Broadcast Measurements Personality provides customized RF video measurements for testing broadcast tran
324. how to use Comments Because the gate must be on at least once per trace point the sweep time has to be set to the pulse repetition interval times for every point of the trace Each trace has 401 points The gate delay must be set so that the gating captures the pulse If the gate delay is too short or too long the gating can miss the pulse or include resolution bandwidth transient responses If the gate length is too long the signal display can include transients caused by the spectrum analyzer filters The video bandwidth must be wide enough so that the rise times of the video bandwidth do not attenuate the signal The resolution bandwidth must be wide enough so that the charging time for the resolution bandwidth filters is less than the pulse width of tthe signal the time gate capability without the convenience of the Gate Utility functions The Gate Utility provides the user with simultaneous displays of the frequency and time domain to assist in setting up and manipulating the time gate An oscilloscope is not needed when using the Gate Utility A list of all the Gate Utility keys can be found under the key in the key menus in Chapter 8 Descriptions of the different Gate Utility functions are found in Chapter 7 Note This example only applies to using Option 105 with a pulsed RF signal For more information on using Option 105 to view other types of signals see product note 8590 2 for Option 105
325. iagnostic capability of your spectrum analyzer for time interleaved signals Option 105 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R15 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit 5062 8218 Option 101 is recommended in addition to Option 105 since it significantly decreases sweep time and therefore the resolution in the time domain CT2 Demodulator Option 110 For HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 8596E only Option 110 provides built in demodulation capability for making CT2 transmitter measurements It must be used with the HP 85717A CT2 CAI measurements personality to make frequency deviation measurements on CT2 cordless telephone handsets and bases Option 110 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R05 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5063 0244 Group Delay and Amplitude Flatness Option 111 Fbr HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only Option 111 allows you to make end to end and loop back measurements of group delay and amplitude flatness It must be used with HP 11770A Link Measurement Personality and the Option 010 Tracking Generator HP 11768A Group Delay and Amplitude Flatness Retrofit Kit contains both the Option 111 and the HP 11770A Link Measurement Personality This kit is factory retrofittable only Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories 1 09 DECT Demodulator Option 112 For HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 8596E only
326. ics converter j Some models support color printing j Part number HP ITEL 45CHVU US and Canada and Part number HP ITEL 45CHVE international Interconnection and Printing Instructions 1 Turn off the printer and the spectrum analyzer 2 Connect the printer to the spectrum analyzer using the HP IB cable 3 The printer usually resides at device address 1 See figure Figure 6 3 for a typical HP IB printer switch setup n gt lt lt Z e 2 ADDRESS 1 Yn A TIL sro en ky pul29el Figure 6 3 ThinkJet Printer Switch Settings 6 4 Printing and Plotting If using the HP IB to centronics converter connect it and set the switches as shown in Figure 6 4 The HP IB to centronics converter must be powered up after the switches are set SPECTRUM PRINTER CONVERTER ANALYZER CENTRONICS ADDRESS 1 DOTS INCH 90 amp POSITION SWITCH pul 14el Figure 6 4 HP IB to Centronics Converter Setup COPY DEV PRNT PLT Set B amp W Printer I up B amp W PRINTER PAINTJET PRINTER Plot Config Set Colr Printer HP B amp W DJ540 DESKJET 310 550C CONFIG q Print Config Prn Port Config EP MX80 SML LRG DESKJET 540 Time Date PRT MENU ON OFF EP LO570 SML LRG Change Prefix PRINTER SETUP More 1 of 3 Previous Menu Previous Menu Previous Menu pul3del Figure 6 5 Printer Configuration Menu Map 4 Turn on the spectrum analyzer and printer
327. icule positive peak The maximum instantaneous value of an incoming signal On digital displays each displayed point of the signal indicates the maximum value of the signal for that part of the frequency span or time interval represented by the point preamplifier An external low noise figure amplifier that improves system preamplifier spectrum analyzer sensitivity over that of the analyzer itself predefined trace Trace A B or C of a spectrum analyzer Refer also to trace preselector A tunable bandpass filter placed ahead of a frequency converter or mixer of a spectrum analyzer It tracks the appropriate mixing mode and passes signals of a desired frequency and reduces others Preselectors are typically used only above 2 GHz They essentially eliminate multiple and image responses and for certain signal conditions improve dynamic range quasi peak detector A detector circuit designed with time constants that give a weighted value to the amplitude of a detected signal The displayed signal output is an indication of the degree to which the detected signal would impair the intelligibility of a desired signal The time constants rise fall average for EM1 purposes are based on the recommendations of CISPR that are in turn based on subjective tests Interference limits for commercial EMI tests are often given in quasi peak values random access memory RAM random access memory or read write memory is a storage area allowing ac
328. idths are correctly set CNF TEST PASS is displayed if the confidence test passes Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used for printer and plotter configurations the time and date display functions changing the current prefix memory card configuration functions disposing of user defined variables and programs from spectrum analyzer memory changing the spectrum analyzer address or the baud rate displaying the installed options on screen and changing the format of the MONITOR output Pressing will clear an SRQ error message from the screen Pressing after the spectrum analyzer has been placed in the remote mode places the spectrum analyzer in the local mode and enables front panel control During remote operation an R appears in the lower right corner of the screen indicating remote mode Pressing removes the R annotation from the lower right corner sets the functions in the Power Menu so that they make the measurement at the end of every sweep After a power measurement is activated pressing CONT MEAS or SWEEP CONT puts the spectrum analyzer into a continuous sweep mode and recalculates the results at the end of each sweep Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER initializes the fast Fourier transform FFT function puts the spectrum analyzer in continuous sweep and performs an FFT at the end of each sweep If the FFT function is already active it puts the spectrum analyzer in continuous sweep and performs FF TS After usi
329. ied bandwidth of a modulated digital radio signal the mean power level of unmodulated carrier and quantifies modulator alignment EM1 Diagnostics Measurements Personality Usethe HP 85712D EMI diagnostics measurements personality with the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E The EM1 diagnostics measurements personality provides an easy way to find EM1 hot spots in your new product designs quickly and easily with the HP 11940A or HP 11941A close field probe The EM1 diagnostics measurements personality is a downloadable program on a memory card The field strength is measured directly at the probe tip in dBuA m and antenna factors for the probe are automatically applied A special function helps you to discriminate between narrowband and broadband signals GSMSOO and DCS1800 Transmitter Measurements Personalities For use with the HP 8591E GSMSOO only HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 8595 or HP 85963 The HP 85715B GSMSOO and HP 85722B DCS1800 measurements personalities provide customized measurements for testing GSMSOO and DCS1800 transmitters respectively These measurement personalities are available as downloadable programs on memory cards They provide real time displays of measurements like mean transmitted carrier power power versus time output RF spectrum spurious emissions intermodulation attenuation combiner tuning and phase and frequency error Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories 10 3 Link Measure
330. in or pressing will take another sweep and perform an FFT After using the FFT function the display is in log mode The markers are put in the FFT mode for use in evaluating the data The signal being transformed is in trace A and the Fourier transform of the signal is in trace B Any information that was in trace B and C will be lost Press FFT OFF to return the spectrum analyzer to normal operation Refer to Chapter 4 Measuring Amplitude Modulation With the Fast Fourier Transform Function for more information Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER sets the functions in the Power Menu so that they make the measurement on a single sweep After a power measurement is activated pressing SINGLE MEAS or initiates a sweep and recalculates the measurement results Front Panel Key Access draws a straight line between the coordinate point of the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment producing limit line values for all frequencies between the two points Front Panel Key Access activates the SPAN function and accesses the frequency span functions Pressing SPAN allows the user to change the frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency The frequency span readout describes the total displayed frequency range to determine frequency span per horizontal graticule division divide the frequency span by 10 Front Panel Key Access finds the highest signal peak on screen If a marker is not already on t
331. in spectrum analyzer memory or on the memory card When accessed by RECALL AMP COR recalls the amplitude correction factors table from either spectrum analyzer memory or the memory card Amplitude correction factors are saved with an a before the memory card file name Screen titles are not recalled with the data Refer to To Save a Limit Line Table or Amplitude Correction Factors in Chapter 5 for more information Amplitude correction factor memory card tiles can be catalogued using CATALOG AMP COR Front Panel Key Access or turns the current amplitude correction factors on or off Front Panel Key Access CAL activates the reference level function and accesses the amplitude menu The softkeys accessed when you press change reference level input attenuation vertical scale mixer level amplitude units input impedance and amplitude offset For the HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 8596E pressing accesses the preselector peaking and preselector default functions also accesses the softkeys that change the amplitude units The amplitude units can be changedby pressing dBm dBmV dBuV Volts or Watts Front Panel Key Access 7 8 Key Descriptions ANALOG For the HP 8591E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E only ON OFF Requires Option 101 or 301 turns on the analog display mode This is a digital implementation of an analog display combining the advantages of both types of displays The display is made u
332. inates for the lower limit line are specified but none are specified for the upper limit line Even if upper limit line values exist or the values had been entered as an upper and lower limit line table the lower limit line values are treated as a separate table from the upper limit line values The lower limit line entries can have independent frequency or time and amplitude coordinates from upper limit line table entries Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY allows you to view or edit the upper and lower limit line tables simultaneously These tables are edited by entering a middle amplitude value and an amplitude deviation Up to 20 entries are allowed for the upper and lower limit line tables Like the upper and lower limit line table format the mid delta limit line table format provides a means of specifying the upper and lower limit lines at the same time Unlike the upper and lower table format the amplitude values are specified as a middle amplitude value with a delta the upper and lower limit lines are drawn an equal positive and negative distance from the middle amplitude With the mid delta format the frequency or time and the middle amplitude plus the delta comprise the upper limit line the frequency or time and the middle amplitude minus the delta comprise the lower limit line The difference between the mid delta and the upper lower format is the way the amplitude values are entered the frequency time coordinate begins a s
333. indow will be active and will display a subset of the frequency span of the upper window The span of the lower window will be indicated on the upper window by two vertical lines called zone markers The zone markers can be moved using the zone center and zone span softkeys to look at different portions of the upper window span The instrument state of the active window can be changed without affecting the state of the inactive window The state of the active window will be used as the state of the spectrum analyzer for sweeping and updating trace data 16 30 58 12 MAR 1992 a CENTER 1 450 6H SPAN 2 900 GHz SWP 58 0 msec z RES BW 3 8 MHz VBW 1 MHz CENTER 1 4000 GHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 3 8 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 28 0 msec RT Figure 5 10 Windows Display Mode Example Use the windows display format to view the calibrator signal 1 Connect the CAL OUT signal to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Press PRESET FREQUENCY START FREQ 0 Hz STOP FREQ 2 GHz 2 Turn on the windows display by pressing the WINDOWS ON key The active window is indicated by a solid line around the display rather than a broken line Press ZONE CENTER use the knob or step keys to move the zone to include one of the harmonics Notice that the span marked by the zone markers in the upper window is shown as a full display in the lower window Note The upper window is not active so the trace is not updated though the zone position i
334. ine which is initiated by pressing TRACKING PEAK Front Panel Key Access turns the selected marker on or off One of the four markers must first be selected by the SELECT 1 2 3 4 key otherwise marker 1 or the last selected marker will be turned on or off When a new marker is turned on by pressing MARKER ON OFF the MK TRACE AUTO ABC function always switches to AUTO and the marker is put on the trace that is selected by the AUTO mode Front Panel Key Access activates a second marker at the position of the first marker If no marker is present two markers appear at the center of the display The amplitude and frequency of the first marker is fixed and the second marker is under your control Annotation in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the screen indicates the frequency and amplitude differences between the two markers The display mode must not be changed between log and linear while using a delta marker Note If there are already four markers when MARKER A is pressed a nonactive marker disappears the active marker becomes a reference marker and the delta marker becomes the active marker Front Panel Key Access or PEAK SEARCH 7 52 Key Descriptions MARKER A SPAN MARKER AUTO FFT MARKER CF MARKER CF STEP MARKER FFT STOP MARKER t MID SCRN MARKER MINIMUM MARKER PK PK MARKER REF LVL MARKER START sets the start and stop frequencies to
335. ing generator to meet its specifications allow the spectrum analyzer to warm up for 30 minutes after being turned on before attempting to make any calibrated measurements Be sure to calibrate the spectrum analyzer and the tracking generator only after the spectrum analyzer has met operating temperature conditions Note Since the tracking generator self calibration routine uses the absolute amplitude level of the spectrum analyzer the spectrum analyzer amplitude should be calibrated prior to using CAL TRK GEM 1 To calibrate the tracking generator connect the tracking generator output RF OUT 500 to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 connector using an appropriate cable and adapters Note A low loss cable should be used for accurate calibration Use the 50 cable shipped with the spectrum analyzer For Option 001 or 011 use the 750 cable shipped with the spectrum analyzer 2 Press the following spectrum analyzer keys CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 and CAL TRK GEN TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND will be displayed if the tracking generator output is not connected to the spectrum analyzer input 3 To save this calibration data in the area of spectrum analyzer memory that is saved when the spectrum analyzer is turned off press CAL then CAL STORE Getting Started 2 17 Performing the YTF Self Calibration Routine HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 Only For HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 and HP 85963 spectrum anal
336. ion The frequency and amplitude differences between the signals appear in the active function block In addition the softkeys accessed by appear on the screen Example Measure the frequency and amplitude difference between two signals that do not appear on the screen at one time This technique is useful for harmonic distortion tests when narrow span and narrow bandwidth are necessary to measure the low level harmonics 1 Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 500 if you have not already done so Press PRESET FREQUENCY 300 MHz SPAN and the step down key CD to narrow the frequency span until only one signal appears on the screen 2 Press to place a marker on the peak 3 Press MARKER A to identify the position of the first marker Making Basic Measurements 3 13 4 Press FREQUENCY to activate center frequency Turn the knob clockwise slowly to adjust the center frequency until a second signal peak is placed at the position of the second marker It may be necessary to pause occasionally while turning the knob to allow a sweep to update the trace The first marker remains on the screen at the amplitude of the first signal peak Note Changing the reference level changes the marker delta amplitude readout The annotation in the upper right corner of the screen indicates the amplitude and frequency difference between the two markers See Figure 3 15 To turn the markers off press MKR More 1 of 2
337. ion Catigory II and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and IEC 664 respectively Regulatory Information Regulatory Information is in the Calibration Guide shipped with this product vi HP 8590 Series Spectrum Analyzer Documentation Description Manuals Shipped with Your Spectrum Analyzer HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers User s Guide Describes how to prepare the analyzer for use Describes analyzer features Describes common applications Tells how to make measurements with your spectrum analyzer Includes error messages Calibration Guide Provides analyzer specifications and characteristics Provides manual procedures to verify specifications Indicates the test equipment required for verification HP 8590 E Series and L Series Series Spectrum Analyzers Quick Reference Guide Describes how to make a simple measurement with your spectrum analyzer Briefly describes the spectrum analyzer functions Lists all the programming commands Options Option 910 Additional User s Documentation Provides an additional copy of the user s guide the calibration guide and the quick reference guide Option 915 Service Guide and Component Level Information Describes troubleshooting and repair of the spectrum analyzer Option 915 consists of two manuals HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Assembly Level pair Service Guide describes adjustment and assembly leve
338. ion menus are accessed with these keys The green key resets the spectrum analyzer to a known state The key accesses the current operating mode of the spectrum analyzer and allows you to change to any operating mode available for your spectrum analyzer All spectrum analyzers have the spectrum analyzer mode of operation indicated by SPECTRUM ANALYZER If an additional softkey label appears in the softkey label area a program also called a downloadable program or personality has been loaded into the spectrum analyzer memory This document covers the spectrum analyzer mode of operation only consult the documentation accompanying the specific measurement personality that you are using for information about other modes of operation For example the HP 85711A Cable Television Measurements Personality the HP 85713A Digital Radio Measurements Personality or the HP 85715A GSM Measurements Personality and RECALL keys save and recall traces states limit line tables amplitude correction factors and programs to or from a memory card and keys also save and recall traces states limit line tables and amplitude correction factors to or from the spectrum analyzer memory 2 2 Getting Started Note If you wish to reset the spectrum analyzer configuration to the state it was in when it was originally shipped from the factory use DEFAULT CONFIG Refer to the DEFAULT CONFIG softkey description in Chapter 7 for more information 10
339. ions must be maintained to make a valid rms measurement If these conditions are not met errors of up to 2 5 dB can occur for noise like signals Video bandwidth is at least 10 times the resolution bandwidth w Detector mode is sample SMP You can use DETECTOR SMP PK to select the detector mode Resolution bandwidth is less than or equal to 100 kHz Video averaging is OFF a Neither MAX HOLD nor MIN HOLD trace mode is selected Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER 7 6 Key Descriptions ADJ CHAN PWR extd ALC INT EXT ALC MTR INT XTAL measures the power leakage into the adjacent channels and calculates the adjacent channel power ratio of both the upper and lower channels with respect to the reference channel ADJ CHAN POWER extd has an extended dynamic range compared with ADJ CHAN POWER The extended range is measured by taking two different sweeps with different reference levels and combining the trace data The displayed dynamic range is 104 dB and the log scale is set to 13 dB division The total power of the channel is displayed The adjacent channel power ratios of both channels are also displayed and the larger number is marked with a A Vertical lines on the display indicate the six edges of the upper lower and reference channels being measured The measurement stops and the spectrum analyzer is returned to its prior state when other measurement functions are activated The center frequency must be se
340. ious Menu EDIT LAST EGITCATITEM APNO CATITE M SAME EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu Key Menus 8 9 8 10 Key Menus ECALL CARD gt STATE Card gt Trace CARD gt DISPLAY CARD gt DLP Catalog Cord INTERNAL CARD is wifh CARD selected TRACE A TRACE B TRACE LIMIT LINES AMP COR Previous Menu CATALOG ALL CATALOG STATES CATALOGTRACES CATALOG PREFIX Change Prefix More 1 of 245 DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX ExitCatalog PreviousMenu ABCDEF GHI JKL MNOPOR STUVWX Z_ Spe Clear More 1 of 2 CATALOG DLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE CATALOG DISPLAY Exit Catalog More 2 of 2 FOR RECALL NGAND SAVING TO MEMORY CARD that O lt gt J2 CI dcr Edit Done More 2 of 2 LOAD FILE DELETE FILE SELECT PREF Ix Exit Catalog Previous Menu FOR RECALLING AND SAVING TO ANALYZER MEMORY thati s TRACE A TRACE B TRACE C SAVE STATE gt NTRNL wi tHNTERNAL selected Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog PreviousMenu EDIT LAST EDIT CAT ITEM APND CATITEM SAVEE DIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu LOAD FILE DELETE FILE LIMIT LINES AMP COR Previous CATALOG ALL CATALOG REGISTER CATALOG VARIABLS CATALOG PREF IX Change Prefix More 1 4 Trace gt Intrati Menu SAVLOCK ONOFF Catalog Internal INTERNAL CARD Changes L SAVLOCK is ON Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous
341. iptions Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE CATALOG Requires O ption 003 for an HP 8590L HP 8592L or HP 8594L LMT LINE catalogs the limit lines on the memory card Press CATALOG REGISTER to catalog limit line tables stored in spectrum analyzer memory limit line tables saved in analyzer memory are stored in trace registers Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE CATALOG displays the on event programming commands and their status The on event ON EVENT programming commands are as follows ONEOS Performs command list at end of every sweep ONSWP Performs command list at beginning of every sweep TRMATH Performs trace math ONCYCLE Performs command list periodically ONDELAY Performs command list once after a time period ONMKR Performs command list at the marker ONSRQ Performs command list on every service request ONTIME Performs command list at a specific time ONPWRUP Performs command list once at power up Note If you get into an infinite loop with ONPWRUP press to abort the command list then press ERASE DLP MEM to clear all DLPs Key Descriptions 7 19 The on event programming commands can be set remotely see the HP8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information about setting the commands When the on event programming commands have not been set or when an instrument preset has been performed pressing CATALOG ON EVENT displays the st
342. ister number ENTER t save amplitude 0 to MAX REG Trace Intrnl AMP COR correction factors register number recall amplitude 0 to MAX REG Internal Trace AMP COR correction factors register number ENTER Registers 1 through 8 are available for the user to save a state State register 0 contains the current state of the analyzer state register 9 contains the previous state of t he spectrum analyzer j The alternate method for recalling data uses the key sequence RECALL Catalog Internal CATALOG REGISTER use the step keys or knob to highlight the item to be recalled LOAD FILE i The screen title is displayed when cataloging the trace registers with CATALOG REGISTER The screen title is not recalled with the limit line tables or amplitude correction factors Using Analyzer Features 5 9 Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card Note Option 003 is required when using an HP 8590L or HP 8592L The memory card provides additional memory for saving instrument states traces display images limit line tables amplitude correction factors and programs Each HP 857 00A battery backed RAM card provides 32 kilobytes of memory Several different memory cards are available with up to 512 kilobytes of memory See Accessories in Chapter 10 Instrument states traces display images limit line tables amplitude correction factors and programs are easily retrievable without the need
343. ith GATE OUTPUT connected to the oscilloscope you can adjust the gate length and gate delay so that the gate occurs near the end of the pulse see Figure 4 24 hp running l 4 00 V div offset 2 062 Y T 1 000 1 de 2s 8 00 V div offset 750 0 mv 1 000 1 de 3 200 mV div offset 0 000V 1 000 1 dc do 4 00 V div offset 0000 V 1 000 1 de 50 0 us div Description of Items in Figure 4 24 Output from pulse generator 1 Output from pulse generator 2 Pulsed RF signal input to the spectrum analyzer Gate output from Option 105 Notice that the gate output is directly below signal 1 If you do not have an oscilloscope it is very important to use the guidelines for determining gate length and gate delay See Setting the Gate Delay and Gate Length Properly following this section 4 The gate delay must be equal to the signal delay plus the pulse width 7 divided by 2 For the first signal there is no signal delay so the gate delay needs to be set to 50 yps 2 or 25 ps Press SWEEP Gate Control GATE DELAY 25 us 5 Set the gate length to a value equal to the pulse width 7 divided by 4 For this example the gate length is set to 50 ys 4 or 13 ys Press GATE LENGTH 13 ps 6 Set the resolution bandwidth to a value that is greater than 2 divided by the gate delay minus the signal delay For this signal 1 there is no signal delay so the resoluti
344. key label Press this key so that ON is underlined Press this key to plot the spectrum analyzer display to the LaserJet printer Key Descriptions This chapter describes functions and controls of the spectrum analyzer The front panel keys and softkey functions are listed alphabetically followed by a complete and detailed description Brief descriptions for service functions have also been included in this chapter However for more detailed descriptions and information about the use of each function refer to the respective service guide for your instrument A listing of all service calibration and service diagnostic functions has been provided in the following Service Functions section All softkeys and their relationship to the front panel keys are shown in Chapter 8 Key Menus Key Descriptions 7 1 Service Functions Two types of functions are available for service use only m Service calibration functions m Service diagnostic functions These service functions are designed for service use only However brief descriptions for each function are provided in this chapter For more detailed descriptions and information about the use of each function refer to the Service Guide for your instrument Service documentation can be obtained by ordering Option 915 through your HP Sales and Service office Option 915 is described in more detail under Chapter 10 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories i
345. l HP IB service request A l unleveled condition tracking generator 4 12 UPDATE TIMEFREQ 7 89 upper and lower limit line 5 23 upper and lower limit lines 5 29 editing 7 38 upper limit line 5 23 user created error messages 9 7 User Menus 7 90 using limit line functions 5 18 Index 18 using the GATE CTL EDGE LVL 4 38 using the level gate control 4 38 using the self calibration routines with Option 105 4 35 V v 7 90 variable cataloging 7 16 VBW RBW RATIO 7 90 verification manual see Calibration Guide 10 12 VERIFY TIMEBASE 7 90 vertical signal positioning 7 3 1 VHS video output 7 84 VID AVG ON OFF 7 90 VID BW AUTO MAN 7 90 VIDEO 7 91 video averaging 3 17 7 90 video bandwidth 7 90 video bandwidth coupling 7 10 gate utility 7 31 video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio 7 90 video picture field triggering on a selected line 4 15 VIEW A 7 91 VIEW B 7 91 VIEW C 7 91 VOL INTEN 2 3 VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 6 voltage selector switch 1 4 Volts 7 91 volume control 2 3 WwW w 7 91 warm up 1 8 warm up time 2 16 warranty 9 4 Watts 7 91 when self calibration is needed 2 18 windows NEXT 7 58 ON 7 60 switching between 7 58 switching time and frequency windows 7 89 using 5 33 34 ZOOM 7 93 windows keys 2 3 WINDOWS OFF 7 91 write protect switch 2 2 1 X X FINE TUNE DAC 7 3 7 91 Y YTF DRIVER 7 3 7 91 YTF self calibration routine 1 10 2 18 YTF slope and offset a
346. l amplitude is changed between trace A and trace B and there is a resulting change in the distortion product this is shown by a change in the marker amplitude marker delta value An example of the marker delta value produced by a change in the distortion product is shown in Figure 3 22 A change in the distortion product is indicative of high level input signals causing circuit overload conditions and producing distortion This distortion is a function of the internal hardware of the analyzer The input signals must be attenuated to eliminate the interference caused by the internal distortion However if is no change in the distortion product with an increase in attenuation the distortion is not caused internally but is a result of distortion that is present on the input signal as supplied from the signal source An example of this is shown in Figure 3 23 where the source signal is not high enough to cause internal distortion in the spectrum analyzer therefore any distortion that is displayed is present on the input signal 8 52 39 APR 07 1943 MKR a O Hz REF 10 0 dBm AT 10 dB 07 dB PEAK LOG x 10 0B ATTEN 10 dB CENTER 4000 MHZ SPAN 200 0 MHz RES BW 1 0 MHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 0 mse Figure 3 23 No Harmonic Distortion Making Basic Measurements 3 21 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Two tone third order intermodulation distortion is a common
347. l repair of the analyzer HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Component Level amp pair Service Guide provides information for component level repair of the analyzer Options 041 and 043 HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide The HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide describes analyzer operation via a remote controller computer for Options 041 and 043 This manual is provided when ordering either Option 041 or Option 043 How to Order Manuals Each of the manuals listed above can be ordered individually To order contact your local HP Sales and Service Office vii Contents 1 Preparing For Use What You ll Find in This Chapter 2 2 2 e e 1 1 Introducing the HP 8590 Series Spectrum Analyzers 1 1 Preparing Your Spectrum Analyzer for Use 2 2 ee 1 2 Initial Inspection 0 ce ai a ee a aa ee T a 1 3 Power Requirements 2 aa au i g a Ta a ian ae o a a a a G 1 4 Setting the Line Voltage Selector Switch 2 2 a 1 4 Checkme the FUSE ico os he ck ae dd ROA ed E A 1 5 Power Cable aee ati i A rt des A eS 1 6 Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time 0 1 8 Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine 1 9 Performing the YTF Self Cali
348. l up B amp W PRINTER PAINTJET PRINTER Set Colr Printer HP B amp W DJ540 DESKJET 310 550 Prn Port Config EP MX80 SML LRG DESKJET 540 PRT MENU ON OFF EP LO570 SML LRG PRINTER SCTUP Previous Menu DEV PRNT PLT Config Date a 5 1of 3 Previous Menu Previous Menu Figure 6 9 Printer Configure Menu 3 Referring to Figure 6 9 select the printer configuration for your spectrum analyzer by pressing the appropriate keys Print Config PRINTER SETUP Set Colr Printer Set B amp W Printer HP B amp W PRINTER HP B amp W DJ540 EP MX80 SML LRG 6 12 Printing and Plotting Press this key to access the configuration menu Press this key to access the printer configuration menu Press this key to send a PRINTER RESET command to the printer This will cause a form feed if any data has been sent to the printer since the last form feed Press this key to print in color if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard compatible color printer then select the appropriate printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page After three printouts the page will be in position to start again at the top of the page if the printer s perforation skip is OFF see Figure 6 1 One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfitting each printout Press this key to print in black and white then select appropriate printer mode Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected t
349. lf calibration routines should be performed To perform the YTF self calibration routine use the following procedure 1 Connect a low loss cable such as HP part number 8120 5148 from 100 MHz COMB OUT to the spectrum analyzer input For the HP 85953 use the CAL OUT instead of the COMB OUT as the spectrum analyzer input 2 Press CAL then CAL YTF The YTF self calibration routine completes in approximately Model Number YTF Cal Time HP 8592L 7 minutes HP 85933 7 minutes HP 85953 3 minutes HP 85963 5 minutes 3 Press CAL then CAL STORE When the self calibration routines have been completed successfully the spectrum analyzer is ready for normal operation I 10 Preparing For Use Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage or destroy electronic components All work on electronic assemblies should be performed at a static safe work station Figure 1 5 shows an example of a static safe work station using two types of ESD protection mw Conductive table mat and wrist strap combination Conductive floor mat and heel strap combination Both types when used together provide a significant level of ESD protection Of the two only the table mat and wrist strap combination provides adequate ESD protection when used alone To ensure user safety the static safe accessories must provide at least 1 MQ of isolation from ground Refer to Table 1 4 for information on ordering static safe accessories
350. lf test by cycling through its major functions The confidence test is performed within 1 to 2 minutes If the unit does not function properly messages appear on the screen See Error Messages for explanations of error messages If error messages appear record the messages and refer to the spectrum analyzer service guide or contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office listed in Table 9 1 9 2 If You Have A Problem 13 14 15 16 17 18 For a preselected spectrum analyzer HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 and HP 85963 with low signal amplitudes above 2 75 GHz perform a YTF calibration For the HP 8592L HP 85933 or HP 85963 connect a low loss cable such as HP part number 8120 5148 from 100 MHz COMB OUT to the spectrum analyzer input For the HP 8595E connect a low loss cable from CAL OUT to the spectrum analyzer input Press CAL CAL YTF Press CAL CAL STORE to save the correction values in memory The YTF self calibration routine completes in approximately Model Number YTF Cal Time HP 8592L 7 minutes HP 85933 7 minutes HP 85953 3 minutes HP 85963 5 minutes If the error message FREQ UNCAL stays on screen run the frequency self calibration routine by pressing CAL FREQ and then press CAL STORE Is the spectrum analyzer displaying an error message If so refer to Error Messages If the calibration routines cannot be performed or the calibration data is corrupt use CAL FET
351. line format which is only available when using the marker table function This format displays the marker amplitudes relative to the display line Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN sets a lower boundary to the active trace The threshold line clips signals that appear below the line when this function is on The boundary is defined in amplitude units that correspond to its vertical position when compared to the reference level The value of the threshold appears in the active function block and on the lower left side of the screen The threshold level does not influence the trace memory or marker position The peaks found by the markers must be at least the peak excursion value above the threshold level The value of the threshold level can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Pressing any digit O through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu If a threshold is active press THRESHLD ON OFF until OFF is selected to turn the threshold display off The threshold value affects peak searching even when the THRESHLD function is set to off Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY_ accesses the softkey menu used to set and display the real time clock Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 85 TIMEDATE ON OFF TOI ON OFF TRACE ABC TRACE A TRACE B TRACE C turns the display of the real time clock on or off Pressing DEFAULT CONFIG sets TIMEDATE ON OFF to ON Front Pa
352. lled an active function The function label of the active function appears in inverse video For example press AMPLITUDE This calls up the softkey menu of related amplitude functions Note the function labeled REF LVL appears in inverse video REF LVL also appears in the active function block indicating that it is the active amplitude function and can now be changed using any of the data entry controls A softkey with ON and OFF in its label can be used to turn the softkey s function on or off To turn the function on press the softkey so that ON is underlined To turn the function off press the softkey so that OFF is underlined The following example demonstrates how an ON or OFF softkey function will be annotated VID AVG ON OFF ON A function with AUTO and MAN in the label can either be auto coupled or have its value manually changed The function s value can be changed manually by pressing the softkey until MAN is underlined and then changing its value with the numeric keypad knob or step keys To auto couple a function press the softkey so that AUTO is underlined The following example demonstrates how an AUTO or MAN softkey function will be annotated ATTEN AUTO MAN AUTO A summary of all front panel keys and their related softkeys can be found in Chapter 8 Key Menus 2 12 Getting Started Making a Measurement Caution Do not exceed the maximum input power The maximum input power for the HP 8590L and HP 8
353. lling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 5 for more information See also the Change Prefix softkey description Front Panel Key Access Requires O ption 003 for an HP 85901 HP 8592L or HP 8594L recalls into spectrum analyzer memory a state saved on the memory card CARD STATE also displays the time and date when the state data was stored Before recalling a state that was saved under a prefix other than the current prefix change the current prefix to the prefix used when the state was saved If the windows display mode is being used the instrument state can only be recalled into the active window Pressing LOAD FILE is an alternate way to load state data from the memory card into spectrum analyzer memory See Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 5 for more information Front Panel Key Access RECALL Requires O ption 003 for an HP 8590L HP 8592L or HP 8594L recalls into spectrum analyzer memory a trace saved on the memory card Limit lines and amplitude correction factors are recalled by pressing Card Trace LIMIT LINES or AMP COR If the screen title does not exceed 34 characters the time and date when the trace data was stored is also displayed with the recalled trace data The screen title and date are not recalled with limit line files or amplitude correction factor files Before recalling a trace limit line file or amplitude correction factors file that was Key Descriptions 7 15 C
354. lution bandwidths gt 300 Hz Widen RES BW indicates that the resolution bandwidth must be increased The function will count the largest signal is a 300 Hz bandwidth even if a narrower bandwidth setting is used Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN reads out the average noise level referenced to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth at the marker position If no marker is present a marker appears at the center of the screen The root mean square noise level normalized to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth is read out The sample detector is activated Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN stops the spectrum analyzer sweep at the marker position for the duration of the dwell time The dwell time can be set from 2 milliseconds to 100 seconds Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN selects the marker readout to be displayed in signal frequency sweep time the inverse of the sweep time or the period which is the inverse of the frequency When the instrument is in zero span the frequency type readout cannot be selected Front Panel Key Access provides a list of the four available markers which is updated at the end of each sweep or when a marker is used The marker data can be displayed in different formats It can be in absolute or delta frequency and amplitude formats There is also a delta display line format which can be accessed using the TABLE ADL NRM softkey The marker table is not saved with the and keys Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN assi
355. lyzer 3 Turn on the analyzer and the HP LaserJet printer Printing and Plotting 6 21 corr UEV PRNT PLT PLTS PG 12 4 Plot Config PLT _ LOC CONF IG Print Config PLT gt LJT ON OFF Time Date Plt Port Contig Change Prefix PLT MENU ON OFF More 1 of 3 Previous Menu pul32e Figure 6 15 Plot Configure Menu 4 Referring to Figure 6 15 select the plotter configuration for your spectrum analyzer by pressing the appropriate keys 5 Configure your analyzer to plot to the LaserJet by pressing COPY DEV PRNT PLT PLTS PG 1 2 4 PLT LOC PLT 1 LOC PLT gt LJT ON OFF 6 22 Printing and Plotting Press this key to bring up the configuration menu so that PLT is underlined Press this key to underline the number of plots per page desired Choose 1 2 or 4 plots per page see Figure 6 2 If two plots per page are chosen this function allows you to select the location on the paper for the plotter output The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent where the plotter output will be located Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the softkey label If four plots per page are chosen this function allows you to select the location on the paper for the plotter output The quadrant of the softkey label graphically represents where the plotter output will be located Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the soft
356. mation 040 7 5 CATALOG ON EVENT Display Description 2 0 2 7 6 Default Configuration Values 2 1 2 ee 7 7 Compatibility of FFT With Other Functions aooo 7 8 Commands Altered Not Available within the Gate Utility 7 9 Functions Which Exit The Windows Display Format 2 7 10 Model Specific Preset Conditions 0 020000 7 11 Common Preset Conditions 2 2 7 12 Preset Spectrum Conditions for All Models 2 2 2 2 2 222004 7 13 HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 8596E SRA eet gee ates eo a a 9 1 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service OMICS e aa ee Ae Ge e Re A I Status Byte DISPONES ee th ae ond Contents 0 5 17 5 40 7 12 7 17 7 19 7 20 7 32 7 43 7 47 7 61 7 66 7 67 7 68 7 71 A 2 Preparing For Use What You ll Find in This Chapter This chapter describes the process of getting the spectrum analyzer ready to use when you have just received it See Preparing Your Spectrum Analyzer For Use for the process steps The process includes initial inspection setting up the unit for the selected ac power source and performing automatic self calibration routines Information about static safe handling procedures is also included in this chapter Introducing the HP 8590 Series Spectrum Analyzers
357. may appear if the spectrum analyzer is using default correction factors If this message appears constantly perform the CAL FREQ routine to try to eliminate this message 6 LOCK OFF appears briefly during the CAL FREQ routine during instrument preset or when the frequency value is changed this is normal and does not indicate a problem U and H ADC 2V FAIL ADC GND FAIL ADC TIME FAIL Cal harmonic gt 5 7 GHz NOT found Indicates that the CAL YTF routine for an HP 85953 cannot find a harmonic of the 300 MHz calibration signal If this happens ensure that the CAL OUT connector is connected to the spectrum analyzer input perform the CAL FREQ AMPTD routine and then perform the CAL YTF routine again U and H CAL _ _ During the self calibration routine messages may appear on the display to indicate how the calibration routines are progressing For example sweep freq span MC delay FM coil and atten can appear on the spectrum analyzer display LOCK OFF appears briefly during the CAL FREQ self calibration routine this is normal and does not indicate a problem M CAL DONE Press CAL STORE to save Indicates that the self calibration routine is finished and that you should press CAL STORE M CAL cannot execute CALAMP enter 0 dB PREAMP GAIN The preamplifier gain should be set to 0 dB before the CAL AMPTD routine is performed The preamplifier gain is set by using EXTERNAL PREAMPG This message also sets SRQ 110
358. ment Personality Fbr use with the HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 8596E only The spectrum analyzer must be configured with options 010 and 111 The HP 11770A Link Measurement Personality is a downloadable program on a memory card It provides a way to adapt your spectrum analyzer for making end to end and loop back measurements of group delay and amplitude flatness These are important test requirements for digital microwave radio satellite cable and other systems NADC TDMA Measurements Personality For use with HP 8590 E Series spectrum analyzers The HP 85718B NADC TDMA measurements personality provides the capability for the spectrum analyzer to make 9 transmitter RF tests and 7 transmitter modulation accuracy tests based on IS 54 IS 55 IS 56 IS 136 IS 137 and IS 138 standards The HP 85913 is compatible with HP 85718B if no modulation accuracy tests are needed See Option 050 in this chapter Noise Figure Measurements Personality For use with HP 8590 E Series spectrum analyzers with O ption 119 The HP 85719A noise figure measurement personality along with the HP 8590 E Series spectrum analyzer provide displayed swept noise figure and gain measurements form 10 MHz to 2 9 GHz Features include one point measurement capability for quick results noise figure and spectrum analyzer mode switching for stray signal detection selectable measurement bandwidths to directly measure narrowband devices and a repeatability calculator to d
359. mentation or the HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 Option 103 supplement documentation for more information Front Panel Key Access or Option 103 only amplifies the video signal ten times 20 dB This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Option 103 only sets the offset of the quasi peak detector This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Option 103 only discharges and resets the quasi peak detector This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Option 103 only accesses the menu of quasi peak softkey functions and if there is not an on screen marker places a marker on the highest on screen signal See the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 Option 103 supplement documentation for more information Front Panel Key Access accesses softkey menus that allow you to recall data from the memory card or spectrum analyzer memory When INTERNAL is selected states traces limit line tables amplitude correction factors can be recalled from spectrum analyzer memory When CARD is selected states traces limit line tables and amplitude correction factors display images and downloadable programs can be recalled from the memory card Option 003 is required to use a memory card with the HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L only In addition pressing accesse
360. n this example place the marker on the 60 Hz fundamental modulation signal Note For HP 8590L with Option 713 or HP 8592L with Option 713 the resolution bandwidth must be left at about 100 kHz to accommodate frequency drift of the spectrum analyzer If you are using an HP 8590L with Option 713 or an HP 8592L with Option 713 do not do step b Making Measurements 4 5 b Press and decrease the resolution bandwidth using the J key until measured signal amplitude drops Then press ff to increase the bandwidth until the signal amplitude stops increasing and stays the same or until the maximum resolution bandwidth is reached Use the narrowest bandwidth that does not cause a change in the signal amplitude Note As the resolution bandwidth is stepped down the modulated signal must be re centered on the spectrum analyzer display If this is not done the signal amplitude can decrease due to off tuning of the spectrum analyzer and not because of the resolution bandwidth chosen For the best amplitude accuracy the resolution bandwidth should be about 10 times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest For the 60 Hz fundamental a 1 kHz resolution bandwidth works well For the HP 8591E HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 if harmonics are not a concern a 100 kHz resolution bandwidth can be used and it will provide a faster update rate C Press Bw VID BW AUTO MAN MAN and use the step keys to d
361. n 026 10 7 Frequency Extension to 26 5 GHz with N Type Connector Option 027 10 7 Front Panel Protective Cover Option 040 10 7 Protective Soft Carrying Case Back Pack Option 042 2 10 7 Improved Amplitude Accuracy for NADC bands Option 050 2 10 8 Improved Amplitude Accuracy for PDC bands Option 051 2 2 2 10 8 Improved Amplitude Accuracy for PHS Option 052 202 10 8 Improved Amplitude Accuracy for CDMA Option 053 2 2 2 10 8 Fast Time Domain Sweeps Option 101 0 00 0 0008 10 8 AM FM Demodulator with Speaker and TV Sync Trigger Circuitry Option 102 10 9 Quasi Peak Detector and AM FM Demodulator With Speaker Option 103 10 9 Time Gated Spectrum Analysis Option 105 10 9 CT2 Demodulator Option 110 4 1 0 9 Group Delay and Amplitude Flatness Option 111 10 9 DECT Demodulator Option 112 0200002000000004 4 10 10 Noise Figure Option 119 l Soe ke Wa eo a a Rae eg ee 10 10 Narrow Resolution Bandwidths Option 130 2002222020008 10 10 Narrow Resolution Bandwidths and Precision Frequency Reference Option 140 10 10 DSP Fast ADC and Digital Demodulator Option 151 0020 10 10 PDC PHS NADC CDMA Firmware for Option 151 Option 160 10 11 GSM DCS1800 Firmware for Option 151 Option 163 10 1 1 TV Picture Display Option 180 2 0
362. n 105 4 26 H hardware broken A l hardware error messages 9 7 hardware problems 9 1 harmonic band 0 7 4 harmonic band 1 7 4 harmonic band 2 7 4 harmonic band 3 7 4 harmonic band 4 7 5 harmonic band menu 7 12 harmonic band slope and offset adjust 7 14 harmonic lock 3 26 7 13 highest peak finding next 7 58 highest signal peak 7 80 HIGH SWEEP IN OUT 2 7 HOLD 2 8 7 48 horizontal signal positioning 7 31 how to call Hewlett Packard 9 4 how to return your analyzer for service 9 6 HP 8590 Series key menus 8 2 14 HP B amp amp W PRINTER 7 78 HP IB address 7 10 HP IB and Parallel Option 041 10 6 HP IB cable 10 15 HP IB interface connector 2 7 HP Paintjet 7 61 I identifying distortion products 3 20 identify the signal FFT 7 79 IDNUM 7 2 7 48 illegal spectrum analyzer command A l impact cover Option 040 10 7 improved amplitude accuracy Option 050 10 8 improved amplitude accuracy Option 051 10 8 improved amplitude accuracy Option 052 10 8 Index 8 improved amplitude accuracy Option 053 10 8 impulse noise measurement 3 17 increase frequency readout resolution 3 6 informational messages 9 7 INIT FLT 7 2 7 48 initial inspection 1 3 INPUT 500 2 3 INPUT 759 2 3 input and output auxiliary control 7 11 input attenuation control 7 10 input impedance 7 49 INPUT Z 502 750 7 49 inserting a memory card 2 19 installation external keyboard 5 42 installation man
363. n distortion measurements Option 101 allows negative peak detection with sweep times as high as 200 ms Option 151 allows negative peak detection with sweep times as high as 800 ms Option 151 requires the installation of Option 160 or 163 PDC PHS NADC CDMA Firmware for Option 151 Option 160 fir HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 85963 with Option 151 only Option 160 provides the digital signal processing DSP firmware ROMs necessary to perform PDC PHS or NADC digital demodulation based measurements It also includes DSP assisted measurements for CDMA Option 160 implements a coherent downconversion and calculates the minimum RMS error vector magnitude of a timeslot Carrier frequency error and I Q origin offset are also extracted from sampled data Option 151 with Option 160 and the HP 85718B NADC TDMA measurements personality provide a complete NADC transmitter RF measurement solution including modulation metrics Option 151 with Option 160 and the HP 85720C PDC measurements personality provide a complete PDC transmitter RF measurement solution including modulation metrics Option 151 with Option 160 and the HP 85725B CDMA measurements personality provide a CDMA transmitter measurement solution with fast DSP assisted measurements Option 151 with Option 160 and the HP 85726B PHS measurements personality provide a complete PHS transmitter RF measurement solution including modulation metrics GSM DCS1800 Firmware for Option 151
364. n factors CAL STORE 1 9 STOR PWR ON UNITS 7 2 7 82 STP GAIN ZERO 7 3 7 82 STUVWX 7 82 subtract display line from trace B 7 11 subtract trace B from A 7 5 SWEEP 7 82 sweep control continuous 7 82 single 7 79 7 82 SWEEP CONT SGL 7 82 SWEEP DELAY gate utility 7 83 sweep modes 2 10 2 11 SWEEP OUTPUT 2 7 SWEEP RAMP 7 3 7 83 sweep time 7 83 sweep time coupling 7 10 gate utility 7 30 SWEEP TIME DAC 7 3 7 83 SWEEP TUNE OUTPUT 2 6 sweep tune output Option 009 10 5 switch trace A and B 7 5 SWP CPLG SR SA 4 9 7 83 SWP TIME AUTO MAN 7 83 SYNC CRD TV TRIG 7 83 synchronization constants 7 32 SYNC NRM NTSC 7 84 SYNC NRM PAL 7 84 T table of markers 7 56 table of amplitude correction factors 7 8 table of signal peaks 7 63 TABLE ADL NRM 7 85 temperature conditions 1 8 test set 500 transmission reflection 10 13 scalar 500 transmission reflection 10 13 TG UNLVL message 4 12 third order intercept measurement 4 39 7 86 third order intermodulation distortion 3 22 third order intermodulation measurement 4 41 verification of 4 42 THRESHLD ON OFF 7 85 threshold line 7 85 timebase verification 7 90 Time Date 7 85 TIMEDATE ON OFF 7 86 time domain window definition 7 32 gate utility 7 32 time gate definition of 7 32 delay 7 46 faster sweep times Option 101 4 22 gate on off 7 46 length 7 46 triggering 7 46 using the gate utility 4 19 time gated spectrum analysis Opti
365. n io cg Da a we he 4 2 Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement 0 WWW GW WW WW OANNAMHWNY wt NN N me WM y Y WN Yuu vn Bees e Leen LG 1 1 UYUNDANFWWNTRKDANAYNYNE WP Li Li Li NNO eK 3 21 Contents 7 4 3 Block Diagram of a Spectrum Analyzer Tracking Generator Measurement System 4 4 Transmission Measurement Test Setup 2 2 4 5 Tracking Generator Output Power Activated 4 6 Spectrum Analyzer Settings According to the Measurement Requirement 4 7 Decrease the Resolution Bandwidth to Improve Sensitivity 4 8 Manual Tracking Adjustment Compensates for Tracking Error 4 9 Normalized Trace e 4 10 Measure the Rejection Range with Delta Markers 2 2 4 1 1 Demodulation of an FM Signal 2 2 a 4 12 Continuous Demodulation of an FM Signal 2 2 2 2 ee ee 4 13 Triggering on an Odd Field of a Video Format 2 4 14 Triggering on an Even Field of a Video Format 4 15 Reflection Measurement Short Calibration Test Setup 4 16 Measuring the Return Loss of the Filter 4 17 Time Gate Utility Display 2 a a e o 4 18 Viewing Time Sharing of a Frequency with an Oscilloscope 4 19 Viewing Time Sharing of a Frequency with a Spectrum Analyzer 4 20 Pulse Repetition Interval and Puls
366. n the spectrum analyzer press PRESET Set the center frequency to 300 MHz the span to 2 MHz and the resolution bandwidth to 300 kHz by pressing FREQUENCY 300 2 MHz then 300 kHz A single signal peak is visible 3 2 Making Basic Measurements Note When using an HP 8590L with Option 713 or an HP 8592L with Option 713 and the signal peak cannot be found increase the span to 20 MHz by pressing 20 MHz The signal should be visible Press PEAK SEARCH MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF ON then 2 to bring the signal to center screen Then press MK TRACK ON OFF so that OFF is underlined to turn the marker track function off 4 Since the resolution bandwidth must be less than or equal to the frequency separation of the two signals a resolution bandwidth of 100 kHz must be used Change the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz by pressing 100 kHz Two signals are now visible as in Figure 3 2 Use the knob or step keys to further reduce the resolution bandwidth and better resolve the signals 4D REF 0 dBm ATTEN1 0 d8 PEAK p LOG 10 d8 RES BW 100 kHz WA SA SC FC CORR X ll CENTER 300 000 MHz SPAN 2 000 MHz RESBW1 0 0 kHz VBW3 0 kHz SWP2 0 msec Figure 3 2 Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude As the resolution bandwidth is decreased resolution of the individual signals is improved and the sweep time is increased For fastest measurement times use the wides
367. n this manual Service Calibration Functions Service Cal accesses the following service calibration softkeys CAL MXR HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only CAL TIMEBASE EDIT FLATNESS EXECUTE TITLE EXIT Flatness Data IDNUM INIT FLT SET ATTN ERROR STOR PWR ON UNITS Service Diagnostic Functions Service Diag accesses the following diagnostic softkeys LOCK ON OFF 10V REF DETECTOR IOV REF DETECTOR 2v REF DETECTOR ALC TEST HP 8590L or HP 85913 with Option 010 or 011 only ANALYZER GAINS AUXB HP 8590L or HP 85913 only BINARY SPAN HP 8590L or HP 8591E only COARSE TUNE DAC DACS DISPLAY CAL DATA DROOP FINE TUNE DAC FM COIL DRIVE FM GAIN Option 102 or 103 only 7 2 Key Descriptions FM OFFST FM SPAN FREQ DIAG FRQ DISC NORM OFF GND REF DETECTOR MAIN COIL DR MAIN SPAN MIXER BIAS DAC PRESEL DAC QP DET ON OFF QP GAIN ON OFF QPDRST ON OFF QPD OFFSET STP GAIN ZERO SWEEP RAMP SWEEP TIME DAC X FINE TUNE DAC YTF DRIVER YTF SPAN YTF TUNE COARSE YTF TUNE FINE Option 102 or 103 only HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only Option 103 only Option 103 only Option 103 only Option 103 only HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 8596E only HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only Key Descriptions
368. ncy frequency offset video bandwidth resolution bandwidth center frequency or start frequency correction factors on wager Refer to the description of the softkey function that was activated 2 11 Table 2 3 Screen Annotation for Trace Trigger and Sweep Modes Trace Mode Trigger Mode Sweep Mode W clear write traces A B C F free run C continuous S M maximum hold traces A B L line single sweep V view traces A B C V video S store blank traces A B C E external M minimum hold trace C T TV Options 101 and 102 onlv Menu and Softkey Overview The keys labeled FREQUENCY CAL and MKR are all examples of front panel keys Pressing most front panel keys accesses menus of functions that are displayed along the right side of the display These menus are called softkey menus Softkey menus list functions other than those accessed directly by the front panel keys To activate a function on the softkey menu press the unlabeled key immediately to the right of the annotation on the screen The unlabeled keys next to the annotation on the display screen are called softkeys Front panel keys are designated with a box around the key label for example AMPLITUDE softkeys are designated by shading on the key label for example REF LVL The softkeys that are displayed depend on which front panel key is pressed and which menu level is enabled If a softkey function s value can be changed it is ca
369. nd TRACES are locked they will still be erased by ERASE MEM ALL Front Panel Key Access 7 74 Key Descriptions SAVE SAVE AMP COR SAVE EDIT accesses softkey menus that allow you to store state data trace data limit line tables and amplitude correction factors on a memory card or in spectrum analyzer memory The SAVE function also allows you to save state data trace data limit line tables amplitude correction factors and program data on the memory card In addition pressing accesses the softkey menus used to catalog the saved data in spectrum analyzer memory or on the memory card To save to or catalog from spectrum analyzer memory press INTERNAL CARD so that INTERNAL is underlined To save to or catalog from the memory card press INTERNAL CARD so that CARD is underlined The HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L must have Option 003 for memory card operation Saving state data saves the spectrum analyzer settings but not the trace data Saving trace data saves both the trace data and the state data Display images and programs also called downloadable programs or DLPs can only be saved to or recalled from the memory card States and traces are saved in spectrum analyzer memory even if the instrument is turned off or is pressed Eight spectrum analyzer memory state registers and many trace registers are available for the user The Catalog Internal softkey is used to access the catalog functions It also accesses
370. nd MAX REG are displayed on the spectrum analyzer display The number after MAX REG indicates the maximum register number that can be entered for trace storage in spectrum analyzer memory Use the numeric keypad to enter a number from 0 to the maximum register number and then press ENTER To Recall a Trace 1 2 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL Press Internal Trace This accesses a menu displaying TRACE A TRACE B TRACE C LIMIT LINES and AMP COR Press TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C to select the trace in which you want to place the trace data Enter the register number under which the trace was stored 5 Press ENTER The recalled trace is placed in the view mode and the spectrum analyzer state is changed to the state that was saved Trace data can also be recalled by using the catalog 1 2 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL Press Catalog Internal CATALOG REGISTER Use the knob to highlight the number of the trace register to be retrieved The trace registers have a TR preceding the trace register number Press LOAD FILE The recalled trace is placed into trace B and the spectrum analyzer state is changed to the state that was saved Using Analyzer Features 5 7 To Save a Limit Line Table or Amplitude Correction Factors The procedure for saving limit line tables or amplitude corr
371. nd of a sweep SRQ 104 occurred at the same time SRQ 144 appears on the spectrum analyzer display because both bit 5 and bit 2 are set as shown below bit number 76 5 4 3 2 10 status byte 0 1 100 100 octal value l 4 4 SRQ 144 Service Request Activating Commands With the exceptions of SRQ 140 and SRQ 110 service requests can only be activated from a computer SRQ 140 and SRQ 110 are always activated Your programmer s guide describes service request activating commands under RQS and SRQ A 2 SRQ Glossary absolute amplitude accuracy The degree of correctness or uncertainty expressed in either volts or dB power It includes relative uncertainties plus calibrator uncertainty For improved accuracy some spectrum analyzers specify frequency response relative to the calibrator as well as relative to the midpoint between peak to peak extremes Refer also to relative amplitude accuracy active function readout The area of a display screen where the active function and its state are displayed The active function is the one that was completed by the last key selection or remote programming command active marker The marker on a trace that can be repositioned by front panel controls or programming commands active trace The trace commonly A B or C that is being swept updated with incoming signal information adjacent channel power The measure of transmitter signal leakage into adjacent channels The measured valu
372. ndwidth is used Turning FM demodulation on turns off AM demodulation if it is on When the frequency span is greater than O Hz a 100 kHz bandwidth is used during the demodulation regardless of the screen annotation When the span is equal to O Hz the displayed bandwidth is used Front Panel Key Access DEMOD Option 102 or 103 only ON OFF turns the AM or FM demodulation on and off If the spectrum analyzer is in a nonzero span a marker is placed at center screen if an on screen marker is not already present The marker pause is changed to equal the current dwell time value Demodulation takes place on any signal that is indicated by the marker position during the marker pause There is no change to the display during marker pause but the demodulation signal is present on the AUX VIDEO OUT Also see the SPEAKER ON OFF softkey description Pressing DEMOD ON OFF selects the sample peak detector for AM demodulation the FMV detector for FM demodulation If the spectrum analyzer is in zero span demodulation is done continuously with or without an on screen marker Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 33 DESKJET 310 550C DESKJET 540 DETECTOR PK SP NG DETECTOR SMP PK DISPLAY CAL DATA selects the HP DeskJet 310 or 550C for color printing Use this function if you have one of these color printers This softkey can be accessed by pressing CONFIG then Set Colr Printer Front Panel Key Access selects the
373. ndwidths bandwidths that are less than 1 kHz with the following procedure 1 Place the marker on the desired signal 2 Increase the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz and verify the marker is on the signal peak 3 If the marker in on the signal peak the marker count function can be used in either the 1 kHz resolution bandwidth or the original narrow resolution bandwidth setting If the marker is not on the signal peak it should be moved to the signal peak and the marker counter function should not be used with a resolution bandwidth setting of less than 1 kHz U MEAS UNCAL The measurement is uncalibrated Check the sweep time span and bandwidth settings or press AUTO COUPLE AUTO ALL U MEMORY OVERFLOWERASE DLP MEM and reload This message indicates that too many user defined items functions variables key definitions or downloadable programs have been loaded into spectrum analyzer memory If this message appears use ERASE DLP MEM and then load the user defined item or downloadable program into spectrum analyzer memory U No card found Indicates that the memory card is not inserted U No points defined Indicates the specified limit line or amplitude correction function cannot be performed because no limit line segments or amplitude correction factors have been defined U If You Have A Problem 9 13 OVEN COLD Indicates that the spectrum analyzer has been powered up for less than 5 minutes The actual temperature
374. nel Key Access finds the third order intercept of the two highest amplitude signals and the two associated distortion products The effect of unequal test signal amplitude is compensated for The measurement runs continuously re executing at the end of each sweep The units for the displayed value can be selected by pressing Amptd Units softkey The two test signals and the two associated distortion products must all be displayed for the measurement to function The relative amplitudes and frequencies of the displayed signals must fit the TO1 pattern All of the signals must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER accesses the trace softkeys that allow you to store and manipulate trace information Each trace is comprised of a series of data points that form a register where amplitude information is stored The spectrum analyzer updates the information for any active trace with each sweep If two traces are being written to they are updated on alternating sweeps Also see Screen Annotation in Chapter 2 selects the softkey menu used for trace A trace B or trace C functions Press TRACE A B C until the letter of the desired trace is underlined Front Panel Key Access sets up trace A for recalling previously saved trace data into trace A or saving trace data from trace A Front Panel Key Access RECALL or sets up trace B for recalling previously saved trace data into trace B
375. nel Key Access allows you to edit the current amplitude correction factors table by accessing the SELECT POINT SELECT FREQ SELECT AMPLITUD DELETE POINT Edit Done and PURGE AMP COR softkeys Front Panel Key Access For options 021 023 and 024 only Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information starts the DLP editor function and loads the highlighted item from the catalog of spectrum analyzer user memory to be displayed and edited It copies the item into the spectrum analyzer DLP editor memory which is a 2500 byte memory buffer If an item is edited the new edited version will not be overwritten in the spectrum analyzer user memory until it is processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE can be accessed through both the amplitude correction menu and the the change prefix menu When accessed from the amplitude correction menu the amplitude correction factors table is erased from the spectrum analyzer screen and the amplitude correction menu is restored on screen Use Edit Done when all the amplitude correction factors have been entered When accessed from the change prefix menu Edit Done erases the prefix from the spectrum analyzer screen and restores the previous menu Use Edit Done when prefix characters have all been entered Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE can be a
376. nel Key Access Option 010 or 011 only Not available with HP 8590L allows you to select between automatic and manual adjustment of the tracking generator s switching attenuator The HP 85913 can be manually adjusted from 0 to 60 dB in 10 dB steps The HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 can be manually adjusted from 0 to 56 dB in 8 dB steps When auto coupled the SRC ATN function automatically adjusts the attenuator to yield the source amplitude level specified by the SRC PWR ON OFF softkey function Set SRC ATM MAN AUTO so that MAN is underlined decoupled for power sweeps greater than 10 dB for the HP 85913 or greater than 8 dB for the HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 Front Panel Key Access Option 010 or 011 only offsets the displayed power of the tracking generator SRC Offset values may range from 100 dB to 100 dB Using the source power offset capability of the tracking generator allows you to take system losses or gains into account thereby displaying the actual power delivered to the device under test Front Panel Key Access Option 010 or 011 only activates ON or deactivates OFF the output power of the tracking generator SRC The power level can then be adjusted using the data keys step keys or knob Pressing any digit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu The available output power level varies for different spectrum analyzer models See speci
377. nformation label 2 22 rear panel features 2 5 7 RECALL 2 2 7 72 RECALL AMP COR 7 73 recalling a display image from the memory card 5 14 7 15 recalling a DLP from the memory card 7 15 recalling amplitude correction factors from analyzer memory 5 8 9 recalling amplitude correction factors from the memory card 5 15 recalling a program from the memory card 5 16 recalling a state from analyzer memory 5 6 Index 14 recalling a state from the memory card 5 13 7 15 recalling a trace from analyzer memory 5 7 7 49 recalling a trace from the memory card 5 13 14 7 15 recalling limit lines from analyzer memory 5 8 9 recalling limit line tables from the memory card 5 15 RECALL LIMIT 7 73 reduced frequency accuracy Option 713 10 12 reference connector 1 8 reference detector 10V 7 4 10V 7 4 2V 7 4 ground 7 47 reference level 7 73 reference level offset 7 73 reflection calibration measurements 4 17 REF LVL 7 73 REF LVL OFFSET 7 73 relative limit line type 7 50 remote command dispose all 7 39 7 40 7 41 front panel execution 7 41 remote operation 7 27 RES BW AUTO MAN 7 74 resolution bandwidth 7 74 resolving signals 3 2 5 resolution bandwidth coupling 7 10 gate utility 7 30 resolution bandwidths optional 10 10 resolution of marker counter 7 26 RETURN 7 74 return loss measuring 4 18 RF bridge 10 13 RF limiters 10 13 RF OUT 500 2 4 RF OUT 753 2 4 RPG knob 2 8 RPG TITLE 7 74
378. ng m Start frequency is too low or the stop frequency is too high The unleveled condition is likely to occur if the true frequency range exceeds the tracking generator frequency specification especially the low frequency specification The true frequency range being swept may be significantly different than the start or stop frequency annotations indicate depending on other spectrum analyzer settings especially the span see specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for your instrument For better frequency accuracy use a narrower span Tracking peak may be required use TRACKING PEAK Source attenuation may be set incorrectly select SRC ATN MAN AUTO AUTO for optimum setting The source power may be set too high or too low use SRC PWR ON OFF to reset it The source power sweep may be set too high resulting in an unleveled condition at the end of the sweep Use PWR SWP ON OFF to decrease the amplitude 4 12 Making Measurements Demodulating and Listening to an AM or FM Signal Note This application should only be performed using an HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 with Option 102 or 103 The functions listed in the menu under Demod allow you to demodulate and hear signal information displayed on the spectrum analyzer Simply place a marker on a signal of interest activate AM or FM demodulation and then listen Example 1 2 5 6 Connect an ante
379. ng SAV LOCK ON OFF returns the menu to its unlocked state Front Panel Key Access SAVE or CONFIG maintains the minimum level for each trace point of trace C Updates each trace point if a new minimum level is detected in successive sweeps Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 8595E or HP 85963 only displays the output of the mixer bias DAC from the first converter driver on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 55 MK COUNT ON OFF MK NOISE ON OFF MK PAUSE ON OFF MK READ F TIP MK TABLE ON OFF MK TRACE AUTO ABC All E Series and L Series spectrum analyzers except HP 8590L with Option 713 turns on the marker counter when ON is underlined If no marker is active before MK COUNT ON OFF is pressed a marker is activated at center screen Press MK COUNT ON OFF so that OFF is underlined to turn the marker counter off Press CNT RES AUTO MAN to change the marker counter resolution to an uncoupled value An may appear in the upper right of the display along with the message Marker Count The ratio of the resolution bandwidth to span must be greater than 0 01 for the marker count function to work properly Reduce Span appears on screen if the bandwidth to span ratio is less than 0 01 If Option 130 narrow resolution bandwidth is not installed the marker count function is limited to reso
380. ng adjustment of the tracking generator to ensure maximum available dynamic range Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL 7 88Key Descriptions accesses softkeys that let you select the sweep mode and trigger mode Also see Screen Annotation in Chapter 1 Note With some delayed trigger functions for example external or TV triggering the softkey menu is not updated until after the trigger has occurred TRIG MKR Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended ON OFF activates a marker which indicates the time from the gate trigger to the current marker position The trigger marker is in the time domain window of the gate utility It is turned off when the menu is exited or if another active function is activated Front Panel Key Access SWEEP TV Options 101 and 102 or O ption 301 only LINE selects the line number of the video picture field The values allowed are 1 to 1012 sets the TV line number to 17 Front Panel Key Access TV Options 101 and 102 or Option 301 only Standard allows the spectrum analyzer to trigger on the standard video formats NTSC PAL PAL M or SECAM L Front Panel Key Access TV SYNC Options 101 and 102 or Option 301 only NEG POS selects the polarity of the modulation of the video format NTSC uses the negative or positive modulation video format NTSC PAL and PAL M use negative modulation SECAM L uses positive modulation Front Panel Key Access TRIG TV TRIG Options 101 and 102 o
381. ng at the Beginning of the Pulse In Figure 4 29 the peak amplitude has not been reached and the transient response of the resolution bandwidth filters adds noise Table 4 4 and Table 4 5 provide the recommended initial spectrum analyzer settings when measuring a signal without signal delay Making Measurements 4 33 Note Refer to the guidelines in Table 4 1 when measuring a signal with signal delay To use Table 4 4 and Table 4 5 Determine the pulse width of the signal you want to measure then use Table 4 4 to determine the gate delay resolution bandwidth gate length and video bandwidth spectrum analyzer settings Determine the pulse repetition rate of the signal then use Table 4 5 to determine the spectrum analyzer sweep time setting Note The peak detection mode is recommended for making gated measurements Table 4 4 Gate Delay Resolution Bandwidth Gate Length and Video Bandwidth Settings Pulse width 7 Resolution Video Bandwidth Bandwidth 10 us 1 MHz 1 MHz 50 us 100 kHz 100 kHz 63 5 us 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 us 100 kHz 100 kHz 500 us 10 kHz 10 kHz 1 ms 10 kHz 10 kHz 5 ms 1kHz 1kHz 10 ms 1kHz 1kHz 16 6 ms 1kHz 1kHz 33 ms 1 kHz 1 kHz 50 ms 1 kHz 1 kHz 100 ms 1 kHz 1 kHz gt 130 ms 1 kHz 1 kHz When using the short gate delays you may notice the gate delay time jitter by 1 ys This jitter is due to the pectrum analyzer 1 MHz gate clock and it does not indicate a problem 4 34 Making Mea
382. ng peak automatic adjustment 4 10 manual adjustment 4 10 TRACKING PEAK 4 10 7 88 tracking unstable signals 3 9 transient limiter 10 13 transit case 10 16 TRIG 7 89 trigger 7 89 external 7 42 free run 7 44 line 7 51 video 7 91 triggering EDGE POL POS NEG 7 36 gate edge or level 7 46 gate utility 7 36 triggering on a selected line video picture field 4 15 trigger modes 2 10 2 11 TRIG MKR ON OFF 7 89 Index l 7 TRMATH command 7 19 turning off markers 7 54 turning off the FFT function 7 43 turning off windows display 7 91 turning on the analyzer for the first time 1 8 turn off active function 2 8 TV LINE 7 89 TV measurements personality 10 2 TV Picture Display Option 180 10 11 TV Standard 7 89 TVSTND 4 16 TV SYNC NEG POS 7 89 TV sync trigger capability fast time domain sweeps AM FM demodulator Option 301 10 12 TV sync trigger circuitry Option 102 10 9 TV trig even field 7 89 NTSC video format 7 59 odd field 7 89 PAL M video format 7 61 PAL video format 7 61 SECAM L video format 7 76 TV line number 7 89 TV Standard 7 89 TV sync 7 89 vertical interval 7 89 TV TRIG 4 15 TV TRIG EVEN FLD 4 15 7 89 TV triggering 4 15 TV TRIG ODD FLD 7 89 TV TRIG OUTPUT 2 5 TV TRIG VERT INT 7 89 T WINDOW RES BW 7 84 T WINDOW SWP TIME 7 84 two display windows 7 60 type of limit line 7 78 U underscore character 7 92 unit key pressed A l units amplitude 7 8 universa
383. ng the knob or data keys Press to correct errors Front Panel Key Access accesses several service calibration functions The service calibration functions are designed for service use only More detailed descriptions of the service functions are available in the service documentation Service documentation can be obtained by ordering Option 915 through your HP Sales and Service office For a listing of all available service calibration functions refer to Service Functions at the beginning of this chapter Front Panel Key Access accesses several service diagnostic functions The service diagnostic functions are designed for service use only More detailed descriptions of the service diagnostic functions are available in the service documentation Service documentation can be obtained by ordering Option 915 through your HP Sales and Service office For a listing of all available service diagnostic functions refer to Service Functions at the beginning of this chapter Front Panel Key Access sets the calibration attenuator error factors this is not the same as the input attenuator This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkeys for setting up black and white HP and Epson compatible printers Front Panel Key Access CONFIG accesses the softkey for setting up the HP PaintJet and DeskJet printers Front Panel Key Access CONFIG 7 78 Key Descriptions
384. ng the FFT function the display is in log mode The markers are put in the FFT mode for use in evaluating the data The signal being transformed is in trace A and the Fourier transform of the signal is in trace B Any information that was in trace B and C will be lost Press FFT OFF to return the spectrum analyzer to normal operation Refer to Chapter 4 Measuring Amplitude Modulation Using the Fast Fourier Transform Function for more information Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER Key Descriptions 7 27 Option 041 or 043 only initiates an output of the screen data without an external controller to a previously specified graphics printer or plotter Refer to Chapter 6 of this manual or the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for detailed information about printing and plotting The printer or plotter must have already been selected using and either Plot Conf ig for a plotter or Print Conf ig for a printer To obtain a print press CONFIG COPY DEV PRNT PLT so that PRNT is underlined then Print Conf ig Pm Port Config For Option 041 use PRINTER ADDRESS to change the HP IB address of the printer if necessary Press CONFIG Print Conf ig Pm Port Conf ig PRN PORT HPIB PAR so that HPIB is underlined then press PRINTER ADDRESS For Option 043 use BAUD RATE to change the baud rate of the spectrum analyzer if necessary Press CONFIG Print Conf
385. ng to the tuned frequency range of the spectrum analyzer Flatness of 1 dB indicates that maximum and minimum values of the analyzer s frequency response are less than 2 dB apart Fourier transform See FFT frequency accuracy The uncertainty with which the frequency of a signal or spectral component is indicated either in an absolute sense or relative to some other signal or spectral component Absolute and relative frequency accuracies are specified independently frequency range The range over of frequencies which the spectrum analyzer performance is specified The maximum frequency range of many microwave analyzers can be extended with the application of external mixers Glossary 5 frequency resolution The ability of a spectrum analyzer to separate closely spaced spectral components and display them individually Resolution of equal amplitude components is determined by resolution bandwidth Resolution of unequal amplitude signals is determined by resolution bandwidth and bandwidth selectivity frequency response The peak to peak variation in the displayed signal amplitude over a specified center frequency range Frequency response is typically specified in terms of dB relative to the value midway between the extremes It also may be specified relative to the calibrator signal frequency span The magnitude of the displayed frequency component Span is represented by the horizontal axis of the display Generally frequency span i
386. nna to the spectrum analyzer input Select a frequency range on the spectrum analyzer such as the range for FM radio broadcasts For example the frequency range for FM broadcasts in the United States is 88 MHz to 108 MHz Press PRESET FREQUENCY START FREQ 88 MHz STOP FREQ 108 MHz Place a marker on the signal of interest by using PEAK SEARCH to place a marker on the highest amplitude signal or by pressing MARKER NORMAL and moving the marker to a signal of interest Press AUX CTRL Demod DEMOD ON OFF so that ON is underlined and DEMOD AM FM so that FM is underlined SPEAKER ON OFF is set to ON by the preset function Use the front panel volume control to control the speakers volume ye MKR 104 90 MHz REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB 46 61 dam Em LOG 10 d8 de OWELL TIME 500 msec f feo SC FC CORR _ S a START 8800 MHz STOP 108 00 MHz RES BW 180 kHz VBW 3B kHz SHP 75 msec Figure 4 11 Demodulation of an FM Signal e The signal is demodulated at the marker s position for the duration of the dwell time Use the step keys knob or number units keypad to change the dwell time For example press the step up key twice to increase the dwell time to 2 seconds The peak search functions can be used to move the marker to other signals of interest Press to access NEXT PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT or NEXT PK
387. ns 7 51 Main Menu MAIN SPAN MAN QP AT MKR MAN TRK AD JUST MARKER ON OFF MARKER A Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended returns to the main gate utility menu from within the gate utility Pressing Main Menu accessesthe Define Time Define Gate Define Coupling UPDATE TIMEFREQ and EXIT UTILITY softkeys Front Panel Key Access SWEEP displays the main coil span signal MC SPAN from the span dividers on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Option 103 only performs a subset of the routine executed by pressing AUTO QP AT MKR and then displays a menu of quasi peak softkeys See the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 Option 103 supplement documentation for more information Front Panel Key Access Option 010 or 011 only allows the user to adjust the frequency of the tracking generator oscillator manually using the step keys or knob The tracking adjust is tuned to maximize the amplitude of the trace Tracking error occurs when the output frequency of the tracking generator is not exactly matched to the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer The resulting mixing product from the spectrum analyzer input mixer is not at the center of the IF bandwidth Any tracking errors may be compensated for through manual adjustments of the tracking generator s oscillator or through an automatic tracking rout
388. nstruments equipped with Option 001 or 011 only use the 750 cable shipped with the spectrum analyzer 2 On the spectrum analyzer press CAL and CAL FREQ amp AMPTD Cal signal not found will be displayed if CAL OUT is not connected to the spectrum analyzer input The frequency and amplitude self calibration functions take approximately 5 minutes to finish 9 minutes with Option 130 at which time the internal adjustment data is in working RAM 3 To save this data in the area of spectrum analyzer memory that is saved when the spectrum analyzer is turned off press CAL STORE Note To interrupt the calibration routines started by CAL FREQ CAL AMPTD or CAL FREQ AMPTD press PRESET CAL More 1 of 4 and CAL FETCH CAL FETCH retrieves the previous correction factors Improperly interrupting the self calibration routines may result in corrupt correction factors If this occurs press CAL FREQ amp AMPTD to rerun the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines The frequency and amplitude self calibration functions can be done separately by using the CAL FREQ or CAL AMPTD softkeys instead of CAL FREQ amp AMPTD 2 16 Getting Started Note If the frequency calibration CAL FREQ and the amplitude calibration CAL AMPTD self calibration routines are used the frequency calibration should be performed before the amplitude calibration unless the frequency data is known to be accurate The CAL FRE
389. nt Measurements are made continuously updating at the end of each sweep This allows you to make adjustments and see changes as they happen The single sweep mode can also be used providing time to study or record the data The individual measurements are described below N dB Bandwidth Measurement It is often necessary to measure a signal response s bandwidth such as when testing a band pass filter The signal to be measured must be centered on the display with a span that includes the full response Activate the measurement by turning the N dB PTS ON OFF key ON The spectrum analyzer places arrow markers at the 3 dB points on either side of the response and reads the bandwidth For other bandwidth responses enter the number of dB down desired from 1 dB to 80 dB No other signal can appear on the display within N dB of the highest signal The measured signal cannot have more than one peak that is greater than or equal to N dB A signal must have a peak greater than the peak excursion to be identified The default value for the peak excursion is 6 dB The N dB bandwidth measurement error is typically m about 2 of the span for spans lt 10 MHz about 3 of the span for spans gt 10 MHz 16 38 08 12 MAR 1992 REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB FEAR A LOG 6 0d8 POINTS 9 0 0 kHz 10 dB CENTER 300 0000 MHz SPAN 100 0 kHz RES GW 9 6 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 33 3 msec R Figure 4 34 N dB Bandwidth Measurement Making M
390. nterest For the 60 Hz fundamental a 1 kHz resolution bandwidth works well For the HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 8596E if harmonics are not a concern a 100 kHz resolution bandwidth can be used and it will provide a faster update rate C Press Bw VID BW AUTO MAN MAN and use the step keys to decrease the video bandwidth until the amplitude of the measured signal drops Then step the bandwidth up until the signal amplitude stops increasing or until the maximum video bandwidth is reached Use the narrowest video bandwidth that does not cause a change in the signal amplitude For the best amplitude accuracy the video bandwidth should be about 10 times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest For the 60 Hz fundamental a 1 kHz video bandwidth works well 11 Press and AM ON OFF so that ON is underlined The spectrum analyzer reads out the percent AM of the largest modulation frequency An arrow indicates the signal being measured see Figure 4 1 This measurement does not include all of the harmonics of the modulating signal Note The percent AM function will not run if the SIGNAL CLIPPED error message is being displayed Increase the reference level until the error message goes away 4 4 Making Measurements Note When the FFT measurement is active pressing the key will cycle between the MEAS USER and FFT menus MKR1 817 KHz 45 25 dBmHNouser A Menu FFTSTART Hz F
391. nts personality 10 4 PDC PHS NADC CDMA Firmware for Option 151 Option 160 10 11 peak next 7 58 next left 7 58 next right 7 58 peak detection mode positive negative 7 34 PEAK EXCURSN 7 62 peaking signal amplitude 3 8 Peak Menu 7 62 peak response routine 7 88 peak search outside of the zone 7 93 PEAK SEARCH 2 14 7 62 peak table 7 63 mode 7 63 sorting 7 63 using 5 4 5 peak to peak measurement 7 53 PEAK ZOOM 7 63 percent amplitude modulation 7 4 measurement 4 40 percent amplitude modulation measurement 4 39 personal digital cellular 10 1 1 phase lock on off 7 4 LOCK ON OFF 7 2 7 4 PHS firmware Option 160 10 1 1 PHS measurements personality 10 4 PK MODE lt gt DL NRM 7 63 PK SORT FRQ AMP 7 63 PK TABLE ON OFF 7 63 Plot Config 7 63 plot menu 7 64 plotter 10 16 PLOTTER ADDRESS 7 63 plotter configuration 7 27 plotter output 7 64 plotting 7 28 7 30 HP IB interface 6 7 laserjet 6 21 RS 232 6 14 plotting parallel laserjet 6 21 plotting serial laserjet 6 21 plotting to laserjets 7 64 PLT LOC _ _ 7 64 PLT MENU ON OFF 7 64 Plt Port Config 7 64 PLT PORT HPIB PAR 7 64 PLT PORT SER PAR 7 64 PLTS PG 1 2 4 7 64 POINT 5 26 7 64 point deletion 7 33 positive peak detection mode 7 34 power amplifiers 10 14 power bandwidth 7 60 power bandwidth measurement 4 43 power cable 1 6 power input 2 6 power measurement 7 65 adjacent channel power 7 6 adjacent channel p
392. o a Hewlett Packard compatible printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page After three printouts the page will be in position to start again at the top of the page if the printer s perforation skip is OFF see Figure 6 1 One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfitting each printout Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard DeskJet 540 printer Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a MX 80 Epson or other compatible 9 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will allow two printouts per page and will print softkey labels if desired see PRT MENU ON OFF Pressing this key to underline LRG will allow only one printout per page and will not print the softkey labels EP LQ570 SML LRG PRT MENU ON OFF COPY DEV PRNT PLT Press this key if the spectrum analyzer is connected to an LQ 570 Epson or other compatible 24 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will allow two printouts per page and will print softkey labels if desired see PRT MENU ON OFF This function is operational for Epson compatible printers only when SML is underlined Press this key so that ON is underlined to print the softkey labels with the spectrum analyzer printout This function is operational only when SML is underlined for the Epson compatible printers Press this key so PRNT is underlined Press this key t
393. o called downloadable programs or DLPs can be loaded into spectrum analyzer memory either by loading a program from a memory card or by defining a function with programming commands Remote programming ability is available with Option 041 or 043 The process of saving and recalling programs from the memory card is similar to saving state data To save program information to the memory card use ALL DLP CARD Note ALL DLP CARD saves an image of the spectrum analyzer memory This means a program cannot be saved selectively if several programs are present in the spectrum analyzer memory at the time Use Catalog Internal DELETE FILE to delete the items in user memory that you do not wish to be saved on the memory card ALL DLP CARD saves all programs and key definitions that are in spectrum analyzer memory onto the memory card To Save a Program L Press or DISPLAY then Change Prefix to enter a new prefix or change the existing prefix If you do not specify a prefix the program will be saved with a file name consisting of d_ register number l Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press ALL DLP CARD REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the spectrum analyzer display 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER The data is saved with a file name consisting of a d the prefix that was entered an underscore _ and the register num
394. o copy the spectrum analyzer display to the printer Printing and Plotting 6 13 Plotting Using an RS 232 Interface This section describes how to plot using an RS 232 interface It is critical that the plotter and the spectrum analyzer be configured to be compatible with each other Particular attention should be paid to Character Size 8 Bits Parity OFF Baud Rate 1200 typical Handshaking DTR YES DUPLEX FULL Equipment HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer with Option 043 HP 24542G 9 25 pin RS 232 cable HP C2932A 9 9 pin RS 232 cable for use with LaserJet 4P and 4Plus Any of the following Plotters a HP 7440A ColorPro plotter with an RS 232 interface a HP 7475A plotter with an RS 232 interface a HP 7550A B plotter with an RS 232 interface Interconnection and Plotting Instructions The RS 232 interface allows only one device to be connected to the spectrum analyzer Refer to the programmer s guide for more information on RS 232 protocol 1 Turn off the spectrum analyzer and plotter 2 Connect the plotter to the spectrum analyzer using an RS 232 cable 6 14 Printing and Plotting If you are connecting an HP 7550A B plotter you will need to use the 92224F f f gender changer as shown in Figure 6 10 HP 7550A PLOTTER AAN TERMINAL lt gt HP 18 COMPUTER MODEM pul37el Figure 6 10 Connecting the HP 7550A B Plotter 3 Turn on
395. o highlight the trace data to be retrieved 3 Press LOAD FILE The trace data is placed in trace B Trace data can also be recalled by specifying the prefix and the register number 1 Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 Press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Using Analyzer Features 5 13 3 Press Card Trace to access the menu that displays TRACE A TRACE B and TRACE C 4 Select the trace in which you want the trace data stored by pressing TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C 5 Enter the register number that the trace was saved under and then press ENTER The recalled trace is placed in view mode To Save a Display Image 1 Press or CONFIG Change Prefix Use the softkeys to enter a prefix under which you want the state saved A prefix can be one to seven characters long If you do not specify a prefix the display image will be saved with a file name consisting of i_ register number 2 Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Selecting CARD selects the memory card as the mass storage device 3 Press DISPLAY CARD REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the spectrum analyzer display 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER To Recall a Display Image l Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 Press or RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined
396. o read return loss Press and position the marker with the knob to read the return loss at that frequency see Figure 4 16 we MKR 324 27 MHz REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB 26 45 dB PEAK z LOG TN A es A ecg MARKER 224 27 MHz DL 26 45 dB dB Wa 8 AAN SHES steed ace aa sect e e e e ere IN 322 50 MHz RES BW 388 kHz CENTER VBW 100 kHz SWP 28 msec MARKER DELTA Figure 4 16 Measuring the Return Loss of the Filter 4 18 Making Measurements Using the Gate Utility to Simplify Time Gated Measurements Option 105 only The time gate allows the user to control when a spectrum analyzer measurement begins and the length of time during which the measurement is made The time gate is an RF signal switch that permits signal into the spectrum analyzer only while the switch or gate is closed Since the spectrum analyzer receives the signal only when passed through the gate it will only display the measurement results from the portion of the signal selected by the time position of the gate closure The time gate acts as a time filter rejecting signals and spectra not occurring at the desired time The time gate utility simplifies the use of the time gate In the gate utility the spectrum analyzer can display the time domain and the frequency domain simultaneously using two separate windows The user is able to adjust the time position of the gate closure relative to the input signal using interactive grap
397. o specify the entry that you wish to edit 8 Specify the third and fourth amplitude correction points by using the following key sequence 300 Wiz 15 45m 350 Wiz 22 eam 5 36 Using Analyzer Features 10 11 hp P E F OdBm ATTENI 0 dB PEAK LOG 10 dB PT FREQUENCY AMPL TUDE A oe sods 5 0 0 MHz 12 0 dB 250 0 MHz 10 0 dB 300 0 MHz 15 0 dB 350 0 MHz PUN WA VB SC FC ACORR e CENTER 300 0 MHz SPAN 500 O MHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 msec pul49e Figure 5 12 Completed Amplitude Correction Table Press EDIT DONE when all the points have been entered Use steps 10 and 11 to display corrected versus uncorrected amplitude trace data for trace comparison Display the amplitude corrected trace in trace A by pressing the following keys CLEAR WRITE A VIEW A Display the uncorrected amplitude trace in trace B by pressing the following keys TRACE A B C until B is selected CLEAR WRITE B CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 More 3 of 4 Amp Cor AMP COR ON OFF until OFF is selected Using Analyzer Features 5 37 Amplitude Correction Functions This section describes the amplitude correction functions in the order they are usually used Editing or Viewing the Amplitude Correction Tables Pressing CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 More 3 of 4 Amp Cor accesses the softkey menus for creating an amplitude correction table
398. o spectrum analyzer memory or purged from memory because the file name cannot be found U INVALID FILENAME _ Indicates the specified file name is invalid A file name is invalid if there is no file name specified if the first letter of the file name is not alphabetic or if the specified file type does not match the type of file See the description SAVRCLW or STOR programming command for more information U INVALID FILE NO ROOM Indicates that there is insufficient space available on the memory card to store the data U INVALID HP IB ADRS OPERATION An HP IB operation was aborted due to an incorrect address or invalid operation Check that there is only one controller the spectrum analyzer connected to the printer or plotter U INVALID HP IB OPERATION REN TRUE The HP IB operation is not allowed This is usually caused by trying to print or plot when a controller is on the interface bus with the spectrum analyzer To use the spectrum analyzer print or plot functions you must disconnect any other controllers on the HP IB If you are using programming commands to print or plot you can use an HP BASIC command instead of disconnecting the controller See the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information U INVALID ITEM Indicates an invalid parameter has been used in a programming command U INVALID KEYLBL Indicates that the specified key la
399. of the spectrum analyzer becomes the state of the window that was active when exiting the gate utility Front Panel Key Access activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start when an external voltage connected to EXT TRIG INPUT on the rear panel passes through approximately 1 5 volts The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to 5 V TTL signal Front Panel Key Access adds a positive or negative preamplifier gain value which is subtracted from the displayed signal The EXTERNAL PREAMPG function is similar to the REF LVL OFFSET function however with the EXTERNAL PREAMPG function the attenuation may be changed depending on the preamplifier gain entered A preamplifier gain offset is used for measurements that require an external preamplifier or long cables The offset is subtracted from the amplitude readout so that the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the input of the preamplifier The preamplifier gain offset is displayed at the top of the screen and is removed by entering zero The preamplifier gain offset is entered using the numeric keypad Press CAL STORE if you want the spectrum analyzer to use the current preamplifier gain offset when power is turned on Preamplifier gain offset is set to zero when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed The preamplifier gain value is not affected by an instrument preset Front Panel Key Access 1f the FFT mode is already active pressing FFT MARKERS only activates t
400. ommended accesses the menu for entering the value of the pulse width Press MARKER ON to activate a delta marker The other menu functions can be used to manipulate the marker to indicate the pulse width value Pressing DONE returns to the previous menu and makes the current value of the marker the pulse width It also restores the time domain window to the state prior to any adjustments made during_entry_ of the pulse width Front Panel Key Access allows you to dispose of the DLPs all traces defined by TRDEF and all VAREF variables that are in spectrum analyzer memory Pressing Dispose User Mem and then pressing ERASE DLP MEM causes a message to appear on the spectrum analyzer screen If you are sure Press key againtopurge data Press ERASE DLP MEM again if you want to dispose of the DLPs in memory Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of the DLPs in memory Note Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from spectrum analyzer memory Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 39 ERASE MEM ALL allows you to purge all user state registers all user trace registers all mode registers the editor buffer Group delay normalization all DLP memory and all microprocessor stack data The stack pointer is set to its power up value No system globals are erased and the calibration data is preserved Pressing ERASE MEM ALL causes a message to appear on the spectrum analyzer screen If you
401. on bandwidth is set greater than 2 25 ys or greater than 80 kHz Press BW 100 kHz Making Measurements 4 29 7 Set the video bandwidth to a value that is greater than 1 divided by the gate length For this example the video bandwidth must be greater than 1 13 ys or 80 kHz Press BW VID BW AUTO MAN 100 kHz The spectrum analyzer displays only signal 1 not Both signal 1 and signal 2 see Figure 4 25 qe REF 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB BATE POr TEL AY LOB E te 18 eee ES Eee Ege clay i 3 i GATE dB LENGTH aowe A enaae MB psec fe EDGE POL dd POS NEG E A ge ae a A A AIN GATE CTL CORR EDGE LVL PREV MA ile MENU CENTER 50 000 MHz SPAN 5 000 MHz RES BW 100 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 120 msec RT Figure 4 25 Using Time Gating to View Signal 1 8 To compare signal 1 to signal 2 we first place signal 1 trace A in the view mode Press TRACE VIEW A TRACE A B C so that B is underlined CLEAR WRITE B 9 To view the second signal change the gate delay so that the gate output is under the second signal Since the second signal had a signal delay of approximately 85 ys we set the gate delay to 85 ys plus the pulse width 2 or 110 ys Press SWEEP Gate Control GATE DELAY 110 us to set the gate delay to 110 ys Using an oscilloscope can be helpful in placing the gate output during the pulsed signal see Figure 4 26 4 30 Making Measurements fp running
402. on 105 10 9 time gated spectrum analyzer capability operation 4 22 time gate utility 7 47 coupling 7 32 delay sweep 7 83 done 7 35 entering 7 45 exit 7 42 marker on 7 54 pulse parameters 7 70 use of 4 19 time window resolution bandwidth 7 84 sweep time 7 84 TO1 ON OFF 4 41 7 86 trace blank trace A 7 12 blank trace B 7 12 blank trace C 7 12 clear write trace A 7 24 clear write trace B 7 25 clear write trace C 7 26 move trace B into C 7 1 1 A lt gt B 7 5 A B A 7 5 A gt C 7 5 B DL B 7 11 view mode 7 91 TRACE 7 86 trace A maximum hold 7 55 TRACE A 7 86 TRACE A BC 7 86 trace B maximum hold 7 55 TRACE B 7 86 trace C minimum hold 7 55 TRACE C 7 86 trace modes 2 10 2 1 1 trace registers locking 7 74 Trace Card 7 87 Trace Intrnl 7 88 Track Gen 4 8 7 88 tracking generator 7 88 external leveling input 2 5 frequency adjustment 7 52 internal external leveling 7 7 normalization 4 11 operation 4 7 output 2 4 output power 7 81 peak response 7 88 power sweep 7 71 power sweep range 7 81 self calibration 7 14 self calibration routine 1 9 2 17 source attenuator 7 81 source power offset 7 81 source power step size 7 81 stimulus response 4 7 warm up time 2 17 tracking generator 509 Option 010 10 6 tracking generator 7562 Option 01 1 10 6 tracking generator self calibration routine 1 9 tracking generator unleveled condition 4 12 tracki
403. only to peaks that rise and fall more than 10 dB above the threshold line or the noise floor of the display Pressing PRESET or turning on power resets the excursion to 6 dB and the threshold to 70 dB below the reference level Note When a peak has a lump on its skirt that is the peak excursion value above the threshold the lump is considered a peak in its own right only if it has a peak excursion drop on both sides Two peaks that are so close that only a valley divides them are not differentiated if the valley is not the peak excursion value deep Peak Menu PEAK SEARCH When the peak excursion value is less than 6 dB the marker peaking functions may not recognize signals less than 6 dB above the noise floor To correct this when measuring signals near the noise floor the excursion value can be reduced even further To prevent the marker from identifying noise as signals reduce the noise floor variance to a value less than the peak excursion value by reducing the video bandwidth or by using video averaging Front Panel Key Access PEAK SEARCH accesses the same softkeys that are available when PEAK SEARCH is pressed See the key description for PEAK SEARCH Pressing Peak Menu instead of allows you to use the peak search functions without initiating a new peak search Front Panel Key Access automatically places a marker on the highest amplitude of a trace displays the marker s amplitude and frequency It al
404. or saving trace data from trace B Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE sets up trace C for recalling previously saved trace data into trace C or saving trace data from trace C Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE 7 86Key Descriptions Trace gt Card begins the process used to save trace data limit line tables or amplitude correction factors on the memory card Pressing Trace Card accesses a softkey menu that allows you to select the trace to be saved trace A trace B or trace C and accesses the LIMIT LINES and AMP COR softkeys To save a trace press TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C use the numeric keypad to enter a trace register number and press ENTER To save limit line tables or amplitude correction factors press LIMIT LINES or AMP COR use the numeric keypad to enter a trace register number and press ENTER If windows are being used only the trace of the active window will be saved If you want the file name of the stored data to contain a prefix press Change Prefix to enter a prefix before storing the data If the trace data was stored using a prefix the file name is t prefix register number If no prefix was available the data is stored under t_ register number File names for limit line tables and amplitude correction factors are treated the same way as file names for trace data except 1 or a is used instead of t If a screen title is present it is saved with the tra
405. ort cable before the CAL YTF routine is performed U and H COMB SIGNAL NOT FOUND The comb signal cannot be found Check that 100 MHz COMB OUT is connected to the spectrum analyzer input The comb generator is available with the HP 8592L HP 85933 or HP 85963 only U and H CMD ERR The specified programming command is not recognized by the spectrum analyzer Press ANNOTATN ON OFF to clear U CONF TEST FAIL Indicates that the confidence test failed If this happens ensure that the CAL OUT connector is connected to the spectrum analyzer input perform the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routine and then perform the confidence test again This message also sets SRQ 110 H and U EMPTY DLP MEM Indicates that the user defined items user defined functions user defined variables user defined traces user defined softkeys and any personalities for example the HP 85716A CATV System Monitor Personality in the spectrum analyzer memory have been deleted If the message is continuously displayed at power up it may indicate a hardware failure See the spectrum analyzer Service Guide for more information U Factory dlp not editable Indicates that the downloadable program or variable that you have selected is used by a personality and cannot be edited A personality is a program that is manufactured by Hewlett Packard and is available for use with the HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer An example of a personality is the HP 85716
406. ot updated as the spectrum analyzer sweeps If trace A is deactivated by pressing STORE BLANK A the stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW A Front Panel Key Access holds and displays the amplitude data that is in the trace B register The trace B register is not updated as the spectrum analyzer sweeps If trace B is deactivated by pressing STORE BLANK B the stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW B Front Panel Key Access holds and displays the amplitude data that is in the trace C register The trace C register is not updated as the spectrum analyzer sweeps If trace C is deactivated by pressing STORE BLANK C the stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW C Front Panel Key Access changes the amplitude units to volts Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE changes the amplitude units to W for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE changes the amplitude units to watts Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE HP 8591 E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E only turns off the windows display mode and returns to the normal full sized instrument display The state of the last active window will become the instrument state when the windows display is turned off Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS ION displays the output of the YTO extra fine tune DAC FM TUNE that is on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use onl
407. otation codes for trace trigger and sweep modes The WINDOWS display mode splits the screen into two separate displays Only one of these displays is active at a time The currently active window will have a solid line around the graticule rather than a broken line The complete annotation is not available for each window because of space limitations 2 10 Getting Started The display will be compressed slightly when using the PAL or NTSC format for the MONITOR OUTPUT instead of the normal format The PAL and NTSC formats have less vertical resolution than the spectrum analyzer display The top and bottom of the spectrum analyzer display are compressed slightly so that all of the information can be fit into the size required by the MONITOR OUTPUT Table 2 2 Screen Annotation Description 5 external keyboard entry Refer to External Keyboard in Chapter 5 marker readout MKR MKR gt MKR FCTN or measurement uncalibrated or AUTO COUPLE function in progress messages o _ ct 12 3 14 5 16 7 8 9 0 j amplitude correction factors on See Using Amplitude Correction Factors in Chapter 5 N 2 a do wm be Lo mle i N D 22 3 24 4 a gt o m a active function block Getting Started reference level time and date display service request See Appendix A remote operation See LOCAL in Chapter 7 frequency span or stop freque
408. ote The fuse container is attached to the line module it cannot be removed The fuse closest to the spectrum analyzer is the fuse in use If the fuse is defective or missing install a new fuse in the proper position and reinsert the fuse container 9008 HI EN PEDO Da 0000 0 SO E pul22el Figure 1 3 Checking the Line Fuse Preparing For Use 1 5 Power Cable The spectrum analyzer is equipped with a three wire power cable in accordance with international safety standards When connected to an appropriate power line outlet this cable grounds the instrument cabinet Warning Failure to ground the spectrum analyzer properly can result in personal injury Before turning on the spectrum analyzer you must connect its protective earth terminals to the protective conductor of the main power cable Insert the main power cable plug only into a socket outlet that has a protective earth contact DO NOT defeat the earth grounding protection by using an extension cable power cable or autotransformer without a protective ground conductor If you are using an autotransformer make sure its common terminal is connected to the protective earth contact of the power source outlet socket Various power cables are available to connect the spectrum analyzer to the types of ac power outlets unique to specific geographic areas The cable appropriate for the area to which the spectrum analyzer is o
409. outine between listing the peaks in order by descending amplitude or by ascending frequency Front Panel Key Access PEAK SEARCH displays a list of up to ten signal peaks that is updated at the end of each sweep The peaks can be sorted in order by descending amplitude or by ascending frequency Peaks above or below the display line can be excluded from the table The peak table function works with trace A only The peak table is not saved with the and keys Front Panel Key Access Option 041 or 043 only accesses the menu used to address the plotter and to select plotter options See the key for more information Front Panel Key Access Option 041 only changes the HP IB address of the plotter The plotter address is set to 5 when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 63 PLT _ LOC 2 PLT MENU ON OFF Pit Port Conf ig PLT PORT HPIB PAR PLT PORT SER PAR PLTS PG 124 PLT gt LJT ON OFF POINT Option 041 or 043 only selects the position of the plotter output The highlighted portion of the softkey label indicates where the plot is to be output on the page This softkey function appears only if two or four plots per page are selected when PLTS PG 1 2 4 is pressed Front Panel Key Access Option 041 or 043 only allows the softkey labels to be plotted along with the spectrum analyzer display This function operates when the key is used in a plot configuration The
410. outine depends on the accuracy of the absolute amplitude level of the spectrum analyzer the spectrum analyzer amplitude calibration should be done prior to using CAL TRK GEM 1 To calibrate the tracking generator connect the tracking generator output RF OUT 502 to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 connector using an appropriate cable and BNC to Type N adapters If the spectrum analyzer has Option 001 750 input use the 75Q calibration cable shipped with the analyzer Use only 75 connectors to avoid damage to the RF input connector Note A low loss cable should be used for accurate calibration Use the 500 cable shipped with the spectrum analyzer If the analyzer has Option 001 750 input use the 750 cable shipped with the spectrum analyzer 2 Press the following spectrum analyzer keys CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 then CAL TRK GEN TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND will be displayed if the tracking generator output is not connected to the spectrum analyzer input 3 To save this data in the area of spectrum analyzer memory that is saved when the spectrum analyzer is turned off press CAL STORE Preparing For Use 1 9 Performing the YTF Self Calibration Routine For preselected spectrum analyzers HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 8595E and HP 85963 only the yig tuned filter YTF self calibration routine should be performed periodically See When Is Self Calibration Needed in Chapter 2 for helpful guidelines on how often the se
411. ower extended 7 7 channel bandwidth 7 22 channel power 7 23 channel spacing 7 23 continuous sweep mode 7 27 occupied bandwidth 7 60 power bandwidth 7 59 turning off 7 55 power measurement setup 7 79 Power Menu 7 65 POWER ON IP LAST 7 65 power on state of spectrum analyzer 7 65 power requirements 1 4 preamplifier gain 7 42 preamplifiers 10 14 precision frequency reference Option 004 10 5 predetermined correction factors 7 31 prefix catalog of 7 20 clearing 7 23 entry 7 2 1 selection 7 77 prefix entry external keyboard 5 43 preparing memory card for use 5 11 preparing your spectrum analyzer for use PRESEL DAC 7 3 7 65 PRESEL DEFAULT 3 8 7 65 preselector default 7 65 preselector peak 3 8 7 65 PRESEL PEAK 3 8 7 65 PRESET 2 2 7 66 preset conditions common 7 66 for all models 7 68 model specific 7 66 PRESET SPECTRUM 7 66 print black and white 7 48 Print Config 7 69 printer 10 16 HP Paintjet 7 28 PRINTER ADDRESS 7 69 printer configuration 7 27 PRINTER SETUP 7 69 printing 7 28 7 30 HP PaintJet 7 61 printing HP IB address 6 4 centronics converter 6 4 deskjet 6 4 epson 6 4 laserjet 6 4 paintjet 6 4 thinkjet 6 4 printing parallel deskjet 6 18 epson 6 18 laserjet 6 18 paintjet 6 18 thinkjet 6 18 printing RS 232 baud rate 6 10 deskjet 6 10 epson 6 10 handshaking 6 10 laserjet 6 10 paintjet 6 10 parity 6 10 thinkjet 6
412. p of 401 horizontal points or trace elements In the analog display mode each trace element can display from 1 to 40 dots or measurements Pressing ANALOG ON OFF makes dot density the active function The dot density function sets the desired number of measurements per trace element Each dot requires an additional analog to digital conversion for each trace element so the sweep time can limit the actual number of dots available Lengthening the sweep time can increase the actual dot density Markers and marker functions as well as the screen text and title capabilities of a digital display are available along with the analog type trace information Some functions are not available with analog display mode See Table 7 1 for a list of functions that are not available with analog displays If a trace is blanked while using an analog display the data is permanently blanked and cannot be recalled even if you use the view function The copy function can be used to provide a printout of the display It must be configured to use a printer and not a plotter After using other functions press ANALOG ON OFF to return to the dot density function Limit lines can be used to test data in an analog display but they cannot be displayed Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Table 7 1 Commands Not Available with Analog Operation Command Description A lt gt B exchanges trace A and trace B A B A ON OFF puts the difference between trace A
413. pan Making Basic Measurements 3 9 5 The signal frequency drift can be read from the screen if both the marker track and marker delta functions are active Press MKR MARKER 4 MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF the marker readout indicates the change in frequency and amplitude as the signal drifts See Figure 3 9 MKR A TRAK 26 8 kHz REF 40 dBm ATTEN dB 05 d8 PEAK i LOG MARKER A dB 10 28 8 kHz CENTER 104 9275 MHz SPAN 500 0 kHz RESBW1 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SHP 3 0 msec Figure 3 9 Using Marker Tracking to Track an Unstable Signal The spectrum analyzer can measure the short and long term stability of a source The maximum amplitude level and the frequency drift of an input signal trace can be displayed and held by using the maximum hold function The minimum amplitude level can be displayed by using minimum hold available for trace C only You can use the maximum hold and minimum hold functions if for example you want to determine how much of the frequency spectrum an FM signal occupies Example Using the maximum hold and minimum hold functions monitor the envelopes of a signal 1 Connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input 2 Press PRESET FREQUENCY 100 MHz and SPAN 20 MHz 3 Press AMPLITUDE 40 dBm ATTEN AUTO MAN 0 dBm SPAN SPAN ZOOM 500 kHz Notice that the signal has been held in the center of
414. pan The spacing of the responses should not change They should be independent of frequency span m Change the video bandwidth If the video bandwidth is made narrower than the resolution bandwidth the displayed amplitude of the responses should decrease card reader See memory card channel power A measure of the total mean power contained within a specified bandwidth The measured power is the combination of all discrete signals modulation and noise within the bandwidth character set The set of elementary symbols These normally include both alpha and numeric codes plus punctuation or any other symbol which may be read stored or written and used for organization control or representation of data CISPR The acronym for the Comit International Special des Perturbations Radio electriques International Special Committee on Radio Interference or the International Commercial EMC Advisory Committee Glossary 2 clear write mode This is an analyzer function that clears the specified trace A B or C from the display then sweeps updates the trace each time trigger conditions are met When trigger conditions are met the new input signal data is displayed then cleared and the process begins again conducted emissions Unwanted signals coupled onto the power or signal lines by a particular device command A set of instructions that are translated into instrument actions The actions are usually made up of individual steps
415. pectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5062 6458 10 8 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories AM FM Demodulator with Speaker and TV Sync Trigger Circuitry Option 102 For HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E and HP 85963 only Option 102 enables you to use amplitude or frequency demodulation and to listen to a demodulated signal Option 102 also allows you to TV trigger on the selected line of a TV video picture frame if both Option 101 and 102 are installed The sweep triggering works with interlaced or noninterlaced displays for the NTSC PAL and SECAM formats Also see Option 301 below Option 102 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R02 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5062 6457 Quasi Peak Detector and AM FM Demodulator With Speaker Option 103 For HP 8591E HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 85953 and HP 8596E only Option 103 enables you to make automatic or manual quasi peak measurements to listen to a demodulated signal and to use amplitude or frequency demodulation Option 103 is available as a kit order HP 11946A Time Gated Spectrum Analysis Option 105 For HP 8591E HP 85933 HP 8594 HP 8595E and HP 8596E only Option 105 allows you to selectively measure the spectrum of signals that may overlap in the frequency domain but be separated in the time domain By adjusting a time gate based on a user supplied trigger signal you can significantly increase the d
416. pectrum analyzer functions refer to Chapter 7 Key Descriptions Making Measurements 4 1 Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function A Fourier transform transforms time domain data zero span into the frequency domain The fast Fourier transform FFT function of the spectrum analyzer allows measurements of amplitude modulation AM It is commonly used to measure AM at rates that cannot be measured in the normal frequency domain due to spectrum analyzer limitations on narrow resolution bandwidths For a given AM rate the FFT function can generate a trace faster than using the frequency domain for the equivalent spectrum analyzer measurement Note The fast ADC Option 101 extends FFT operation The standard spectrum analyzer has sweep times in zero span up to 20 ms and allows FFT stop frequencies from 20 Hz to 10 kHz With Option 101 spans of 20 us can be used and FFT stop frequencies up to 10 MHz are available The FFT function calculates the magnitude of each frequency component from a block of time domain samples of the input signal It uses a flat top filter response This implementation is a post detection Fourier transform and it cannot be used to resolve continuous wave or carrier signals When MEAS USER FFT Menu and SINGLE FFT are pressed sample detection mode is selected and a sweep is taken to obtain a sample of the input signal Then the spectrum analyzer executes a series of
417. ples to reference level m Center frequency step size couples to 10 of span During normal operation the sweep time resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth are coupled to yield optimum performance If any of these functions becomes uncoupled that is is manually set a will appear next to the screen annotation representing the function on the screen If one or more functions are manually set so that the amplitude or frequency becomes uncalibrated MEAS UNCAL appears on the right side of the graticule Recouple a single function by pressing the function label to activate the function and pressing the function again so that AUTO is underlined Pressing AUTO COUPLE AUTO ALL couples all coupled functions listed For Option 103 only executes a quasi peak routine See the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 Option 103 supplement documentation for more information Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used to control the auxiliary outputs and input The auxiliary outputs are controlled by pressing CNTL A 0 1 CNTLBO1 CNTLCO 1 andCNTLDO 1 The status of the auxiliary input control line I can be displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen with DISPLAY CNTL I Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used for control of the auxiliary interface connector For the HP 8592L HP 8593F and HP 8596E AUX CTRL also accesses the comb generator function For Option 102 or 103 AUX CTRL
418. plitude coordinate that starts the second segment Second segment Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts third segment Third segment Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts fourth segment Fourth segment 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts fifth segment Fifth segment Rh o reo Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts sixth segment 5 24 Using Analyzer Features Selecting the Frequency or Time Coordinate Press SELECT FREQ then enter a frequency value or press SELECT TIME and enter a time value for the segment Regardless of the table format a frequency time coordinate must be specified Note Limit line coordinates may be entered in terms of either frequency and amplitude or time and amplitude Press LIMITS FRQ TIME until the desired choice of either frequency or time has be selected underlined If TIME has been selected as the limit line parameter SELECT TIME will replace SELECT FREQ in the Edit Limit menus Selecting the Amplitude Coordinate In the previous procedure pressing SELECT AMPLITUD and then entering an amplitude value specified the amplitude coordinate for the upper limit line The limit line table formats dictate how the amplitude values are treated With the upper limit line table format one amplitude component representing an upper limit line segment is specified per frequency time component The amplitude value is entered by p
419. plitude correction tables SAVE AMP COR saves the current amplitude correction table in the current mass storage device spectrum analyzer memory or memory card To determine the current mass storage device press SAVE AMP COR If MAX REG appears on the spectrum analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press SAVE or RECALL INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device Press SAVE AMP COR enter a register number then press to save the current amplitude correction table in spectrum analyzer memory or on the memory card RECALL AMP COR recalls amplitude correction tables from the current mass storage device spectrum analyzer memory or memory card To determine the current mass storage device press RECALL AMP COR If MAX REG appears on the spectrum analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press or RECALL INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device When recalling an amplitude correction table from the memory card it is necessary that the current prefix match the prefix that the table was originally stored with Use Change Prefix to change the current prefix To recall an amplitude correction table enter the register number that the table was saved under then press ENTER Using Analyzer Features 5 39 Extern
420. portional to its bandwidth and if the proportionality constant k is included then we can make the rise time equal the k divided by resolution bandwidth Mathematically this is represented as resolution bandwidth _ resolution bandwidth x sweep time span sweep time span k resolution bandwidth Time in Passband Rise Time Solving for sweep time k x span resolution bandwidth sweep time time gate A time gate acts as a time filter rejecting signals and spectra not corresponding to the desired time It is an RF signal switch that admits the signal to the spectrum analyzer only while the switch or gate is closed Since the spectrum analyzer receives the signal only when passed through the gate it will only display the measurement results from the portion of the signal selected by the gate position in time title line The area on a display where user selected characters are displayed These characters are selected from the front panel keys TO1 Third order intermodulation distortion occurs in a system where two signals are present The distortion products are a result of each signal mixing with the other s second harmonic If the two main signals are of equal power the two third order distortion products will also be of equal power As the power of the two main signals is increased by an equal amount the power of the distortion products will increase three times that amount Theoretically there is a
421. power that the spectrum analyzer can tolerate appears on the front panel and should not be exceeded Excessive dc voltage can also damage the input attenuator For your particular instrument note the maximum dc voltage that should not be exceeded on the spectrum analyzer front panel beneath the INPUT 50 connector 13 14 15 PROBE PWR provides power for high impedance ac probes or other accessories CAL OUT provides a calibration signal of 300 MHz at 20 dBm 29 dBmV for Option 001 or 011 VOL INTEN or INTENSITY For the HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 8596E only The VOL INTEN knob changes the brightness of the display If Option 102 103 or 110 is installed it can also adjust the volume of the internal speaker If it adjusts both the inside part of the knob adjusts the intensity while the outside part adjusts the volume The INTENSITY knob changes the brightness of the display For the HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L only Getting Started 2 3 16 100 MHz COMB OUT supplies a 100 MHz reference signal that has harmonics up to 22 GHz For the HP 85921 HP 85935 or HP 8596E only 17 Memory card reader reads from or writes to a memory card The memory card reader is standard with an HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 It is also available for the HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L as Option 003 18 RF OUT 509 supplies a source output for the built in tracking generator For Option 010 only See
422. printers can be ordered with RS 232 or parallel interfaces to correspond to the interface option installed on the spectrum analyzer Rack Slide Kit This kit HP part number 1494 0060 provides the hardware to adapt rack mount kits Options 908 and 909 for mounting the spectrum analyzer on slides in an HP System II cabinet RS 232 Cable For use with O ption 043 The HP 245426 is a 9 pin f to 25 pin m RS 232 cable The HP 24542G cable can be used with HP plotters HP DeskJet printers HP LaserJet Series and PC printers with 25 pin f RS 232 connectors The LaserJet 4P and 4Plus require an HP C2932A 9 pin m to 9 pin f cable for RS 232 connection The modem cable required is HP 24542M 9 pin f to 25 pin m and the PC cable is HP 245428 Transit Case The transit case HP part number 9211 5604 provides extra protection for your spectrum analyzer for frequent travel situations The HP transit case protects your instrument from hostile environments shock vibration moisture and impact while providing a secure enclosure for shipping 10 1 6 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories SRQ Service Requests This appendix describes the spectrum analyzer service request SRQ capability A service request is a spectrum analyzer output that tells the operator or computer that a specific event has taken place in the spectrum analyzer When writing programs service requests can be used to interrupt the computer program
423. prove Sensitivity Adjusting the resolution bandwidth may result in a decrease in amplitude of the signal This is known as a tracking error Tracking errors occur when the tracking generator s output frequency is not exactly matched to the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer Tracking errors are most notable when using narrow resolution bandwidths Tracking error can be compensated manually or automatically In narrow bandwidths the manual method of adjusting the tracking is usually faster than the automatic tracking adjustment To compensate for the tracking error manually press AUX CTRL Track Gen and MAN TRK ADJUST then use the knob to adjust the trace for the highest amplitude To compensate for the tracking error automatically press AUX CTRL Track Gen then TRACKING PEAK REF 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB PEAK LOG 10 T dB SAC TRACK ADJ 6183 WA SB SC FC i oe Le CORA CENTER 443 6 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 5 0 msec Figure 4 8 Manual Tracking Adjustment Compensates for Tracking Error 4 10 Making Measurements Note If the automatic tracking routine is activated in a narrow resolution bandwidth it usually is not necessary to use the tracking adjust again when increasing the resolution bandwidth 7 To make a transmission measurement accurately the frequency response of the test system must be known To measure th
424. provides a 500 to 750 matching pad with de block to be used on the spectrum analyzer input The pad has a frequency range of 1 MHz to 1 8 GHz It adapts your standard 500 spectrum analyzer to be compatible with a 753 system under test Option 711 is also available as HP part number 08590 60090 Reduced Frequency Accuracy Option 713 For HP 8590L only Option 713 removes the built in frequency counter from your spectrum analyzer This reduces the frequency accuracy of your measurements Rack Mount Kit Without Handles Option 908 This option provides the parts necessary to mount the spectrum analyzer in an HP System II cabinet or in a standard 19 inch 482 6 mm equipment rack Option 908 is also available as a kit HP part number 5062 4841 Rack Mount Kit With Handles Option 909 Option 909 is the same as Option 908 but includes front handles for added convenience Option 909 is also available as a kit HP part number 5062 4840 User s Guide and Calibration Guide Option 910 An additional copy of the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers User s Guide the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Series Spectrum Analyzers Quick Reference Guide and the Calibration Guide of the appropriate model number for your spectrum analyzer are available as a set under Option 910 Service Documentation Option 9 15 Option 915 provides one copy of the assembly level repair service guide and one copy of the component level repair s
425. pson compatible printers only when SML is underlined Press this key so PRNT is underlined Press this key to copy the spectrum analyzer display to the printer Plotting Using an HP IB Interface Equipment m HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer with Option 041 m HP 10833A or equivalent HP IB cable Any of the following plotters a HP 7440A ColorPro plotter with HP IB a HP 7475A plotter with HP IB a HP 7550A B plotter with HP IB Interconnection and Plotting Instructions More than one instrument can communicate on the same HP IB Therefore each device must have a unique HP IB address This means that both a printer and a plotter can be connected to the spectrum analyzer at the same time using two or more HP IB cables The plotter must be configured with an address which can be recognized by the spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer will not print if it senses another controller on the HP IB Therefore other controllers such as computers must be disabled In most cases it is sufficient to simply turn the other controllers OFF 1 Turn off the plotter and the spectrum analyzer 2 Connect the plotter to the spectrum analyzer using the HP IB cable 3 Figure 6 6 shows an example of a typical plotter s switch setting ADDRESS 5 vul3tel Figure 6 6 HP 7475A Plotter Switch Settings Printing and Plotting 6 7 PLTS PG 124 Re To LUGG PLT gt LJT ON OFF Pit Port Config PLT MENU O
426. pter 7 for more information on a specific function key 10 04 03 MAR a EXTE4 NAL KEYBOARD f NPUT AT Ap SCREEN TITLE REF 10 0 dBm 2 0 dBPGO 0 dB ee CENTER SMPL FREO P o5 4 aes START oe 5 TONG FREQ dB EL SRA 110 OR C 5 0 FREQ _ dBm g J AVG E 100 CF STEP t AUTO MAN WA SB E Esc FS g FREQ Oye ieee TH 3 C9 70 0 S dem PT aaa a eae BAND E LOCK CENTER 399 9 MHz OFFST 100 0 MHz SPAN 200 0 MHz RES BW 1 MHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 msec PL 15 pul7de Figure 2 4 Screen Annotation In Figure 2 4 item 21 refers to the trigger and sweep modes of the spectrum analyzer The first letter F indicates the spectrum analyzer is in free run trigger mode The second letter S indicates the spectrum analyzer is in single sweep mode Item 22 refers to the trace modes of the spectrum analyzer The first letter W indicates that the spectrum analyzer is in clear write mode The second letter is A representing trace A The trace B trace mode is SB indicating trace B B is in the store blank mode S The trace mode annotation for trace C is displayed under the trace mode annotation of trace A In Figure 2 4 the trace C trace mode is SC indicating trace C C is in the store blank mode S Refer to Table 2 3 for the screen ann
427. r O ption 301 only EVEN FLD selects an even video field of an interlaced video format to trigger on Front Panel Key Access TRIG TV TRIG O ptions 101 and 102 or Option 301 only ODD FLD selects an odd video field of an interlaced video format to trigger on Front Panel Key Access TRIG TV TRIG Options 101 and 102 or Option 301 only VERT INT selects a vertical interval to trigger on Triggering occurs on the next pulse edge If it triggers on an even field triggering will not alternate between odd and even fields If it triggers on an odd field triggering will alternate between odd and even fields The vertical interval is used for non interlaced video formats Front Panel Key Access UPDATE Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended TIMEFREQ switches between the time domain and frequency domain windows in the gate utility The window is updated to reflect the current state when it is activated The WINDOWS key will also switch between the windows Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 89 User Menus VBW RBW RATIO VERIFY TIMEBASE accesses a menu available for your use for user defined programs and key functions Front Panel Key Access changes the amplitude units to V for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE selects the ratio between the video and resolution bandwidths If signal responses near the noise level are visually masked by the noise the ratio can be set to les
428. r from a computer that uses a Hewlett Packard interface bus HP IB Such computers include the HP 9000 Series 300 and the IIP Vectra PC Option 041 includes a connector for an external keyboard an HP IB connector a parallel interface connector for printers and the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide Option 041 allows the spectrum analyzer to copy its screen to a printer or plotter and includes a separate connector that accepts programming commands from an external keyboard Option 041 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R41 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 08590 60380 10 6 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories Note Option 041 can be converted to an Option 043 by ordering the RS 232 and parallel interface connector assembly HP part number 08590 60369 RS 232 and Parallel Interface Option 043 Option 043 allows you to control your spectrum analyzer from a computer that uses an RS 232 interface bus Such computers include the HP Vectra PC the IBM PC the AT and compatibles It includes a connector for an external keyboard an RS 232 9 pin connector a parallel interface connector for printers and the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide Option 043 allows the spectrum analyzer to copy its screen to a printer or plotter and includes a separate
429. rcent Amplitude Modulation Measurement Example Use the AM function to make a measurement 1 Press PRESET Connect a signal with amplitude modulation to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 2 Press FREQUENCY and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 3 Press SPAN Change the span until only the signal and its two sidebands appear on the display 4 Press and AM ON OFF ON to activate the percent amplitude modulation function 4 40 Making Measurements 5 Read the measurement results in the upper left corner of the screen 6 Press 4 AM ON OFF OFF to turn the measurement off Third Order Intermodulation Measurement TOI Use the TO1 one button measurement to make quick and easy intermodulation measurements of microwave spectrum analyzers mixers or converters When the TO1 measurement is turned on there must be four signals on the display two test signals and their two associated distortion products All of the signals must have peaks greater than the peak excursion value The default value for the peak excursion is 6 dB The two highest amplitude signals are assumed to be the test signals for the third order intercept measurement The spectrum analyzer computes and displays the third order intercept TOI of the displayed signals marking all four signals with arrows to confirm the correct signal selection The measurement updates at the end of every
430. red Amplitude correction data is sorted in the table by frequency The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front panel Front Panel Key Access CAL or allows you to enter the amplitude value for the lower limit line segment Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequency or time by using the knob or data keys Press to correct errors Front Panel Key Access allows you to enter the middle amplitude value The middle amplitude value and the delta amplitude value create upper and lower limit line segments Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequency or time by using the knob or data keys Press to correct errors Front Panel Key Access allows you to create or edit an amplitude correction factor data point Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the data keys then press ENTER Press BK SP to correct errors Front Panel Key Access CAL allows you to select an already existing prefix of a cataloged file and changes the current prefix to this selected prefix This provides a convenient method for saving and recalling data to and from the memory card and for cataloging by the prefix Use either the knob or step keys to select the file Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE allows you to create or edit a limit line segment Limit lines are created by entering frequency or time and amplitude values into a limit line table The frequency or time and
431. reen displays the firmware revision date in the YYMMDD format For example 930522 indicates May 22 1993 This is a change from previous revisions where any firmware date used the DDMMYY format prior to 930506 Note Record the firmware date and keep it for reference If you should ever need to call Hewlett Packard for service or with any questions regarding your spectrum analyzer it will be helpful to have the firmware date readily available If your spectrum analyzer is equipped with Option 021 HP IB interface the appropriate interface address HP IB ADRS XX also appears on the screen If your spectrum analyzer is equipped with Option 023 RS 232 interface the baud rate RS232 XXXX is displayed 4 To meet spectrum analyzer specifications allow a 30 minute warm up before attempting to make any calibrated measurements Be sure to calibrate the spectrum analyzer only after the spectrum analyzer has met the operating temperature conditions 5 Connect the type N m to BNC f connector shipped with the spectrum analyzer to the INPUT 500 Connect the 500 coaxial cable also shipped with the instrument between the front panel CAL OUT and the INPUT 500 connector If the spectrum analyzer has Option 1 8 Preparing For Use 001 750 input use the 750 calibration cable shipped with the analyzer Use only 750 connectors to avoid damage to the RF input connector Note Option 105 only Remove all connections to the GATE TRIGG
432. rements of frequency power return loss VSWR and reflection transmission coefficients are quick and easy The scalar measurement personality also includes simple one button measurements for 3 dB or 6 dB bandwidth Q factor shape factor and insertion loss gain 10 4 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories Options Options can be ordered by option number when you order the spectrum analyzer Some of the options are also available as kits that can be ordered and installed after you have received your spectrum analyzer The options are listed numerically by their option number 750 Input Impedance Option 001 For HP 8590L and HP 85913 only This option provides a 753 input impedance instead of the standard 500 impedance Spectrum analyzers with this option use cables circuit boards and front panels that are different from the standard units Memory Card Reader Option 003 For HP 85901 HP 8592L and HP 8594L only This option provides a memory card reader to save and recall data from a memory card Spectrum analyzers with this option have an opening on the front panel to insert the memory card Option 003 includes a 32 Kbyte memory card and a memory card holder The memory card reader is standard for the HP 85913 HP 8593E HP 85943 HP 85953 and HP 85963 Option 003 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R03 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5062 6456 Precision Frequency
433. requency domain window which is the lower window The spectrum selected with the current gate position can now be viewed in the frequency domain window Press Main Menu 12 The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and sweep time are not optimized so the frequency display may not look correct There may be signal dropouts or poor frequency resolution This can be corrected by entering the pulse parameters and turning on the coupling The gate utility can optimize the setting of resolution bandwidth if the user enters the value of the pulse width and turns on the coupling The video bandwidth will be optimized if the gate length is entered and coupled The sweep time is optimized when the pulse repetition interval is entered and coupled Press Define Coupling Then press Pulse Param to enter the pulse parameters This activates the time domain window and turns off the time gate If pulse parameters have previously been entered the values will be displayed 13 Use the ENTER REF EDGE ENTER WIDTH and ENTER PRI softkeys to enter the pulse parameters These parameter entry tools allow pulse parameters to be entered using a marker or through the keypad Press Previous Menu to return to the coupling menu 14 Press CPL RBW ON OFF ON to turn on the resolution bandwidth coupling Press CPL VBW ON OFF ON and CPL SWP ON OFF ON to turn on the video bandwidth and sweep time coupling 15 Press Main Menu and look at the signal in the time
434. ressing SELECT AMPLITUD entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key With the lower limit line table format one amplitude component representing a lower limit line segment is specified per frequency time component The amplitude value is entered by pressing SELECT AMPLITUD entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key With the upper lower limit line table format two amplitude components one each for the upper and lower limit line segments can be specified per frequency or time component It is not necessary to specify both an upper and a lower amplitude value Specifying only upper amplitude values results in an upper limit line but not a lower limit line Omitting an amplitude point on one limit line does not affect the other limit line The amplitude of the upper limit line is entered by pressing SELECT UPR AMPL entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key The amplitude of the lower limit line is entered by pressing SELECT LWR AMPL entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key m With the mid delta limit line table format two amplitude components one representing a mid amplitude value one representing a deviation positive and negative values from either side of this value is specified per frequency component If no deviation is entered the deviation defaults to zero The middle amplitude value is entered by pressing SELECT MID AMPL entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key
435. resulting from conversion before demodulation IF gain IF attenuation A control that adjusts the vertical position of displayed signals without affecting the signal level at the input mixer When changed the value of the reference level is changed accordingly IF feedthrough A condition that results in a rise in amplitude of the baseline trace This occurs as a result of an input signal at the intermediate frequency IF passing through the input mixer This a usually only a potential problem on nonpreselected spectrum analyzers The entire baseline trace rises because the signal is always at the IF Mixing with the local oscillator is not required image response A displayed signal that is actually twice the intermediate frequency IF away from the frequency indicated by the spectrum analyzer For each harmonic of the local oscillator there is an image pair One is below the local oscillator frequency by the IF and the other is above Images usually only appear on nonpreselected spectrum analyzers impedance The apparent opposition in an electrical path to the flow of current The specified nominal input impedance of a spectrum analyzer is stated for the input connector The most common impedance for RF and microwave spectrum analyzers is 500 However 750 is typically used for cable television CATV work impulse bandwidth The width of a rectangular filter that has the same peak voltage output as the actual analyzer filter The impulse
436. riginally shipped is included with the unit You can order additional ac power cables for use in different areas Table 1 3 lists the available ac power cables illustrates the plug configurations and identifies the geographic area in which each cable is appropriate 1 6 Preparing For Use Table 1 3 AC Power Cables Available A y CABLE PLUG CABLE CABLE FOR USE PLUG TYPE HP PART DESCRIPTION LENGTH COLOR LN COUNTR Y NUMBER ZM INCHES ae 8120 1351 Straight BS1363A 229 90 Mint Gray Great Britain D 8120 1703 90 229 90 Mint Gray Cyprus Nigeria E en Singapore L N Zimbabwe E Argentina 250V 8120 1369 Straight NZSS198 ASC112 201 79 Gray ers e T3 2120 0696 90 ABR Gray NewZ en land E MainiandC hina gt S 2 i N 250V 8120 1689 Straight CEE7 Y11 201 79 MintGray East and West 8120 1692 90 201 79 ea o Central African Republic OE O United Arab N L Republic x unpolarized in many nat ions 8120 1348 Straight NEMAS 15P 203 80 Black Un He de States 8120 1538 90 203 80 Block cangoa Japan 100 V or 8120 1378 Straight NEMAS 15P 203 80 Jadegray Z 9 0 V Brozil Jade Gra Colombia Mexica 8 120 4753 Straight 230 90 Y Phillipines 8120 1521 90 203 80 Jade Gray Saudia Arabia 8120 4754 90 230 90 Jade Gray faiwan 250v p 8120 5182 Straight NEMA5 15P 200 78 Jade Gray Israel 8120 5181 30 200 78 Jade Gray
437. ritten into the program software Front panel key selections determine which menu set of softkeys appears on the display span Span equals the stop frequency minus the start frequency The span setting determines the horizontal axis scale of the spectrum analyzer display Glossary 14 span accuracy The uncertainty of the indicated frequency separation of any two signals on the display spectral purity See noise sidebands spectral component One of the sine waves comprising a spectrum spectrum An array of sine waves differing in frequency and amplitude They are properly related with respect to phase and taken as a whole constitute a particular time domain signal spectrum analyzer A device that effectively performs a Fourier transform and displays the individual spectral components sine waves that constitute a time domain signal spurious response The undesired responses that appear on a spectrum analyzer display as a result of the input signal Internally generated distortion products are spurious responses as are image and multiple responses These can be either harmonic responses or nonharmonic responses Harmonic responses are second third fourth and so on harmonics of the input signal Nonharmonic responses are intermodulation and residual responses state register The area of user memory in the analyzer where measurement results and associated analyzer settings are stored step The increment of change that re
438. rker if ACCEPT QP DATA was pressed and returns to the previous quasi peak softkey menu See the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 Option 103 supplement documentation for more information Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL provides additional characters for the Change Title function Pressing RPG TITLE provides lowercase letters numbers Greek letters and punctuation symbols When RPG TITLE is pressed a character table appears on the screen To select a character turn the knob to position the cursor under the desired character and press the ENTER key The step keys move the cursor between rows When all characters have been entered press WINDOWS NEXT or for an HP 8590L or HP 8592L press HOLD All other spectrum analyzer functions are unaccessible until the NEXT or key is pressed Front Panel Key Access CAL or locks all the current internal state and trace registers against further data storage when ON is underlined With the state and trace memory locked the STATE gt INTRNL and Trace Intrnl softkey functions are no longer accessible the MEM LOCKED softkey function is displayed instead Pressing DEFAULT CONFIG or sets SAV LOCK ON OFF to OFF Note When SAV LOCK ON OFF is set to ON none of the state registers 1 8 can be overwritten The spectrum analyzer automatically updates state register nine with the last state ERASE MEM ALL ignores the state of the SAV LOCK So even if STATES a
439. rnal directional bridges offer high directivity and excellent port match The HP 86205A operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 6 GHz The HP 86207A operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories 10 13 AC Power Source The HP 85901A provides 200 watts of continuous power for field and mobile application The self contained ac power source has outputs for either 115 V or 230 V and runs on its own internal battery an external battery or on another 12 V dc source Typical operating time exceeds 1 hour for 100 watt continuous use at room temperature AC Probe The HP 85024A high frequency probe performs in circuit measurements without adversely loading the circuit under test The probe has an input capacitance of 0 7 pF shunted by 1 MQ of resistance and operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz High probe sensitivity and low distortion levels allow measurements to be made while taking advantage of the full dynamic range of the spectrum analyzer Caution Do not use dc coupled probes on HP 8592L and HP 85933 analyzers they may cause damage to the spectrum analyzer input circuit When using a dce coupled probe with an HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 the spectrum analyzer must be set to ac coupling To set the analyzer to ac coupling press AMPLITUDE More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3 COUPLE AC DC so that AC is underlined Broadband Preamplifiers and Power Amplifiers Pr
440. s 6 18 Printing and Plotting er DEV PRNT PLT i B amp W Printer se f B amp W PRINTER PAINTJET PRINTER H ot Config E Colr Printer P B amp W 04540 DESKJET 310 550C More 1 of 3 Previous Menu Previous Menu Previous Menu CONFIG Print Config Pra Port Config EP MX80 SML LRG DESKJET5 40 Time Date E MENU ON OFF EP LO570 SML LRG Y Chonge Prefix ES SETUP pu 130e Figure 6 14 Printer Configuration Menu Map 5 To print with a parallel interface press the following keys Print Config Pm Port Conf ig PRN PORT HPIB PAR PRN PORT SER PAR Press this key to access the configuration menu Press this key to access the printer menu Press this key to access the printer configuration menu for Option 041 so that PAR is underlined for Option 043 so that PAR is underlined 6 Select the printer configuration for your spectrum analyzer by pressing the appropriate keys Print Config Pm Port Config PRINTER SETUP Set Colr Printer Set B amp W Printer HP B amp W PRINTER HP B amp W DJ540 Press this key to bring up the configuration menu Press this key to access the printer menu Press this key to access the printer configuration menu Press this key to send a PRINTER RESET command to the printer This will cause a form feed if any data has been sent to the printer since the last form feed Press this key to print in color if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard color printer then select the
441. s The separation between the two signals must be greater than half the filter width of the larger signal at the amplitude level of the smaller signal Example Resolve two input signals with a frequency separation of 200 kHz and an amplitude separation of 60 dB 1 To obtain two signals with a 200 kHz separation connect the equipment as shown in the previous section Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function 2 Set the center frequency to 300 MHz and the span to 2 MHz press 300 MHz then SPAN 2 ME Note When using an HP 8590L with Option 713 or an HP 8592L with Option 713 and the signal peak cannot be found increase the span to 20 MHz by pressing 20 MHz The signal should be visible Press PEAK_SEARCH MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF so that ON is underlined Then SPAN 2 to bring the signal to center screen Then press MK TRACK ON OFF to OFF to turn the marker track function off 3 4 Making Basic Measurements 3 Set the source to 300 2 MHz so that the signal is 200 kHz higher than the calibration signal Set the amplitude of the signal to 80 dBm 60 dB below the calibration signal 4 Set the 300 MHz signal to the reference level by pressing PEAK SEARCH MKR gt then MARKER gt REF LVL If a 10 kHz filter with a typical shape factor of 15 1 is used the filter will have a bandwidth of 150 kHz at the 60 dB point The half bandwidth 75 kHz is narrower than th
442. s PRI is equivalent to 1 PRF where PRF is the pulse repetition frequency Pulse repetition interval PRI of signal 2 Pulse width 7 of signal 1 Pulse width is also referred to as 7 tau Pulse width 7 of signal 2 Signal delay of signal 2 Notice that the signal delay is zero for signal 1 ption 105 The trigger input coincides with signal 1 Making Measurements 4 25 Use the guidelines in Table 4 1 when using Option 105 to view a pulsed RF signal These are only guidelines and the spectrum analyzer settings can be changed if necessary Spectrum Analyzer Function Sweep Time Gate Delay Gate Length Video Bandwidth Resolution Bandwidth Table 4 1 Determining Spectrum Analyzer Settings for Viewing a Pulsed RF Signal Spectrum Analyzer Setting Set the sweep time to be 401 times greater than the pulse repetition interval PRI Sweep time gt 401 x PRI The gate delay is equal to the signal delay plus half of the pulse width Gate Delay Signal Delay r 2 The gate length is equal to one fourth the pulse width Gate Length r 4 Set the video bandwidth to a value greater than 1 divided by the gate length Video Bandwidth gt g Set the resolution bandwidth to a value greater than 2 divided by the gate delay minus the signal delay Resolution Bandwidth gt Gate Delay Signal Delay Example of a Time Gated Pulsed RF Signal The measurement procedures in this section explain
443. s of minimum resolution bandwidth and minimum input attenuation DLP The abbreviation for downloadable program A single programming command or a sequence of programming commands used to perform specific operations DLPs can be made up of several functions variables and traces defined by the program creator The DLP can be downloaded from one electronic storage medium into another and executed without a controller drift The slow relative to sweep time change of signal position on the display as a result of a change in local oscillator frequency versus sweep voltage While analyzer drift may require periodic retuning it does not impair frequency resolution dynamic range The power ratio dB between the smallest and largest signals simultaneously present at the input of an analyzer that can be measured with some degree of accuracy Dynamic range generally refers to measurement of distortion or intermodulation products Glossary 4 EM1 The abbreviation for electromagnetic interference An EM1 measurement determines how much an undesired electromagnetic disturbance impairs the reception of a desired electromagnetic signal envelope detector A detector circuit whose output follows the envelope but not the instantaneous variation of its input signal This detector is sometimes called a peak detector In superheterodyne spectrum analyzers the input to the envelope detector comes from the final IF and the output is a video signal When we
444. s and turn them on and off Markers are diamond shaped characters that identify points of traces and allow the traces to be manipulated and controlled on the screen During manual operation four markers may appear on the display simultaneously only one can be controlled at a time The marker that is controlled is called the active marker Pressing activates the MARKER NORMAL softkey read marker to accesses the softkeys used for the transfer of marker information directly into other functions accesses the marker function softkeys These softkeys can be used to access the marker table and to turn on marker functions for tracking the signal and counting its frequency Noise markers and the marker pause function are also accessed under MKR FCTN accesses the softkey menu for selecting screen title or prefix characters M through R Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE changes the softkey menus for the spectrum analyzer mode and other modes of operation when SPECTRUM ANALYZER located under PRESET and PRESET SPECTRUM are selected respectively Other modes are available using the downloadable measurement personalities The HP 8571 1A cable television measurements personality the HP 85712D EMI diagnostics measurements personality and the HP 85713A digital radio measurements personality are examples of some of these modes Others are described in Measurement Personalities Options and
445. s are present in many different applications A few of the applications are listed below Digital cellular communication systems require measurements on pulse modulated TDMA signals Measurements must be accurately aligned with the time division multiple access TDMA burst of the communication carrier The time gate can position spectrum analyzer measurement to assess TDMA burst timing and the quality of the burst modulation Rotating head devices such as VCRs and hard disks have time interleaved signals multiplexed from alternate recording tracks on the storage media The time gate can isolate the spectrum due to a single recording track Tests required for mobile communication systems often require that the transient spectrum due to pulse modulation be excluded from measurement results Example Measure a Pulsed RF signal 1 The rear panel GATE OUTPUT must be connected to EXT TRIG INPUT 2 A TTL trigger signal must be connected to GATE TRIGGER INPUT on the rear panel If no trigger is present an error message is displayed and the gate utility will not be activated 3 Press PRESET Connect a pulsed RF signal to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 503 4 Press FREQUENCY and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 5 Press AMPLITUDE and MARKER REF LVL to bring the signal to the top of the display 6 Access the gate utility by pressing SWEEP Gate Control
446. s given as the total span across the full display Some analyzers represent frequency span scan width as a per division value frequency stability The stability of a frequency component to remain unchanged in frequency or amplitude over short and long term periods of time Stability refers to the local oscillator s ability to remain fixed at a particular frequency over time The sweep ramp that tunes the local oscillator influences where a signal appears on the display Any long term variation in local oscillator frequency drift with respect to the sweep ramp causes a signal to shift its horizontal position on the display slowly Shorter term local oscillator instability can appear as random FM or phase noise on an otherwise stable signal front panel key Keys typically labeled and located on the front panel of an instrument The key labels identify the function the key activities Numeric keys and step keys are two examples of front panel keys full span A mode of operation in which the spectrum analyzer scans the entire frequency band of an analyzer function The action or purpose which a specific item is intended to perform or serve The spectrum analyzer contains functions that can be executed via front panel key selections or through programming commands The characteristics of these functions are determined by the firmware in the instrument In some cases a DLP downloadable program execution of a function allows you to execute
447. s recalled unless IP has been set by the POWER ON function Table 7 10 Model Specific Preset Conditions Model Center Start stop Sweep Frequency o Frequency Time HP 85901 900 MHz 1 8 GHz 1 8GHz 20 ms auto coupled HP 8591H 900 MHz 1 8GHz 1 8GHz 20 ms auto coupled HP 8592L 12 38 GHz 19 25 GHz 22 GHz 385 ms full span auto coupled HP 85933 12 38 GHz 19 25 GHz 2 22 GHz 385 ms full span auto coupled HP 85943 1 450 GHz 2 9 GHz 2 9 GHz 58 ms auto coupled HP 8594L 1 450 GHz 2 9 GHz 2 9 GHz 58 ms auto coupled HP 85953 3 25GHz 6 5 GHz 6 5 GHz 130 ms auto coupled HP 85963 6 4 GHz 12 8GHz 12 8 GHz 256 ms auto coupled PRESET allows the spectrum analyzer mode only to be preset Table 7 12 lists the SPECTRUM conditions affected by the PRESET SPECTRUM function Other operating modes will not be affected See the description of the key In addition pressing PRESET SPECTRUM erases user generated graphics and blanks the active function block that is on the spectrum analyzer screen Pressing PRESET SPECTRUM disposes of ONEOS ONSWP and TRMATH These are remote programming commands see the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information Front Panel Key Access MODE or PRESET 7 66 Key Descriptions Table 7 11 Common Preset Conditions A B A Amplitude correction factors Amplitude units Annotation and graticule display
448. s saved The intensity of some screen items may differ if the current spectrum analyzer state does not match the state of the recalled image This will not affect the spectrum analyzer ability to output a copy of the screen It is possible to have more functionality than just viewing and copying a recalled display image For example you can set the spectrum analyzer to the identical window configuration as when the display was saved Then recall the trace that corresponds to the display image This will restore the trace and state information Finally you can recall the display image At this point markers and display line can be used to examine the data If an attempt is made to update the trace data the display will be erased and redrawn to reflect the current instrument state Pressing LOAD FILE is an alternate way to load display image from the memory card into spectrum analyzer memory See Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 5 for more information Front Panel Key Access Requires Option 003 for an HP 85901 HP 85921 or HP 8594L recalls into the spectrum analyzer memory a downloadable program DLP saved on the memory card Before recalling data that was saved under a prefix other than the current prefix change the current prefix to the prefix used when the data was saved Pressing LOAD FILE is an alternate way to load program data from the memory card into spectrum analyzer memory See Saving and Reca
449. s than 1 to smooth this noise The knob and step keys change the ratio in a 1 3 10 sequence Pressing and AUTO ALL sets the ratio to 0 300 X The ratio can be changed using the step keys or the knob Front Panel Key Access All E Series and L Series spectrum analyzers except HP 8590L with Option 713 allows the time base digital to analog converter to be changed to verify that the 10 Mhz reference time base performs to specification Pressing resets the time base to its original value A pass code is required to access this function Note The VERIFY TIMEBASE softkey function is not available for the HP 8592L or spectrum analyzers with Option 004 VID AVG ON OFF VID BW AUTO MAN Front Panel Key Access initiates a digital averaging routine that averages displayed signals and noise This function does not affect the sweep time bandwidth or other analog characteristics of the spectrum analyzer Annotation on the left side of the screen indicates the current number of sweeps averaged The default number of sweeps is 100 Increasing the number of sweeps smoothes the trace To turn off the video averaging function press VID AVG ON OFF so that OFF is underlined The number of sweeps can be entered using the numeric keypad Front Panel Key Access BW TRACE or MEAS USER changes the spectrum analyzer post detection filter from 30 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence For Option 130 only Option 130 provides additional narrow
450. s the cataloging functions used to catalog the saved data that is in spectrum analyzer memory or on the memory card It also accesses the DLP editor utility 7 72 Key Descriptions RECALL AMP COR RECALL LIMIT REF LVL REF LVL OFFSET recalls an amplitude correction factors table from the current mass storage device spectrum analyzer memory or memory card To verify the current mass storage device press RECALL AMP COR If MAX REG appears on the spectrum analyzer display the current mass storage device is spectrum analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press or RECALL then INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device To recall an amplitude correction factors table enter the register number that the table was previously saved under then press ENTER When recalling an amplitude correction factors table from the memory card it may be necessary to change the current prefix to the prefix with which the table was stored Press Change Prefix to change the current prefix When saved in spectrum analyzer memory the register number is restricted to the range between O and the number x indicated by MAX REG x The screen title is not recalled with the amplitude correction factors table Front Panel Key Access recalls limit line tables from the current mass storage device spectrum analyzer memory or memory card To verify the current mass storage device press RECALL LIMI
451. s updated The upper window must be activated by pressing WINDOWS to update the trace data 3 Press ZONE PK RIGHT The spectrum analyzer identifies the first signal to the right of the zone and moves the zone so that it is centered around the new signal 4 Press ZONE SPAN and use the knob step keys or the data entry keys to change the zone span to include two signals If the lower window is active you will notice that the span changes corresponding to the changes in the zone marked on the upper window If the lower window is not active press WINDOWS NEXT to make it active Using Analyzer Features 5 33 5 Press ZONE PK RIGHT and ZONE PK LEFT and observe the movement of the zone and the changes in the lower window 6 Press WINDOWS Zoom Now a full sized display of the lower window will be displayed Notice the increase in the displayed annotation 7 Pressing WINDOWS activates the upper window A full sized display of it will be shown and the inactive lower window will not be displayed Press WINDOWS NEXT again to activate the lower window and display it again Notice that the zone markers can be used to tell which window is active and being displayed while in the zoom state 8 Press WINDOWS Z00M to return to the dual windows display The lower window will still be active 9 Press WINDOWS OFF and the spectrum analyzer returns to normal operation with the active window as the spectrum analyzer state 10 Pressing WIND
452. saved data that has the specified prefix that is either on the PREFIX memory card or in spectrum analyzer memory The entire prefix does not have to be specified For example if you want to catalog all the files beginning with the prefix S specify S as the prefix and then use CATALOG PREFIX Prefixed items can be saved in spectrum analyzer memory by either loading in from a memory card or using remote programming commands to define them Front Panel Key Access or 7 20 Key Descriptions CATALOG REGISTER displays the status of state and trace registers in spectrum analyzer memory States 1 through 8 are displayed with the center frequency denoted by CF and span denoted by SP The status of trace registers O to the maximum number of traces is displayed also If a trace limit line tables or amplitude correction factors have been saved in the trace register the screen title denoted by TL is displayed otherwise UNUSED is displayed If the screen title length allows or if no title is saved with the trace the time and date are displayed To load the contents of the state or trace register into spectrum analyzer memory use the knob or step keys to select the register and press LOAD FILE The DELETE FILE key can be used to delete a state or trace register from spectrum analyzer memory Note Do not use LOAD FILE to load the contents of a trace register containing limit line tables or amplitude correction factors CA
453. sec Figure 4 37 Occupied Bandwidth If you want to change the percent power value press the OCC BW POWER key and use the knob or the data entry keys to change the calculated percent power Press Previous Menu Press MEAS OFF to turn the measurement off and exit the power menu or press another measurement key to stop the current measurement and start a new measurement Note If the power menus have been exited without turning the power measurement off by pressing another front panel key press the key twice to return to the last power menu used 4 44 Making Measurements Adjacent Channel Power Ratio ACP The leakage of a transmitter into adjacent channels can be measured quickly and easily Enter the channel spacing and channel bandwidth and activate the adjacent channel power measurement The spectrum analyzer computes and displays the ACP ratio of both the lower and upper adjacent channels marking the higher of the two The absolute carrier power is read out and vertical lines on the display mark the channel bandwidth edges Selecting ACPGRAPH ON OFF ON computes a graph showing the adjacent channel power ratio for the selected channel as a function of channel spacing and disables the numerical adjacent channel power display Normally the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters are set automatically Parameter setting can be changed from automatic to manual control using PARAM AUTO MAN The following conditions
454. sed as a visual reference line The line which can be used for trace arithmetic has amplitude values that correspond to its vertical position when compared to the reference level The value of the display line appears in the active function block and on the left side of the screen The display line can be adjusted using the step keys knob or numeric keypad Pressing any digit O through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu To deactivate the display line press DSP LINE ON OFF so that OFF is underlined Also see the VIDEO softkey description Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY MKR FCTN or PEAK SEARCH Key Descriptions 7 35 DWELL TIME EDGE POL POS NEG Edit Amp Cor EDIT CAT ITEM Edit Done EDIT DONE EDIT FLATNESS Option 102 or 103 only sets the dwell time for the marker pause during which demodulation can take place in nonzero span sweeps The dwell time can be set from 2 milliseconds to 100 seconds Front Panel Key Access Option 105 only Option 101 is recommended determines whether the gate triggers on the positive going or negative going edge of the signal at the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the rear panel of the spectrum analyzer If the gate utility is used and a pulse repetition interval has been entered gate trigger position markers will be shown in the time domain window A fp indicates positive triggering A l indicates negative triggering Front Pa
455. selectively delete stored programs or variables from spectrum analyzer memory Front Panel Key Access 7 40 Key Descriptions ERASE TRACEALL allows you to purge all the user trace registers O through TRCMEM Pressing Dispose User Mem and then pressing ERASE TRACEALL causes a message to appear on the spectrum analyzer screen If you are sure Press key again to purge data Press ERASE TRACEALL again if you want to dispose of the user trace registers Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of user state registers Note EP LQ570 SML LRG EP MX80 SML LRG EXECUTE TITLE EXIT Exit Cat alog a If SAVE LOCK ON OFF is set to ON this function is disabled Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from spectrum analyzer memory Front Panel Key Access sets the spectrum analyzer to be compatible with an Epson LQ 570 compatible printer Press Set B amp W Printer then EP LQ570 SML LRG until LRG is underlined to set up the large screen printout This will allow for one printout per page The large screen printout format will not allow for printing of the menu keys Press Set B amp W Printer then EP LQ570 SML LRG until SML is underlined to set up the small screen printout This will allow for two printouts per page Front Panel Key Access sets the spectrum analyzer to be compatible with an Epson MX80 compatible printer Press Set B amp W Printer then EP MX80 SML LRG until LRG
456. ses is independent of sweep time Change the video bandwidth The amplitude of the responses is unaffected by changes in video bandwidth negative peak The minimum instantaneous value of an incoming signal On digital displays each displayed point of the signal indicates the minimum value of the signal for that part of the frequency span or time interval represented by the point noise figure The ratio usually expressed in dB of the signal to noise ratio at the input of a device mixer amplifier and so on to the signal to noise ratio at the output of the device noise marker A marker whose readout represents the noise level in a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth When the noise marker is selected the sample display detection mode is activated the values of a number of consecutive trace points about the marker the number depends on the type of analyzer are averaged and this average value is normalized to an equivalent value in a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth The normalization process accounts for detection and bandwidth plus the effect of the log amplifier when we select the log display mode Glossary D noise sidebands Modulation sidebands that indicate the short term instability of the local oscillator primarily the first local oscillator system of a spectrum analyzer The modulating signal is noise in the local oscillator circuit itself or in the local oscillator stabilizing circuit and the sidebands comprise a noise spectrum The
457. smitters The Broadcast Measurements Personality is a downloadable program on a memory card It allows simple selection of either PAL I or PAL B G systems The channel bands CCIR VHF CCIR UHF or CCIR CATV can be selected There are 14 measurements including carrier level carrier to noise intermodulation and NICAM level CATV Measurements Personality The HP 85901 HP 8592L and HP 8594L must have Option 003 The HP 85711B cable television measurements personality provides a quick and easy way to adapt your spectrum analyzer for making cable TV measurements while retaining spectrum analysis capability The CATV measurements personality is a downloadable program on a memory card that adds a set of eight functions to simplify cable TV testing channel selection carrier level carrier to noise power line hum crossmodulation composite triple beat modulation depth and system frequency response CATV System Monitor Personality The HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L must have Option 003 The HP 85716A CATV system monitor personality provides automatic measurements for testing and monitoring your cable TV system It can continuously measure headend signal quality and simplify system proof of performance testing The CATV system monitor personality is a downloadable program on a memory card It has seven different channel tests and two system tests for systems with NTSC format and can do performance testing without interrupting service Cable
458. so accesses the menus of marker peak functions including the peak table functions 7 62 Key Descriptions PEAK ZOOM PK MODE lt gt DLNRM PK SORT FRQ AMP PK TABLE ON OFF Plot Config PLOTTER ADDRESS finds the highest displayed signal and narrows the span to a value selected by the user Pressing PEAK ZOOM the first time will make FINAL SPAN the active function so the user can input the destination span The current FINAL SPAN value will be displayed At that time the user can enter a span or press PEAK ZOOM again to use the displayed span The peak zoom function sets the reference level to the signal amplitude and sets the center frequency step size to the signal frequency If the signal is in a microwave band a preselector peak is executed For a signal to be found it must have a peak of at least 6 dB If no signal is found Signal not found will be displayed The routine will ignore the spectrum analyzer local oscillator feedthrough signal which is at 0 Hz Front Panel Key Access select which peaks will be listed in the peak table to include all peaks or to exclude the peaks that are either above or below the display line see table below The display line is activated if it was not currently being displayed Selection Peaks Listed NRM all peaks listed gt DL peaks above display line listed lt DL peaks below display line listed Front Panel Key Access PEAK SEARCH switches the peak table sorting r
459. spectrum analyzer input perform the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routine and then perform the CAL YTF routine again U and H CAL ZERO FAIL The spectrum analyzer could not set up the tuning sensitivity of the main coil If this message appears press FREQUENCY 37 Hz CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 DEFAULT CAL DATA and perform the CAL FREQ routine again H Cannot engage phase lock with current CAL FREQ data Indicates that the CAL FREQ routine needs to be performed before phase locking can be turned on U Cannot reach N dB points Indicates that the number of dB specified for the N dB PTS function is greater than the distance of the signal peak from the spectrum analyzer noise floor or peak threshold U Check trigger input Indicates that the spectrum analyzer needs an external trigger signal to use the time gating functions Before using the time gating functions you should ensure there is a trigger pulse connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the rear panel of spectrum analyzer and that the GATE OUTPUT is connected the EXT TRIG INPUT connector U Comb harmonic at _ GHz NOT found Indicates that the CAL YTF routine for the spectrum analyzer cannot find a harmonic of the comb generator at frequency displayed If this happens ensure that the 100 MHz COMB OUT connector for an HP 8592L HP 85933 or HP 8596E or the CAL OUT connector for an HP 85953 is connected to the spectrum analyzer input with a low loss sh
460. ssage If you are sure press key again to purge data will appear Press LIMITS FRQ TIME again to purge the limit line table and switch between frequency and time Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY 7 50 Key Descriptions LINE LMT DISP Y N AUTO LMT TEST ON OFF LOAD FILE Note activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to be synchronized with the next cycle of the line voltage Front Panel Key Access displays any portion of the limit lines that are currently within the spectrum analyzer display boundary If Y yes is underlined the limit lines are displayed If N no is underlined they are not displayed If AUTO is underlined the display of the limit lines is dependent on LMT TEST The limit lines will be displayed while the limit test function is turned on otherwise they will be turned off Limit lines cannot be displayed while using the analog display mode Limit testing can be done but the limit lines will not be displayed Front Panel Key Access turns the limit line testing and if LMT DISP AUTO is selected turns the display of the limit lines on and off When limit line testing is enabled every measurement sweep of trace A is compared to the limit lines If trace A is at or within the bounds of the limit lines LIMIT PASS is displayed If trace A is out of the limit line boundaries LIMIT FAIL is displayed Front Panel Key Access loads a file from the memory card into spectrum analyzer memory
461. ssary to repeat the SELECT FREQ softkey for successive entries Using Analyzer Features 5 29 Lower Amplitude Upper Amplitude Segment Frequency Type Number 290 MHz 75 dBm Slope 295 MHz 75 dBm Slope 297 MHz 75 dBm Slope 29 dBm 300 MHz Slope 303 MHz 75 dBm Slope 305 MHz 75 dBm Slope Flat 75 dBm 310 MHz 400 MHz 75 dBm Point Note When entering a limit line segment the frequency and amplitude values will be listed as asterisks until new values are entered The new segment will be listed last until both the frequency and amplitude values have been entered Once the frequency and at least one amplitude value are entered the segment will be sorted into the limit line table according to frequency To edit an existing segment use SELECT SEGMENT to specify the segment Then use SELECT FREQ SELECT AMPLITUD or SELECT TYPE to specify the column that you wish to edit 11 Press More 1 of 2 then EDIT DONE when all values have been entered into the limit line table 12 Press LMT TEST ON OFF so that ON is underlined LIMIT PASS is displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen if the measurement sweep is within the limit lines LIMIT FAIL is displayed if the measurement sweep is not within the limit lines hp REF O dm ATTEN 10 dB PEAK E LIMIT PASS LOG 10 dB
462. ssed as a scalar ratio of the input to the output magnitude in decibels bandwidth selectivity This is a measure of the analyzer s ability to resolve signals unequal in amplitude It is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth for a given resolution filter IF Bandwidth selectivity tells us how steep the filter skirts are Bandwidth selectivity is sometimes called shape factor battery backed RAM Random access memory RAM data retained by a battery RAM memory cards can contain data that is maintained with a battery Refer also to nonvolatile memory blank mode This is an analyzer function that stores any active trace in the analyzer s reserved memory and blanks the display The stored trace may be either A B or C broadband response A signal whose spectrum is wider than the resolution bandwidth of a spectrum analyzer and whose repetition frequency is lower than the bandwidth of the spectrum analyzer Notice that it is a combination of signal and receiver characteristics that determines when a signal is classified as broadband For refining incoming signal responses select narrower spans and bandwidths Refer also to narrowband response The following checks can help verify whether or not the response is broadband Change the resolution bandwidth The displayed amplitude should change m Change the sweep time The spacing of the responses on the display should change as you change the sweep time m Change the s
463. st Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Safety Symbols The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument Caution Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Warning Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol A when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community CE If accompanied by a year it is when the design was proven Po The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association This symbol is used to mark the ON position of the power line switch TAZ This symbol indicates that the input power required is AC I This symbol is used to mark the STANDBY position of the power line switch dEl This symbol is used to mark the STANDBY OFF position of the power line switch La This symbol is us
464. sults when you press the front panel step keys A and y or by program commands stimulus response mode The operating state that allows a spectrum analyzer to make measurements similar to those of a network analysis measurement system Spectrum analyzers with this ability use tracking generator functions The tracking generator may be an external instrument stand alone tracking generators or designed into the analyzer hardware Measurement results are displayed in a relative amplitude scale resulting from a variation plus or minus from a reference normalized value stored in a trace stop start frequency Terms used in association with the stop and start points of the frequency measurement range Together they determine the span of the measurement range Glossary l 5 sweep time The time it takes the local oscillator to tune across the selected span Sweep time directly affects how long it takes to complete a measurement It does not include the dead time between the completion of one sweep and the start of the next It is usually a function of frequency span resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth Resolution affects sweep time in that the IF filters are band limited circuits requiring finite times to charge and discharge The amount of time the mixing product remains in the IF filter passband is directly proportional to the bandwidth inversely proportional to the sweep in Hz per unit of time The rise time of a filter is inversely pro
465. surements Table 4 5 Sweep Time Settings Pulse Repetition Pulse Repetition Sweep Time minimum Interval PRI Frequency PRF gt 20 kHz 10 kHz 2 kHz 1 kHz 200 Hz 100 Hz 60 Hz 30 Hz 20 Hz 10 Hz 5 Hz 4 Hz Use the MAX HOLD trace function and take several measurement sweeps Using the Self Calibration Routines with Option 105 The spectrum analyzer self calibration routines initiated by pressing CAL AMPTD or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD should be performed prior to using the Option 105 functions Use the following procedure to perform the self calibration routines and to check the results of the self calibration routines Note Be sure that the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the spectrum analyzer rear panel is not connected to anything while performing the spectrum analyzer self calibration routines Remove the cable from the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector 2 Connect the CAL OUT connector to the spectrum analyzer input connector with the calibration cable 3 Press CAL Press either CAL FREQ AMPTD to perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines or CAL AMPTD to perform the amplitude self calibration routine Eh 4 When the self calibration routines have successfully completed press CAL STORE 5 Press CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 Service Diag DISPLAY CAL DATA then NEXT PAGE 6 Verify that the number displayed for GATE in the lower left corner is between 0 98 and 1 0 see Fi
466. sweep which enables real time optimization of devices or systems under test The third order intermodulation is calculated as follows 2 x AmPlsignal A Amplaistortion product A Amplsignal B TOI 7 where the frequency of distortion product A is FreQaistortion product A 2 X FreQsignal A FreQsignal B Third Order Intercept Third order intercept is defined as the absolute power level at which the third order distortion products intercept the level of two equal level test signals If the distortion products are due to true third order distortion then the measurement result will be independent of the level of the test signals The measurement algorithm used by TO1 ON OFF see above equation corrects for the two test signals being different amplitudes The result is a calculated value for the two test signals being equal amplitude and is independent of the absolute level of either test signal In order to minimize the measurement error it is best to keep the test signals as close as possible to the same level and to the top of the screen The TOI measurement accuracy assuming the measured signals are near the top of the display is typically about 1 8 dB Making Measurements 4 41 we MKR A i G25 MHz REF dBm ATTEN 40 cB 54 O48 PEAK gt LUG 10 dB MARKER A 1 025 MHz 54 04 dB CENTER 300 650 MHz SPAN 5 000 MHz AFS AW 3 kHz VAN
467. t changing COPY DEV PRNT PLT produces the function last entered a print or a plot To print after plotting press COPY DEV PRNT PLT so that PRNT is underlined plot after printing press COPY DEV PRNT PLT so that PLT is underlined COPY T o Printing and Plotting 6 17 Printing With a Parallel Interface This section describes how to print using a parallel interface Equipment m HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer equipped with Options 041 or 043 parallel interface HP C2950A parallel printer cable Printer with parallel interface choose one of the following Q HP 2225C ThinkJet a HP 310 Portable DeskJet a HP 3630A PaintJet a HP 500 Series DeskJets a HP LaserJet a HP QuietJet or QuietJet Plus a LQ 570 Epson a MX 80 Epson Some models support color printing Interconnection and Printing Instructions 1 Turn off the printer and the spectrum analyzer 2 Connect the printer to the spectrum analyzer using the parallel printer cable 3 If your printer has configuration switches now is the time to set them See Figure 6 13 or refer to your printer s documentation for more specific information on your printer s configuration 4 Turn on the spectrum analyzer and printer e BEBSBRBA EEREEREG 1 C 0 DO g 12345 678 123 45 678 QUIETJET OUIETJE r PLUS THINEJET Figure 6 13 Parallel Printer Switch Setting
468. t frequency resolution bandwidth and marker position The data controls will change the active function in a manner prescribed by that function For example you can change center frequency in fine steps with the knob in discrete steps with the step keys or to an exact value with the number units keypad For example resolution bandwidth which can be set to discrete values only is changed to predetermined values with any of the data controls Hold Key Deactivate functions with HOLD which is found under the key On the HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L it is also available as a front panel key HOLD The active function readout is blanked indicating that no entry will be made inadvertently by using the knob step keys or keypad Pressing a function key re enables the data controls Knob The knob allows continuous change of functions such as center frequency reference level and marker position It also changes the values of many functions that change in increments only Clockwise rotation of the knob increases values For continuous changes the extent of alteration is determined by the size of the measurement range the speed at which the knob is turned does not affect the rate at which the values are changed The knob enables you to change the center frequency start or stop frequency or reference level in smooth scrolling action The smooth scrolling feature is designed to move the trace display to the latest function value as t
469. t possible resolution bandwidth Under preset conditions the resolution bandwidth is coupled or linked to span Since the resolution bandwidth has been changed from the coupled value a mark appears next to RES BW in the lower left corner of the screen indicating that the resolution bandwidth is uncoupled Also see the key description in Chapter 7 Note To resolve two signals of equal amplitude with a frequency separation of 200 kHz the resolution bandwidth must be less than the signal separation and resolution of 100 kHz must be used The next larger filter 300 kHz would exceed the 200 kHz separation and would not resolve the signals Making Basic Measurements 3 3 Resolving Small Signals Hidden by Large Signals Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function When dealing with resolution of signals that are not equal in amplitude you must consider the shape of the IF filter as well as its 3 dB bandwidth The shape of the filter is defined by the shape factor which is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth Generally the IF filters in this spectrum analyzer have shape factors of 15 1 or less If a small signal is too close to a larger signal the smaller signal can be hidden by the skirt of the larger signal To view the smaller signal you must select a resolution bandwidth such that k is less than a See Figure 3 3 Figure 3 3 Resolution Bandwidth Requirements for Resolving Small Signal
470. t the focus as described in Chapter 2 of this user s guide If the display position is offset press CAL More 1 of 4 CRT VERT POSITION and use the knob or step keys to adjust the vertical position Press CAL More 1 of 4 CRT HORZ POSITION to adjust the horizontal position Press CAL CAL STORE to save the new vertical and horizontal display position If you wish to reset the spectrum analyzer configuration to the state it was in when it was originally shipped from the factory use DEFAULT CONFIG To access DEFAULT CONFIG press CONFIG More 1 of 3 DEFAULT CONFIG DEFAULT CONFIG DEFAULT CONFIG requires a double key press See the softkey description for DEFAULT CONFIG in Chapter 7 Is the test being performed and the results that are expected within the specifications and capabilities of the spectrum analyzer See specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for spectrum analyzer specifications Are the spectrum analyzer measurements obviously inaccurate If so the spectrum analyzer correction factors may have been removed from the measurement results If this occurs perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines given in Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines in Chapter 2 After running these routines press CAL STORE then perform the confidence test Perform the confidence test by pressing CAL More 1 of 4 CONF TEST The spectrum analyzer performs a se
471. t to the intended carrier frequency and the reference level set to optimize the displayed signal The channel bandwidth and channel spacing must be entered by the user If PARAM AUTO is selected so AUTO is underlined other spectrum analyzer settings will then be coupled and set automatically The adjacent channel power measurement is an rms measurement This means that the measurement of the total channel power and the adjacent channel power ratios are accurately reported whether the transmitted signal contains tones noise or both IF PARAM AUTO is selected the parameters of the instrument state are set for a valid measurement When using PARAM MAN the following conditions must be maintained to make a valid rms measurement Video bandwidth is at least 10 times the resolution bandwidth m Detector mode is sample SMP You can use DETECTOR SMP PK to select the detector mode Resolution bandwidth is less than or equal to 100 kHz Video averaging is OFF m Neither MAX HOLD nor MIN HOLD trace mode is selected Front Panel Key Access HP 8593E HP 8594E HP 8595E or HP 8596E with Option 010 only activates internal INT leveling or external EXT leveling Front Panel Key Access HP 8590L or HP 8591E with O ption 010 or 011 only activates the automatic leveling control ALC function for internal INT leveling or external XTAL or MTR leveling The external leveling input located on the rear panel of the spectrum analyzer
472. ta can be printed by pressing the key The marker table cannot be saved or recalled Using Analyzer Features 5 3 Use the Peak Table to List the Displayed Signals The peak table function can be used to list the amplitude and frequency of up to 10 of the signals being displayed This is done by pressing a single key without having to put a marker on each signal Multiple signals from components such as oscillators and mixers or from surveillance are automatically identified and listed The information is updated at the end of each sweep The peak table display can easily be copied to a printer It is often helpful to have the spectrum analyzer sort the signals The peak table feature marks and list the signals based on the criteria selected The signals can be sorted by increasing frequency or decreasing amplitude The peak table function can be set to select all of the displayed signals or only those signals above or below a specified display line Note A signal must have a peak of at least 6 dB to be recognized by the peak table function This value can be changed using the peak excursion function 16 32 18 12 MAR 1992 REF dBm ATTEN 18 dB Pk Freq MHz Amplitude Pk Freq MHz Amplitude 1 7 5 91 dBm 6 689 33 88 dBm 2 305 20 28 dBm i 1813 37 90 dBm 3 906 24 53 dBm 8 2417 39 57 dBm 4 5 14244 25 84 dBm 2414 41 04 dBm 4545 34 70 dBm 2749 42 23 dBm CENTERR 1 450 GHz SPAN 2 300 GHz RE
473. th the spectrum analyzer is similar to its operation with a computer except for the following SCROLL LOCK and NUM LOCK are fixed and cannot be changed Pressing displays the keyboard mode on the spectrum analyzer screen The analyzer will not recognize the control characters or function keys The keyboard supports a 244 character recall buffer The longest single item is limited to 243 characters subsequent characters are ignored Using the A or y keys of the external keyboard to recall an item does not change the buffer contents Recalling an item and then pressing the key does not store a new copy of the item in the recall buffer If an item is recalled and then modified a new copy will be made in the recall buffer Adding new data into the keyboard line deletes the oldest data automatically When in command mode the active line will append a semicolon to the keyboard entry if the line does not end with a semicolon and it is fewer than 243 characters long Using Analyzer Features 5 41 Using the External Keyboard The following three example procedures demonstrate how to use an external keyboard to enter a screen title programming commands and a prefix However a brief procedure on installing your external keyboard is described first More detailed information on using the external keyboard is found in the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide External Keyboard Inst
474. that the function cannot be accessed without the pass code For the DEFAULT CAL DATA function the pass code is setting the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer to 37 Hz M CAL RES BW AMPL FAIL The relative insertion loss of the resolution bandwidth is incorrect This message also sets SRQ 110 H CAL SIGNAL NOT FOUND Indicates the calibration signal CAL OUT cannot be found Check that the CAL OUT and the spectrum analyzer input connectors are connected with an appropriate cable If the calibration signal is connected to the spectrum analyzer input but cannot be found press FREQUENCY 37 Hz CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 DEFAULT CAL DATA If the calibration signal still cannot be found press FREQUENCY 37 and perform the CAL FREQ or CAL FREQ AMPTD self calibration routines This message also sets SRQ 110 U and H CAL SPAN SENS FAIL The self calibration span sensitivity routine failed This message also sets SRQ 110 H CAL USING DEFAULT DATA Indicates that the calibration data is corrupt and the default correction factors are being used Interruption of the self calibration routines or an error can cause this problem M If You Have A Problem CAL YTF FAILED Indicates that the CAL YTF routine could not be successfully completed If this message appears ensure that the CAL OUT connector for the HP 85953 or 100 MHz COMB OUT connector for the HP 8592L HP 85933 or HP 85963 is connected to the
475. the active function the logarithmic units per division can be changed Values may range from 0 1 to 20 dB per division When LIN is underlined the vertical scale is in linear mode which has a range of 1 kW to 1 pW The reference level value is set to the top of the screen and the bottom graticule becomes zero volts Each division of the graticule is one eighth of the reference level in volts Pressing SCALE LOG LIN always sets the units specified for the current amplitude scale Pressing or powering on the spectrum analyzer sets the default units Front Panel Key Access Requires Option 301 or both O ptions 101 and 102 triggers on the SECAM L video formats Pressing SECAM L alters the TV line number that the spectrum analyzer triggers on internally the line number displayed when TV LINE does not change Pressing SECAM L changes the video modulation to positive set TV SYNC NEG POS to NEG if negative video modulation is required Front Panel Key Access selects one of the four possible markers A marker can be turned on once it is selected A marker that has already been turned on will become active when it is selected If a marker has already been turned on and assigned to a specific trace it will become active on that trace and the MK TRACE AUTO ABC softkey will have the appropriate trace letter underlined Front Panel Key Access allows you to enter either the amplitude value for the displayed upper or lower limit line segm
476. the display 4 Turn off the marker track function by pressing MK TRACK ON OFF OFB 5 To measure the excursion of the signal press TRACE then MAX HOLD A As the signal varies maximum hold maintains the maximum responses of the input signal as shown in Figure 3 10 3 10 Making Basic Measurements we MKR 104 8813 MHz REF 48 B dBm ATTEN Y dB 47 04 dBm PEAK LOG 10 d8 SPAN 500 9 kHz MA sof AJN sC FC COAR CENTER 104 8813 MHz SPAN 500 0 kHz RESBW1 0 kHz VBW1 0 kHz SWP3 0 msec Figure 3 10 Viewing an Unstable Signal Using Max Hold A Annotation on the left side of the screen indicates the trace mode For example MA SB SC indicates trace A is in maximum hold mode trace B and trace C are in store blank mode See Screen Annotation in Chapter 2 6 Press TRACE TRACE A B C to select trace B Trace B is selected when B is underlined Press CLEAR WRITE B to place trace B in clear write mode which displays the current measurement results as it sweeps Trace A remains in maximum hold mode showing the frequency shift of the signal 7 Press TRACE A B C to select trace C C should be underlined Press MIN HOLD C Trace C is in the minimum hold mode and displays the minimum amplitude of the frequency drift of the signal 40 MKR 104 8813 MHz REF 48 0 dBm ATTEN 0 dB 47 64 dBm PEAK a LOG 10 d8 A SPAN 500 8 kHz MA WB
477. the values of the delta markers The start and stop frequencies will not be set if the delta marker is off Front Panel Key Access functions exactly like the CONTINUS FFT softkey if the spectrum analyzer is already in zero span If the spectrum analyzer is not in zero span it activates a marker which must be placed on the signal that will have an FFT performed on it and MARKER AUTO FFT must be pressed again The resolution bandwidth setting must be wide enough to include the displayed modulation signals Refer to Chapter 4 Measuring Amplitude Modulation Using the Fast Fourier Transform for more information Press FFT OFF to return the spectrum analyzer to normal operation The spectrum analyzer state prior to pressing MARKER AUTO FFT can be recalled from register 8 Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER changes the spectrum analyzer settings so that the frequency at the marker becomes the center frequency Front Panel Key Access MKR or PEAK SEARCH changes the center frequency step size to match the value of the active marker Press then CF STEP AUTO MAN to view the step size If marker delta is active the step size will be set to the frequency difference between the markers Front Panel Key Access changes the FFT stop frequency to whatever the current value of the FFT marker frequency is within the limitations of the available sweep times This puts the marker on the right side of the graticule Front Panel Key A
478. ther frequency or time parameters Frequency is the default selection If TIME is selected SELECT TIME will replace SELECT FREQ in the Edit Limit menus This section provides an overview of limit lines a procedure for creating a sample upper limit line and descriptions of the limit line functions A procedure for creating an upper and a lower limit line is at the end of this section Refer to Chapter 7 for more information on a specific limit line function Procedure for Creating an Upper Limit Line This procedure demonstrates how to create a sample upper limit line for the CAL OUT signal and activate testing Detailed descriptions of the limit line functions follow this procedure 1 Press PRESET 2 Set the center frequency and span by pressing FREQUENCY 300 MHz and SPAN 500 MHz 3 Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT and INPUT 50 Q on the spectrum analyzer using an appropriate cable The calibration signal is used as the test signal for this demonstration Note If the amplitude units are anything other than dBm at this time change the amplitude units to dBm for this demonstration Press AMPLITUDE More 1 of 2 Amptd Units dBm 4 Press DISPLAY Limit Lines to access the limit line menus 5 18 Using Analyzer Features ho REF O der ATTN 10 dB 19 93 dBm MKR 304 Q MHz PEAK LOG IMIT FAIL 10 dB WA VB vc FC CORR
479. ticule represents zero deviation The top graticule is the positive deviation set by FM GAIN The bottom graticule is the negative deviation set by FM GAIN The range for FM gain is from 10 kHz to 500 kHz The default value is 100 kHz Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL or Option 102 103 or 301 only adjusts the horizontal trace for center screen with no modulation on the carrier This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL displays the FM SPAN signal from the span dividers on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access HP 8590L HP 8592L and HP 8594L must have O ption 003 formats a card in logical interchange format LIF This is the same as ERASE MEM CARD The memory card is formatted with the volume label HP859X Pressing FORMAT CARD causes a message to appear on the spectrum analyzer screen If you are sure press key againtopurgedata Press FORMAT CARD again if you want to format the memory card Pressing FORMAT CARD deletes data stored on the memory card Front Panel Key Access activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep Front Panel Key Access TRIG All E Series and L Series spectrum analyzers except HP 8590L with Option 713 displays in real time frequency diagnostic information for the LO section This is a s
480. tion 101 only 5 32 Learn About the Windows Display e eo 5 33 Learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors 39 Procedure for Creating Amplitude Correction Factors 5 36 Amplitude Correction Functions 8 eae 5 38 Editing or Viewing the Amplitude Correction Tables 5 38 Selecting the Amplitude Correction Point 5 38 Selecting the Frequency Coordinate 0050 ee eae 5 39 Selecting the Amplitude Coordinate o a 0a a a a a o 5 39 Completing Table Entry and Activating Amplitude Corrections 5 39 Saving or Recalling Amplitude Correction Tables 5 39 External Keyboard e 0 gs mos ara a a a et a s 5 40 Using the External Keyboard e 5 42 External Keyboard Installation ee 5 42 To Enter 4 Screen Titles ata a led Sew A ee e a A 5 42 To Enter Programming Commands o 5 43 Contents 3 To Enter a Prefix 6 Printing and Plotting Printing or Plotting with HP IB Printing Using an HP IB Interface A fed ar de Montiel Interconnection and Printing Instructions Plotting Using an HP IB Interface Equipment Y og oe Sunk iy ie ode Interconnection and Plotting Instructions Printing or Plotting with RS 232 Equipment Interconnection and Printing Instructions Plotting Using an RS 232 Interface Equipment aa eo te ar Interconnection and Plotting Instr
481. tion 105 is installed remove the cable from the rear panel GATE INPUT before starting the self calibration routine Front Panel Key Access initiates both the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines Connect CAL OUT to the spectrum analyzer input before pressing CAL FREQ amp AMPTD If Option 105 is installed remove the cable from the rear panel GATE INPUT before starting the self calibration routine Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 8595E or HP 8596E only adjusts the bias current DAC setting for the optimum displayed signal amplitude The HP 8592L HP 85933 and HP 85963 use the 100 MHz COMB OUT signal for the test signal The HP 85953 uses the 300 MHz CAL OUT signal This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access stores the correction factors from the last calibration The stored correction factors are automatically retrieved when the spectrum analyzer is turned on If correction factors are not stored they will be retained only until the spectrum analyzer is turned off See the description for the CAL FETCH softkey Front Panel Key Access changes the setting of the 10 MHz reference standard timebase DAC that is located on the A25 Counter Lock assembly This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL Option 010 or 011 only performs absolute amplitude vernier and tracking peak self calibration routines
482. tion 301 only allows you to trigger on the NTSC video format Pressing NTSC alters the TV line number that the spectrum analyzer triggers on internally the line number displayed when TV LINE is pressed does not change Pressing NTSC changes the video modulation to negative set TV SYNC NEG POS so that POS is underlined if positive video modulation is required Front Panel Key Access allows the user to enter the percent of the power desired when using the occupied bandwidth measurement under the Power Menu softkey When the power measurements are first accessed the initial value for percent power is 99 percent Once the value is changed the new value will be saved through an instrument preset or power on If the occupied bandwidth measurement is active and the percent power is changed another sweep is taken and measured Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER Key Descriptions 7 59 OCCUPIED integrates the power of the displayed spectrum and puts markers at the BANDWDTH frequencies containing a selected percent of the power The measurement defaults to 99 of the occupied bandwidth power The power bandwidth routine first computes the combined power of all signal responses contained in the trace For 99 occupied power bandwidth it then puts markers at the frequencies at which 0 5 of the power lies to the right of the right marker and to the left of the left marker Thus 99 of the power lies between the markers The difference of the mark
483. tion explains how to save and recall state trace limit line and amplitude correction factor data to and from spectrum analyzer memory You can use STATE INTRNL to store up to eight states in analyzer memory and Trace Intrnl to store many traces limit line tables and amplitude correction factors Saving state data saves the spectrum analyzer settings but not the trace data Saving trace data saves the trace data and the state data Limit line data and amplitude correction factors are stored in trace registers but state and trace data are not recalled with the limit line data or the amplitude correction factors States traces limit line tables and amplitude correction factors are saved in spectrum analyzer memory even if the instrument is turned off or is pressed Refer to the Catalog Internal softkey description in Chapter 7 for more information about cataloging spectrum analyzer memory Refer to Table 5 1 at the end of this section for a summary of saving and recalling data to and from spectrum analyzer memory To Save a State 1 Set up the spectrum analyzer settings to be saved 2 Press SAVE If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL Selecting INTERNAL selects the spectrum analyzer memory as the mass storage device 3 Press STATE INTRNL SAVE REG is displayed on the spectrum analyzer display 4 Enter a number from one to eight using the numeric keypad and the state is saved automatically
484. tle recalled as a Using Analyzer Features 5 17 Using Limit Line Functions Limit lines provide an easy way to compare trace data to a set of amplitude and frequency parameters while the spectrum analyzer is sweeping the measurement range An upper and or lower limit line can be displayed Every measurement sweep of trace A is compared to the limit lines If trace A is at or within the bounds of the limit lines LIMIT PASS is displayed If trace A is out of the limit line boundaries LIMIT FAIL is displayed Figure 5 4 shows a sample limit line display Limit lines are constructed from a table of frequency and amplitude coordinate pairs Limit line segments are created by connecting these points Everything except the segment length is defined by the entry for its beginning point There are several different ways of entering the frequency amplitude pairs These are described in the following section Note Limit lines can only by created and edited from the front panel in the format of limit line tables Limit lines that are in a trace format can only be created using remote commands or a down loadable program See HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzer and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information Though coordinates of frequency and amplitude are used most often limit line data can also be entered in terms of time and amplitude Use the LIMITS FRQ TIME softkey to underline the desired choice of ei
485. to return to the main power menu 8 Press ADJ CHAN POWER to activate the function Making Measurements 4 45 g REF 20 0 dBm AT 3048 SINGLE SMPL faos dhan Power MEAS 10G Pwr 13 2 dam 10 Low 39 dB Up 40 CONT MEAS A CENTER FREG ACPGRAPH A DN OFF WA se sc FS Setup CORA Previous Menu CENTER 825 0300 MHz SPAN 116 8 kHz RES BW 1 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 350 msec Figure 4 38 Adjacent Channel Power 9 To use the extended Adjacent Channel Power function press Previous Menu then press ADJ CHAN POWER extd g REF 12 EF 12 0 dBm AT 30 08 siete SMPL fags dhan Honen exta MEAS LOG Pwr 14 5 dam 13 cow aly Ao eee ed dB Up 59 1 da A CSP BO 00 KHz CONT Cow BO 001 kHz SWEEP CENTER FREG ACPGRAPH ON OFF VA SB Sc FS Setup CORR Previous Meri CENTER 625 0300 MHz SPAN 216 9 KHZ ARES BH 1 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 651 msec Figure 4 39 Adjacent Channel Power Extended 10 A graph of the adjacent channel power ratio as a function of channel spacing can be calculated and displayed by pressing ACPGRAPH ON OFF so ON is underlined The numerical ACP results are not displayed The top graticule line represents an ACP ratio of O dB and the horizontal center represents a channel spacing of zero hertz 4 46 Making Measurements MKR a 90 0 kHz
486. tors 1 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 2 Press Internal Trace This accesses a menu with LIMIT LINES and AMP COR 3 Press either LIMIT LINES to recall a limit line table or AMP COR to recall amplitude correction factors 4 Enter the register number under which the data was stored 5 Press ENTER To Protect Data From Being Overwritten If you want to protect all state trace limit line and amplitude correction data from being overwritten press SAVE then SAV LOCK ON OFF so that ON is underlined Table 5 1 summarizes the functions when saving and recalling data to and from spectrum analyzer memory Note This feature does not protect state trace limit line and amplitude correction data from ERASE MEM ALL 5 6 Using Analyzer Features Table 5 1 Summary of Save and Recall Operations Analyzer Memory Operation Screen Register Key Sequence Title Range Available save state 1 to 8 STATE INTRNL register number recall state INTERNAL STATE register number j save trace 0 to MAX REG SAVE Trace gt Intrnl TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C register number recall trace 0 to MAX REG Internal Trace TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C register number ENTER save limit line Yest 0 to MAX REG Save Trace Intrnl LIMIT LINES table register number ENTER recall limit line 0 to MAX REG Internal Trace table LIMIT LINES reg
487. total power of all input signals at the spectrum analyzer input must not exceed the maximum power level for the spectrum analyzer 1 Connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input Press PRESET 2 Reduce the frequency range to view a low level signal of interest For example narrow the frequency span from 88 MHz to 108 MHz by pressing FREQUENCY START FREQ 88 MHz STOP FREQ 108 MFZ 3 Place a marker on the low level signal of interest Press and use the knob to position the marker at the signal s peak 4 Place the signal at center frequency by pressing then MARKER CF 5 Reduce the span to 10 MHz Press SPAN and then use the step down key CD See Figure 3 16 MKR aga 93 mz AEF o dam AT 10 08 sf 1 dem PEAK LOG dB SPAN i n 00MHz WA SB sc FC E CORR I f jil edd A UL Jean CENTER 104 93 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz RES BW 100 kHz VBW 30 KHZ SWP 20 0 mse Figure 3 16 Low Level Signal Making Basic Measurements 3 15 6 Press AMPLITUDE ATTEN AUTO MAN Press the step up key E once to select 20 dB attenuation Increasing the attenuation moves the noise floor closer to the signal A mark appears next to the AT annotation at the top of the display indicating the attenuation is no longer coupled to other spectrum analyzer settings 7 To see the signal more clearly press 0 dBm Zero
488. trum analyzer determines the nature of the service request The meaning of each bit of the status byte is explained in Table A l SRQ A Table A l Status Byte Definition Message Display Message 0 LSB Unused 1 Unit Key Pressed SRQ 102 2 End of sweep SRQ 104 3 Hardware broken SRQ 110 4 Command complete SRQ 120 5 Illegal spectrum analyzer command SRQ 140 6 Universal HP IB service request HP IB RQS bit T Unused The display message is an octal number based on the binary value of the status byte This octal number always begins with a 1 since this is translated from bit 6 the universal service request bit The status byte for an illegal spectrum analyzer command SRQ 140 is as follows bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 status byte O 1 100 0 0 0 This displays the octal equivalent of the status byte binary number SRQ 140 The octal equivalent is based on the whole binary number 01100000 binary 140 octal One simple way to determine the octal equivalent of the binary number is to partition the binary number three bits at a time from the least significant bit and treat each part as a single binary number binary Ol 100 000 octal l 4 0 The decimal equivalent of the octal number is determined as follows 140 octal 1 x 8 4 x 8 O x 8 96 decimal More than one service request can be sent at the same time For example if an illegal spectrum analyzer command SRQ 140 and the e
489. try 5 43 programming command entry 5 43 screen title entry 5 42 external keyboard connector 2 7 external keyboard installation 5 42 external keyboard operation 5 42 43 EXTERNAL PREAMPG 7 42 EXT KEYBOARD 2 7 EXT REF INPUT 2 6 EXT TRIG INPUT 2 7 F fast ADC optional 10 10 fast Fourier transform stop frequency 7 43 fast Fourier transform function 4 2 7 43 fast time domain sweeps Option 101 10 8 features front panel 2 1 FFT markers 7 53 FFT compatibility 7 43 FFT display annotation 4 2 FFT marker frequency 7 53 FFT MARKERS 7 42 FFT measurement 4 2 7 27 7 80 automatic 4 5 manual 4 3 setup 4 3 FFT Menu 7 43 FFT OFF 7 43 FFT STOP FREQ 7 43 fine focus control 2 9 FINE TUNE DAC 7 2 7 43 firmware optional 10 1 1 firmware date 1 8 fixed limit line type 7 50 fix tuned receiver 3 24 FLAT 5 26 7 43 flatness factory defaults 7 48 flatness correction constants 7 36 7 43 Flatness Data 7 2 7 43 FLATNESS EXT DET IN 2 5 FM COIL DRIVE 7 2 7 44 FM GAIN 4 14 7 2 7 44 FM OFFSET 7 2 7 44 FM SPAN 7 3 7 44 FORMAT CARD 5 1 1 7 44 format date 7 31 Fourier transform See also fast Fourier transform 7 43 Fourier transform measurement 7 43 FREE RUN 7 44 FREQ DIAG 7 3 7 44 FREQ DISC NORM OFF 7 44 FREQ OFFSET 7 45 frequency stop 7 82 FREQUENCY 2 1 2 13 7 45 frequency and amplitude self calibration routine 1 8 7 14 frequency demodulation 7 33 frequency extension to 26 5
490. ts 4 3 10 To confirm that the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth are correct for measuring the modulation amplitude use the following procedure a Press and use the knob to move the marker to the desired modulation signal In this example place the marker on the 60 Hz fundamental modulation signal Note For HP 8590L with Option 713 or HP 8592L with Option 713 the resolution bandwidth must be left at about 100 kHz to accommodate frequency drift of the spectrum analyzer If you are using an HP 8590L with Option 713 or an HP 8592L with Option 713 do not do step b b Press and decrease the resolution bandwidth using the key until measured signal amplitude drops Then press ff to increase the bandwidth until the signal amplitude stops increasing and stays the same or until the maximum resolution bandwidth is reached Use the narrowest bandwidth that does not cause a change in the signal amplitude Note As the resolution bandwidth is stepped down the modulated signal must be re centered in the filter bandwidth This is a zero span display To center the signal select and adjust the center frequency to maximize the amplitude of the trace If this is not done the signal amplitude can decrease due to off tuning of the spectrum analyzer and not because of the resolution bandwidth chosen For the best amplitude accuracy the resolution bandwidth should be about 10 times greater than the highest modulation frequency of i
491. ts the amplitude part of the coordinate pairs The time parameters are always fixed beginning at the left edge of the graticule 8 Specify the first limit line segment to begin at 50 MHz and have an amplitude of 60 dBm by using the following key sequence SELECT FREQ 50 MHz 60 dBm FLAT Note The coordinates for the second point must be entered before the first and limit line segment is displayed 9 Enter the second limit line segment by pressing the following keys 250 MHz 60 dBm SLOPE Note Table entries can be edited if you make a mistake To edit an existing segment use SELECT SEGMENT to specify the segment Use SELECT FREQ SELECT AMPLITUD or SELECT TYPE to specify the column you wish to edit 10 Specify the third limit line segment by pressing the following keys 400 MHz 15 dBm FLAT You may notice that the end coordinate of segment three is drawn to a point off the top of the spectrum analyzer display This assures that no trace data beyond the end of the limit line will cause the test to fail 11 Specify the fourth limit line segment by pressing the following keys 600 MHz 15 dBm POINT Since the limit line in this procedure has only four segments specified the frequency value of segment four the last segment is set to 600 MHz which is greater than the stop frequency of the display 12 Press More 1 of 2 then EDIT DONE when all the segments have been entered 13 Press LMT TEST ON OFF so that ON
492. ts the value of pulse width pulse repetition interval and reference edge to zero and turns off the coupling of the pulse parameters to the resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and sweep time Front Panel Key Access SWEEP fir Option 103 only clears the displayed quasi peak amplitude and quasi peak marker represented by a diode symbol from the spectrum analyzer screen See the HP 85913 HP 85933 HP 8594E HP 85953 or HP 8596E Option 103 supplement documentation for more information Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL Key Descriptions 7 23 CLEAR WRITE A erases any data previously stored in trace A and continuously displays any signals during the sweep of the spectrum analyzer This function is activated at power on and by pressing PRESET Changing the trace mode of trace C to clear write or minimum hold can change the trace mode of trace A If trace A is in clear write mode or maximum hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace A is changed to store blank The following table shows the trace mode of trace A before and after changing trace C to clear write or minimum hold trace mode Trace Mode of Trace A After Store blank Store blank View Trace Mode of Trace A Before Clear write Maximum hold View Changing the trace mode of trace A to clear write or maximum hold can change the trace mode of trace C If trace C is in clear write mode when trace A is
493. ual see User s Guide 10 12 instrument preset 7 66 instrument state 2 2 intensity control 2 3 interface connectors 2 7 intermodulation distortion third order 3 22 INTERNAL CARD 7 49 internal comb generator 7 27 internal external leveling 7 7 INTERNAL STATE 7 49 Internal Trace 7 49 INTERVAL CNTR INPUT 2 6 K keyboard external keyboard functions 5 40 keyboard external 5 40 keyboard operation external 5 42 key functions external keyboard 5 40 key menus 8 1 knob 2 3 2 8 L label softkey 2 1 laserjet plots 7 64 LAST SPAN 7 49 length GATE LENGTH 7 46 level triggering gate control 7 46 limiters RF and transient 10 13 LIMIT FAIL 5 18 limit line functions 5 22 28 limit lines 5 18 amplitude coordinate 5 25 cataloging 7 19 creating 5 18 5 22 delete segment 7 33 displaying 5 28 7 51 edit done 7 36 editing 5 20 edit lower table 7 37 edit mid delta amplitude 7 37 edit table 7 37 edit upper and lower tables 7 38 edit upper table 7 38 fixed 5 22 fixed and relative 7 50 flat type 7 43 frequency or time 5 22 frequency or time coordinate 5 25 point 7 64 purge 7 70 recall table 7 73 relative 5 22 save table 7 76 segment number 5 23 SEGMENT TYPE 5 26 select amplitude 7 76 select delta amplitude 7 76 select frequency 7 77 select frequency or time 7 50 select lower amplitude 7 77 select middle amplitude 7 77 select segment 7 77 select time 7 78 sele
494. uctions Printing Using an RS 232 Interface Printing after Plotting or Plotting after Printing 2 2 2 To print after plotting press To plot after printing press Printing With a Parallel Interface Equipment Interconnection and Printing Instructions Plotting to an HP LaserJet Printer Equipment Interconnection and Plotting Instructions 7 Key Descriptions Service Functions Service Calibration Functions Service Diagnostic Functions Analyzer Functions 8 Key Menus 9 If You Have A Problem What You ll Find in This Chapter Before You Call Hewlett Packard Check the Basics Read the Warranty Service Options How to Call Hewlett Packard How to Return Your Analyzer for Service Service lag ar Ga He Bw we eB Original Packaging Other Packaging Error Messages Contents 4 o ar O E e E E rd o pe A A gt 10 Measurement Personalities Options and Accessories What You ll Find In This Chapter 2 e 10 1 Measurement Personalities 2 1 ee 10 2 Broadcast Measurements Personality 0 08 4 10 2 CATV Measurements Personality 0 2000 10 2 CATV System Monitor Personality 2 2 ee 10 2 Cable TV Measurements and System Monitor Personality 2 2 2 2 10 2 CDMA Me
495. ude and type are specified The frequency or time and upper amplitude comprise the coordinate point for the upper limit line the frequency or time and lower amplitude value comprise the coordinate point for the lower limit line It is not necessary to specify both an upper and lower amplitude component for every frequency component Three asterisks in the table indicate that an amplitude value has not been entered for the segment The mid delta limit line table format is accessed by Edit Mid Delt Like the upper and lower limit line table format the mid delta limit line table format provides a means of specifying the upper and lower limit lines at the same time Unlike the upper and lower table format the amplitude values are specified as a middle amplitude value with a delta the upper and lower limit lines are then drawn at an equal positive and negative distance from the middle amplitude With the mid delta format the frequency or time and the mid amplitude plus the delta comprise the upper limit line the frequency or time and the mid amplitude minus the delta comprise the lower limit line The difference between the mid delta format and the upper lower format is the way the amplitude values are entered however in both formats the frequency coordinate begins a segment The mid delta format can be used if the upper and lower limit lines are symmetrical with respect to the amplitude axis Note Editing a limit line table can be done
496. ude corrections 5 36 editing limit lines 5 20 EDIT LAST 7 37 Edit Limit 5 22 7 37 Edit Lower 5 23 7 37 Edit Lower limit line format 5 25 Edit Mid Delt 5 23 7 37 Edit Mid Delt limit line format 5 25 Editor 7 38 Edit Up Low 5 23 7 38 Edit Up Low limit line format 5 25 Edit Upper 5 19 5 23 7 38 Edit Upper limit line format 5 25 EDIT UPR LWR 7 38 electrostatic discharge 1 1 1 EM1 bandwidth 120 kHz 7 5 200 Hz 7 5 9 kHz 7 5 EM1 BW Menu 7 38 EM1 close field probe 10 15 EMI diagnostics measurements 10 3 end of sweep A l Index 6 ENTER 7 38 entering a prefix 5 12 ENTER PRI 7 39 ENTER REF EDGE 7 39 ENTER WIDTH 7 39 epson format 7 41 EPSON LARGE 7 78 epson 1q570 7 41 epson mx80 7 41 epson printer 7 41 EPSON SMALL 7 78 ERASE ALL 7 40 ERASE CARD 7 40 ERASE DLP 7 39 ERASE DLP MEM 7 39 ERASE MEM ALL 7 40 ERASE MEM CAROD 7 40 ERASE STATE 7 40 ERASE STATEALL 7 40 ERASE TRACE 7 41 ERASE TRACEALL 7 41 erase user programs and variables 7 35 ESD 1 11 reducing damage caused by ESD 1 12 static safe accessories 1 12 static safe work station 1 1 1 EVENT CNTR INPUT 2 6 exchange trace A and B 7 5 exchange trace B and C 7 11 execute a command front panel 7 41 EXECIJTE TITLE 7 2 7 41 EXIT 7 41 Exit Catalog 7 41 EXIT SHOW 7 42 EXIT UTILITY 7 42 expanding a window 7 93 EXT ALC INPUT 2 5 EXTERNAL 7 42 external internal leveling 7 7 external keyboard 5 40 10 15 prefix en
497. uency range of the harmonic band may be entered The span is automatically reduced to accommodate a center frequency specified near the end of the band range Example 1 Connect 100 MHz COMB OUT to the spectrum analyzer input The HP 85953 does not have a 100 MHz COMB OUT signal so it cannot be used for this measurement example An external source must be substituted 2 Press and then the following keys COMB GEN ON OFF ON SPAN 350 MHz 3 Band Lock BND LOCK ON OFF ON 3 Place a marker on the farthest peak to the left by using the key 4 Press MARKER A NEXT PK RIGHT NEXT PK RIGHT to show the frequency and amplitude difference between the two comb teeth You will see three comb teeth on your display The spectrum analyzer is locked in band 1 and will not allow multiband sweeps See Figure 3 28 5 To see a multiband sweep press the following keys More 1 of 2 MARKER ALL OFF Band Lock BND LOCK ON OFF OFF 6 Place a marker on the farthest peak to the left by pressing PEAK SEARCH 7 Press MARKER A Use NEXT PK RIGHT to place a marker on the farthest peak to the right The marker readout displays the frequency and amplitude difference between the two comb teeth See Figure 3 29 3 26 Making Basic Measurements 40 MKA A 200 4 MHz REF 0 dBm ATTEN 10 48 2 02 d8 PEAK LOG 10 y8 MARKER A l CENTER 12 9000 GHz SPAN 350 0 MHz RES BW 3 MHz VB
498. ulating and Listening to an AM or FM Signal in Chapter 4 for more information Example View the modulation waveform of an AM signal in the time domain 1 To obtain an AM signal you can either connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input and tune to a commercial AM broadcast station or you can connect a source to the spectrum analyzer input and set the percent modulation of the source If a headset is used with the VIDEO OUT connector the spectrum analyzer will operate as a radio 2 First center and zoom in on the signal in the frequency domain see Decreasing the Frequency Span Using the Marker Track Function Be sure to turn off the marker track function since the marker track function must be off for zero span See Figure 3 26 3 24 Making Basic Measurements 4 REF 0 dBm ATTEN1 0 GB PEAK LOG 10 dB RES BW 1 MHz a wa SB sc FC CORR CENTER 30000 0000 MHz SPAN 20 00 MHz RES BW 1 MHz VBW B000 kHzz SWP 2 O msec Figure 3 26 Viewing an AM Signal 3 To demodulate the AM press BW Increase the resolution bandwidth to include both sidebands of the signal within the passband of the spectrum analyzer 4 Next position the signal peak near the reference level and select a linear voltage display Press and change the reference level then press SCALE LOG LIN to underline LIN 5 To select zero span either press SPAN 0 or press ZERO SPAN See
499. um analyzer operation Executing the self calibration routine regularly ensures that the spectrum analyzer is using current calibration data that improves the spectrum analyzer frequency and amplitude accuracy Press the key to view the self calibration routine menus The last softkey on this menu labeled More 1 of 4 provides access to additional self calibration functions For more detailed information on the self calibration softkeys refer to Chapter 7 The self calibration routines add correction factors to internal circuitry The addition of the correction factors is required to meet frequency and amplitude specifications When the correction factors are added to internal circuitry CORR corrected appears on the left side of the screen Warm Up Time In order for the spectrum analyzer to meet its specifications allow the spectrum analyzer to warm up for 30 minutes after being turned on before attempting to make any calibrated measurements Be sure to calibrate the spectrum analyzer only after it has met operating temperature conditions The spectrum analyzer frequency and amplitude self calibration routines are initiated by the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD softkey in the menu located under the key 1 To calibrate the instrument connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 500 connector with an appropriate cable Note A low loss cable should be used for accurate calibration Use the 509 cable shipped with the spectrum analyzer I
500. unction press SWEEP Gate Control GATE CTL EDGE LVL so that LVL level is underlined see Figure 4 33 we REF 9 dBm ATTEN 10 dB ROS LOG 18 AA he dB GATE DELAY 60 000 msec WA SB SC FC A AE TAE E GATE CTL CORR EDGE LVL PREV MENU CENTER 0 Hz SPAN 0 Hz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 208 msec RT Figure 4 33 Using the Level Gate Control When the GATE CTL EDGE LVL softkey function is set to edge triggering occurs at the edge of the trigger input When the GATE CTL EDGE LVL softkey function is set to level the gate is on whenever the trigger input is high Because the trigger input for this example is the HI SWEEP IN OUT signal and HI SWEEP IN OUT signal is high 5 V during every sweep the level of the signal on screen is high Notice that the GATE DELAY GATE TIME and EDGE POL NEG POS softkeys are blanked when the gate control is set to level When the gate control is set to level LVL the functions of gate delay gate length and edge trigger polarity no longer apply 4 38 Making Measurements Using the One Button Measurements to Measure N dB Bandwidth Percent Amplitude Modulation and Third Order Intercept TOI The spectrum analyzer includes one button measurement functions With one key press they make accurate measurements of m N dB Bandwidth Percent Amplitude Modulation a Third Order Intermodulation The signal or signals being measured must be displayed before activating the measureme
501. unction and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL Option 010 or 011 only selects stimulus response SR or spectrum analyzer SA auto coupled sweep time In stimulus response mode auto coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements Stimulus response auto coupled sweep times are typically valid in stimulus response measurements when the system s frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL selects the length of time in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps the displayed frequency span In all non zero frequency spans the sweep time varies from 20 milliseconds to 100 seconds In zero frequency span the fastest sweep time is 15 milliseconds Reducing the sweep time increases the rate of sweeps The sweep time can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad For Option 101 only Option 101 provides sweep times from 20 ps to 20 ms in zero span Front Panel Key Access or Options 101 and 102 or O ption 301 only provides sweep triggering on the selected line of a video picture field and accesses the softkey menu used to select the line number of the video picture field and the type of video picture frame When SYNC CRD TV TRIG is pressed the trigger mode is changed to TV trigger TV LINE becomes the active function and the softkey menu for changing the TV line numbers and video field trigger is access
502. ure for Creating an Upper and Lower Limit Line This is a basic procedure for creating a sample of upper and lower limit lines The CAL OUT signal is used for the test signal 1 2 10 Press PRESET Since this procedure uses the calibration signal as the test signal connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 50 Q with an appropriate cable Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows FREQUENCY 300 MHz 50 MHz 3 MHz Press DISPLAY and Limit Lines to access the limit line menus At this point you may need to do the following a To save the current limit line table press SAVE LIMIT and enter the register number Then press ENTER b To clear an existing limit line table press Edit Limit Edit Upper and More 1 of 2 Then press PURGE LIMITS two times If necessary press Edit Limit to access the LIMITS FRQ TIME softkey Press LIMITS FRQ TIME so that FRQ is underlined to select the frequency type of limit line if it is not already selected Press Edit Up Low to create upper and lower limit lines simultaneously Press More 1 of 2 LIMITS FIX REL so that FIX is underlined to select the fixed type of limit line if it is not already selected Specify the first limit line segment by using the following key sequence SELECT FREQ 275 MHz 60 dBm 75 dBm FLAT Repeat the above step for the values listed in the following table to complete the limit line table It is not nece
503. urrent limit line LINES tables in spectrum analyzer memory or on the memory card When accessed by RECALL pressing LIMIT LINES recalls limit line tables from spectrum analyzer memory or the memory card See To Save a Limit Line Table or Amplitude Correction Factors or To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors in Chapter 5 for more information Front Panel Key Access or LIMITS allows you to choose fixed or relative type of limit lines The fixed FIX type FIX REL uses the current limit line as a reference with fixed frequency and amplitude values The relative REL setting causes the current limit line value to be relative to the displayed center frequency and reference level amplitude values When limit lines are specified with time rather than frequency the REL setting only affects the amplitude values The current amplitude values will be relative to the displayed reference level amplitude but the time values will always start at the left edge of the graticule As an example assume you have a frequency limit line If the limit line is specified as fixed entering a limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz If the same limit line table is specified as relative it is displayed relative to the spectrum analyzer center frequency and reference level If the center frequency is at 1 2 GHz a relative limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300
504. us Menu ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPQR STUVWX YZ_ SpceClear More 1 of 2 y 8592L or After selecting this softkey pressing ony digit 0 through 9 brings up the appropriate amplitude terminator menu HP 8595E only HP 8592L and HP 8593E only HP 8596E oniy 8 6 Key Menus FREQUENCY CENTER FREQ START FREQ STOP FPEO Fed EP AUTO MAN Bond Lock 17 24 SLOPE FLAT POINT ch SELECT SEGMENT SELECT FREO orTIME SELECT AMPL TUD Fa SELECT TYPE LIMITES EDIT UPRLWR More 1of 2 ix REL SELEC I SEGMENT DELETE SEGMENT EDIT DONE PURGEL IM TS More 2 of 2 SELECT SELECT FREQ or TIME SELECT UPR AMPL SELECT LWR AMPL SELECT TYPE More lof 2 SLOPE FLAT POINT of LIMITS FIX REL SEGMENT SEI SEGMENT SEGMENT SEI FREQ or TIME ED DONE PURGE LIMITS More 2 of 2 SELECT MID AMPL SELECT DLT AMPL SELECT TYPE More 1 of 2 SLOPE FLAT POINT is lt gt JALI LIMITS FIXPEL CETE SELECT SEGMENT Edi t None DELE TE SEGMENT More 2 of 2 ED I T DONE PURGE LIMIT More 2 of 2 pql4el 0 2 9 Gz BAND 0 2 75 6 5 BAND 1 60 128B AND 21724 12 4 19 BAND 317 19 1 22 BAND 417 BND LOCK ON off 24 17 PUIZEL MEAS USER User Menus N dB PTS ON OFF AM ON OFF TOION OFF Power Menu FFT Menu No User Menu OCCUPIED BANOWDTH ADJ CHAN POWER ADJ CHANPWR extd CHANNEL POWER Setup _______ MEAS OFF
505. using the knob step keys or keypad Activating another function will turn off the hold function Front Panel Key Access Option 041 or 043 only selects a black and white printer Use this function if you have a black and white HP DeskJet 540 printer Press Set B amp W Printer and then select the HP B amp W PRINTER softkey Start printing by pressing COPY DEV PRNT PLT PRNT and COPY Front Panel Key Access Option 04 or 043 only selects a black and white printer Use this function if you have a black and white HP printer or if you are using a color printer but want to have a black and white print Press Set B amp W Printer and then select the HP B amp W PRINTER softkey Start printing by pressing COPY DEV PRNT PLT PRNT and COPY Front Panel Key Access is used when the instrument is powered on the first time It inputs the spectrum analyzer model number and option information This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access is used when the instrument is powered on the first time It sets the defaults for spectrum analyzer flatness including the start and stop frequencies and the step size All of the correction values are set to zero This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access CAL 7 48 Key Descriptions INPUT Z 502 752
506. ust be returned to a service facility designated by HP Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument HP does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your neare
507. value The step size depends upon the spectrum analyzer measurement range or on a preset amount Each press results in a single step change For those parameters with fixed values the next value in a sequence is selected each time a step key is pressed Changes are predictable and can be set for some functions Out of range values or out of sequence values will not occur using these keys Fine Focus Control The fine focus control is located on the side of the spectrum analyzer Use the following procedure to adjust the fine focus control 1 Adjust the front panel intensity control for a comfortable viewing intensity 2 Use an adjustment tool or small screwdriver to access the fine focus adjustment See Figure 2 3 Adjust for a focused display Fol NE FOCUS ADJUSTMENT 7 Cp eS yy ED Ac CS GSC ra Ga Jl rn ae pa ODE J J OE 9M OM YW OO FE gt IEA gt zi a i CT p aa EE 2 a DM gt TM 2 C C ASEO Cc IER EI Figure 2 3 Adjusting the Fine Focus Getting Started 2 9 Screen Annotation Figure 2 4 shows an example of the annotation that may appear on a spectrum analyzer screen The screen annotation is referenced by numbers and is listed in Table 2 2 The function key column indicates which front panel key or softkey activates the function related to the screen annotation Refer to Cha
508. ve window will be saved Front Panel Key Access saves the current spectrum analyzer state in the selected state register To save the current state press STATE gt INTRNL and use the numeric keypad to enter a state register number valid state register numbers are 1 through 8 If windows are being used only the state of the active window will be saved Front Panel Key Access sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies When these frequencies are activated their values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span Front Panel Key Access sets the default settings for the units used in the linear and the logarithmic modes when the instrument is powered on The settings for the units can be changed during normal instrument operation but they will return to the default settings when the instrument is powered on again This is a service calibration function Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access CAL disables the two 20 dB step gain amplifiers on the Al2 Amplitude Control assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used for selecting screen title or prefix characters S through X Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or accesses the sweep time menu and accesses the sweep
509. x displayed after MAX REG x during a save or recall operation If a screen title is present it is saved with the trace data The time and date that the trace was stored is appended to the screen title If windows are being used only the trace of the active window will be saved When comparing a trace displayed in view mode with a recalled trace it is possible to over write the displayed trace by recalling the trace data This can happen because the instrument state is saved and recalled with the trace data For example if you save trace A when it is in clear write mode place trace A in view mode then recall the trace data into trace B trace B will be placed in view mode but the trace mode of trace A is changed to clear write mode since the trace mode of trace A was clear write when it was saved To avoid this problem change the trace mode of the traces to view or blank mode before saving the trace data Front Panel Key Access Option 010 or 011 only displays softkey menus for use with a built in tracking generator Front Panel Key Access Option 010 or 011 only activates a routine that automatically adjusts the tracking adjustment to obtain the peak response of the tracking generator on the spectrum analyzer display Note For tracking peak to function properly the tracking generator must be connected to the spectrum analyzer Before making a stimulus response measurement care must be taken to maximize the tracki
510. xt to the RES BW annotation at the lower left corner of the screen indicating that the resolution bandwidth is uncoupled As the resolution bandwidth is reduced the sweep time is increased to maintain calibrated data Example The video filter control is useful for noise measurements and observation of low level signals close to the noise floor The video filter is a post detection low pass filter that smoothes the displayed trace When signal responses near the noise level of the spectrum analyzer are visually masked by the noise the video filter can be narrowed to smooth this noise and improve the visibility of the signal Reducing video bandwidths requires slower sweep times to keep the spectrum analyzer calibrated Using the video bandwidth function measure the amplitude of a low level signal 1 As in the first example connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input Set the spectrum analyzer to view a low level signal 2 Narrow the video bandwidth by pressing BW VID BW AUTO MAN and the step down key QD This clarifies the signal by smoothing the noise which allows better measurement of the signal amplitude A mark appears next to the VBW annotation at the bottom of the screen indicating that the video bandwidth is not coupled to the resolution bandwidth Instrument preset conditions couple the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth so that the video bandwidth is equal to or narrower than the resolution ban
511. y Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 8593E HP 85953 or HP 8596E only displays the output of the sample and hold circuit in the YTF span divider and driver located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Key Descriptions 7 91 YTF SPAN YTF TUNE COARSE YTF TUNE FINE YZ_ spc Clear ZERO MARKER ZERO SPAN ZONE CENTER HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 8595 or HP 8596E only displays a trace of the voltage driving the YTF as it sweeps through the displayed span This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access CAL HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 8595E or HP 8596E only displays the output produced by the YTF coarse tune DAC located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 8595E or HP 8596E only displays the output produced by the YTF fine tune DAC located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used for selecting the characters Y Z underscore _ space or for clearing the screen title Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or Option 105 only O ption 101 is recommended zeros the value
512. y Descriptions Table 7 12 Preset Spectrum Conditions for All Models A B A Analog display mode Annotation and graticule Attenuation Center frequency Center frequency step size Coupled functions Coupling Detector Display line Frequency offset Harmonic lock Limit line testing Scale Marker counter f Marker counter resolution Markers Measure On end of sweep command ONEOS On sweep command ONSWP Reference level Reference level offset Reference level position Resolution bandwidth Span Start frequency Stop frequency State registers 1 8 Sweep Sweep time Threshold Trace A Trace B Trace C Trace math command TRMATH L ace registers Trigger Video averaging Video bandwidth Video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio HP 85943 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only Off Off on coupled Refer to Table 7 10 10 of span all set to AUTO AC positive peak Off 0 Hz Off off log 10 dB div off 2 kHz auto coupled off SA spectrum analyzer cleared cleared 3 dBm in power on units dB zop 8th graticule 3 MHz coupled Refer to Table 7 10 Refer to Table 7 10 Refer to Table 7 10 inaffected continuous tefer to Table 7 10 coupled off slear write itore blank ttore blank cleared inaffected MHz coupled 3 HP 8592L HP 85933 HP 85953 or HP 85963 only 1 All E Series and L Series spectrum analyzers except HP 8590L with Option 713
513. y card or written on a label on the memory card If the memory card does not have a label with the date that the battery was installed use the date code engraved on side of the memory card The date code engraved on the memory card consists of numbers and letters engraved in the black plastic on the side of the memory card See Figure 2 8 The first number indicates the year the following two characters indicate the month and the following number indicates the week in the month that the memory card battery was installed For example 80C3 indicates the battery was installed in the third week in October in 1988 Figure 2 8 Memory Card Battery Date Code Location 2 20 Getting Started Procedure to Change the Memory Card Battery The battery is located beside the card s write protect switch on the end opposite the connector Caution The battery power enables the memory card s memory to retain data You can lose the data when the battery is removed Replace the battery while the card is installed in a powered up instrument 1 Locate the groove along the edge of the battery clip See Figure 2 9 2 Gently pry the battery clip out of the card The battery fits within this clip 3 Replace the battery making sure the plus sign on the battery is on the same side as the plus sign on the clip HP Part Number 1420 0383 or commercial Lithium CMOS type part number CR 2016 DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT COLLECT AS SMALL
514. y careful Any adjustments or service procedures that require operation of the instrument with the protective covers removed should be performed only by trained service personnel This product conforms to Enclosure Protection Standard IP 2 O according to IEC 529 and protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure Warning This product presents a significant risk of electrical shock if operated when wet This product conforms to Enclosure Protection Standard IP 2 O according to IEC 529 and therefore it does not protect against the admittance of water into the interior of the product Caution Before switching on this instrument make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Caution Always use the three prong AC power cord supplied with this product Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause product damage Caution VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS When installing the product in a cabinet the convection into and out of the product must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the product by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater then 800 watts then forced convection must be used Caution This product is designed for use in Installat
515. y of purely analog displays which provides flicker free trace display regardless of sweep time vector display The display type where the electron beam is directed so the image consisting of trace graticule and annotation is written directly onto the display face It is not created from a series of dots as with the raster display video A term describing the output of a spectrum analyzer s envelope detector The frequency range extends from 0 Hz to a frequency that is typically well beyond the widest resolution bandwidth available in the analyzer However the ultimate bandwidth of the video chain is determined by the setting of the video filter video amplifier A post detection dc coupled amplifier that drives the vertical deflection plates of the display Refer also to video bandwidth and video filter video average The digital averaging of spectrum analyzer trace information It is available only on analyzers with digital displays Each point on the display is averaged independently and the average is computed based on the number of sweeps selected by the user The averaging algorithm applies a factor to the amplitude value of a given point on the current sweep 1 n where n is the number of the current sweep applies another factor to the previously stored average n I n and combines the two for a current average After the designated number of sweeps are completed the factors remain constant and the display becomes a runnin
516. yzers only the YTF self calibration routine should be performed periodically See When Is Self Calibration Needed in the following section for some helpful guidelines on how often the self calibration routines should be performed 1 3 For the HP 8592L HP 85933 and HP 85963 connect a low loss cable such as HP part number 8120 5148 from 100 MHz COMB OUT to the spectrum analyzer input For the HP 8595E connect the cable from the CAL OUT to the spectrum analyzer input Press CAL then CAL YTF The YTF self calibration routine completes in approximately Model Number Calibration Time HP 8592L 7 minutes HP 85933 7 minutes HP 85953 3 minutes HP 85963 5 minutes Press CAL then CAL STORE to save the calibration factors in memory 4 Press PRESET to return to normal operation When Is Self Calibration Needed While it is difficult to provide general advice for your specific measurement needs the following suggestions may help you decide when to use the self calibration features 1 Perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines whenever the instrument experiences significant environmental changes such as temperature 5 C humidity shock or vibration such as may occur during shipping or transport This is especially important if the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines were performed last in a different environment If the environment is relatively stable for example a l

HP 8590 E & L Series Spectrum Analyzers User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

HP 8590 E &amp; L Series Spectrum Analyzers User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

HP 8590 E & L Series Spectrum Analyzers User's Guide